2021 Audi A4 s4 78208

Owner's Manual
2021 A4
Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Foreword
Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us.
Your new Audi will allow you to experience the best in groundbreaking technology and premium quality
equipment that a vehicle has to offer. Audi recommends that you read your Owner's Manual thoroughly
so that you quickly become acquainted with your Audi and make use of all of its features.
In addition to explaining how the different features work, there are many useful tips and information
concerning your safety, how to care for your vehicle, and how to maintain your vehicle's value. Audi also
gives you useful tips and information on how to drive your vehicle more efficiently and in an environ-
mentally-friendly manner.
Audi hopes you enjoy driving your vehicle and wishes you safe and pleasant motoring.
ZA\ warNiNc
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or
off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals includ-
ing engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize expo-
sure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.
ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
8W1012721BC
Table of contents
About this Owner's Manual...... Valetiparking = s ss-e «x cscs ov cree a ¥ os 48

Garage door opener..........--.00 eee 48
SUMIMAry: < = exe : eens:
Seen cs sens
NOD OO
QutckeaeCe ssh: «i esis se ois a eaves @ Lights and Vision................. 51
Cockpit. ...... 0... eee eee eee eee Exterior lighting...................4. 51
Indicator lights overview...........4.. Interior liQhting ss =e aves ss eews so eos 54
ViSIOMsn « 3 ses 3 3 ema oo wena vo ae © ove 55
Display and operation........... 12 Windshield wipers.............-..45- 58
Instrument cluster............... 12 Digital compass.............-.-0000- 61
Instrument cluster overview........... 12
Operating. ecccuse w+ were oo wens oo ayes 9 ¥ 13 Sitting correctly and safely...... 63
Adjusting the display................. 13 Correct passenger seating position...... 63
Coolant temperature display........... 14 Frontseats:: » ssw. « ¢ sews & » saws +s ewe < 63
Tachometer’ series i ewe so snes ¥ & ome 14 Steering wheel seis < «cies ¥ eerie ss eee 66
Odometer.............. cee eee eee ee 15 Head restraints.................0000. 67
Outside temperature display........... 15 Safety Beltsi: s sass x eeups ¢ < saves 2 e cee 68
Engine oil temperature indicator....... 15 Memory function . « scons ecw ee cro ee 71
Boost indicator...............0--000. 15 Airbag system... ... 2.62... 0 ee eee eee 7X
Vehicle functions...............----- 16 Child safety seats.................04- 76
Touch display..................... 17 Storage and convenience........ 82

General touch display operation........ 17 POWErSOURCES coisa gs seen ss wae se aes 82
Multi Media Interface................ 19 Gup holders. ¢ ssn ss wee 2 2 see 2 & pee 82
Storage and compartments............ 83
Head-up display.................. Z5 Luggage compartment............... 83
DeSeriptions: s wees « x wows ¢ cess so eee 25 ROOF hacks « = weies x = wae 2 s eae 2 & ween 2 88
Voice recognition system........ 26 Warm and cold................... 90

Generalinformation................. 26 Climate control system............... 90
DeSeriptions. «+ seams x x arucsms x 0 seine oo coer 26 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control. 91
External voice operation.............. 27 Steering wheel heating............... 93
Fluids in the A/C system. .........0065 93
Global FUNGtHIONS:. icc: 5 6 ese. 6 6 sce 29;
Additional function buttons........... 29 Driving ..............
0.0... eee eee 95
Starting the vehicle...............0.0. 95
Starting and driving............. 30 When driving isis ss iovsvie se aerswce oo anes oe 96
Personalization.................. 30 Drive system... 2.2...
ee eee eee eee 101
30 Start/Stop system .........ee cece eee 102
BrakeS's so isemi 2 wane w aman a 2 oer as ie 104
Opening and closing............. 33 Electromechanical parking brake....... 106
Central locking..............00-e
eee 33) Special driving situations.............. 107
37
40 Driving: dynamic. . « sic. 6 6 see a 6 se 110
Child safety lock.............00.-000 44 Audi drive select..................00. 110
Power WindOWSic« s < sews ys wey 5 2 em 5 45 SUSPENSION es « + exes ¢ ¢ eres +o ees vv eae 111
Sliding/tilting:SUNTOOF escinie os wise a 6 soe 46 SUECOMIING 6 vessse oo csisweue io & stone 6 a toma ww Bs Lid
Panoramic glass roof................. 47
Table of contents
All wheel drive (quattro).............. 112 PRCT COMMBCE 's. cosves 5 6 sivas 6 6 snes 8 oo LS
Electronic Stabilization Control......... 113 General information................- 173
Audi connect Infotainment............ 173
Trailer towing.................... 115 Using a Wi-Fi hotspot................ 174
Driving with atrailer................. 115 Audi connect Infotainment services..... 174
Functions on demand................ 175
Assist systems................... 117 Audi connect vehicle control services.... 175
Assist systems................... 117 Settings............. 0.0.00 002 eee 176
General information. . 117 TRGUBIESHOOLING sass ¢ scm s 3 Hae 5 tee 177
Surrounding area detection............ 118
Emergency call................... 178
Driving information.............. L241 Overview... 12.0...
eee eee eee 178
Speed warning systeM.........-.00 00 121 Emergenicy'call « css s sees 6 s gems © + eeu 178
Camera-based traffic sign recognition... 121 Online roadside assistance............ 179
Traffic light information.............. 123
Lap tel ws = = sees 5 5 ses 2 2 eee ge ee 124 NaViGGationtc: « « meus « & seu sc poms + «oe 181
Integrated Toll Module............... 125 Opening navigation............0..005 181
myAudi navigation...............000. 181
Driver assistance................. 127 Entering a destination................ 182
Cruise control system............20-- 127 Stopping route guidance.............. 185
Efficiency assist....... 0.00... 128 Map... .. see cece eee eee 185
Audi adaptive cruise control........... 130 Alternative routes.............2-.00. 187
Traffiejaim assists: « ¢ sas s o aerey & 2 sores x 138 Additional functions................. 187
Distance warning ...... 2.00... .00000. 140 Satellite map..........
2.0... ee eee 188
Audi active lane assist/lane departure Mapupdaté-: « 2cas ss ees 9 ¢ eews vs pee 189
WARNING: = = wey = o eee 2 o wees 2 Rae & 2 BS 141 Traffic incidents’. = vce se eeu ve exon ewe 190
Audi pre sense... ...... cee eee eee 143 SETEIIGS sseneie oo smeneie © oxemenene © sitadame @ © etnznis 191
Side assist... 0.0.6...
cece eee eee 147
EXit Warnitig ces s = ewes 5 & eee § o eee es 148 RAGUIG:: « cas 2 = seus « s pomp o 6 com 2 ¢ ce 193
General information................. 193
Parking and maneuvering....... 150 Radio functions................00005 194
TNtROGUetiON « = sew ce sees 5 2 eee : x ewer 150 Online radio's: ss sees ss eees ye epee se ee 197
Parkirigiaid plus o seswies «5 acinwse ow enanave a & ox 150 Options and settings.............0005 198
Rearview camera and peripheral cameras. 152 Troubleshooting..............--000-5 199
Rear cross-traffic assist.............0. 156
Assisted parking............ 0 eee eee 157 PRE wei. as aoscen oo sauweme 3 & coset 3 v wens 201
Park assist... 0.0... ccc eee ee 159 Generalinformation................. 201
Bluetooth audio player............... 201
Infotainment system............ 162 Amazon Alexa... 0.000 s eee bee eee ees 202
Telephone..................-0-005 162 Multimedia connections.............. 202
Introduction................ 0000-0 162 Playing media. ........ 2. cece eee eee 203
S@tUP -cusy 9 sous & ¥ Sew Yo eR Es ewe 162 Options and settings................. 207
Using the Audi phone box............. 164 Supported media and file formats...... 207
Using the telephone.................. 166 Troubleshooting..............--.0005 209
SOtUiNGS sisis < & eawig + eels # eee s BwR 169
MOSSAQESicies «i sanswis 6 v sete + 0 oxime 4 9 aie 170 Audi smartphone interface...... 210
8W1012721BC
Troubleshooting............--.000005 172 Setup... 2... eee eee eee 210

Troubleshooting.............---.00-5 211
Table of contents
Additional settings.............. 212 Customer information........... 277

System settingS.............ce ee eee 212 Data privacy..................008. 277
Software update... 1.2...
.. cc cece ee eee 213 Privacy MOtiCe « mes x x eee 2 Ree ¢ RES ¥ 277
Connected devices.............000 005 214 Image recording): « « sus 2 wanes 2 2 wweem 2 2s 277,
Legalinformation................... 215 Data memories............0..00 eee ee 277
Transmitted information.............. 278
Additional information.......... 216
Brands and licenses..............0-0- 216 Accessories and technical
changes................ 0.0.02 eee 281
Maintenance and Care........... 217 Warranty’: « + esos & + meen & ¢ eee se sees 281
Checking and Filling............. 217 Audi Literature Shop.............000- 281
LE 217 Driving in other countries............. 281
Refttelingiecs ss sees s eames s Reee ee ewe 218 Maintenance, repairs, and technical
Emissions control system............. 220 IMOGIFICATIONS « snocue so sume = emmace # m annem 281
Engine compartment................. 221 Accessories and parts..............-. 283
ENGING2Otls sees 2 x seus « ones x ove Bee 224 Reporting Safety Defects.............. 283
Cooling:system « « ssccses ve emacs ve asecane s & ave 227 Declaration of compliance for
Brake fluid... 0.2...
eee eee eee 229 telecommunications equipment and
Electrical system............22---05- 230 electronicisysteMms:: s = caws se waa « 2 gems 284
Battery’: « & ces «6 cow © 6 eee «8 eens ¥ oe 230
Windshield washer system...........- 233 Technical data.................... 286
Service interval display............... 233 Identification data................04. 286
Vehicle datas ss nico s ves se oman evs 286
WSENGRRES Ee ceicece 0 ccneace x 0 wprsnne x « scecane a 0 ane 235
Wheels and Tires . . 235 Index ...... 00.0...
eee eee 288
Tire pressure monitoring system....... 252
Care and cleaning................ 255

Generalinformation................. 255
Car washes « sscica ea scam a 0 eine oo acne 0 6 255
Cleaning and care information......... 256
Taking your vehicle out of service....... 260
Do It Yourself .................... 261

Emergency assistance........... 261
General information...........0..0.. 261
Equipment.............00-
cece eee 261
Tire Mobility’ kit «0. ss cece se ces se ee 261
Changing’ tire = sco: +s ween so some 2 2 ore 263
Space-saving spare tire............... 266
Collapsible spare tire..............0.. 267
JUIMP'StAFting « wos s = weve s eerws F coos 268
TOWING wwewiwe «2 exersie w > suseine 6 > cxememe 6 4 cuneec 269
Fuses and bulbs.................. 272

FUSCSiercs ao accsans wo cena wo ee @ 8 ROIS & ore 272
Bulbs... 0.0... cee eee eee eee 276
About this Owner's Manual
In this manual, Audi provides important informa- => A\ Cross reference to a “WARNING” within a
tion, tips, suggestions, and warnings for using section. Ifa page number is indicated, the
your vehicle. “Audi” refers to AUDI AG, the re- WARNING is located outside of the section.
spective importer in a country, as well as joint
ventures. IN WARNING
It has always been Audi's policy to continuously Text with this symbol contains information
improve its products. Audi reserves the right to about safety and how to reduce the risk of se-
make changes in design and specifications, and rious personal injury or death.
to make additions or improvements in its prod-
ucts without incurring any obligation to install C) Note
them on products previously manufactured. This Text with this symbol contains information
owner's manual is based on the current data about reducing the risk of damage to your ve-
available when it was printed. Text, illustrations, hicle.
and specifications in this owner's manual are
based on the most current information available (@) For the sake of the environment
at the time of printing, and shall not constitute a Text with this symbol contains information on
basis for liability claims. protecting the environment.
KEEP THIS GUIDE
G) Tips
Keep this manual and any other applicable docu-
Text with this symbol contains additional use-
ments in your vehicle at all times. This is espe-
ful information.
cially important if you loan your vehicle to others
or sell it.
This owner's manual describes the equipment

range for all model versions of this vehicle at the
time of printing. Individual equipment options
described may only be available at a later date or
may only be offered in certain countries.
Some sections in this manual do not apply to all

vehicles. When this is the case, the beginning of
the section indicates the validity, for example
“Applies to: vehicles with speed warning sys-
tem”. Optional or vehicle-specific equipment is
also identified with an asterisk ugn “*”.
The illustrations in this manual are a guide.

Some of the details in your vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
All directions, such as “Left”, “right”, “front” and

“rear”, are based on the vehicle's direction of
travel.
* — Optional equipment or vehicle-specific equip-

ment
b> The section continues on the next page.
8W1012721BC
Quick access
Quick access
Cockpit
[RAZ-0886.
Fig. 1 Cockpit
@ Door handle @ Lockable glove compartment with:

@ Central locking switch ........... 35 — Valet Parking function ......... 48
@ Memory function buttons ........ 71. ~@ Front passenger's airbag ........ 71
@ Vent GO; KSC Sia auc 2 x wee so ews 2 ae 71
© Lever for: @® Climate control system .......... 90
—Turn signals and high beams .... 52. @@ Depending on equipment, buttons
— High beam assistant .......... 52 for:
— Audi active lane assist ......... 141 drive SELCCE cassis «6 sossan © 4 esr © 6s 110
— Traffic jam assist ............. 138 —Start/Stop system ............ 102
© Multifunction steering wheel with: — Electronic Stabilization Control
_iHorn' bet (ES@) we < = ween «seme
se ee zea 114
—Driver's airbag .............0- 71 — Panassist ws 5 2 aque « s quae x # me 159
— Operating buttons ............ 13, 29 — Parking system ..........-..+. 150
—Shift paddles ................ 99 — FUL Fold aSSi8t cies 2 4 onus
oo ees 108
@ Instrument cluster ............. 12 — Center display .............00s 19
Reset trip odometer ............ 15 @ Socket .......seeseeeee eens 82
© Windshield washer system lever .. 58 @ Cupholder ........
0.0 seer eee 82
@ Emergency flashers ............ 53 @© MMI0n/Off button ............. 19,29>
@ Center display ................. 19
Quick access
@9 Center armrest with storage com- turn off when the drive system is switched on or
partment. Depending on vehicle while driving.
equipment, it may have:
With some indicator lights, messages may ap-
— Audi music interface .......... 202
pear and warning signals may sound. The indica-
—Audi phone box ............... 164 tor lights and messages may be covered by other
— Starting the engine if there is a displays. To show them again, select the second
MALFUMERION since oo sxosoue x 2 seems ss 95 tab for messages with the multifunction steering
@) Electromechanical parking brake wheel > page 13.
BUGGOT sieves so cman « 2 ewes 2s men 2 106
Some indicator lights in the display can display in
@) Selector lever (automatic transmis-
several colors.
SIOM) seo so neon & v Howe & eRe Fa 97
@3 Storage compartment .......... 83
OMe eee any
@ [START ENGINE STOP]button .... 95
@3) Audi music interface ............ 202 If the wA or N indicator light turns on, check
@@ Steering wheel adjustment ...... 66 the message in the instrument cluster.
@) Lever for:
— Cruise control system ......... 127
— Audi adaptive cruise control .... 130 The following indicator lights may be available,
Button for switching the head-up depending on the vehicle equipment:
®
display on and off, adjusting the

height ........ 2... cee eee eee 25 Red indicator lights
@ Instrument illumination ......... 55 Central indicator light
60) Connection port for the On Board => page 7,
Diagnostic System (OBD) ........ 277 Instrument cluster
=>page 12
@) Headlight control switch ........ 51
@ Hood release ...............0-. 222 Cooling system
> page 14,
63 All-weather lights button ........ 51
=> page 227,
@4 Luggage compartment lid button . 40
=> page 227
@5) Exterior mirror adjustment ...... 55
Safety belt
68 Buttons for: => page 70
— Power windows ...........00. 45
Transmission
—Child safety lock .............. 44
= page 100
@) Tips Drive system

= page 102,
Some the equipment listed here is only instal-
Electrical system
led in certain models or is available as an op-
=> page 230
tion.
Brake system
Indicator lights overview =>page 105,
=>page 229,
Electromechanical parking brake
=> page 107 >
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
8W1012721BC
blink or turn on. They indicate functions or mal-

functions. Some warning and indicator lights
turn on when you switch the ignition on and must
Quick access
Brake system Engine speed limitation

=> page 105, > page 14,
=> page 229, Drive system
Electromechanical parking brake = page 102
=> page 107 Central locking
Electromechanical parking brake => page 35
=> page 106 Bulb failure indicator
Electromechanical parking brake => page 54
=> page 106 Adaptive light
Steering => page 54
>page 111 Headlight range control system
Steering lock > page 54
>page 111 Light/rain sensor
Adaptive cruise control => page 54,
=> page 131, => page 60
Safe start monitor Windshield wipers
> page 136, => page 60
Driver intervention request
Safety systems
=> page 137
=> page 72
Traffic jam assist
Engine start system
=> page 138
=> page 96
Steering intervention request
Convenience key
=>page 139
=> page 96
Distance warning
Transmission
=> page 140
=> page 100
Active lane assist
Brake system
=> page 141
=>page 105
Pre sense
Electromechanical parking brake
> page 144
=> page 107
Hood
Suspension control
=> page 222
> page 111
Engine oil pressure
Steering
=> page 224
=> page 111
Engine oil level (MIN)
Steering lock
=> page 224
>page 111
Electrical system
All wheel drive
= page 230
> page 112,
Yellow indicator lights Sport differential
> page 112
Central indicator light
=> page 7 Electronic Stabilization Control
(ESC)
Engine speed limitation
=>page 114
=>page 14
Quick access
Electronic Stabilization Control Engine oil sensor

(ESC) => page 224
> page 114 Engine warm-up request
Electronic Stabilization Control => page 224
(ESC)
Electrical system
=>page 114
=> page 230
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
Washer fluid level
>page 114
=> page 233
Tire pressure
=>page 114
=> page 253,
Adaptive cruise control => page 253
> page 138,
Tire pressure
Traffic jam assist
=> page 253
=> page 139
Steering intervention request Other indicator lights
> page 139, Low beam headlights
=>page 142 =>page 51
Distance warning Parking lights
=> page 140 => page 51
Active lane assist Turn signals
> page 141, => page 52,
=> page 143 =>page 53
Pre sense Turn signals
=> page 143 => page 52,
Side assist, exit warning => page 53
=> page 148 Start/Stop system
Parking systems => page 103
=>page 152 Hill hold assist
Rear cross-traffic assist => page 108
=> page 156 Cruise control system
Park assist => page 127
=>page 161 Cruise control system
Emergency call function =>page 127
> page 179 Efficiency assist
Tank system => page 129,
=> page 218 =>page 129
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Efficiency assist

> page 218, > page 129
=> page 220 Efficiency assist
Engine oil level (MIN) => page 129
=> page 224 Efficiency assist
8W1012721BC
Engine oil level (MAX) => page 129 >

=> page 224
Quick access
Efficiency assist Electromechanical parking brake

=> page 129 => page 107
Efficiency assist Electromechanical parking brake
=>page 129 => page 107
Efficiency assist Hold assist
=> page 129 => page 107
Adaptive cruise control Hill hold assist
=> page 131 => page 109
Adaptive cruise control Steering
=> page 131 >page 111
Adaptive cruise control Speed warning system
=> page 131 => page 121
Adaptive cruise control Speed warning system
=> page 131 > page 121
Adaptive cruise control Camera-based traffic sign recog-
=> page 136 nition
Traffic jam assist > page 122
> page 138 Cruise control system
=> page 127,
Traffic jam assist et =>page 128,
> page 138
=>page 128
Active lane assist
Cruise control system
> page 141
=> page 127,
High beam headlights > page 128,
=> page 52, =>page 128
=> page 52
Efficiency assist
High beam assistant = page 129,
=> page 52 Predictive control
Child safety lock => page 134,
=> page 44 Adaptive cruise control
Child safety lock > page 138,
=>page 45 Traffic jam assist
= page 139
Child safety lock
Adaptive cruise control
=>page 45
= page 134
High beam assistant
Adaptive cruise control
=> page 52,
=> page 138,
=> page 54
Traffic jam assist
Convenience key
=> page 138,
=> page 96
=>page 139
Transmission
Distance warning
=> page 100 => page 140
Start/Stop system
=> page 103
10
Quick access
Active lane assist

=> page 141,
=> page 143
Pre sense
> page 143
®) Pre sense
=> page 144
Side assist, exit warning
Fs => page 148
Parking systems
=> page 152
Q
hee
Rear cross-traffic assist
=> page 156
Park assist
=> page 161
Park assist
=> page 161
8W1012721BC
11
Instrument cluster
trument clu
Instrument cluster overview
Belo
6/24/2019
6/24/2019
C100T
Fig. 3 Instrument cluster overview (analog)
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- @) Right additional display with speed-
ing items may appear in the instrument cluster: ometer
Left dial @® Left additional display with:
—Tachometer .........00..
000s 14 SIG OOM wice es eosenes 2 a were 2 8 wate @ oe 97
Tab af@a « < sees se oes x eee gee 13 — Audi drive select mode ......... 110
Centralarea .............0.000. 13 Display
Status line (one or two lines) — Engine coolant temperature ~E .. 14
Right dial i
— Convenience display ZX WARNING
— Speedometer Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
Display If there is a severe ECD in the instru-

—FuellevelfD .....-..e0eeec
ee. 218 ment cluster, the display may turn off. The
indicator light may also turn on. Stop the >
12
Instrument cluster
vehicle safely. See an authorized Audi dealer Selecting a tab

or authorized Audi Service Facility for assis- > Press the <J/ > button @) repeatedly until the
tance. desired tab is selected.
G) Tips Returning to functions at higher levels
— The following pages primarily show illustra- > Press the D button ©).
tions of the Audi virtual cockpit*. The dis-
Opening and closing the menu
play or location of the items that are shown
may vary on the different versions of the in- » Press the [=] button ©).
strument cluster.
Selecting and confirming a function
— You can select the units used for tempera-
ture, speed, and other measurements Requirement: a menu or list must be displayed.
=> page 212. > To select a function, turn the left thumbwheel
— Speeds are displayed in mph (miles per @ to the desired function.
hour) or km/h (kilometers per hour). > To confirm a selection, press the left thumb-
— Certain instrument cluster content can also wheel (7).
be displayed in the head-up display*
=>page 25. Switching the view
> Press the VIEW button @) > page 13.
Operating
The following tabs may be available, depending
on vehicle equipment:
RAZ-0377
First tab Vehicle functions > page 16

Second tab | Driver messages (this is only dis-
played if at least one indicator
light/message is being displayed)
Third tab Radio > page 193
Media > page 203
Fourth tab | Telephone > page 166
Fifth tab Navigation > page 181
Adjusting the display

RAZ-0673
Fig. 5 Left side of multifunction steering wheel
Information is organized within various tabs @) Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit
in the instrument cluster. The tab contents are Fig. 6 Center display: adjusting the display
displayed in the central area (2).
Switching the view
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
8W1012721BC
Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit
> Press the VIEW button to switch between the

default view @ and the enhanced view (2).
13
Instrument cluster
Adjusting the layout ment cluster display turns on, the coolant tem-
Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit perature is too high > page 227.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, various lay-
outs may be available. () Note
— Auxiliary headlights and other accessories in
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
front of the air intake impair the cooling ef-
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Audi virtu-
fect of the coolant. This increases the risk of
al cockpit.
the engine overheating during high outside
> To adjust the desired layout, press @).
temperatures and heavy engine load.
Adjusting the additional display — The front spoiler also helps to distribute
Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit cooling air correctly while driving. If the
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the addi- spoiler is damaged, the cooling effect will
tional displays that can be selected may vary. be impaired and the risk of the engine over-
heating will increase. See an authorized
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Audi virtu- cility for assistance.
al cockpit > Configure.
> Select the desired additional display.
Tachometer
Reducing the display
The tachometer @) > page 12 displays the engine
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). The be-
hide the central area in the instrument cluster. ginning of the red zone in the tachometer indi-
> Select on the instrument cluster: vehicle func- cates the maximum permissible engine speed for
tions tab > [=] button > Reduced display, or all gears once the engine has been broken in. Be-
> Press the VIEW button on the multifunction fore reaching the red zone, you should shift into
steering wheel. the next higher gear, select the "D" or "S" selec-
tor lever position, or remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal.
Coolant temperature
display Engine speed limitation
Applies to: vehicles with a coolant temperature indicator
If the tA indicator light turns on, the engine will
The coolant temperature display @) > page 12 be automatically limited to the RPM displayed in
only functions when the ignition is switched on. the instrument cluster. This will protect the en-
To reduce the risk of engine damage, please ob- gine components, for example during a cold start
serve the following notes about the temperature or from overheating.
ranges. The engine speed limitation is deactivated if you
release the accelerator pedal while the engine is
Cold range
at normal operating temperature.
If only the LEDs at the bottom of the gauge turn
on, the engine has not reached operating tem- If the engine speed limitation was activated by
perature yet. Avoid high engine speeds, full accel- an engine control malfunction, the By indicator
eration, and heavy engine loads. light also turns on. Make sure the engine speed
does not go above the speed displayed, for exam-
Normal range ple when downshifting. Drive to an authorized
The engine has reached its operating tempera- Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
ture once the LEDs up to the center of the gauge mediately to have the malfunction corrected. >
turn on. If the | indicator light in the instru-
14
Instrument cluster
At temperatures below 41 °F (+5 °C), a snowflake

@) Note
symbol appears in front of the temperature dis-
The needle in the tachometer may only be in play > A\.
the red area of the gauge for a short period of
time before there is a risk of damaging the 7 WARNING
engine. The location where the red zone be-
Do not assume the roads are free of ice based
gins varies depending on the engine.
on the outside temperature display. Be aware
that there may be ice on roads even when the
Odometer outside temperature is around 41 °F (+5 °C)
and that ice can increase the risk of accidents.
Engine oil temperature

indicator
Applies to: vehicles with engine oil temperature indicator
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the engine

oil temperature %7% may be indicated by a bar in
the instrument cluster.
Fig. 7 Instrument cluster: reset button > Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit:
Open the vehicle functions tab and switch to
The trip odometer and odometer are displayed in the enhanced view > page 13.
the status bar@) > page 12. > Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument
The trip odometer shows the distance driven cluster: Open the lap timer > page 124.
since it was last reset. It can be used to measure When engine oil temperatures are low, the dis-
short distances. The odometer shows the total play --- °F (--- °C) appears in the instrument clus-
distance that the vehicle has been driven. ter. The engine has reached its operating temper-
Resetting the trip odometer ature when the engine oil temperature is be-
tween 176 °F (80 °C) and 248 °F (120 °C) under
> To reset the trip odometer to zero, press the re- normal driving conditions. The engine oil temper-
set button @. ature may be higher if there is heavy engine load
and high temperatures outside. This is not a
@) Tips cause for concern as long as the | or 3 indica-
Distances are displayed in mi (miles) or km tor lights do not turn on.
(kilometers).
Boost indicator
Outside temperature Applies to: vehicles with boost indicator
display Depending on vehicle equipment, the current en-

gine load (meaning the current boost pressure)
The outside temperature is displayed in the sta-
may be indicated by a bar in the instrument clus-
tus bar@) 9 page 12.
ter.
If your vehicle is stationary or if you are driving at
> Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit:
very low speeds, the temperature displayed in
Open the vehicle functions tab and switch to
the instrument cluster may be slightly higher
the enhanced view > page 13.
than the actual temperature outside due to heat
8W1012721BC
> Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument

radiating from the engine.
cluster: Open the lap timer > page 124.
15
Instrument cluster
Vehicle functions new values will be included when calculating the

current trip information.
Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term

The trip computer is displayed in the first tab of memory is not erased automatically. You can se-
the driver information system. Additional vehicle lect the time period for evaluating trip informa-
functions can be accessed depending on the vehi- tion yourself.
cle equipment.
Average consumption
> Press the LE] button on the multifunction steer-
The current consumption can be shown using a
ing wheel.
bar graph. The average consumption stored in
— On-board computer > page 16 the short-term memory is also displayed. If the
— Lap times > page 124 bar is green, your vehicle is saving fuel (for exam-
— Lap statistics > page 124 ple, using recuperation).
— Reduced display > page 14
Energy consumers
The Energy consumers view lists other equip-
On-board computer
ment that is currently affecting fuel consump-
Resetting values to zero tion. The display shows up to three equipment
items. The equipment using the most power is
Requirement: the Consumption, Short-term
listed first. If more than three items using power
memory, or Long-term memory display must be
are switched on, the equipment that is currently
selected.
using the most power is displayed. A gauge also
> To reset the values in the respective memory to shows the current total consumption of all other
zero, press and hold the left thumbwheel on equipment.
the multifunction steering wheel for one sec-
ond. Gi) Tips
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can call The date, time of day, and time and date for-
up the following displays in the on-board com- mat can be set > page 212.
puter one at a time by turning the left thumb-
wheel on the multifunction steering wheel:
—Time and date > page 212

— Level
— Digital speedometer
— Average consumption > page 16
— Range
— Short-term memory overview
— Long-term memory overview
— Energy consumers > page 16
— Driver assistance
— Traffic sign recognition and traffic light infor-
mation
Short-term memory and long-term memory

The short-term memory collects driving informa-
tion from the time the ignition is switched on un-
til it is switched off. If you continue driving within
two hours after switching the ignition off, the
16
Touch display
ouch displ > Press and hold an item until the associated op-
tions are displayed.
General touch display
operation eee ne
Applies to: touch display
The center display is a touchscreen. Operation is

very similar to operating a smartphone.
@ Tips
Certain gestures are not available in every
menu.
Fig. 10 Touch display: pressing and pulling
Applies to: touch display Moving an item
You can position some items at any location on

the screen.
>» Press and hold an item, and then use your fin-
ger to pull it to the desired location.
Fig. 8 Touch display: pressing
RAH-9164]
Selecting a function or button
> Press the desired function or button.
Fig. 11 Touch display: pinching fingers together and pull-

ing them apart
Zooming in and out on an item

> To increase the size of an item, touch it with
two fingers and pull your fingers apart.
> To decrease the size of an item, touch it with
two fingers and pull your fingers together.
Fig. 9 Touch display: pressing and holding
Accessing options
For some items, you can access additional op-
8W1012721BC
tions that are not directly visible.
17
Touch display
‘agging away from/toward the edge of

Applies to: touch display e scre
Fig. 12 Touch display: rotating

Fig. 14 Touch display: dragging away from the edge of the
Rotating the view or perspective screen
> Rotate the item using two fingers. Opening hidden menus
The E=] symbol indicates that there is a hidden

agging menu.
> Use your finger to drag inward from the upper
or lower edge of the screen, or
> Press the E=] button.
Closing hidden menus

> Press within the menu and drag it toward the
upper or lower edge of the screen.
Information about menu paths

Fig. 13 Touch display: @ dragging with one finger, @
dragging with two fingers This guide shows you at a glance the paths for
opening a desired menu and its settings and
Scrolling or browsing through menus/lists functions.
> To scroll through menus and lists, swipe up-
ward or downward with one finger. Esamplw ers path
> To browse through menus and lists, swipe to > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
the right or left with one finger. SETTINGS > General > Date & time.
Tilting 3D displays Following the path

> Drag upward or downward with two fingers. » First, determine in which display the path
should be entered. In this example, it is the
MMI display.
> To open the home screen, press (2.
> If the SETTINGS button is not displayed, use
your finger to swipe to the left or right until it
appears.
> Press the SETTINGS button.
> If the General button is not displayed, swipe
toward the left or right with one finger until it
appears.
18
Touch display
> Press the General button. > To switch the MMI on, press the On/Off knob.
> If the Date & time button is not displayed,
Restarting the MMI
swipe upward or downward with one finger un-
tilit appears. > Press and hold the On/Off knob for at least 10
> Press the Date & time button. seconds.
(i) Tips Switching the center display on or off

> To switch the center display on or off, press the
If a menu or symbol is in parentheses in the
fo] button in the center console above the se-
path, for example, (General) or ({2), then it is
lector lever, or
an optional menu item that does not need to
> To switch the center display off, press [Jin the
be used in every system.
notification center > page 22.
> To switch the center display on, touch the dis-
play or press {oJ again.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Display & Brightness > MMI. Introduction
Possible settings: You can display and operate Infotainment system

and vehicle functions using the touch display in
— Brightness
the Multi Media Interface, abbreviated MMI.
— Touchscreen feedback
Configuration wizard
Multi Media Interface After starting for the first time, the configuration
wizard helps you to set up the vehicle, for exam-
ce mle)
ple to set the desired system language and con-
Audi recommends performing certain Infotain- nect a telephone.
ment system functions, such as entering a desti-
> Follow the instructions in the center display.
nation, only when the vehicle is stationary. Al-
>» Applies to: MMI: To access the configuration
ways be prepared to stop operating the Infotain-
wizard at a later time, select on the home
ment system in the interest of your safety and
screen: HELP > Configuration wizard.
the safety of other road users.
Tool tips
ZX WARNING You can have tool tips displayed if necessary.
Only use the Infotainment system when road, They introduce various MMI functions to you.
traffic, weather, and visibility conditions per-
mit and always in a way that allows you to >» Applies to: MMI: To open the tool tips, select on
maintain complete control over your vehicle. the home screen: HELP > Tool tips > Basic in-
formation or Expert information.
G) Tips > Follow the instructions in the display.
Certain functions are not available while driv-

ing.
Scale Romeo
Switching the MMI on or off

8W1012721BC
> To switch the MMI off, press and hold the

On/Off knob > page 29, fig. 22 until all Info-
tainment functions are switched off.
19
Touch display
Menus and symbols
RAX-0176.
m< po Ooer ce oS Eee had
Cer ce
Co) Peo eens ETc)
eh aed CNet a Ts) © SETTINGS
Fig. 15 MMI: center display
Label Description
Displays selected information tiles and provides quick access to
Overview screen ‘
certain functions > page 20
© | ©
®|O|
Return to the home screen or the overview page, open menus

Quick access bar guidlly pageei
Display area Select a menu, apply settings, display content > page 21
Favorites Use or manage favorites > page 21
Operate functions and apply quick settings > page 22, display
©-@ Status bar of available notifications © > page 22, status indicator
=> page 22, time
Description of common symbols Symbol Description

You can operate the default functions using the Open additional actions
symbols that follow. The symbols may be found Open additional information for
in any menu, depending on the context. the selected menu
Description
Go back one level Overview screen
Close the menu The overview screen is the first menu page in the
Search for content MMI. Information about certain vehicle functions
Open explanations for a menu such as media, time, and phone is displayed in
tiles. The available information tiles can be rear-
Open settings for the selected
ranged on the overview screen or replaced with
menu
others. Depending on the system context, you
Open the submenu may be able to operate certain functions directly,
Adjust the settings such as muting the sound.
Set as favorite
Switching between the overview screen and
Switch functions on or off the home screen
Switch functions on or off
> Press () repeatedly until the desired view ap-
Switch functions on or off pears.
20
Touch display
Configuring the overview screen Switching between menu pages

> Press and hold an information tile on the over- Ifa menu contains multiple menu pages, B= is
view screen. displayed in the display area. The white bar
> To change the position of an information tile, shows the location of the current menu page.
press and hold it and then slide it to the desired
> To switch between menu pages, swipe your fin-
position.
ger to the right or left.
> To replace an information tile, press Z and se-
lect the desired information tile.
> Press Done to complete the configuration. Favorites
By creating favorites, you can have quick access

to various items, such as radio stations, frequent-
ly-used contacts, or vehicle settings. In the FA-
With quick access, you can return to the home
VORITES menu, the stored favorites are sorted
screen and quickly switch between four menus
by topic into information tiles.
that can be individually configured.
Adding a favorite
Returning to the home screen or opening a
menu quickly A YY button indicates if you can add a favorite,
such as a selected radio station. Depending on
> Press ( or one of the four buttons.
the context, you may also be able to add items
Configuring quick access without the yy button to the favorites, such as
entries ina list.
> Press and hold a button on the home screen
display area or in the quick access bar. > Press YY, or
> To move a button to the quick access bar, pull it > Press and hold an item ina list.
from the display area to the quick access bar. > Press Store as favorite. The selected item will
> To adjust the placement of the buttons in the be added as a favorite.
quick access bar, pull them to the desired posi-
tion in the bar. Using favorites
> Press Done to complete the configuration. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
FAVORITES. The stored favorites will be dis-
G) Tips played.
> To access a stored favorite, press that favorite.
The position of © cannot be adjusted.
Stored favorites can only be deleted or config-
Display area ured in the corresponding menu (such as RADIO).
You can freely change the location of the buttons Arranging information tiles
on the home screen display area. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
FAVORITES.
Configuring the display area
>» Press and hold the desired information tile.
> Press and hold a button on the home screen > Pull the information tile into the desired posi-
display area. tion.
> To adjust the placement of the buttons, pull >» Press Done to confirm the configuration.
them to the desired locations.
> Press Done to complete the configuration.
8W1012721BC
21
Touch display
Notification center
Off Of o8
[RAZ-1078
Off of af Cee ay
debtors
Tap here to display parking spaces at the destination.
O88 OB of of
Fig. 16 Center display: frequently used symbols in the sta- Fig. 17 Center display: notification center
tus bar
Notifications can be displayed in the center dis-
The symbols in the status bar show you informa- play. After a specified time, they will be hidden
tion at a glance, such as ifa mobile device is con- and a corresponding symbol will appear in the
nected or if there is a data connection. The most status bar © > page 20, fig. 15. In the notifica-
common symbols are listed in the table. tion center, you can view these notifications ®
> fig. 17, apply quick settings @, and operate
Description
functions @).
There is a data connection. The bar indi-
@ | cates the signal strength of the data con- Using the notification center
nection. Data is being transmitted now. > To open the notification center, pull the status
There is a data connection. The bar indi- bar downward, or
cates the signal strength of the data con- > Press the =] button on the status bar.
©
nection. No data is being transmitted now. > To turn quick settings on or off, press the re-
A mobile device is connected. The bar indi- spective symbol @).
cates the signal strength of the cell phone > To apply quick settings, press the respective
©
connection. symbol @).

There is no data connection. > To obtain additional information about a notifi-
© |e;© |@|®|
cation, press it.

An error occurred with the mobile device
> To delete a notification, pull it toward the right
connection to the MMI.
edge of the screen.
A user is selected. If a question mark ap- > If there are more than four notifications in the
pears in the symbol my, the guest user is ac- notification center, the older notifications will
tive. be hidden. To display the older notifications,
A Bluetooth device is connected. drag your finger upward on the screen.
Bluetooth is switched on, but no Bluetooth
Setting which content is displayed
device is connected.
You can set whether some notifications should be
Audio playback was interrupted.
NO)
displayed.
The audio source is muted.
Privacy settings are enabled. The additional > To set the displayed content, press &@, or
symbol indicates which privacy settings are > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
©
currently activated > page 278. SETTINGS > Notifications.

> Select and confirm which notifications should
The Integrated Toll Module is switched on.
be displayed.
The numbers 1 - 3+ indicate how many pas-
®
sengers are selected in the MMI.
22
Touch display
Possible functions characters that have been entered @) and results

may be shown @).
Description
Press: switches the center display Opening text input
on or off (this can also be done us- > Tap inside the input field @.
ing the button in the center con-
Switching input languages
sole)
/Press
switchesthe
and hold: | Requirement: multiple input languages must be
screen clearing mode on or off defined in the MMI > page 24.
(can also be done using the but- > To switch between the defined input languages,
ton in the center console) press the button @.
Opens the garage door opener
function Switching the input methods
> To switch between handwriting input or the on-
Possible.quick:settings screen keyboard, press the button @).
Symbol Description
Apply sound settings Entering text
Manage connected devices > Applies to: the on-screen keyboard: To enter
text, press the buttons on the keyboard. De-
Manage users
pending on the usage context, you may also be
= Set displayed content in the noti- able to swipe over the letters )).
fication center > Applies to handwriting input: To enter text,
PLwAec Set date and time simply write in the input area using one finger
©. You can write the separate characters next
Tonia: to each other or one on top of the other with-
out having to move your finger over after writ-
ing a character. When you end the entry, the
[RAZ-0955|
writing is interpreted by the system.

> Applies to: the on-screen keyboard with an in-
7 put language that uses accented characters: To
Maal enter accented characters (such as 4, ¢, fi, 6),
cH
Pea press and hold a character that has accented
eeu cn . . :
Cea versions available and select the desired ac-
cented character.
» Applies to: handwriting input: To enter a space,
drag a line from left to right in the input sec-
Fig. 18 Center display: text input 5
tion ©.
Overview > To select a location in the text input, press on
the desired location in the input field. You can
In the input fields of various menus, you can en- control the location more accurately using the
ter letters, numbers and characters, for example slider on the screen ©.
to find an address in navigation*. > To delete individual characters, press 1@, or
The text that is currently entered is displayed in » Applies to: handwriting input: Drag a line from
the center display @. Depending on the context, right to left in the input section ©).
word suggestions may be given based on the > To delete multiple characters, press and hold
a@.
8W1012721BC
2) Depending on the country or equipment
23
Touch display
> To delete all characters at a specific location,

press and hold <41@) and drag up to the desired
location 1). When released, the highlighted
characters are deleted.
Accepting suggested words or selecting

entries from the results list
> To accept a suggested word (2) or select an en-
try from the results list @), press on it.
> To display more content in the results list, drag
your finger upward or downward on the screen.
> To enlarge the results list, press the @) button
or pull it inward.
Setting the input language or keyboard

layout
> Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Lan-
guage & keyboard > Keyboard.
> To define additional input languages, press the
© button.
> To change the keyboard layout for an input lan-
guage, press >. For example, you can select be-
tween QWERTZ and QWERTY.
D Depending on the country or equipment
24
Head-up display
Head-up display ® Note

Description To reduce the risk of scratches on the glass
Applies to: vehicles with head-up display covering the head-up display, do not place any
objects in the projection opening.
iG) Tips
— Sunglasses with polarization filters and un-
favorable lighting conditions can impair visi-
bility of the display.
— An optimal display depends on the seat po-
sition and the height adjustment of the
head-up display.
—A special windshield is needed for the head-
Fig. 19 Instrument panel: knob for the head-up display
up display function.
The head-up display projects certain warnings or — For information on cleaning, see > table In-
selected information from the assist systems on terior cleaning on page 257.
the windshield. The display appears within the
driver's field of vision.
Switching on and off

> To switch the head-up display on, press the 67
knob @.
> To switch the head-up display off, press the S7
knob.
Adjusting the height

The height of the display can be adjusted to the
individual driver.
> Make sure you are seated correctly > page 63.
> Turn the knob S? to the right or Left.
Settings in the Infotainment system

SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Head-up
display.
Possible settings:
— Display rotation
— Brightness
— Display contents: you can set which informa-
tion should be displayed. The display of certain
information and some of the red indicator
lights cannot be hidden.
8W1012721BC
25
Voice recognition system
Voice recognition system Description

General information Operating the voice recognition system
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system
(2) ieiS]
You can operate many functions in the vehicle STEN
>|
easily using voice commands. Daa) re
|
Neer) a
Using the voice recognition system optimally Connect 5
Pre)
oy c a
> Speak clearly and distinctly at a normal volume. ey
Cesc >
Speak louder when driving faster. coy
> Emphasize the words in the commands evenly
and do not leave long pauses. Fig. 20 Center display: voice recognition system
> Close the doors, the windows, and the sunroof*

to reduce background noise. Make sure that Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be
passengers are not speaking when you are giv- switched on. A system language supported by
ing a voice command. the voice recognition system must be set. There
> Do not direct the vents toward the hands-free must be no phone calls in progress and the park-
microphone, which is in the roof headliner near ing aid must not be active.
the front interior lights. Operating by button «¢
> Only the driver should speak to the system, be-
cause the handsfree microphone is aimed to- > Briefly press the «€ button on the multifunction
ward this seating position. steering wheel, or depending on the context,
press we in the center display.
ZA\ WARNING > Say the desired command after the signal tone.
> To switch the voice recognition system off,
— Direct your full attention to driving. As the press and hold the «€ button on the multifunc-
driver, you have complete responsibility for tion steering wheel, or say or press Cancel (@)
safety in traffic. Only use the functions in > fig. 20.
such a way that you always maintain com-
plete control over your vehicle in all traffic Operating with voice commands
situations. > Applies to: MMI: To operate the voice recogni-
— Do not use the voice recognition system in tion system using voice commands, select on
emergencies because your voice may change the home screen: SETTINGS > General >
in stressful situations. The system may take (Speech dialog system) > Activate the speech
longer to dial the number or may not be dialog system with "Hey Audi".
able to dial it at all. Dial the emergency > Say the activation phrase Hey Audi together
number manually. with the desired command.
> To switch the voice recognition system off, say
G) Tips Cancel or press and hold the «£ button on the
There are no voice guidance* prompts when a multifunction steering wheel, or press @)
dialog is active. > fig. 20.
Commands and assistance

In the voice recognition system menu, possible
commands or help settings are displayed for the
current dialog @).
> To receive additional help for the current dia-
log, say or press Help (2).
26
> To pause voice recognition, say or press Pause screen: SETTINGS > General > (Speech dialog
@). To reactivate voice recognition, press () system) > Activate the speech dialog system
again or briefly press the «€ button on the mul- with "Hey Audi".
tifunction steering wheel. >» Say the activation phrase “Alexa” together with
the desired command.
Additional functions
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system () Note
Command during voice output Read the information about Audi connect, and
be sure to note the connectivity costs section
If the function is switched on, you can simply say =>@ in General information on page 173.
a new command during a prompt.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: @ Tips

SETTINGS > General > Speech dialog system > Audi provides access to services from third
Allow commands during voice output. party providers. Permanent availability cannot
be guaranteed, because that depends on the
Online recognizer
third party provider.
Applies to: vehicles with online recognizer
You can activate the online recognizer for addi-

External voice operation
tional functions and to improve the results of
Applies to: vehicles with external speech dialog system
voice recognition. A supported menu language
must be selected. When there is an active Inter- You can access and control the voice operation on
net connection, the spoken command is evaluat- a connected mobile device through your vehicle.
ed in the vehicle and online.
Switching external voice operation on or off
> When you switch on the voice recognition sys-
Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be
tem for the first time, a menu for the online
switched on. A cell phone must be connected to
recognizer will open, or
the MMI with the Handsfree profile > page 162.
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
The mobile device being connected must have
SETTINGS > General > Speech dialog system >
voice control that can be controlled externally.
Consent to online speech recognizer.
There must be no phone calls in progress and the
> Read the licensing agreements and accept
parking aid must not be active.
them.
> To switch on the external voice operation, press
Amazon Alexa and hold the «€ button longer on the multifunc-
Applies to: vehicles with Amazon Alexa Integration
tion steering wheel.
You can activate Amazon Alexa to access certain > To switch off the external voice operation, press
functions. A reduced number of commands for and hold the «€ button longer on the multifunc-
Amazon Alexa are available during this. tion steering wheel or press Cancel.
Requirement: you must be logged in to your Using external voice operation
myAudi account in the vehicle. The online recog-
nizer must be activated. A system language that » Say the desired command after the signal tone.
> To reactivate voice recognition when it is
is supported by both the voice recognition system
paused, press the w£ button briefly on the mul-
and Amazon Alexa must be selected.
tifunction steering wheel or press Resume.
USER > Connect to Amazon Alexa. @) Tips
8W1012721BC
> Follow the instructions in the display.

Audi simply provides access to control your
>» Applies to: MMI: To operate Amazon Alexa us-
cell phone with voice operation and does not >
ing voice commands, select on the home
27
take any responsibility for the contents and

commands within the external voice control.
28
Global functions
Global functions Quick access steering wheel button

Depending on vehicle equipment, the button @)
Additional function
may provide quick access to various functions.
buttons
> & button, see > page 93.
You can program the >K button with various func-
tions.
> To bring up the function that is currently set,
press the * button.
> To perform the function that is currently set,
press and hold the >K button, or:
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Settings & Service > Steering wheel
button assignment.
> Select and confirm the desired function.
[RAz-0846]
Switching voice operation on or off
«€ button @, see > page 26.
Using the telephone functions
button @, see > page 168.
[
Fig. 22 MMI On/Off knob with joystick function
Adjust the volume of the audio system so that
signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all
Adjusting the volume
times.
You can adjust the volume of an audio source or a
system message (for example, from the voice
recognition system) when the sound is playing.
> To increase or decrease the volume, turn the

right thumbwheel @) © fig. 21 upward or
downward, or turn the On/Off knob > fig. 22 to
the right or left.
> To mute, push the right thumbwheel or the
On/Off knob.
Selecting the previous/next track or station

> Press the d<J/ DDI button @ or briefly press
the On/Off knob to the left/right.
Fast forward/rewind
> Press and hold the l<J/ DPI button @, or
press the On/Off knob to the left or right until
the desired playback position is reached.
8W1012721BC
29
Personalization
Personalization G) Tips
Users — Certain Infotainment and vehicle settings
(such as mirrors, last radio stations) may be
(eT e e eeu) stored, depending on vehicle equipment.
Applies to: vehicles with personalized user settings
You can find additional information in the
Depending on vehicle equipment and your coun- MMI. Select on the home screen: SETTINGS
try, your vehicle may be able to manage various > General > Legal notes > About Audi con-
users in the MMI. Each user will be assigned the nect.
settings that they last used. — Applies to: myAudi users: The stored set-
tings can only be transferred to vehicles
Before you begin driving, you can select a user in
that are capable of receiving the transmit-
the MMI and load personalized Infotainment and
ted information. There may be restrictions
vehicle settings.
that prevent this, particularly in other coun-
Possible users in the MMI: tries.
— myAudi user: as a myAudi user, you can use — Applies to: myAudi users: The settings can
Audi connect services that require a myAudi ac- only be transferred and loaded when there
count. Certain settings are transferred online to is coverage from the applicable mobile
your myAudi account. If you log into your phone service provider.
myAudi account in another vehicle, you can — Applies to: myAudi users with PIN protec-
load your settings in the other vehicle. tion switched on: If the MMI displays a de-
— Local user: as a local user, you can only store tected user but you simply start driving or
settings in the current vehicle. Your settings wait without entering the 4-digit PIN, then
cannot be transferred to other vehicles. Audi the guest user will be selected. Some set-
connect services that can only be used with a tings for the detected myAudi user will be
myAudi account will not be available. transferred to the guest user.
— Guest: as a guest, you can store settings in the
vehicle without changing the settings for other OTe le le (a4
users. Audi recommends only using the guest Applies to: vehicles with user management
user temporarily, because settings can be over-

Opening user management
written by other users.
Applies to: MMI
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following > Press USER on the home screen.
options may be used to detect the active user so
that the user settings can be loaded automatical- Selecting a user
Applies to: MMI
ly before you start driving.
— Vehicle key > Press on the desired user.
> Enter the 4-digit myAudi PIN, if necessary.
Requirement: the driver's door has been opened.
Adding myAudi users
The detected user must be shown in the MMI.
Applies to MMI and Audi connect
Confirm the user shown, select another user
= page 30, or add another user > page 30. Requirement: you must have successfully regis-
tered at my.audi.com and have created a 4-digit
ZA\ WARNING myAudi PIN.
It may not be possible to load Infotainment > Press Add user.
and vehicle settings, or they may only load > Press Log in now to log in with your myAudi
partially. The driver is always responsible for credentials.
the Infotainment and vehicle settings in order > Follow the system instructions.
to reduce the risk of an accident.
30
Personalization
To transfer existing destinations from the MMI to

your myAudi account one time, confirm the sys- Applies to: vehicles with key user management
tem prompts with Yes.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the vehicle
You can set a profile pictured for your myAudi owner must be set as the key user for certain
user at my.audi.com. Audi connect vehicle control services and possibly
for functions on demand.
Adding a local user
Applies to: MMI The key user automatically has remote access au-
> Press Add user. thorization that allows control of certain func-
> Press Initiate setup. tions such as Audi connect vehicle control serv-
> Press Local user. ices through the myAudi app.
> Follow the system instructions.
Setting the key user
Editing users Requirement: a key user must not be set yet.
Applies to: MMI
> To set a key user for the vehicle, you will need a
Requirement: the user must be selected and that
myAudi account. Register at my.audi.com.
user’s settings must be loaded. > Add your vehicle at my.audi.com and then veri-
> Press on the user. fy your myAudi account using the verification
process that is provided.
Depending on the user type, available options
may include the following.
USER > © > Set key user.
PIN protection: when this function is switched > Follow the system instructions and enter the
on, the 4-digit myAudi PIN must be entered be- 10-digit vehicle code > page 37. The key user
fore any settings for this user can be loaded. is set. You have the rights to use the Audi con-
nect vehicle control services > page 175 that
Remove the user from the vehicle: the user will
depend on vehicle equipment as well as the
only be deleted in the vehicle from the list in the
ability to manage other vehicle functions and
MMI.
any other users.
Change name: you can change the name of the
local user. Managing additional users
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
Removing users
grant authorization for additional users to use
Applies to: MMI
Audi connect vehicle control services at my.audi.
> Select on the home screen: Users > Z > one or com.
more entries > Delete. The user will only be de-
leted from the list in the MMI. The authoriza- Removing the key user
tions for the user in the vehicle (such as key If you remove the key user, all other users that
user) will not be removed. were stored by the key user at my.audi.com and
their authorizations will be deleted. It will no
@ Tips longer be possible to use the Audi connect vehi-
— The guest user cannot be renamed. cle control services, depending on the vehicle
— When changing users, the new user settings equipment.
are loaded in the vehicle. Requirement: a key user must be set.
— Ifa user has the & symbol, PIN protection is
active. To switch off PIN protection, you can > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
USER > ©} > Remove key user.
8W1012721BC
edit the user.

— Depending on the country, you may be able
to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
31
Personalization
@ Tips
to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
— You do not need to log into the vehicle with
a myAudi user in order to use Audi connect
vehicle control services, which depend on
the vehicle equipment.
— If you sell your vehicle, reset all settings to
the factory default settings.
— Store the vehicle code in a secure place. It
may be necessary to re-enter the vehicle
code.
— When entering the vehicle code, please note
that the code is case-sensitive.
— If you do not have the 10-digit vehicle code,
contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility.
32
Opening and closing
Opening and closing Automatic locking

If you unlock the vehicle but then do not open
Central locking any of the doors, the luggage compartment, or
General information the hood within a short period time, the vehicle
locks again automatically. This feature prevents
Z\ WARNING the vehicle from being accidentally left unlocked
for a long period of time.
— If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition
off and take the key with you. This applies Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
particularly when children remain in the ve-
The Auto Lock function locks all doors and the
hicle. Otherwise, children could start the ve-
luggage compartment lid once the speed has ex-
hicle or operate electrical equipment (such
ceeded approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). The ve-
as power windows), which increases the risk
hicle will unlock again if the unlock function in
of an accident.
the central locking switch is pressed, the “P” gear
— Applies to vehicles with anti-theft alarm sys-
is engaged, or the ignition is switched off.
tem: When the vehicle is locked from the
outside, no one - especially children - should You can open the doors individually from the in-
remain in the vehicle, because the windows side by pulling the door handle one time. To open
can no longer open from the inside the rear doors individually, you must pull the
=> page 36, Anti-theft alarm system. door handle twice.
Locked doors make it more difficult for In the event ofa crash with airbag deployment,
emergency workers to enter the vehicle,
the doors will also automatically unlock to allow
which puts lives at risk.
access to the vehicle.
Unintentionally locking yourself out

Only lock your vehicle when all of the doors and
All doors and the luggage compartment lid can
the luggage compartment lid are closed and
be centrally unlocked and locked at once. You can
there is no key in the vehicle. This reduces the
select in the MMI if the entire vehicle or only the
risk of locking yourself out accidentally.
driver's door should unlock when unlocking the
vehicle > page 34. The turn signals flash twice The following features help to reduce the risk of
when you unlock the vehicle and flash once when locking your vehicle key in the vehicle:
you lock the vehicle. If they do not flash when — If the driver's door is open, the vehicle cannot
locking, check if all doors and lids are closed. be locked by pressing the & button on the re-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may mote control key or by touching the locking
have different options for centrally unlocking and sensor* on a door.
locking your vehicle. — If the vehicle key that was used most recently is
inside the luggage compartment, the luggage
— Vehicle key > page 38
compartment lid will automatically open again
— Sensors in the door handles > page 38
after it closes > ©.
— Lock cylinder in the driver's door > page 36
— If the vehicle key that was last used is detected
— Interior central locking switch > page 35 inside the vehicle, then the vehicle cannot be
Vehicle key locked from the outside > ©.
The term “vehicle key” refers to the remote con- ZA\ WARNING
trol key or convenience key*. The convenience
8W1012721BC
Observe the safety precautions > page 33. >

key* is a remote control key with special func-
tions > page 38 and > page 95.
33
Opening and closing
@) Note Setting the central locking system
The following applies when locking the vehi- You can adjust the central locking system to your
cle: preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle
— If the vehicle key that was last used is de- equipment.
tected inside the passenger compartment,
then the vehicle cannot be locked from the
HICLE > Settings & Service > Central locking.
outside using the sensor. Take the vehicle
key with you and lock the vehicle again. Oth- Door unlocking
erwise, the vehicle will not be protected
—If you select All, all doors and the luggage
against unauthorized access.
compartment lid will be unlocked when unlock-
— If you try to lock the vehicle using the but- ing the vehicle.
ton on the vehicle key while the front pas-
— If you select Driver's door, only the driver's
senger's or rear door is open, and you acci-
door will be unlocked. To unlock all doors and
dentally place the vehicle key inside the pas-
the luggage compartment lid, press the ( but-
senger compartment and close the door,
ton on the vehicle key twice. In vehicles with a
the vehicle will lock at first. But if the key-
convenience key*, only the driver's door will un-
less system detects a vehicle key inside the
lock when you pull the driver's door handle. If
vehicle after it locks, then the vehicle will
you pull another door handle, the entire vehicle
unlock again. The turn signals will flash sev-
will be unlocked.
eral times to indicate this. If you do not
open the vehicle to remove the vehicle key The entire vehicle will always be locked f you
within a brief period, then the vehicle will press the &@ button.
lock automatically. This prevents the vehicle
Long press to open windows
from being left unlocked for long periods of
time. The vehicle key will then be locked in- You can select if all windows and the panoramic
side the vehicle. glass roof* should open using the vehicle key
— If the luggage compartment lid closes and = page 46, Convenience opening and closing. If
the system detects that the last vehicle key you press and hold the fj button on the vehicle
that was used is inside the luggage com- key, all of the windows and the panoramic glass
partment, then the luggage compartment roof* will close.
lid will open again. The turn signals will
Disable rear lid handle
flash several times to indicate this. The
doors will lock. Always take the vehicle key You can select if the luggage compartment lid
with you, or unauthorized persons may be can open with the handle. If you activate this
able to enter the vehicle. function, the luggage compartment lid can only
be opened with the << or 4s button on the vehi-
@) Tips cle key or in the driver's door. In vehicles with a
convenience key*, you can still open the luggage
— Do not leave valuables unattended in the ve-
compartment lid using the handle if an author-
hicle. A locked vehicle is not a safe!
ized convenience key is detected > page 40.
—The LED in the driver's door rail blinks when
you lock the vehicle. If the LED turns on for Fold mirrors
approximately 30 seconds after locking,
You can select if the exterior mirrors automatical-
there is a malfunction in the central locking
ly fold in when locking.
system. Have the problem corrected by an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility.
34
Opening and closing
Tone when locking) — The central locking switch is inoperative

You can select if an audio signal sounds when when the vehicle is locked from the outside.
locking the vehicle.
Open with convenience key

Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
|-3} Driver's door: malfunction! Shift to P before
You can deactivate the feature for unlocking us- leaving vehicle. See owner's manual
ing the sensor > page 38.
There is a malfunction in the driver's door. Secure
the vehicle before exiting by selecting the “P” se-
(etiam cre dire ln] lector lever position. Drive immediately to an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
8
3
=. Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
2o
a
3} Central locking: malfunction! See owner's
manual
There is a central locking malfunction. If the

doors cannot lock, you can emergency lock the
doors > page 36. Drive to an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immedi-
ately to have the malfunction corrected.
Fig. 23 Driver's door: central locking switch
> To lock or unlock the vehicle, press the f or B

button > /\.
When locking the vehicle with the central locking

switch, the following applies:
— The doors and the luggage compartment lid

cannot be opened from the outside for security
reasons, for example, to reduce the risk of un-
authorized entry while stopped at a light.
— The LED in the central locking switch turns on
when all doors are closed and locked.
— You can open the doors individually from the in-
side by pulling the door handle one time. To
open the rear doors individually, you must pull
the door handle twice.
— In the event of a crash with airbag deployment,
the doors unlock automatically to allow access
to the vehicle.
Z\ WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions > page 33.
— The central locking button works when the
ignition is switched off.
8W1012721BC
)_ This function is not available in all countries.
35
Opening and closing
Mechanically unlocking and locking the Locking the front passenger's door and rear
doors doors using the mechanical key
If the central locking fails, you must unlock or The mechanical lock is located on the edge of the
lock the doors separately. doors
(@) or in the latch opening @) > fig. 25. It is
only visible when the door is open.
>» Remove the mechanical key > page 37.

> If necessary, remove the cap from the opening
> fig. 25.
> Insert the mechanical key into the slot on the
inside and turn it all the way to the right (right
door) or Left (left door).
> If necessary, install the cap in the opening and
close the door.
Fig. 24 Driver's door: door lock cylinder Once the front passenger’s door or rear doors
close, it will no longer be possible to open them
[Raz-149|
from the outside. The front doors can be opened

from the inside by pulling the door handle one
time. The rear doors can be unlocked from the in-
side by pulling the door handle one time and
then opened by pulling the door handle again. If
the child safety lock in one of the rear doors is ac-
tivated, you must first pull the door handle from
the inside. Then you can open the door from the
outside.
Z\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions > page 33.
Peale Ce)
Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft alarm system
If the anti-theft alarm system detects a vehicle

break-in, audio and visual warning signals are
Fig. 25 Door: mechanically locking
triggered. The anti-theft alarm system is switch-
ed on or off when locking or unlocking your vehi-
Unlocking or locking the driver's door with cle. If the alarm is triggered, it will shut off auto-
the mechanical key matically after a certain amount of time.
> Remove the mechanical key > page 37. Switching the alarm off manually
> To unlock the driver's door, turn the mechanical
> To switch the alarm off, press the G button on
key to the unlock position in the direction of ar-
the vehicle key or switch the ignition on.
row @) > fig. 24.
> Pull the door handle to open the driver's door. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the anti-
> To lock the driver's door, select the "P" position theft alarm system may have the following fea-
and turn the mechanical key once to the close tures:
position @=> /\.
36
Opening and closing
Break-in security feature

The alarm will sound if there is a break-in at the
doors, hood, and/or luggage compartment lid.
RAZ-0720,
Interior/towing protection monitor
The alarm will be triggered if there are move-
ments detected in the vehicle interior (for exam-
ple, by animals) or if there is a change in the vehi-
cle angle (for example, when the vehicle is being
towed).
You can prevent the alarm from being triggered

by deactivating the interior/towing protection
monitor. Fig. 26 Your vehicle key set
Deactivating the interior/towing protection @ Vehicle key

monitor
You can unlock and lock your vehicle with the ve-
There are the following options for deactivating hicle key.
the interior/towing protection monitor:
@ Mechanical key and release buttons for
> Press the & button on the vehicle key a second the mechanical key
time within two seconds. Or
A mechanical key is integrated in the vehicle key.
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key:
To remove it, press the release button and re-
Touch the sensor on the door handle a second
move the mechanical key.
time within two seconds. Or
> Turn the mechanical key in the door lock to the Using the mechanical key, you can:
close position a second time within two sec-
— Applies to: vehicles with lockable glove com-
onds.
partment: locking/unlocking the glove com-
> Applies to: vehicles with MMI: Select on the
partment.
home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service >
— Manually unlock and lock the doors > page 36.
Interior monitoring.
— Applies to: sedan with locking backrests: Lock-
If you lock the vehicle, then the interior/towing ing and unlocking the backrest > page 85.
protection monitor will stay off until the next — Unlock the luggage compartment lid using the
time the vehicle is unlocked. emergency release > page 43.
Z\ WARNING @ Key fob with vehicle code

Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
No one, especially children, should stay in the
Open the key tag and scratch to reveal the vehicle
vehicle when it is locked from the outside, be-
code. You can unlock the Audi connect vehicle
cause the windows can no longer be opened
control services* for your vehicle with this vehicle
from the inside. Locked doors make it more
code. For additional information, see
difficult for emergency workers to enter the
=> page 175. If a key fob is lost, contact an au-
vehicle, which puts lives at risk.
Facility.
@ Tips
The interior/towing protection monitoring on-
ly functions correctly when the windows and
8W1012721BC
the roof* are closed.
37
Opening and closing
@ PANIC button
G) Tips
In an emergency, you can press the PANIC button
— The vehicle key function can be temporarily
to trigger the alarm for the anti-theft alarm sys-
disrupted by interference from transmitters
tem. The vehicle horn and emergency flashers
near the vehicle working in the same fre-
will turn on if you trigger the alarm.
quency range (such as a mobile device or ra-
—To trigger the alarm, press the PANIC but- dio equipment). Always check if your vehicle
ton @)
© fig. 26. is locked.
—To turn the alarm off, press the PANIC button — Applies to MMI: You can view the number of
again. keys programmed to the vehicle by selecting
on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings &
Lost key/replacing a key Service > Vehicle information.
If a vehicle key is lost, contact an authorized Audi — The system complies with United States FCC
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have regulations and ISED regulations
this vehicle key deactivated. It is important to => page 284.
bring all keys with you.
If a key is lost, you should report it to your insur- Unlocking and locking the vehicle
ance company.
Seis
Electronic immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized use of
the vehicle.
.
In some cases, it may not be possible to start the
vehicle if there is a vehicle key from a different
—
vehicle manufacturer on the key chain.
_
Data in the vehicle key
Fig. 27 Door handle: sensor for locking
When driving, service and maintenance-relevant
data is continuously stored in your vehicle key. An Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service have various options for unlocking and locking
Facility can read out this data and tell you about your vehicle. The settings in the MMI specify
the work your vehicle needs. which doors will unlock > page 34.
ZA\ WARNING Unlocking or locking using the vehicle key

buttons
> To unlock the vehicle, press the @ button
=> page 37, fig. 26.
@) Note
> To lock the vehicle, press the & button once.
Protect the key against high temperatures
and direct sunlight. Unlocking or locking using the sensors
@ For the sake of the environment > To unlock a door or the luggage compartment
XE Do not dispose of vehicle keys in household lid, grasp the door handle or luggage compart-
trash. They contain materials that can be re- ment lid handle.
cycled. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or > To lock the vehicle, close the door and touch
authorized Audi Service Facility for more in- the sensor on the door handle once >fig. 27.
formation. Do not grasp the door handle while locking the
vehicle, or else the vehicle will not lock. The >
38
Opening and closing
door cannot be opened for a brief period direct- BS Tey ae-e am ala BC
ly after locking it. This way you have the oppor-
tunity to check if the doors locked correctly.
RAZ-0722
Unlocking and locking with the Audi connect
vehicle control service!)
Requirement: Audi connect vehicle control serv-

ices must be activated > page 175. The vehicle
must be parking and the ignition must be switch-
ed off.
ZA WARNING
BFV-0277
@) Tips
— Only use the vehicle key when you can see
the vehicle.
— The vehicle can only be locked when the "P”
selector lever position is engaged.
— Do not use the vehicle key to lock and un-
lock when you are inside the vehicle. Other- Fig. 29 Vehicle key (rear side): removing the battery holder
wise, you could trigger the anti-theft
alarm*. If this happens, press the @ unlock LED in the vehicle key
button. The LED @) indicates the vehicle key function.
> If you press a button briefly, the LED blinks
@ Tips
once.
> If you press and hold a button (convenience
— When unlocking or locking the vehicle, the opening/closing), the LED blinks several times.
convenience key cannot be more than ap- > If the LED does not blink, the vehicle key bat-
proximately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the tery is drained. Replace the battery in the vehi-
door handle or luggage compartment. cle key.
— Unlocking with the convenience key (keyless
access) can be deactivated in the MMI sys- Replacing the vehicle key battery
tem > page 34. > Press the release buttons @) > fig. 28 and re-
— To prevent the vehicle battery from dis- move the mechanical key.
charging, the energy management gradual- > Press the release buttons @) > fig. 29 while
ly switches off convenience functions that pulling the battery holder out of the vehicle key
are not needed. You then may no longer be in the direction of the arrow.
able to unlock your vehicle with the sensors. > Replace the battery and insert the new battery
with the “+” symbol facing down.
> Slide the battery holder carefully into the vehi-
cle key.
> Insert the mechanical key.
8W1012721BC
D In certain countries
39
Opening and closing
ZA\ WARNING inside it. To reduce the risk of injury, do not

allow children to play in or around the vehi-
If batteries or coin cell batteries are swal-
cles
lowed or enter the body in any other way, they
—To reduce the risk of injuries by pinching,
can cause serious or fatal injuries within a
make sure that no one is in the operating
short period of time. There is a risk of chemi-
area of the luggage compartment lid, in-
cal burns.
cluding the hinge areas and the upper and
— Keep vehicle keys and key fobs with batter-
lower edge of the luggage compartment lid.
ies out of the reach of children.
— After closing the luggage compartment lid,
— Keep new or used batteries away from chil-
make sure that it is latched. The luggage
dren.
compartment lid could open suddenly while
— If the battery compartment on a vehicle key
driving, which would increase the risk of an
does not close securely, stop using the key
accident.
and keep it away from children.
— Never drive with the luggage compartment
— Seek medical attention immediately if you
lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases
suspect that a battery was swallowed or has
from the surrounding area can enter the ve-
entered the body in any other way.
hicle interior and increase the risk of asphyx-
iation.
@ For the sake of the environment
— If there is a luggage rack (such as a bicycle
Discharged batteries must be disposed of us- rack) on the luggage compartment lid, the
ing methods that will not harm the environ- luggage compartment lid may not open
ment. Do not dispose of them in household completely under certain circumstances or it
trash. could close by itself if open due to the extra
weight. Therefore, the open luggage com-
G) Tips partment lid must be given additional sup-
Replacement batteries for the vehicle key port or the cargo must first be removed
must meet the same specifications as the from the luggage rack.
original battery. — Applies to vehicles with power-operated or
sensor-controlled luggage compartment lid:
Luggage compartment Pay careful attention when closing the lug-
gage compartment lid. Otherwise, you could
lid
cause serious injury to yourself or others de-
(ee eles) spite the pinch protection.
Z\ WARNING @) Note
— Applies to vehicles with anti-theft alarm sys- The luggage compartment lid can bump into
tem: When the vehicle is locked from the objects such as the garage ceiling when open-
outside, no one - especially children - should ing and become damaged.
remain in the vehicle, because the windows
can no longer open from the inside @ Tips
= page 36. Locked doors make it more diffi- — When the vehicle is locked, the luggage
cult for emergency workers to enter the ve- compartment lid can be unlocked separately
hicle, which puts lives at risk. by pressing the “S button twice on the vehi-
— Always close and lock the luggage compart- cle key. The luggage compartment lid locks
ment lid and the doors when the vehicle is automatically when it is closed again.
not in use. Otherwise someone such as a — The ability to open the luggage compart-
child could enter the vehicle through the ment lid using the handle can be deactivat-
luggage compartment and become locked ed or activated in the MMI > page 34. >
40
Opening and closing
— Applies to: vehicles with fixed rear backr- Automatic luggage compartment lid
ests: The luggage compartment lid can be Applies to: vehicles with automatic luggage compartment lid
unlocked from the inside in an emergency
83]
=> page 44. I?)
ny
||
Opening and clo e luggage

compartment lid
23
S
z
=
azt
Fig. 31 Luggage compartment lid: @ closing button*, @)

lock button* (vehicles with convenience key*)
The luggage compartment lid can be opened and

closed automatically > A\ in General informa-
tion on page 40.
Fig. 30 Driver's door: opening the luggage compartment
lid
Opening the luggage compartment lid
Opening the luggage compartment lid > When the ignition is switched off, press and
hold the 4s button on the vehicle key twice. Or
> Applies to: vehicles without convenience key:
>» Engage the "P" selector lever position and pull
Unlock the vehicle or the luggage compartment
the <2 button* in the driver's door. Or
lid using the @/ As button on the vehicle key
» Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press
and press the handle in the luggage compart-
the handle in the luggage compartment lid.
ment lid. Or
The vehicle key cannot be more than approxi-
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press
mately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage
the handle in the luggage compartment lid.
compartment.
The vehicle key cannot be more than approxi-
mately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage Closing the luggage compartment lid
compartment. Or
> Press the <3 button in the luggage compart-
> When the ignition is switched off, press and
ment lid. Or
hold the As button on the vehicle key twice. Or
> Press the handle in the luggage compartment
> Engage the "P" selector lever position and pull
lid. Or
the < button* in the driver's door.
> Press the luggage compartment lid downward
Closing the luggage compartment lid slightly. Or
> When the ignition is switched on, pull the <
» Applies to vehicles without automatic luggage
switch in the driver's door > page 41, fig. 30
compartment lid: Use the inside grip to pull the
until the luggage compartment lid is closed. Or
luggage compartment lid down and allow it to
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press
drop gently to close it. Or
and hold the 4s button on the vehicle key while
> Applies to vehicles with automatic luggage
the ignition is switched off until the luggage
compartment lid: Note > page 41.
compartment lid closes. Make sure there is
enough distance (maximum of approximately 9
ZA WARNING feet (3 m)) between you and the luggage com-
8W1012721BC
partment lid. Or
> Applies to vehicles with convenience key: When
the ignition is switched off, press the << / fi* >
41
Opening and closing
button in the luggage compartment lid. The ve- necessary to use more force when doing this.
hicle key must not be more than approximately Move the lid slowly to reduce the amount of
4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage compart- force needed.
ment and it must not be inside the vehicle. If
you press the f* button, then the vehicle will Opening and closing the luggage
lock. compartment lid with foot motion (kicking
movement)
Storing the luggage compartment lid Applies to: vehicles with sensor-controlled luggage compart-
opening position ment lid
Applies to: allroad
rr}
Ssa
The position must be at a certain height or higher 9
<
to store. go
a
> Bring the luggage compartment lid into the de-

sired open position. If you want to move the
luggage compartment lid to a lower position,
move it slowly in small increments; otherwise,
the luggage compartment lid will close auto-
matically.
> Press and hold the <3 button in the luggage Fig. 32 Vehicle rear: foot motion (example)
compartment lid for at least four seconds to
store the new opening position. A visual and The luggage compartment lid can be opened and
audio signal will follow. closed automatically 1) > A\ in General informa-
> To set a higher open position, wait at least five tion on page 40.
seconds and then carefully press the luggage
Requirements: you must be carrying your conven-
compartment lid upward.
ience key* with you. The ignition must be switch-
> Press and hold the <3 button again for at least
ed off. You must be standing at the center behind
four seconds to store the desired opening posi-
the luggage compartment lid.
tion.
> Move your foot back and forth under the bump-
The automatic opening or closing will stop if: er one time > fig. 32. Do not touch the bumper.
— You press the < button or press the handle in Make sure you have firm footing. The luggage
the luggage compartment lid again Or compartment lid will open or close ) once the
— If something blocks the luggage compartment system detects the movement. The automatic
lid or makes it difficult for the lid to move. opening or closing will be canceled if you re-
peat one of the movements described.
If you press the <s button or press the handle in
the luggage compartment lid again, the luggage
ZA WARNING
compartment lid will open again.
ZX WARNING
Gi) Tips
The luggage compartment lid will only open
@ Tips or close )) if you perform the movement as
described. This prevents the luggage com-
The luggage compartment lid can be operat-
partment lid from opening or closing due to
ed manually if the vehicle battery is low. It is
similar movements )), such as when you walk >
)) The closing function applies to vehicles that also have au-

tomatic luggage compartment lid operation.
42
Opening and closing
between the rear of the vehicle and your ga-

rage door. In some situations, the function
may be limited or temporarily unavailable.
This may happen if:
— You are standing too close to the bumper or
too far away from it
— The luggage compartment lid was closed or
opened immediately beforehand
— You park close to a hedge and the branches
move back and forth under the vehicle for a Applies to: vehicles with fixed backrests
Fig. 34 Rear bench seat: release cable for emergency re-
long period of time
lease in the sedan
— You clean your vehicle, for example with a
pressure washer or in a car wash Depending on the equipment, the luggage com-
— There is heavy rain partment lid can be opened either from inside
—The bumper is very dirty, for example after the luggage compartment or from the rear bench
driving on salt-covered roads seat using the emergency release.
— There is interference to the vehicle key's ra-
dio signal, such as from mobile devices or Folding rear seat backrest
remote controls >» Fold the backrest on the rear bench seat for-
ward = page 85.
Mechanically unlocking the luggage > Remove the mechanical key > page 37.
compartment lid >» Applies to: sedan: Using the mechanical key,
pry out the cover in the luggage compartment
lid trim panel @ ®°fig. 33.
> Applies to: allroad: Using the mechanical key,
pry out the cover &> in the luggage compart-
ment lid trim panel Q) 9 fig. 33.
> To unlock the luggage compartment lid, press
the lever in the direction of the arrow using a
suitable object (such as a screwdriver) or using
the mechanical key if necessary.
> Fold the backrest backward until it locks into
place.
Fixed rear seat backrest

Applies to: sedan
> Carefully pull the left side of the rear bench

seat out of its mount until you can reach the re-
lease cable >fig. 34.
>» Remove the Velcro® tape @).
> Pull on the loop @) until the luggage compart-
ment lid releases.
Applies to: vehicles with folding backrests > Tape the release cable back in place and press
Fig. 33 Inner luggage compartment lid: access for emer-
gency release @) sedan, @ allroad the bench seat back into its retainer.
8W1012721BC
43
Opening and closing
ZN WARNING Child safety lock

— Applies to: vehicles with folding backrests: The child safety lock prevents the rear doors
If you have folded the backrests into the up- from being opened from the inside and the rear
right position, always check if the lock is se- power windows from being operated.
cured by pulling forward on the backrest.
RAZ-0826
— Applies to: vehicles with fixed backrest: Af-
ter the emergency release on the luggage
compartment lid is activated, make sure
that the bracket under the rear bench seat
engages securely in the lifting eye.
Opening luggage compartment

fro ide in an emergency
Applies to: vehicles with fixed rear backrests
SI
2
I
aae
Fig. 35 Inner luggage compartment lid: lever Applies to: vehicles with manual child safety locks
Fig. 37 Rear door: manual child safety lock
> Press the lever in the direction of the arrow un-
til the luggage compartment lid opens. Vehicles with 8 button
Applies to: vehicles with power child safety locks
G) Tips > To activate and deactivate the child safety lock

Never close the luggage compartment lid us- (door handle and power window switch) for the
ing the emergency handle. a rear door, press the left or right 8 button in
the driver's door @) that corresponds to that
rear door > fig. 36. The indicator light in the
button turns on/blinks.
> Make sure the child safety lock is working by
checking the function on the rear power win-
dow switch and door handle.
Vehicles with 43 button

Applies to: vehicles with manual child safety lock
> To activate or deactivate the child safety lock

for the power window switch in the rear doors,
press the & button in the driver's door (2)
> fig. 36. The indicator light in the button turns
on/blinks.
> To activate or deactivate the manual child safe-
ty lock for the rear door handle, open the >
44
Opening and closing
respective rear door and turn the key switch @ Left front door
with the mechanical key in the direction of the ® Right front door
arrow or opposite the direction of the arrow @® Left rear door
> fig. 37. This will disable the function of the
@ Right rear door
rear door handle.
> Make sure the child safety lock is working by Opening and closing the windows
checking the function on the rear power win-
The driver can control all power windows. All
dow switch and door handle.
power window switches are equipped with a two-
Applies to: vehicles with power child safety locks: stage function:
It is not possible to operate the rear climate con- > To open or close the window completely, press
trol system* when the child safety lock is activat- the switch down or pull the switch up briefly to
ed. The SET REAR function allows you to adjust the second level. The operation will stop if the
all settings in the rear using the climate control switch is pressed or pulled again.
system controls in the cockpit. > To select a position in between opened and
closed, press or pull the switch to the first level
Message in the instrument cluster display
until the desired window position is reached.
@/ Child safety lock: malfunction! Please
contact Service Correcting a malfunction in the one-touch
up/down function
There is a malfunction in the child safety lock.
Press the @/ & button again. You can reactivate the one-touch up/down func-
tion if it malfunctions.
If the message stays on, drive immediately to an
> Pull the power window switch up until the win-
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility to have the malfunction repaired. dow is completely raised.
> Release the switch and pull it up again for at
Z\ WARNING least one second.
— Observe the safety precautions > page 33.

—A malfunction in the child safety lock could
Z\ WARNING
allow the rear doors to be opened from the — Observe the safety precautions > page 33.
inside, which increases the risk of an acci- — Never close the windows carelessly or in an
dent. uncontrolled manner, because this increases
the risk of injury.
Power windows
G) Tips
Opening and closing the windows — You can still open and close the windows for
several minutes after turning the ignition
RAZ-0723
off. The power window switch is not disa-

bled until the driver's door or front passeng-
er's door is opened.
— The power windows are equipped with pinch
protection. The automatic window may stop
closing and will open all the way again even
if no obstacle is detected. Pull the power
window switch up until the window is com-
pletely raised.
8W1012721BC
Fig. 38 Driver's door: power window switch
Power window switches:
4s
Opening and closing
Convenience opening and closing Sliding/tilting sunroof

Convenience opening and closing the Applies to: vehicles with sliding/tilting sunroof
windows and roof*
You can set in the MMI if all windows or the roof*
should open or close all at once > page 34, Set-
ting the central locking system.
> Press and hold the & or & button on the vehicle
key until all windows and the roof* have
reached the desired position > /\.
> Touch the sensor* on the door handle until all
of the windows and the roof* are closed. Do not
place your hand in the door handle when doing Fig. 39 Section of front headliner: sliding/tilting sunroof
this. button
When all of the windows and the roof* are The sunshade can be opened and closed manual-
closed, the turn signals will flash once. ly in any position when the roof is closed. The
sunshade opens automatically when the roof is
ZX WARNING opened.
— Never close the windows or the roof* care-
Tilting and closing the roof
lessly or in an uncontrolled manner, because
this increases the risk of injury. > To tilt the sunroof as far as possible, press the
— For security reasons, the windows and the <> button up briefly to the second level @).
roof* can only be opened and closed with > To close the sunroof completely, pull the 2>
the vehicle key at a maximum distance of button down briefly to the second level > A\.
approximately 6.5 feet (2 m) away from the > To set a partially open position, press or pull
vehicle. Always pay attention when using the A> button to the first level until the roof
the f& button to close the windows and the reaches the desired position.
roof* so that no one is pinched. The closing
Opening and closing the roof
process will stop immediately when the &
button is released. > To close the sunroof completely, push the A>
button back briefly to the second level @).
@) Tips > To close the sunroof completely, push the A>
button forward briefly to the second level
Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass
ofA.
roof: If the sunshade is closed, it will auto-
> To select a partially open position, push the A>
matically open partially or halfway when the
button forward or back to the first level until
roof is tilted or opened.
the desired position is reached.
Sunroof emergency closing

If an object is detected when closing, the roof
will open again automatically. In this case, you
can then close it with the power emergency clos-
ing function.
> Within five seconds after the sunroof opens au-

tomatically, pull the applicable button until the
roof is closed.
46
Opening and closing
Operating the roof sunshade

AN WARNING
The roof sunshade cannot be closed completely if
To reduce the risk of injury, always pay atten-
the roof is open.
tion when closing the sliding/tilting sunroof.
Always switch the ignition off when leaving > Opening and closing the sunshade: push the -&
the vehicle and always take the vehicle key switch in the headliner @) briefly toward the
with you. rear or forward to the second level.
> Partially opening the sunshade: press the
@) Note switch to the first level until the sunshade
Always close your sliding/tilting sunroof when reaches the desired position.
leaving your vehicle. Rain can cause damage Operating the roof
to the interior equipment of your vehicle, par-
ticularly the electronic equipment. > Tilting the roof: press the 2 switch in the
headliner briefly up to the second level (@).
@ Tips > Closing the tilted roof: pull the 2> switch down
briefly to the second Level.
— After switching off the ignition, the sliding/
> Opening the roof: slide the 2s switch back
tilting sunroof can still be operated for sev-
briefly twice in a row to the second level (2).
eral minutes as long as neither of the front
> Closing the opened roof: push the A> switch
doors have been opened.
forward briefly to the second level.
— It is not possible to open the sliding/tilting
> Opening or closing partially: slide the 2s
sunroof when temperatures are too low.
switch to the first level and hold it there until
the roof reaches the desired position.
Panoramic glass roof
Quick opening
Operating th noramic glass roof
roof sunshad You can also open the roof and roof sunshade in
Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass roof and roof sun- one movement.
shade
> Push the 4d switch back briefly to the second
level
2) twice in a row.
Roof emergency closing
If an object is detected when closing, the roof
will open again automatically. In this case, you
can then close it with the power emergency clos-
ing function.
> Within five seconds after the sunroof opens au-

tomatically, pull the applicable button until the
Fig. 40 Headliner: panoramic glass roof and sunshade*
roof is closed.
buttons
The control buttons are equipped with a two- Z\ WARNING

stage function. To reduce the risk of injury, always pay atten-
tion when closing the roof. Always switch the
When tilting or opening the roof, the roof sun-
ignition off and take the key with you when
shade will open partially or halfway if the sun-
leaving the vehicle. >
shade is closed.
8W1012721BC
47
Opening and closing
The following buttons are deactivated when the

@) Note
valet parking function is switched on:
Always close the roof when you leave the vehi-
cle and when there is precipitation to reduce — <3 Button in the driver's door
the risk of damage to the interior equipment, — As Button on the vehicle key
particularly the electronic equipment. — Handle in the luggage compartment lid
If the valet parking function is switched on, a

G) Tips message will appear every time the ignition is
— After switching off the ignition, the roof and switched on.
sunshades can still be operated for several
minutes as long as neither of the front @) Tips
doors have been opened. Please note that the luggage compartment
— It is not possible to open the roof when can still be accessed from the vehicle interior
temperatures are too low. in vehicles with fixed rear seat backrests or
ones that cannot be locked, even when the
Valet parking valet parking function is switched on.
Applies to: vehicles with valet parking function
The valet parking function can protect the lug- Garage door opener
gage compartment from unauthorized access.
The [VALET] button for valet parking is in the Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
glove compartment.
With the garage door opener, you can activate
You can switch the valet parking function on, for systems such as the garage doors, security sys-
example when someone else is parking your vehi- tems or house lights from inside your vehicle.
cle ). The vehicle can be driven, locked, and un- These functions are operated in the MMI. Multi-
locked using the vehicle key, but access to the ple receivers can be programmed, which can con-
luggage compartment is blocked. trol the functions of up to eight2) hand-held
transmitters.
> Remove the mechanical key > page 37.
> Press the [VALET] button in the glove compart-
ZA\ WARNING
ment. The LED in the button turns on if the
— When operating or programming the garage
function is switched on.
> Lock the glove compartment with the mechani- door opener, make sure that no people or
cal key. objects are in the area immediately sur-
» Applies to: vehicles with lockable pass-through rounding the equipment. People can be in-
and lockable rear seat backrests: To secure the jured or property can be damaged if struck
luggage compartment from the vehicle interior, when closing.
lock the pass-through and the rear seat backr- — Do not allow yourself to be distracted from
ests using the mechanical key > page 86, traffic by the viewing and operating the dis-
=> page 85. plays.
> Give your vehicle key to the service personnel
who are parking your vehicle and keep the me- (i) Tips
chanical key. — If you sell your vehicle, reset all settings to
the factory default settings > page 213. >
D_ This function is not available in all countries.

2) The possible number of hand-held transmitters depends
on the equipment.
48
Opening and closing
— The system complies with United States FCC If transmission was successful, the message:
regulations and ISED regulations Send to: XXX will appear.
=> page 284.
G) Tips Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener

Before you program your system to the ga-
You can program both fixed code and rolling code
rage door opener, first check the compatibili-
systems in the MMI using the procedure that is
ty:
described.
— Ask an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility or check at www. Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
homelink.com. You can also find more infor-
Programming the system
mation about HomeLink there.
Applies to: MMI
— You can display information about Home-
Link (compatibility level/status/country Requirement: the hand transmitter must be
code/HomeLink generation) in the MMI: present and the vehicle must be within range of
— Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Set-
the system (such as the garage door) that you
tings & Service > Garage door opener > (i). would like to program.
> If you are programming the garage door opener

for the first time, press the - button on the
Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener display. Follow the instructions in the MMI. Or
> If you would like to program other systems, se-
Requirements: the remote control transmitter
lect on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings &
must be programmed > page 49, the vehicle
Service > Garage door opener. Select the de-
must be within range of the system, and the igni-
sired button: @). Follow the instructions in the
tion must be switched on.
MMI.
There are multiple options to open or close the > If you would like to reprogram systems that are
system (such as the garage door). already programmed, select on the home
screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage
> If you have only programmed one remote con-
door opener. Press the Z button and select 7
trol transmitter, press the - button on the
for the system to be reprogrammed. Select:
display. Or
Program. Follow the instructions in the MMI.
> If you have programmed multiple remote con-
trol transmitters, press the - button on the With some systems, the garage door opener will
display and then press the respective system be immediately available after programming.
button. Or With other systems, the garage door opener
> Applies to: vehicles with programmable steer- must also be synchronized.
ing wheel button: If you have configured the
Synchronizing)
programmable steering wheel button, press
the *K button > page 29 and then press the re- Requirement: the hand transmitter must already
spective button for the system. Or be programmed and the vehicle must be within
> Applies to: vehicles with location pairing: If you range of the system (such as the garage door).
have programmed Location pairing, press the
If the system synchronization is performed di-
button for this in the display (notification cen-
rectly after the programming procedure, follow
ter > page 22). As you approach the system,
the instructions on the MMI.
the button is displayed on the MMI.
If you would like to sync at a later time:
8W1012721BC
2) Only applies to rolling code systems
49
Opening and closing
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door
opener. opener.
> Press the button for the system that you would > Press the Z button.
like to synchronize. > To delete an individual system, press the L]
> Follow the instructions in the MMI. button for the desired system. If the checkmark
Y is set, select: Delete.
Renaming programmed systems
> To delete all systems, select: All > Delete.
You can rename the programmed systems indi-
vidually (names may have a maximum of 10 char- G) Tips
acters).
— Make sure the batteries in the hand trans-
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: mitter are charged before starting the pro-
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door gramming process.
opener. — The programming process may take up to
> Press the Z button. 30 seconds. It may be necessary for the
> Press the 7 button for the system that you hand transmitter to be pressed again in the
would like to rename. meantime.
> Select: Rename. If necessary, delete the preset — The garage door opener may need to be
name, such as Garage door opener 1. synchronized with the system after pro-
> Follow the instructions in the MMI. gramming. Follow the manufacturer's in-
structions for doing this.
Location pairing
Applies to: vehicles with location pairing
G) Tips
For easier operation, you can program your sys-
In some cases, the system may need to be
tem's location.
programmed in a different mode (“D mode”).
Requirements: the respective hand transmitter — Switch the ignition on.
must be programmed > page 49 and the vehicle — Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
must be located in front of the system. VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage
door opener.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
— Press and hold the desired button @).
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door
— Select Yes, in D mode and follow the in-
opener.
> Press the Z button. structions on the MMI.
> Press the / button for the system your vehicle
is facing.
> Select: Location pairing.
> Follow the instructions in the MMI.
Only a maximum of three systems can be dis-

played in the notification center > page 22. If
you would like to have all systems displayed,
press aa.
Deleting programmed systems
The programmed systems can be deleted individ-
ually or all at once.
sO
Lights and Vision
Lights and Vision traffic if the vehicle load changes. The headlight
range adjusts automatically.
Exterior lighting
Audi adaptive light
Switching the lights on and off Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive light
Audi adaptive light provides better visibility when

driving in the dark. The lights are adapted to the
road conditions based on speed, such as when
driving on expressways, rural roads, at intersec-
tions, and around curves. The adaptive lights only
function when the light switch is in the AUTO po-
sition and the all-weather lights are switched off.
ZA WARNING
Fig. 41 Instrument panel: light switch with button — Observe the safety precautions and note the
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
@ Light switch cameras > page 117.
Turn the light switch @ to the corresponding po- — Automatic headlights are only intended to
sition when the ignition is switched on. The 2 assist the driver. The driver is still responsi-
symbol and the selected position will turn on (ex- ble for controlling the headlights and may
cept position 0). need to switch them on and off manually
depending on light and visibility conditions.
O - The daytime running lights* will automatical- For example, fog cannot be detected by the
ly turn on. In vehicles for some markets, you can light sensors. So always switch on the low
switch the automatic daytime running lights on beams ZO under these weather conditions
and off in the MMI. and when driving in the dark.
AUTO - The headlights will automatically adapt to
the surrounding brightness. G) Tips
— If the vehicle battery has been discharging
300: — Parking lights
for a while, the parking light may switch off
20 - Low beam headlights automatically. Avoid using the parking
When the low beam headlights or parking lights lights for several hours.
are switched on, the corresponding Be or 200 in- — When using lighting equipment, the driver
dicator light will turn on depending on vehicle is responsible for adhering to any local ap-
equipment. plicable regulations while driving and when
parking the vehicle.
@ All-weather lights Zo — Only the front headlights turn on when the
Requirement: the light switch must be in the AU- daytime running lights are switched on*. In
TO or ZO position. vehicles in certain markets, the tail lights
will also turn on.
The headlights automatically adjust so that there
—Incool or damp weather, the inside of the
will be less glare, for example when the road sur-
headlights, turn signals, and tail lights can
face is wet.
fog over due to the temperature difference
Automatic headlight range control between the inside and outside. They will
clear shortly after switching them on. This
Your vehicle is equipped with automatic head-
8W1012721BC
does not affect the service life of the light-

light range control. It reduces glare for oncoming
ing.
51
Lights and Vision
Turn signal and high beam lever item luo

Applies to: vehicles with high beam assistant
BFV-0012
The high beam assistant automatically turns the
high beams on or off depending on the surround-
ing conditions.
A camera on the rearview mirror mount can de-

tect light sources from other road users. The high
beams switch on or off automatically depending
on the position of vehicles driving ahead and on-
coming vehicles, the vehicle speed as well as oth-
Fig. 42 Lever: switching on the turn signal and high beams er environmental factors and traffic conditions.
The lever operates the turn signals, the high Activating high beam assistant
beams and the headlight flasher. Requirement: the light switch must be in the AU-
Turn signals @ > TO position and the high beam assistant must be
switched on in the MMI > page 53.
The turn signal will activate when you move the
lever into a turn signal position while the ignition > To activate the high beam assistant, tap the
is switched on. The respective Kl or By indicator lever forward @) > page 52, fig. 42. The 3&4 in-
light will flash. dicator light will appear in the instrument clus-
ter display and the high beams will be switched
@ Right turn signal on or off automatically. The Ea indicator light
@® Left turn signal will turn on if the high beams are switched on.
The turn signal blinks three times if you tap the Activating and deactivating the high beam
lever (convenience turn signal). head lights manually
If an indicator light blinks twice as fast as usual, If the high beams did not switch on or off as ex-
a turn signal bulb has failed. Carefully drive to an pected, you may switch them on or off manually
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service instead:
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor- > To activate the high beams manually, tap the
rected. lever forward @) > page 52, fig. 42. The & in-
High beams 20 and headlight flasher dicator light will turn on.
> To deactivate the high beams manually, pull
> Move the lever to the corresponding position: the lever back @) > page 52, fig. 42. The high
@) High beams on (vehicles with high beam assis- beam assistant is deactivated.
tant*) > page 52
Operating the headlight flasher
@ High beams off or headlight flasher
> To operate the headlight flashers, pull the lever
The ED indicator light in the instrument cluster back @) > page 52, fig. 42. If the high beam
will turn on. headlights are not switched on, the high beam
assistant will remain activated.
Z\ WARNING
High beams can cause glare for other drivers,
Z\ WARNING
which increases the risk of an accident. For — Observe the safety precautions and note the
this reason, only use the high beams or the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
headlight flasher when they will not create cameras > page 117.
glare for other drivers.
52
Lights and Vision
— High beam assistant is only intended to as- Daytime running lights

sist the driver. The driver is responsible for USA models: The daytime running lights can be
controlling the high beam headlights and switched on and off.
adjusting them to match the lighting and
Canada models: This function cannot be switched
visibility conditions.
off. They activate automatically each time the ig-
— High beams can cause glare for other driv-
nition is switched on.
ers, which increases the risk of an accident.
For this reason, only use the high beams or
the headlight flasher when they will not cre- Emergency flashers
ate glare for other drivers.
G) Tips
Adhere to any local applicable regulations
when using the lighting equipment, for exam-
ple in regard to reducing glare for other driv-
ers. The driver is always responsible for adher-
ing to the regulations applicable in the coun-
try where the vehicle is being operated.
Fig. 43 Center console: emergency flashers
Adjusting the exterior lighting
The emergency flashers help to make other driv-
You can adjust the exterior lighting separately. ers aware of your vehicle in dangerous situations.
The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
» Press the A @ button to switch the emergency
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: flashers on or off.
VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Exterior light-
ing. When the emergency flashers are turned on, the
a and By indicator lights will flash at the same
Automatic headlights time.
You can adjust the following settings in the Auto- You can indicate a lane change or a turn when the
matic headlights menu: emergency flashers are switched on by using the
Activation time - You can adjust if the headlights turn signal lever. The emergency flashers stop
switch on Early, Medium, or Late based on the temporarily.
sensitivity of the light sensor. The emergency flashers also work when the igni-
High beam assistant - You can switch the high tion is turned off.
beam assistant on and off.
@) Tips
Entry/exit lighting
You should switch the emergency flashers on
The Entry/exit lighting illuminates the area if:
around the vehicle when the vehicle is unlocked — you are the last car in a traffic jam so that
or when the driver’s door is opened while the ig- all other vehicles approaching from behind
nition is off. The entry/exit lighting works when it can see your vehicle
is dark and the light switch is in the AUTO posi- — your vehicle has broken down or you are
tion. The front and rear daytime running lights* having an emergency
switch on automatically each time the vehicle is — your vehicle is being towed or if you are tow-
8W1012721BC
unlocked regardless of how bright it is outside ing another vehicle

the vehicle.
53
Lights and Vision
Messages Interior lighting

If the 8; indicator light turns on, a bulb has Front interior lighting
failed. The displayed message indicates the cause
and possible solutions. If one of the messages re-
mains on, drive immediately to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to
have the malfunction repaired.
By Audi adaptive light: malfunction! See own-

er's manual
Adaptive light* is not working. The headlights

still function. Drive immediately to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to Fig. 44 Headliner: front interior lighting
have the malfunction repaired.
Interior lighting buttons
By Headlight range control: malfunction! See
ax — Interior lighting on/off
owner's manual
There is a malfunction in the headlight range
4 - Door contact switch on/off. The interior light-
ing is controlled automatically.
control system, which may cause glare for other
drivers. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au- Touch-sensitive reading lights
thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
> To turn a reading light on or off, touch the sur-
the malfunction corrected.
face@ briefly.
High beam assistant: malfunction! See own- > To activate the manual dimming function,
er's manual touch the surface @ when the light is switched
You can still switch the high beams on or off off and keep touching it until the desired
manually. Drive immediately to an authorized brightness is reached.
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to
have the malfunction repaired. Rear interior lighting
High beam assistant: currently unavailable.
RAZ-T100
Camera view limited due to environmental con-
ditions
This message appears if the camera's visual field

is blocked. The system will switch itself off. Try
switching the systems on later.
[BY Automatic headlights: malfunction! See

owner's manual
The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning. In the Fig. 45 Headliner: rear reading lights
AUTO light switch position, the low beams re-

main switched on at all times for safety reasons. Reading lights
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer > To switch the reading lamp on or off, press the
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the ~¥ button @.
malfunction repaired. > To activate the manual dimming function*,
touch the surface while the light is switched off
“~¥@ and keep touching it until the desired
brightness is reached.
54
Lights and Vision
Interior lighting Pitt aaa ce aria eda)

Applies to: vehicles with interior lighting
The ambient lighting turns on when the ignition

is switched on. The O light switch position deacti-
vates the interior lighting.
You can adjust the interior lighting individually.

>» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-

HICLE > Light & Visibility > Interior lighting.
Fig. 46 Light switch: instrument illumination
You can choose from various color profiles, such
as Maritime.
%, - You can adjust the background brightness of
Additional settings and profiles: the instruments and display illumination.
— Brightness: you can adjust the brightness for > Press the knob (@) to release it.
all of the interior lighting. > Turn the knob toward "-" or "+" to reduce or in-
— Individual: you can adjust the brightness and crease the brightness.
color of the interior lighting separately, divided > Press the knob again to return it to its original
into contour and surface lighting. Position.
Ow
— Audi drive select: the contour and surface
lighting color changes depending on the select-
ed drive select* mode.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the instru-
ment illumination (needles and gauges) may
@ Tips
turn on when the lights are off and the igni-
Depending on vehicle equipment, when the tion is switched on. The illumination for the
drive select function is activated, the color of gauges reduces automatically and eventually
the contour and surface lighting may briefly turns off as brightness outside increases. This
change to red or blue when the interior tem- function reminds the driver to turn the low
perature is manually increased or decreased. beams on at the appropriate time.
Display brightness Vision

You can adjust the instrument and display illumi- Adjusting exterior mirrors
nation separately. The settings depend on the ve-
hicle equipment.
RAZ-0150
> Applies to MMI: select on the home screen:

SETTINGS > Display & brightness.
Possible settings in the MMI:
— Cockpit dimming
— Head-up display
—MMI
© ©
— Audi virtual cockpit Fig. 47 Driver's door: knob for the exterior mirrors
8W1012721BC
> Turn the knob in the driver's door to the desired

position: >
55
Lights and Vision
0 - Deactivates all adjustment functions. way out. The mirrors will make a loud noise
when they latch into place. The mirror hous-
Q/ #- Selects the left or right exterior mirror.
ing must not be moved back into place by
To adjust the mirror glass in a mirror, press the
hand because this could impair the function
knob in the desired direction.
of the mirror mechanism.
GA - Heats the mirror glass depending on the — Applies to: vehicles without power folding
outside temperature. exterior mirrors: If the mirror housing was
©) - Folds the exterior mirrors*. To fold the mir- moved by outside forces (such as an impact
rors out, turn the knob to one of the other posi- when maneuvering), you must move it back
tions. In the MMI, you can select if the mirrors in place by hand.
fold in automatically when you lock the vehicle — If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car
=> page 34. wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors.
Front passenger's exterior mirror tilt Never fold power folding exterior mirrors*
function* by hand. Only fold them in and out using
Requirement: the knob must be in the position the power controls.
for the front passenger’s exterior mirror.
@) Tips
The mirror surfaces tilt slightly when reverse
If the power adjusting function malfunctions,
gear is selected to provide a better view, for ex-
the glass in both mirrors can be adjusted by
ample of the edge of the curb.
pressing on the edge of it by hand.
You can adjust the mirror surface by turning the
knob in the desired direction.
Dimming the mirrors
The mirror moves from the reversing position
Manual dimming rearview mirror
back to the original position:
> Pull the lever on the bottom of the mirror back.
— When you switch the ignition off
— When you drive forward at speeds faster than 9 Automatic dimming rearview mirror
mph (15 km/h). Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors
— When the knob is no longer in the position for > The interior and exterior mirrors dim automati-
the front passenger exterior mirror cally when light shines on them, for example
from headlights on a vehicle behind you.
Z\ WARNING
Curved mirror surfaces (for example convex) ZA WARNING
enlarge the field of vision. However, they Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors
make objects in the mirror appear smaller and — Electrolyte fluid can leak out from broken
farther away. When using these mirrors to es- mirror glass. This liquid can irritate the skin,
timate your distance to vehicles behind you eyes and respiratory system. If there is con-
when changing lanes, you could estimate in- tact with the fluid, flush immediately with
correctly, which increases the risk of an acci- plenty of water. Consult a physician if neces-
dent. sary.
— Repeated or long-term exposure to electro-
@) Note lyte fluid can lead to irritation of the air-
— Applies to: vehicles with power folding exte- ways, especially in people with asthma or
rior mirrors: If the mirror housing was other respiratory conditions. Take deep
moved by outside forces (such as an impact breaths immediately after leaving the vehi-
when maneuvering), you must use the pow- cle or, if this is not possible, open all of the
er folding function to fold the mirror all the doors and windows as wide as possible.
56
Lights and Vision
— If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with Sun visor

the eyes, flush them thoroughly with plenty The sun visors can be moved out of their brackets
of clean water for at least 15 minutes and and turned toward the doors (@).
then seek medical attention.
They can also be moved back and forth length-
— If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with
wise in this position.
the skin, flush the affected area with clean
water for at least 15 minutes, and then Vanity mirror
clean with soap and water and seek medical
The mirror lighting* switches on when the cover
attention. Clean affected clothing and shoes
over the vanity mirror
@) opens.
thoroughly before wearing again.
— If the fluid was swallowed and the person is
conscious, flush the mouth with water for at
Applies to: vehicles with sunshade
least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomiting
unless this is recommended by medical pro-
fessionals. Seek medical attention immedi-
ately.
Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors

Electrolyte fluid can leak out from broken mir-
ror glass. This liquid damages plastic surfaces
and paint. Clean this liquid as quickly as possi-
ble, for example with a wet sponge. Fig. 49 Rear door: sunshade
@ Rear door sunshade

Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors > Pull the sunshade out and attach it to the re-
— If the light reaching the rearview mirror is tainer on the upper door frame > fig. 49.
obstructed, the automatic dimming mirror
will not function correctly,
— The automatic dimming mirrors do not dim
when the interior lighting is turned on or
the reverse gear is selected.
Sun visors
Fig. 48 Roof headliner: sun visor

8W1012721BC
57
Lights and Vision
Windshield wipers © Clean the windshield 7. The number of wipes

and afterwipes depends on how long the lever is
Switching the windshield wipers on held in position ©).
The wipers wipe one time after several seconds of
RAZ-0149.
driving to remove water droplets. You can switch
this function off by moving the lever to position
© within ten seconds of the afterwipe. The after-
wipe function is reactivated the next time you
switch the ignition on.
If you hold the lever in position ©) for longer

than half a second, the edge wiping feature will
be activated. This moves the windshield wipers
closer to the edge of the windshield and per-
forms an afterwipe to clean the residue that re-
sults from the wiping process from the edge of
the windshield. The function is available when
driving at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
The headlight washer system* operates only

when the low beam headlights are on. If you
move the lever into position ), the headlights
will be cleaned at fixed intervals.
Fig. 51 Lever: rear window wiper (allroad) Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper: @) -
Wiping the rear window J. The number of wipes
> Move the windshield wiper lever S7 to the cor- depends on the windshield wiper movement.
responding position:
The rear wiper automatically switches on when
@ Windshield wipers off the reverse gear is selected and the front wind-
@ Rain sensor/intermittent mode. The windshield wipers are on and running.
shield wipers switch on once the vehicle speed Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper: ®) -
exceeds approximately 2 mph (4 km/h) and it is Cleaning the rear window &. The number of
raining. The higher the sensitivity of the rain sen- wipes depends on how long the Lever is held in
sor that is set (switch © to the right), the earlier position @).
the windshield wipers react to moisture on the
This may also clean the rearview camera, depend-
windshield. You can deactivate the rain sensor
ing on the vehicle equipment.
mode, which switches the interval mode on. In
intermittent mode, you can adjust the interval
time using the switch ©.
Z\ WARNING
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — The rain sensor is only intended to assist the
VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Rain sensor. driver. The driver may still be responsible for
manually switching the wipers on based on
@ Slow wiping visibility conditions.
@ Fast wiping — The windshield must not be treated with
water-repelling windshield coating agents.
@ Single wipe. If you hold the lever in this posi-
Under unfavorable conditions, such as wet-
tion longer, the wipers switch from slow wiping
ness, darkness, and when the sun is low,
to fast wiping.
these coatings can cause increased glare, >
58
Lights and Vision
which increases the risk of an accident. They (eG ee a kes

wiper blades
ce
can also cause wiper blade chatter.
B8V-0696]
— Properly functioning windshield wiper
blades are required for a clear view and safe
driving > page 59, Cleaning/changing wip-
er blades.
@) Note
— If there is frost, make sure the windshield
wiper blades are not frozen to the wind-
shield. Switching on the windshield wipers Fig. 52 Windshield wipers: changing the wiper blades
when the blades are frozen to the wind-
shield can damage the wiper blades. Wiper blade replacement position
— Prior to using a car wash, the windshield
> Switch off the ignition and hold the windshield
wiper system must be switched off (lever in
wiper lever in position @) > page 58, fig. 50 un-
position @). This prevents the wipers from
til the windshield wiper moves into the wiper
switching on unintentionally and causing
blade replacement position.
damage to the windshield wiper system.
> To bring the windshield wipers into the normal
position, switch the ignition on and hold the
@) Tips
windshield wiper lever in position @) until the
— The windshield wipers switch off when the windshield wipers go back to the original posi-
ignition is switched off. You can activate the tion, or drive faster than 8 mph (12 km/h).
windshield wipers after the ignition is
switched on again by moving the windshield You can also turn the wiper blade replacement
wiper lever to any position. The single wipe position on or off in the MMI:
function (lever in position @)) also functions > Switch the windshield wipers off (position @
when the ignition is switched off. => page 58, fig. 50).
— Worn or dirty windshield wiper blades result > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
in streaking. This can affect the rain sensor HICLE > Settings & Service > Wiper change po-
function. Check your windshield wiper sition.
blades regularly. Cleaning the wiper blades
— The washer fluid nozzles for the windshield
washer system are heated when the ignition Requirement: the windshield wipers must be in
the wiper blade replacement position.
is on if the outside temperature is low.
— When stopping temporarily, such as at a > Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the
traffic light, the speed of the windshield windshield.
wipers automatically reduces by one level. > For information on cleaning, see > table on
page 256.
Replacing the wiper blades

Requirement: the windshield wipers must be in
the wiper blade replacement position.
> Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the

windshield.
8W1012721BC
> Press the locking knob () on the wiper blade.

Hold the wiper blade firmly.
59
Lights and Vision
> Remove the wiper blade from the windshield Cleaning the wiper blades
wiper arm mount @). > Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window.
> Insert the new wiper blade into the mount on >» For information on cleaning, see > table on
the wiper arm until it clicks into place. page 256.
> Place the wiper arm back on the windshield.
> Exit the wiper blade replacement position. Removing the wiper blade
> Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window.
ZX WARNING > Remove the wiper blade from its holder.
— For safety reasons, the windshield wiper
Installing the wiper blade
blades should be replaced once or twice
each year. > Press the wiper blade mount into the retainer.
— Dirty windshield wiper blades can impair vi- > Fold the window wiper arm back onto the rear
sion, which increases the risk of an accident. window.
©) Note ZA WARNING
— The windshield wipers must only be lifted For safety reasons, the windshield wiper
up when in the wiper blade replacement po- blades should be replaced once or twice each
sition. Otherwise, you risk damaging the year.
paint on the hood or the windshield wiper
motor. Messages
— You should not move your vehicle or press
the windshield wiper lever when the wiper If the & indicator light turns on, then there is a
arms are folded up from the windshield. The windshield wiper malfunction. The message that
windshield wipers would move back into is also displayed indicates the cause and possible
their original position and could damage the solutions. If one of the messages does not turn
hood and windshield. off, drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
Gi) Tips malfunction repaired.
— You can also use the wiper blade replace- a Automatic wipers: malfunction! See owner's
ment position for other reasons, for exam- manual
ple if you want to protect the windshield
The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning. You can
from icing by using a cover.
still control all functions that are not controlled
— You cannot activate the wiper blade replace-
by the rain sensor using the windshield wiper lev-
ment position when the hood is open.
er. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
(aE Th} anging the rear wiper blade malfunction repaired.
Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper
B8R-0380
Fig. 53 Rear window wiper: installing the wiper blade
60
Lights and Vision
Digital compass > To turn the compass on or off, press the button
@ until the compass display in the mirror turns
on or off.
@©,
The digital compass only works when the ignition
q is turned on. The directions are indicated with ab-
S|>
a
ao. breviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east),
SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W
(west), NW (northwest).
To prevent inaccurate compass readings, do

not bring any remote controls, electrical devi-
ces or metallic objects near the mirror.
B42-0405
Fig. 55 Magnetic zone map
The magnetic zone must be adjusted correctly for > Press the button () repeatedly to select the
the compass to read accurately. correct magnetic zone. The selection mode
turns off after a few seconds.
> Press and hold the button @) > page 61, fig. 54
until the number of the magnetic zone appears
8W1012721BC
in the interior rearview mirror.
61
Lights and Vision
Calibrating the compass

Applies to: vehicles with digital compass
If the display is incorrect or inaccurate, the com-

pass must be recalibrated.
> Press and hold the button @ until aC

=> page 61, fig. 54 appears in the rearview mir-
ror.
> Drive in a circle at about 6 mph (10 km/h) until
a direction is displayed in the rearview mirror.
To reduce the risk to yourself and other driv-

ers, calibrate the compass in an area where
there is no traffic.
62
Sitting correctly and safely
Sitting correctly and — Never kneel on the seats.

— Never tilt your backrest too far back.
safely
— Never lean against the instrument panel.
Correct passenger — Never lie down on the rear bench seat.
seating position — Never sit only on the front section of the seat.
— Never sit sideways on the seat.
General information
— Never lean against the window.
As the driver, you are responsible for making sure — Never place your feet out of the window.
every passenger is sitting correctly in their seat — Never place your feet on the instrument panel.
and maintaining this seating position while driv- — Never place your feet on the seat cushion.
ing. Make sure that: — Never ride in the footwell.
— Never sit on the armrests.
— Every passenger in the vehicle has adjusted his
— Never drive or ride in a seat without fastening
or her seat correctly > page 63
your safety belt.
— The steering wheel is adjusted correctly
— Never ride in the luggage compartment.
=> page 66
— The mirrors are adjusted so that there is a suffi-
ZA WARNING
cient view of the area around the vehicle
=>page 55 Incorrect seating positions, failure to wear a
— Every passenger in the vehicle has his or her safety belt, or being too close to an airbag in-
head restraint adjusted correctly > page 67 crease the risk of serious or fatal injury to ve-
hicle occupants, especially if the airbags de-
— Every passenger in the vehicle has his or her
ploy and come into contact with occupants
safety belt fastened correctly > page 68
who are not seated correctly. Note the impor-
— The activation status of the front passenger's
tant information and warnings in the chapters
airbag is suitable for the passenger in the front
for the topics given above.
passenger's seat > page 74
— Children are secured in suitable child safety
seats that are secured to appropriate vehicle
Gi) Tips
seats > page 76. Read and observe the impor- If you or other vehicle passengers have physi-
tant safety information pertaining to the use of cal limitations that prevent sitting in a correct
child safety seats on the front passenger's seat position, modifications to the vehicle may be
=> A\ in General information on page 76. necessary. For more information, contact an
Examples of incorrect seating positions Service Facility, or call Audi customer support
Safety belts can only provide its optimal protec- at 1-800-822-2834.
tion when they are routed correctly. Incorrect
seating positions significantly reduce the protec- Front seats
tive functions of the safety belts and increase the
risk of injury due to incorrect belt routing. General information
The following list includes examples of seating Make sure that:

positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle — You can press the pedals down completely
occupants. This is not a complete list. The pur- while your legs are slightly bent
pose is to provide examples to increase your
— The distance between your upper body and the
awareness of the topic. The following points ap- steering wheel or instrument panel is at least
ply when the vehicle is in motion:
10 inches (25 cm)
8W1012721BC
— Never stand inside the vehicle. — The distance between your knees and the in-
— Never stand on the seats. strument panel is at least 4 inches (10 cm) >
63
— Your thighs are lightly supported by the front window, or on the seat surfaces. This also
surface of the seat applies to passengers in the rear seats.
— The backrest is in an upright position and your
back is resting against it (@) Note
— You have a sufficient view of the area around Applies to: vehicles with manually adjustable head re-
the vehicle straints
— You have a clear view of the instrument cluster, To reduce the risk of damage, be very careful
indicator lights, and the head-up display* when adjusting the seat to make sure the
head restraints do not come into contact with
Z\ WARNING the headliner or the sunroof*.
— If you are too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel, the airbag system cannot Power seat adjustme
provide the optimal protection, which in-
creases the risk of injury and death.
— To reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking maneuvers or accidents,
never drive with the backrest reclined very
far. The airbag system and seat belts can on-
ly provide optimal protection when the back-
rest is in an upright position and the driver
is wearing the seat belt correctly. If the
backrest is angled back too far, the safety
belt can shift to soft areas of the body, such
as the stomach, which increases the risk of
injury.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust
the seats when the vehicle is stationary.
— Be careful when adjusting the seat. Lack of
control or attention when adjusting can re-
sult in injuries due to pinching to vehicle oc-
cupants both in the front seats and rear
seats.
— Never place objects in the driver's footwell. Fig. 57 Front seat: adjusting the seat (version B)
Objects could shift and enter the area
around the pedals, which could prevent you The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
from using them. You would then be unable
to use the pedals if sudden driving or brak- Adjusting the backrests
ing maneuvers were needed, which increas- > To move the backrest forward or backward,
es the risk of an accident. press the button @) forward or backward.
— Make sure that the floor mats are always se-
Adjusting the seat position
curely attached.
— To reduce the risk of an accident, never place > To move the seat forward or backward, push
additional floor mats or other floor covers the button @) forward or backward.
over the installed floor mats, because this > To adjust the seat upward or downward, push
reduces the pedal's range of motion and can the rear section of the button @) upward or
impair pedal operation. downward.
—To reduce the risk of injury, never place your > To adjust the seat surface, press the front part
feet on the instrument panel, out of the of the button @) upward or downward.
64
Adjusting the lumbar support The settings and the number of menus and but-
tons depend on the vehicle equipment.
> To adjust the lumbar support, press the button
@) in the desired direction. Operating
Applies to: MMI
Adjusting the upper thigh support
> Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Seats.
> To increase or decrease the upper thigh sup-
> To access the various menus (4), swipe to the
port, lift the handle @) and move the upper
left or right.
thigh support.
> To display the various seats, press ) or ( @.
Massage function The red coloring in the symbol
@) indicates which
> To switch the massage function on or off, press seat is selected.
the button ©) > fig. 57.
Massage
Adjusting the side supports See > page 65
You can adjust the side bolsters using the multi-
Additional seat settings
function button @) > fig. 57.
See > page 65
ZA WARNING
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust aces cetera (ol)
the driver's seat when the vehicle is station- Applies to: vehicles with massage function
ary. Selecting the massage function

— The power front seats can also be adjusted
> To open the Massage menu, press the button
when the ignition is switched off. To reduce
the risk of injury, children should never be
© > page 64, fig. 57.
left unattended in the vehicle for this rea- Switching the massage function on or off
son. Applies to: MMI
— Exercise caution when adjusting the seat
> To switch the massage function on or off, press
height. Unsupervised or careless seat adjust-
the button ©) > page 64, fig. 57.
ment could cause parts of the body to get
> Press Start/Stop on the MMI.
pinched, which increases the risk of injury.
— The front seat backrests must not be re- Setting the massage type and intensity
clined too far back when driving, because Applies to: MMI
this impairs the effectiveness of the safety > To adjust the massage type, press the desired
belts and airbag system, which increases the button on the MMI, for example Wave.
risk of injury. > To adjust the intensity of the massage, press
Intensity on the MMI repeatedly until the de-
ON em amie MR sired level is reached.
Applies to: vehicles with seat settings in the MMI
G) Tips
RAZ-0873,
The massage function switches off automati-

cally after approximately 10 minutes.
OX CTT eerie Mg

8W1012721BC
Fig. 58 Center display: seat settings

VEHICLE > Seats.
> Swipe to the left if necessary.
65
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- — You are always holding the steering wheel with
ing options may be available. both hands on the outer edge at the sides (9:00
and 3:00 position) when driving
Reset seat position
You can adjust the position of the front passeng- Z\ WARNING
er’s seat to match the driver's seat. — If you are too close to the steering wheel,
the driver's airbag cannot provide optimal
Driver seat entry assistance
protection, which increases the risk of injury
Entry assistance makes it easier to enter or exit or fatality.
the vehicle. — Never hold the steering wheel in the 12:00
Front passenger’s seat adjustment position or in any other way, such as holding
the center of the steering wheel. Otherwise,
You can adjust the front passenger's side with the your arms, hands, and head could be injured
driver's seat buttons. in the event that the driver's airbag deploys.
Front center armrest

Adjusting the steering wheel position
Applies to: vehicles with a front center armrest
manually
The front center armrest is located between the Applies to: vehicles with manual steering wheel adjustment
front seats. The steering wheel position is adjustable up and

down and forward and back.
Adjusting the center armrest
> To adjust the armrest forward or backward,

move the armrest in the desired direction.
> To adjust the angle, raise the armrest in stages.
> To move the armrest back into the original posi-
tion, raise it slightly out of the top level and
fold it downward.
Z\ WARNING Fig. 59 Steering column: lever for adjusting the steering

In certain positions, the front center armrest wheel position
can interfere with the driver’s arm movement,
which increases the risk of injury. > Press the lever in the direction of the arrow.
> Bring the steering wheel into the desired posi-
tion.
Steering wheel > Push the lever all the way up until it engages.
General information
ZA WARNING
Make sure that:
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust
— The distance between your upper body and the the steering wheel before you start driving.
steering wheel is at least 10 inches (25 cm) — Push the lever upward firmly so that the
— Your arms are bent slightly at the elbows steering wheel position does not change un-
— You have a sufficient view of the area around intentionally while driving, which would in-
the vehicle and you have a clear view of the increase the risk of an accident.
strument cluster and head-up display*.
66
Head restraints Front head restraints

Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints
General information
[RAZ-0683|
B4G-0454
Fig. 61 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint
Fig. 60 Correctly-adjusted head restraint The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
Make sure that: Adjusting the head restraints
— The upper edge of the head restraint is as even > To adjust the head restraint upward or forward,
as possible with the top of your head slide it until it locks into place.
— The head restraint is as close as possible to the > To adjust the head restraint downward or back-
back of the head ward, press the button on the side and slide the
— The head restraints in any occupied rear seats head restraint. Release the button and slide the
are all the way up head restraint farther until it locks into place.
Z\ WARNING Rear head restraints

— There is one head restraint for each seat. All
vehicle occupants must adjust the head re-
RAZ-0823
straint correctly before every trip. Having
head restraints that are not adjusted cor-
rectly or not installed in the vehicle increas-
es the risk of a neck injury during sudden or
unexpected driving or braking maneuvers or
in a collision.
— Only remove the rear seat head restraints if
it is necessary to install a child safety seat
= page 76. Stow the removed head re-
Fig. 62 Rear seat: adjusting or removing the head restraint
straints securely, for example in the luggage
compartment. Reinstall the head restraints Adjusting the head restraints
immediately once the child safety seat has
> To adjust the head restraint upward, slide it un-
been removed. Driving without head re-
til it locks into place.
straints increases the risk of serious neck in-
> To adjust the head restraint downward, press
juries.
the button @) and slide the head restraint. Re-
lease the button and slide the head restraint
farther until it locks into place.
Removing the headrests

8W1012721BC
Applies to: vehicles with removable head restraints
> Fold the backrest forward slightly > page 85. >
67
> Move the head restraint upward all the way. that are seated in a child safety seat that is
> Insert a suitable object, such as the extended appropriate for their weight and age and
vehicle key or mechanical key, into the release that is secured with a safety belt.
point @ on the inside or outside of the base. In the event of a collision, vehicle occupants
> Press the button @) and pull the head restraint that are not wearing safety belts could be
out of the backrest. propelled through the vehicle interior and
collide with vehicle components, such as the
Installing the headrests
steering wheel, instrument panel, wind-
> Fold the backrest forward slightly > page 85. shield, or doors. In some situations, vehicle
>» Slide the posts on the head restraint down into occupants could also be ejected from the ve-
the guides until the posts click into place. hicle. Vehicle occupants in the rear seats
> Press the button @) and slide the head restraint who do not wear safety belts not only en-
all the way down. It should not be possible to danger themselves, but also other people in
remove the head restraint from the backrest the vehicle.
without pressing the button. Only one person may be fastened with a
safety belt at a time. Never secure more
Safety belts than one person, including children, with a
single safety belt.
Never allow children or infants to ride on an-
Each seat is equipped with a three-point safety other person's lap and be belted into the
belt. Safety belts that are worn correctly are the safety belt with them.
most effective way to reduce the risk of serious or Insert the belt buckle only in the belt latch
fatal injuries in a collision. Therefore, wear your belonging to the corresponding seat, so that
safety belt correctly and make sure that all vehi- the protective function is not impaired.
cle passengers are also wearing their safety belts To ensure the maximum protective function
correctly when the vehicle is moving. of the safety belts, all vehicle passengers
must sit in the correct seating position
Even though your vehicle is equipped with an air-
=> page 63.
bag system, every vehicle passenger must still al-
Check the condition of your vehicle’s safety
ways wear the appropriate safety belt. In addi-
belts regularly > page 256. If you find dam-
tion to their normal protective function, safety
age to the belt webbing, the belt connec-
belts also hold vehicle occupants in the correct
tions, the retractor, or the buckle, have the
seating position in the event of a collision so that
damaged safety belt replaced by an author-
the airbags can deploy correctly and provide addi-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
tional protection. Safety belts provide protection
Facility.
during collisions when the airbags do not deploy
The safety belts must not be removed or
or if they have already deployed.
modified in any way. Do not attempt to re-
ZA WARNING pair the safety belts yourself.
Safety belts that are strained during an acci-
The risk of serious or fatal injury increases if
dent must be replaced by an authorized
the safety belt is not fastened, if it is worn in-
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
correctly, or if it is damaged.
ty.
— All vehicle occupants, including the driver,
must fasten their safety belts correctly be-
fore every trip and must always keep their
safety belts fastened during the trip, regard-
less of whether the seat is equipped with an
airbag or not. This also applies to children
68
Correct safety belt positioning ZA\ WARNING

Incorrect safety belt positioning can cause se-
B4H-0751
rious injury in the event of an accident or dur-
ing sudden braking or driving maneuvers.
— Never drive with the backrest reclined ex-
tremely far. The more the backrest is tilted
back, the greater the risk of injury due to the
safety belt being routed incorrectly.
— The safety belt itself or a loose safety belt
can cause serious injuries if it shifts onto
soft areas of the body, such as the stomach.
— The shoulder portion of the safety belt must
RAZ-0696
lie over the center of the shoulder and
chest, and never under the arm, behind the
back, or across the neck or face.
— The lap portion of the safety belt must lie
across the lap and never over the stomach.
—The safety belt must lie flat and securely on
the upper part of the body and the lap.
— The belt webbing must not be pinched or
twisted, or rub against sharp edges.
— If the safety belt height is set incorrectly
Fastened safety belts only offer optimal protec- and/or the safety belt is routed incorrectly,
tion during an accident and reduce the risk of se- then the safety belt's protective function
rious injury or death when they are positioned will be impaired in the event of an accident.
correctly. Furthermore, the correct safety belt Make sure the safety belt is at the right
position holds the vehicle occupant in place so height and is routed correctly for the pas-
that a deployed airbag can provide maximum senger using it.
protection. Therefore, always fasten the safety —A safety belt that is too loose may lead to in-
belt and make sure it is positioned correctly juries during an accident, because your body
> fig. 63. will move farther forward due to kinetic en-
ergy and will be stopped abruptly by the
To ensure the safety belt is positioned correctly,
belt.
make sure of the following points:
— Heavily bulky, loose clothing (for example, a
— The lap portion of the safety belt must be locat- coat over a sports jacket) may prevent the
ed across the lap. seat and safety belts from functioning cor-
—The shoulder portion of the safety belt must rectly.
rest over the center of the shoulder. — Do not position the safety belt over hard or
— The safety belt must always rest flat and se- breakable objects (such as glasses, pens,
curely on the body. etc.).
—The lap belt portion of the safety belt must
For pregnant women, the safety belt must rest
sit as low as possible on the lap of pregnant
evenly across the chest and as low and flat as
women and lie flat under the belly.
possible on the lap, so that no pressure is applied
to the lower abdomen. This should be done
@) Note
8W1012721BC
throughout the entire pregnancy > fig. 64.

Make sure that there are no hook-and-loop
fasteners or sharp objects such as zippers or >
69
rivets on clothing in the area where the safety led while driving. Above certain speeds, addition-
belt is worn. Otherwise, the safety belt could al warning tones will sound.
be damaged.
Ned em Maat em aL LAVALAe
Cm cele tL mre
B4G-0004|
B4H-0462 Fig. 67 Belt height adjustment for the front seats - safety
belt relay
°Rg
a > To move the belt higher, slide the safety belt re-
2
z|
x lay @ upward.
oO
> To move the belt lower, press the release but-
ton @ and slide the safety belt relay @) down-
ward.
> To check if the safety belt relay is securely
locked in place, pull firmly on the belt.
Fig. 66 Releasing the belt buckle from the belt latch

You can also adjust the height of the front
Observe the safety precautions > page 68. seats to change the position of the safety
belts.
Fastening the safety belt
> Pull the safety belt by the belt buckle evenly Additional safety belt functions
across your chest and lap.
Belt retractor lock
> Insert the belt buckle in the belt latch belong-
ing to the seat until it audibly engages The safety belts on the rear seats and on the
> fig. 65. front passenger seat are equipped with a belt re-
> Pull on the belt to make sure that the belt is se- tractor lock.
curely locked in the latch. > If you secure a child safety seat with a safety
Unfastening the safety belt belt, the belt retractor lock on the safety belt
may need to be activated. Follow the instruc-
> Press the red button on the belt latch > fig. 66. tions from the child safety seat manufacturer.
The belt buckle will pop out.
> When a vehicle passenger has fastened a safety
> Guide the belt back by hand so that the safety belt, the belt retractor lock should not be acti-
belt can roll up more easily.
vated. If the belt retractor lock has been acti-
vated unexpectedly, deactivate it.
Safety belt monitoring system
Deactivating or activating the belt retractor lock
eB - If the indicator light turns on or flashes, a => page 79.
safety belt is not fastened or it has been unbuck-
70
Safety belt retractor Depending on vehicle equipment, some settings

The safety belts are equipped with an automatic such as the driver’s seat and exterior mirror posi-
tion can be stored.
belt retractor. This automatic retractor allows the
safety belt to be pulled all the way out when the
belt is pulled slowly. However, the automatic re- Storing and recalling a seat profile
tractor locks during sudden braking maneuvers. Applies to: vehicles with memory function
It also locks the belts when accelerating, driving

The memory function buttons are located in the
uphill, and driving around curves.
door trim panel.
Belt force limiter
Storing a seat profile
Safety belts with belt force limiters reduce the
> Press the [SET] button. If the LED in the button
force placed on the body by the safety belts dur-
turns on, a seat profile can be stored.
ing a collision.
> Push one of the numbered memory buttons. A
Safety belt pretensioners tone confirms that the settings were stored.
In certain driving situations, safety belts may be Recalling a seat profile

tightened with reversible belt tensioners when
> When the a door is open and the ignition is
you start driving. If the safety belt is too loose, it switched off, press the memory button once
will be tightened so that the belt will rest closer
briefly. The seat will be fully adjusted to the
to the body.
settings in the seat profile.
In some collisions, pyrotechnic belt tensioners > If the door is closed or the ignition is switched
may secure the safety belts so that they cannot on, press and hold the memory button until the
loosen. This reduces forward movement by the seat is fully adjusted to the settings in the seat
vehicle passengers. profile.
ZA\ WARNING Z\ WARNING

The pyrotechnic system can only provide pro- —To reduce the risk of an accident, the seat
tection during one collision. If the pyrotechnic setting can only be recalled when the vehicle
belt tensioners deploy, the pretensioning sys- is stationary.
tem must be replaced by an authorized Audi — In an emergency, the recall process can be
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. canceled by pressing the seat adjustment
button on that seat.
@) Tips
Smoke may be released when pyrotechnic belt Airbag system
tensioners deploy. This is not a sign of a vehi-
cle fire.
Memory function
Z\ WARNING
— If you have not fastened your safety belt,
General information you are in an incorrect seating position, or
Applies to: vehicles with memory function you are too close to the airbag system, the
With the memory function, you can save and call airbag system will not be able to protect
you. This increases the risk of serious or fa-
up seat profiles using the memory buttons in the
door trim panel. tal injuries. Make sure that every vehicle
8W1012721BC
passenger has their safety belt correctly fas-

tened and is sitting in a correct seating posi-
tion > page 63. This is necessary regardless |>
71
of whether the seat is equipped with an air- injuries. Only have an authorized Audi dealer
bag or not. or authorized Audi Service Facility make re-
— Never place your feet on the instrument pairs or modifications to a vehicle.
panel, out of the window, or on the seat sur- — The airbag system can only provide protec-
faces. To help ensure that the airbag system tion during one collision. If there is another
can deploy correctly, never bend forward or collision, the airbag system will not deploy
lean on the door or the side window. Other- again. If the airbag system has deployed,
wise, serious and possibly fatal injuries can have it replaced immediately by an author-
occur if the airbags deploy. ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
— People, animals, or objects between the Facility.
passengers and the airbag system can inter- — Fine dust may appear if the airbags deploy.
fere with the correct deployment of the air- This is completely normal and does not indi-
bag or can be thrown through the vehicle in- cate a fire in the vehicle. The fine dust can ir-
terior, increasing the risk of serious or fatal ritate the skin and mucous membranes in
injuries. Make sure that nothing is located the eyes and can cause difficulty breathing,
between the vehicle occupants and the air- particularly for individuals who have or have
bag system. Do not secure or transport any had asthma or other health issues that af-
objects within the deployment zone of the fect breathing. Exit the vehicle or open the
airbag systems, especially on the steering windows or doors to get access to fresh air.
wheel, on the instrument panel, on the
doors, on the windows, or in the footwell. (i) Tips
— Never put stickers on the airbag system cov- If you are transporting children in the vehicle,
ers or cover them with any objects. read the information and follow the safety
— Only lightweight clothing should be hung precautions > page 76.
from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Do
not use clothes hangers to hang clothing.
Safety systems monitoring
The pockets of the clothing must not con-
tain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged The ka indicator light in the instrument cluster
objects. This could impair the effectiveness monitors the safety systems such as the airbags
of the side curtain airbags. (including the control modules, sensor, and wir-
— You must not use seat or protective covers ing) and the belt tensioners. It turns on when you
that are not specifically approved for use on switch the ignition on and turns off after several
Audi seats with side airbags. Since the side seconds.
airbags deploy from the seat backrest, such
If the indicator light does not turn on when the
covers could impair the protective function
ignition is switched on, does not turn off after
of the side airbags.
several seconds, or turns on or flashes while driv-
— Damage to the original seat covers in the
ing, there may be a malfunction in one of the
side airbag deployment area must always be
safety systems. Drive to an authorized Audi deal-
repaired by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately
thorized Audi Service Facility.
to have the malfunction corrected.
— Airbag system components are installed at
various locations in your vehicle. Incorrect ZA WARNING
work or repairs on the vehicle could damage
Have the malfunction in the safety systems in-
the airbag system components or impair
spected immediately. Otherwise, there is a
their functionality. This may prevent the air-
risk that the systems may not activate during
bags from deploying or cause them to de-
an accident, which increases the risk of seri-
ploy incorrectly in the event of an accident,
ous or fatal injury.
which increases the risk of serious or fatal
72
Description
RAZ-0239
Fig. 68 Airbag overview image (enlarged section: deployed airbags)
The locations of the airbags are labeled with condition of the object that the vehicle hits (hard
“AIRBAG”. The following airbags are installed in or soft), the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc.
your vehicle: The deciding factor for the deployment of the air-
bag system is the deceleration that occurs during
Driver's airbag
an accident. Sensors in the vehicle are designed
Front passenger's airbag
OOOO
to detect the severity of an accident in conjunc-

Front side airbags and rear, if applicable tion with the control module, and to provide a
Head curtain airbag with ejection mitigation targeted and timely deployment of the restraint
Knee airbags system. If the vehicle deceleration that is meas-
ured during an accident is below the specified
Airbags offer the best possible protection in your
reference values in the control module, then the
vehicle during an accident when they are used to-
airbags will not deploy, even though the vehicle
gether with safety belts that are fastened cor-
may be severely damaged from the accident. In
rectly, and when passengers are sitting in the cor-
these cases, the vehicle occupants will be pro-
rect seating position. Airbags are a supplementa-
tected by the safety belts if they are fastened and
ry restraint system and do not replace safety
worn correctly.
belts.
The deployment of the front passenger's airbag
Airbags may deploy during front-impact, side-im-
will depend on the occupancy of the seat
pact, or rollover accidents.
=> page 74.
The deployment area for the airbag system can-
Each deployed airbag is filled with gas. When this
8W1012721BC
not be defined for every situation, since the cir-

occurs, the airbag covers open and the airbags
cumstances surrounding accidents can vary wide-
unfold with great force into the deployment zone >
ly. Factors that play an important role include the
73
within milliseconds. Inflated airbags reduce the for “low risk deployment” for children aged 3 to
movement of passengers wearing safety belts in 6 years old (as defined in the standard).
the direction of the impact and thus help to re-
The advanced airbag system will activate or deac-
duce the risk of injury. They can help to protect
tivate the front passenger's airbag based on the
the head, upper body, and lap, for example. How-
occupancy of the seat. If a front airbag deploys
ever, there is the possibility that airbag deploy-
during an accident, the deployment force will
ment can cause injuries.
adapt to the passenger.
The airbag system only works when the ignition
Components
is turned on.
The advanced airbag system consists of the fol-
If you or other vehicle passengers have physical
lowing components:
limitations that prevent sitting in a correct posi-
tion, modifications to the vehicle may be neces- — Front airbags in the steering wheel and in the
sary. For more information, contact an author- instrument panel on the front passenger's side:
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- these can protect the front passengers during
ty, or call Audi customer support at an accident
1-800-822-2834. — Passenger occupant detection sensor in the
front passenger's seat: this detects if the front
@) Tips passenger's seat is occupied (for example, by a
The side curtain airbags in your vehicle have person or asmall child in a child safety seat)
ejection mitigation functions. This reduces — Seat position sensors on the front seats: these
the risk of being ejected from the vehicle inte- determine the distance between the seat and
rior during an accident, especially in the event the steering wheel or instrument panel
of a vehicle rollover. — Sensors in the front seat belt latch: these de-
tect if the safety belts are fastened
Advanced airbag system — PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ; ON ® indi-
cator light in the headliner:this indicates if the
front passenger's airbag is activated or deacti-
vated
- ka indicator light in the instrument cluster:
this monitors the function of the Advanced Air-
bag System components to ensure they are
functioning correctly
How the components function together

The passenger occupant detection sensor in the
Fig. 69 Headliner: indicator light to display the status of front passenger's seat detects if the front pas-
the front passenger's airbag senger's seat is occupied. The passenger occu-
pant detection sensor measures the electrical ca-
The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has
pacity on the front passenger’s seat. The pas-
been certified to comply with the requirements
senger's airbag is activated or deactivated de-
of the United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety pending on the electrical capacity that is meas-
Standard (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor
ured.
Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applica-
ble at the time your vehicle was manufactured. The passenger's airbag is activated if:
According to these requirements, the front Ad- — The electrical capacity is higher than the
vanced Airbag System on the passenger’s side threshold stored in the control module
has been certified for “suppression” for infants
approximately 12 months old and younger, and
74
— The electrical capacity is the same as or greater — An adult or individual of similar size in the
than the electrical capacity of a typical adult front passenger's seat: the front passenger's
airbag must be activated, therefore
The passenger's airbag is deactivated if:
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ must remain
— The electrical capacity is lower than the thresh- turned on.
old stored in the control module — An individual of smaller size (for example, an
— The electrical capacity is the same as or less adolescent or small adult) in the front pas-
than the electrical capacity of a typical one- senger's seat: the front passenger's airbag
year-old child in a child safety seat that has must be activated, so
been used for certification in accordance with PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ must stay on.
FMVSS 208 — Child in a child safety seat on the front pas-
If the front passenger's airbag is activated, the senger's seat: the front passenger's airbag
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ indicator light must be deactivated, so
will turn on. If the front passenger's airbag is de- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #¥; must stay on.
activated, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; — Front passenger's seat not occupied: the front
indicator light will turn on. passenger's airbag must be deactivated, so
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; must stay on.
The deployment force of the front airbags adapts
based on whether or not the safety belt is used Z\ WARNING
and the distance between the seat and the steer-
— An adult or a person with a small stature
ing wheel/instrument panel. For example, if a
(such as a young person or small adult) seat-
person is too close to the front airbag, the front
ed on the front passenger's seat will not be
airbag will deploy with less force to help reduce
protected by the passenger's airbag in the
the risk of injury.
event of a collision if the passenger's airbag
Meaning of PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3; ON is deactivated. This increases the risk of in-
® indicator light jury and death. Always make sure that
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ remains on
When the ignition is switched on, the system de-
while driving. If
tects whether the front passenger's seat is occu-
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ does not
pied. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; ON @
turn on, make sure the front passenger is
will turn on for several seconds during this proc-
sitting correctly in the seat > page 63 and
ess. Then it will indicate whether the front pas-
that there is nothing covering the front pas-
senger's airbag is activated or deactivated.
senger's seat (such as blankets or pillows).
— PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #%%;: the front If PASSENGER AIR BAG ON ®@ still does
passenger's airbag is deactivated and will not not turn on, the front passenger's seat must
deploy in the event of an accident. not be used. Drive to an authorized Audi
— PASSENGER AIR BAG ON ®:: the front pas- dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
senger's airbag is activated and could deploy in and have the airbag system inspected.
the event of an accident. —Achild ina child safety seat on the front
passenger's seat - especially in a rear-facing
If a change to the occupancy status of the front
passenger's seat is detected child safety seat - can receive a severe im-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #, ON @ will pact if the front passenger's airbag deploys,
flash for several seconds and will then display the which increases the risk of serious or fatal
status of the front passenger's airbag. injury. Always secure child safety seats on
the rear seats. If special circumstances re-
Always make sure the indicator light corresponds
8W1012721BC
quire the use of a child safety seat on the

to the occupancy of the front passenger's seat. front passenger's seat, always make sure
75
that PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; stays You can also obtain useful and current informa-
on while driving. If tion from the following sources:
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #¥; does not U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
turn on, remove the child safety seat and in- tration
stall it again according to the child safety http://www.nhtsa.gov
seat manufacturer instructions. If http://www.safercar.gov
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF &%; still does
not turn on, the front passenger's seat must National SAFE KIDS Campaign
not be used. Drive to an authorized Audi http://www.safekids.org
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility SafetyBeltSafe U.S.A.
and have the airbag system inspected. http://www.carseat.org
— Fluids, electronic devices, or mechanical
Transport Canada Information Centre
damage on the front passenger's seat may
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
cause the front passenger seat occupant de-
tection to malfunction. The system may Audi Customer Experience Center
then incorrectly detect if the front passeng- https://www.audiusa.com/help/contact-us
er's seat is occupied. As a result, it could de- https://www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/models/layer/
ploy the front passenger’s airbag incorrectly contact.html
or fail to deploy it, which increases the risk
of serious or fatal injury. Make sure that no Z\ WARNING
wet objects (such as a wet hand towel) and To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries,
no fluids come into contact with the front children must always be secured in the vehicle
passenger's seat cushion. If the front pas- with a child safety seat that is appropriate for
senger's seat becomes wet, dry it immedi- their body size, weight, and age.
ately. Make sure no electronic devices (such — Children ages 12 and under must be trans-
as a laptop or a retrofitted seat heater) are ported using the appropriate child safety
on the front passenger's seat. Do not trans- seat. Note differences in regulations be-
port any objects on or under the front pas- tween states and countries.
senger's seat.
— Child safety seats secured incorrectly in the
— Seat covers or protective covers may prevent vehicle may cause serious or fatal injuries in
the advanced airbag system from correctly the event of an accident. Always secure the
detecting child safety seats or passengers in child safety seat according to the manufac-
the front passenger's seat. You must not use turer instructions.
seat covers or protective covers on the front
— Children or babies must not under any cir-
passenger's seat that are not specifically ap-
cumstances be held on the lap of the driver
proved for use on Audi seats with an ad- or other passengers while driving.
vanced airbag system.
— Do not secure more than one child in a child
safety seat.
Child safety seats — Never allow a child to sit in a child safety
seat unsupervised.
General information
— Never allow children to ride unsecured in the
When installing and using child safety seats, fol- vehicle or to stand or kneel on the seats
low the information in this Owner's Manual, the while driving. In the event of an accident, a
applicable state and federal regulations, and the child could be propelled through the vehicle.
manufacturer instructions for the child safety This can cause serious or fatal injuries for
seat. the child and passengers.
— If children use an incorrect seating position
while driving, they have a higher risk of
76
injury during a sudden braking maneuver or Facility and have the airbag system in-
accident. This especially applies to children spected.
in the front passenger's seat or children who — If you must use a forward-facing child safety
have their head near the side airbag deploy- seat on the front passenger's seat, move the
ment area, if the airbag system is deployed seat as far back as possible so that it is as
during an accident. This incorrect seating far as possible from the front passenger's
position can cause severe or even fatal inju- airbag. While doing this, make sure the seat
ries. can be adjusted all the way. A child in a child
Make sure there is enough space in front of safety seat on the front passenger's seat can
the child in the child safety seat. If necessa- receive a severe impact if the front passeng-
ry, adjust the angle and position of the seat er's airbag deploys, which increases the risk
in front of the child safety seat. of serious or fatal injury.
The rear side of a forward-facing child safety — Replace the child safety seat after an acci-
seat should be positioned as close as possi- dent because there could be damage that is
ble to the backrest on the vehicle seat. If the not visible.
head restraints make it difficult to install a — Even if a child is not sitting in the child safe-
child safety seat, adjust or remove them if ty seat, the child safety seat must be se-
necessary > page 67. Reinstall the head re- cured. An unsecured child safety seat may
straints immediately once the child safety be thrown through the vehicle interior dur-
seat has been removed. ing sudden braking maneuvers or an acci-
Always make sure that the backrest on the dent.
seat where the child safety seat is installed
is securely locked in place and cannot move (ee aca em Letitia m imate)
forward. Otherwise, the backrest where the
child safety seat is secured could move for- Always secure children in a child safety seat de-
ward in the event of an accident or other signed for the body size, weight, and age of the
emergency situation. child.
NEVER use a rear-facing child safety seat on
You can secure child safety seats in your vehicle
a seat with an ACTIVATED FRONT AIRBAG;
using the lower LATCH anchors or the safety
this could cause DEATH or SERIOUS INJU-
belts. You can also secure child safety seats to
RIES to a CHILD.
the top tether anchor. Depending on the child
— Always secure child safety seats on the safety seat, it may also be necessary to secure it
rear seats. If exceptional circumstances re- to the top tether anchor. In Canada, securing for-
quire the child safety seat to be placed on ward-facing child safety seats to the top tether
the front passenger's seat, then the front anchors is required by law.
passenger's airbag must be deactivated.
Always make sure that Always transport children in the rear seats
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; stays on Accident statistics show that children that are se-
while driving. If cured correctly in the rear seats are safer than in
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; does not front seats. Always transport children in suitable
turn on, remove the child safety seat and child safety seats secured on the rear seats.
install it again according to the child safe-
ty seat manufacturer instructions. If In exceptional circumstances: transporting
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4%; still children in the front passenger's seat
does not turn on, the front passenger's If exceptional circumstances require the child
8W1012721BC
seat must not be used. Drive to an author- safety seat to be placed on the front passenger's
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service seat, then the front passenger's airbag must be
deactivated. Please note the important >
77
information for this > page 74, Advanced airbag the fastening systems or safety belts do not
system. If you must secure a forward-facing child impair those in an adjacent seating position.
safety seat, move the front passenger's seat as — All child safety seats are constructed so that
far back as possible so that it is as far as possible they can be secured using the lap safety belt
from the front passenger's airbag. While doing in the vehicle.
this, make sure the seat can be adjusted all the — Child safety seats with a load leg can only
way. be secured to the outer rear seats and to the
front passenger's seat.
Only switch to a larger child safety seat when
absolutely necessary
Secu child safety seats to the lower
Switch to a larger child safety seat only when ab- LATCH anchors
solutely necessary. Secure your child using a safe-
ty belt without a child safety seat only if all of the
following statements are true:
— The child is large enough to sit upright in the

seat
—The child is able to sit with his or her back rest-
ing completely on the seat backrest
— The child is able to sit with his or her knees
bent over the edge of the seat surface
—The child is able to sit with both of his or her
Fig. 70 Rear bench seat: lower LATCH anchors
feet completely touching the floor in the foot-
well
— The lap portion of the safety belt lies flat and
securely over the hip area and never over the In the United States and Canada, child safety
stomach seats can be secured without safety belts using
—The shoulder portion of the safety belt lies flat the LATCH system. LATCH stands for Lower An-
and securely over the center of the shoulder chors and Tethers for Children. In Canada, similar
and the chest, and never under the arm, behind systems are called UCRA, LUAS, or UAS.
the back, or over the neck or face. The lower LATCH anchors in your vehicle are lo-
—The child is able to maintain this seating posi- cated on the outer seats of the rear bench seat
tion throughout the entire trip between the seat surface and the backrest. These
Read and follow the important information and seating locations each have two lower LATCH an-
warnings regarding the correct use of safety belts chors that can be used to secure a LATCH child
=> page 68. safety seat. Marking points with a > fig. 70 sym-
bol are located on the covers for the lower LATCH
@) Tips anchors. You can locate the LATCH anchors using
the marking points.
— Child safety seats can also be secured to
seats with side airbags. In the event of an > Activate the child safety lock > page 44.
accident, children can also be protected by > Remove the cover* from both lower LATCH an-
the side airbags if the child is correctly se- chors.
cured in a suitable child safety seat that is > If you secure a child safety seat to the rear seat,
attached correctly. secure any unused safety belts that are within
— The lower LATCH anchors as well as the reach of the child > A\ in Securing child safety
safety belt may be required to correctly in- seats with a safety belt on page 79.
stall some child safety seats. Using both at > Secure the child safety seat according to the
the same time is permitted, provided that child safety seat manufacturer instructions. >
78
> Pull on the child safety seat to check if both > If the child safety seat is secured on the front
sides are engaged correctly in the LATCH an- passenger's seat, adjust the front passenger's
chors. seat backrest until it rests flat against the child
> If possible, also secure the child safety seat to safety seat. Also make sure that the upper safe-
the respective top tether anchor in the vehicle ty belt fixture is behind the child safety seat.
=> page 80. > If you secure a child safety seat on the rear
seat, also secure it to the correct top tether an-
Z\ WARNING chor if possible > page 80.
The LATCH anchors in the vehicle are only de- Activating the belt retractor lock
signed for child safety seats with the LATCH
If you secure a child safety seat using the vehicle
system. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
safety belt, you must activate the belt retractor
injury, never secure other child restraint sys-
lock. Follow the child safety seat manufacturer
tems, belts, or objects to the anchors.
instructions.
G) Tips The belt retractor lock prevents the safety belt

The LATCH anchors are designed for a total from becoming loose while driving, which could
weight (child and child safety seat combined) result in the child safety seat no longer being ad-
up to 65 lbs (29 kg). If the total weight is equately secured.
greater than this, the child safety seat must > Secure the child safety seat according to the
be secured with the vehicle safety belt. child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
While doing so, pull out the safety belt. Insert
Tae Ma CRNA LR LCLa the safety belt into the belt latch that belongs
th to that seat until it audibly locks.
> Pull the upper belt out completely and then al-
Observe the safety precautions > page 76. The
low it to retract. You will hear a clicking sound
front passenger’s seat is a dangerous location for
while the belt is retracting. It will not be possi-
a child, even with an advanced airbag system. If
ble to pull the safety belt out any farther.
exceptional circumstances require the child safe-
> Push the child safety seat into the seat and al-
ty seat to be placed on the front passenger's
low the belt to retract more.
seat, then the front passenger's airbag must be
> Make sure that the child safety seat cannot
deactivated. Please note the important informa-
move more than 1 inch (2.5 cm).
tion for this > page 77, Correct positioning for
children and > page 74, Advanced airbag sys- Deactivating the belt retractor lock
tem.
> Unbuckle the safety belt from the belt latch.
Securing child safety seats > Remove the child safety seat according to the
manufacturer instructions.
> Activate the child safety lock > page 44.
> Allow the safety belt to retract completely. The
> If you secure a child safety seat to the rear seat,
belt retractor lock is deactivated.
secure any unused safety belts that are within
reach of the child > A\, > page 81.
> If you secure a child safety seat to the front
ZA WARNING
passenger's seat, adjust the front passenger's — A safety belt that is not locked by the belt
seat to the highest position. retractor lock or a locking device cannot se-
> Secure the child safety seat according to the cure a child safety seat while driving or in
child safety seat manufacturer instructions. the event of an accident, which increases the
risk of fatal injury. Always make sure the >
8W1012721BC
> If necessary, activate the belt retractor lock

=>page 79.
79
belt retractor lock on the safety belt is acti-
RAZ-0093
vated if the child safety seat manufacturer
instructions require it.
— Due to the risk of fatal injury, never place a
rear-facing child safety seat on the front
passenger's seat when the front passenger's
airbag is switched on.
— For the child safety seat to offer the maxi-
mum protection, it is especially important
to route the vehicle safety belt correctly. Al-
ways follow the instructions from the child
safety seat manufacturer for routing the
safety belt correctly. Incorrectly fastened
safety belts can cause injuries, even during
minor accidents.
lly securing a child safety seat to

the top tether a
Fig. 72 Version @ rear shelf/ Version @ rear backrest: se-

RAZ-0325
curing the upper strap on the top tether anchor
There is a top tether anchor behind every seat in

the rear bench seat to additionally secure a child
safety seat with an upper belt.
> Move the head restraint behind the child safety

seat upward.
> Applies to: version 1: Fold the cover for the top
tether anchor upward.
> Guide the upper belt on the child safety seat
under the head restraint or along both sides of
it and toward the rear (depending on the child
safety seat model).
> Fasten the belt to the top tether anchor
=> fig. 72. While doing this, make sure the belt
is not twisted and is not running over any sharp
edges.
Fig. 71 Version @ rear shelf/ Version @) rear backrest: top
tether anchors for securing a child safety seat with an up- > Secure the child safety seat according to the
per strap child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
> Pull the belt tightly so that the child safety seat
rests at the top of the seat backrest.
> If necessary, move the head restraint behind
the child safety seat downward.
80
fatal injury. Always secure unused safety belts

so that they are not within reach of children in
The top tether anchors in the vehicle are only
child safety seats.
designed for child safety seats equipped with
an upper strap. To reduce the risk of serious or
fatal injury, never secure other child restraint
systems, belts, or objects to the anchors.
RONG Ot
NG = GSS
7s.
Fig. 73 Rear bench seat: securing unused safety belts
If a child safety seat is used on the rear bench

seat, the child must not be able to reach any
safety belts that are not being used. Secure safe-
ty belts that are within reach of the child.
> If you secure a child safety seat to the LATCH

anchors, fasten the safety belt on the seat
where the child safety seat is installed using
the seat's safety belt latch.
> If you secure a child safety seat to one of the
outer seats, fasten the safety belt for the cen-
ter seat in its latch.
> Activate the belt retractor lock on the fastened
safety belts. To do this, pull the upper belt out
completely and then allow it to retract. You will
hear a clicking sound while the belt is retract-
ing. It will not be possible to pull the safety
belt out any farther.
> Make sure the fastened safety belt does not
block access to the LATCH anchors. Otherwise,
it may not be possible to secure the child safety
seat to the LATCH anchors correctly.
8W1012721BC
A child ina child safety seat could play with

the unused safety belts and then become en-
tangled in them, which increases the risk of
81
Storage and convenience
Storage and convenience — Disconnect the connectors from the power

sources carefully to reduce the risk of dam-
Power sources aging them.
When the ignition is switched on, you may be

G) Tips
able to use multiple power sources for external
devices, depending on the vehicle equipment. Do not connect any other devices to the sock-
ets when using the compressor* provided by
12 volt sockets the factory > page 261. The power consump-
You can connect electrical accessories to the 12 tion in the sockets may be temporarily ex-
volt sockets. The power usage from the sockets ceeded when using the compressor*.
must not exceed a total of 120 watts. Do not
connect multiple devices to the sockets in the ve- Cup holders
hicle at the same time. Applies to: vehicles with cup holders
5
The 12 volt sockets are labeled with the 12V
e
symbol. They are located in the front center con- =z
8
sole, in the rear* and on the side trim panel in the
luggage compartment”*.
USB ports
Applies to: vehicles with USB port
You can charge mobile devices using the USB

ports. The USB ports are labeled with the «> or
[4 symbol or CHARGE ONLY. Fig. 74 Rear center armrest*: cup holders
ZA\ WARNING Depending on vehicle equipment, your vehicle

— To reduce the risk of fatal injury, store all may have cup holders in the front center console
connected devices securely when driving so and in the rear center armrest.
that they do not move around inside the ve-
Cup holders in the rear center armrest*
hicle when braking or in the event of an acci-
dent. > Fold the center armrest* downward.
— Incorrect usage can lead to serious injuries > To open the cup holders, pull the top cover on
or burns. To reduce the risk of injuries, never the cup holders forward > fig. 74.
leave children unattended in the vehicle > To close the cup holder, fold the cover back un-
with the vehicle key. til it clicks into place.
@) Note Z\ WARNING
— Read the operating manuals for the con- — Do not put any hot beverages in the cup
nected devices. holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot bev-
—To reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle erages could spill, which increases the risk
electrical system, never attempt to charge of injury.
the vehicle battery by connecting accesso- — Do not use any breakable beverage contain-
ries that provide power to the power sour- ers (for example, made out of glass or por-
ces. celain). You could be injured by them in the
— Do not connect any device whose network event of an accident. >
class (voltage) does not match the network
class designed for the socket.
82
@) Note ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of

an accident. Store objects securely while
Beverage containers in the cup holders should
driving.
always have a lid. Otherwise, the liquid inside
— Only use the storage compartments in the
could spill and cause damage to vehicle
door trim panels to store small objects that
equipment.
will not stick out of the compartment and
impair the function of the side airbags.
Storage and — Due to strength reasons, only secure objects
compartments up to 11 lbs (5 kg) with the straps* in the
luggage compartment. Heavier objects are
Storage area behind the rear head
not adequately secured. There is risk of per-
restraints
Applies to: vehicles with storage area behind the rear head re-
sonal injury.
straints — Only lightweight clothing should be hung
from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Do
The storage area can be used to carry light pieces
not use clothes hangers to hang clothing.
of clothing.
The pockets of the clothing must not con-
Z\ WARNING tain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged

objects. This could impair the effectiveness
The storage compartment must not be used of the side curtain airbags.
to transport heavy objects, hard objects, or — Make sure your view toward the rear is not
animals. Such objects endanger vehicle occu- blocked, for example by hanging clothing or
pants and increase the risk of injury during objects in the vehicle.
sudden driving or braking maneuvers or in an
accident.
Luggage compartment
@) Note General information
Make sure that the heating grid strips for the
All pieces of luggage or objects must be securely
rear window defogger are not damaged by
fastened in the luggage compartment. Note the
abrasive objects.
following to maintain good vehicle handling:
@ Tips > Distribute the load evenly in the luggage com-
To ensure the ventilation functions correctly, partment.
the ventilation slots between the rear window > Stow heavy luggage as far forward in the lug-
and the storage area must not be covered. gage compartment as possible.
> Use non-elastic cords attached to the tie-downs
to secure objects.
Additional storage options
Depending on vehicle equipment, there are a va- Z\ WARNING

riety of storage areas, compartments, and retain- — Applies to: vehicles with luggage compart-
ers, such as the glove compartment, for safely ment cover: The luggage compartment cov-
storing and securing objects. er is not a surface for storing objects. Ob-
jects placed on the cover increase the risk of
Z\ WARNING injury to all vehicle occupants during sudden
—To reduce the risk of injury, make sure all driving or braking maneuvers or in the event
storage compartments are always closed of an accident. >
8W1012721BC
while driving.
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve-
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak-
83
— Applies to: vehicles with luggage compart- ing pinched, pay attention and check when
ment cover: The luggage compartment cov- folding backrests forward.
er must always be securely fastened when in — The backrest must be securely latched so
use to reduce the risk of an accident. objects cannot slide forward out of the lug-
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve- gage compartment during sudden braking.
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- — The backrest must be latched securely to en-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of sure that the safety belt is protecting the
an accident. Always stow objects securely in center seating position.
the luggage compartment and secure them — Always pull forward on the backrest to make
at the tie-downs. Use straps suitable for sure it is check if it is correctly locked in
heavy objects. place.
— If pieces of luggage or objects are secured
to the tie-downs with unsuitable or dam- () Note
aged straps, this can increase the risk of in-
—To reduce the risk of damage, move the rear
jury during braking maneuvers or accidents.
head restraints down > page 67 before fold-
— When transporting heavy objects, the vehi- ing the rear backrests forward.
cle characteristics will change due to the
— When folding the backrest forward, make
shift in the center of gravity, which increases
sure the outer safety belts are in the belt
the risk of an accident. You may need to
guide recess so that they do not get pinched
adapt your driving style and speed to the in the backrest lock and damaged. Other ob-
current conditions. jects should be removed from the rear
— The cargo net* is only strong enough to se- bench seat to protect the backrest from
cure light objects. Heavy objects are not ade- damage.
quately secured. Attempting to secure heavy — To reduce the risk of damaging the front
objects increases the risk of injury.
seats, make sure there is enough space be-
— Never exceed the permitted axle and load
tween the front seat and the rear seat
and vehicle weight > page 287. equipment when folding the center backrest
— Never secure a child safety seat to the tie- forward.
downs. — If you move the front seat back when the
— Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe- rear seat backrest is folded forward, you
cially if the luggage compartment lid is could damage the head restraints on the
open. Children could enter the luggage com- rear seat.
partment and close the luggage compart- — Make sure that the heating grid strips for
ment lid from the inside. This creates the the rear window defogger are not damaged
risk of fatal injury, since the children would by abrasive objects.
be locked in and may not be able to escape
— Applies to: vehicles with manual luggage
by themselves.
compartment cover: Let the luggage com-
— Do not allow children to play in or on the ve- partment cover roll up slowly to reduce the
hicle. Close and lock the luggage compart- risk of damage.
ment lid as well as all other doors when you — Applies to: vehicles with partition net: Let
leave the vehicle.
the partition net roll up slowly to reduce the
— Never transport passengers in the luggage risk of damage.
compartment. Every passenger must be cor-
rectly secured with the safety belts in the (i) Tips
vehicle > page 68.
— The tire pressure must be adapted to the
— Be careful when releasing the backrest and
load > page 245.
folding it forward. To reduce the risk of be-
— You can purchase straps at specialty stores.
84
Power luggage compartment cover ieee eb 4d im aM lee Coe R cela)

Applies to: vehicles with power luggage compartment cover inside the passenger compartment
Applies to: vehicles with folding backrests
lock*
Fig. 76 Luggage compartment: removing the luggage

compartment cover
Fig. 78 Center backrest: folding the center backrest for-
Observe the safety precautions > page 83. ward
If you open the luggage compartment lid, the Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be
power luggage compartment cover will move in- possible to fold the backrests forward separately
to position @ or Q). or together.
> To attach the luggage compartment cover, pull Observe the safety precautions > page 83.
the cover out. Guide the cover past position @
and install it at position @). Folding the outer rear backrests forward and
> To remove the luggage compartment cover, de- backward
tach the cover and allow it to roll up. > Pull the release lever (@) in the direction of the
> Pull the lever (@) firmly in the direction of the arrow and fold the backrest forward. Let the
arrow and remove the cover upward. backrest latch into the lowest position.
> To install the luggage compartment cover, > Fold the backrest back up again until it locks in-
place the cover in the side trim panel mount on to place and the red marking (@) is no longer
the left side. visible.
>» Press the cover down into the right mount until
it locks into place.
Folding the center rear backrest forward and
backward
> Pull on the upper release lever (@) and fold the
backrest forward (2).
>» Fold the backrest backward until it locks into
8W1012721BC
place. >
ss
Applies to: vehicles with lockable backrests in the rear anda Observe the safety precautions > page 83.
lockable pass-through.
To prevent access to the luggage compartment > To release the pass-through, turn the lock on
from the vehicle interior, the backrest can be the backrest > fig. 80.
locked with the mechanical key © when it is > Fold the center backrest forward > page 85.
latched in place and the pass-through can be
locked = page 86. You can only enlarge the lug- @ Tips
gage compartment if the backrest is not locked. The pass-through can be locked and unlocked
from within the luggage compartment. This
prevents any access to the luggage compart-
ment from the vehicle interior.
Applies to: vehicles with release lever in the luggage compart-
ment
ad
Applies to: vehicles with partition net
BEW-0268|
B8W-0121
Fig. 79 Luggage compartment: release lever
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be Fig. 81 Behind the backrest: hanging the partition net
possible to fold the backrests forward separately
B8W-0122
or together.
> Pull the release lever > fig. 79 in the direction

of the arrow to fold the backrest forward.
> To set up the backrest again, fold it back until it
locks or the red marking (8) > page 85, fig. 77
is no longer visible.
Fig. 82 Behind the backrest: removing the partition net
Applies to: vehicles with pass-through The partition net prevents objects from sliding
from the luggage compartment into the passen-
ger compartment.
Setting up/storing the partition net

> To set up the partition net, pull it upward.
> Attach the crossbrace to the mounting eyelets
above the backrest > fig. 81.
> To store the partition net, remove the cross-
Fig. 80 Center backrest: pass-through release member from the mounting eyes and let the
partition net roll up slowly.
86
Removing/installing the partition net Setting up/storing the partition net

> To install the partition net, slide it into the left > To set up the partition net, pull it upward and
and right mounts on the side trim panel. out and hook it into the mounting eyelets
> Press the partition net down diagonally at the above the front seats > fig. 84.
left and right until it locks into place and the > To store the partition net, remove it from the
red markings on the buttons are no longer visi- mounting eyes and let it roll up slowly.
ble.
> To remove the partition net, press the left and
right buttons on the net and Lift it upward to re-
You must remove the partition net before
move it > fig. 82.
folding the backrest back into the upright po-
sition.
Partition net (backrests folded forward)
Applies to: vehicles with partition net
downs and luggage compartme
2g
=
=a
a
Fig. 83 Folded backrest: installing the partition net

B8W-0124
Fig. 84 Folded backrest: setting up the partition net : 1 dua da ha ees, WS

Fig. 86 Luggage compartment: luggage compartment net*
stretched out
The partition net prevents objects from sliding
from the luggage compartment into the passen- Observe the safety precautions > page 83.
ger compartment.
Tie-downs
There are tie-downs (d) in the luggage compart-
Removing/installing the partition net ment to secure pieces of luggage and objects.
> To install the partition net, fold the backrest > Use the tie-downs to secure the cargo.
forward .> page 85
>» Place the partition net on the recesses in the re- Cargo net
taining rails @ and slide it all the way to the Applies to: vehicles with cargo net
8W1012721BC
left @. Use the cargo net (2)

to secure lighter objects in
> To remove the partition net, first slide it to the the luggage compartment
right and then lift it out of the retaining rails.
87
> Fold the clip for the tie-downs upward. Roof rack
> Attach the hooks for the cargo net to the tie-
downs. General information
Applies to: vehicles with roof rack mount
a8
Reversible cargo floor
Nn
Applies to: vehicles with reversible cargo floor <q|
WW S
8
g
=a
a
Applies to: sedan

B8W-0128 Fig. 89 Roof: mounting points
Applies to: allroad

Fig. 90 Roof rail: mounting points
Fig. 88 Luggage compartment: cargo area floor reversed
If luggage or cargo is to be carried on the roof,
You can transport dirty and damp objects on the you must observe the following:
reversible cargo area floor.
— These roof racks are the basis for a complete
Reversing the cargo floor roof rack system. Only roof racks that are suita-
ble for your vehicle may be used. Audi recom-
> Lift up the cargo floor using the handle
mends roof racks and attachments from the
> fig. 87.
Audi Genuine Accessories program.
> Flip the cargo floor over and install it > fig. 88.
— Make sure the roof rack is mounted on the vehi-
cle only at the specified locations.
— Note the permitted axle load, permitted total
weight, and permitted roof load of your vehicle
=> page 287. The roof load is the total of the
weight of the roof rack, the attachments and
the cargo you are carrying. However, you must
also note the permitted load of the carrier sys-
tem being used.
Z\ WARNING
— Follow the installation instructions provided
with the roof rack system. If you do not
88
secure the roof rack system and objects on

the roof correctly, they could come loose
from the vehicle and cause an accident.
— The risk of an accident increases when using
a roof rack system, because it changes the
driving characteristics by shifting the center
of gravity and/or the increasing the surface
area exposed to wind. You may need to
adapt your driving style and speed to the
current conditions.
Make sure that the open luggage compart-

ment lid and the tilting/sliding sunroof* or
panoramic glass roof* do not come into con-
tact with objects on the roof.
Energy usage will increase because of the in-

creased wind resistance. Remove the roof rack
when you are no longer using it.
8W1012721BC
89
Warm and cold
Warm and cold using the seat heating* function. To reduce

the risk of injury, these individuals should
Climate control system not use seat heating”.
C) Note
Your vehicle has a deluxe automatic climate con-
To reduce the risk of damage to the seat heat-
trol system with 3 zones where the temperature,
ing* elements, do not kneel on the seats or
air distribution, and air supply can be set sepa-
place heavy pressure on one area of the seat.
rately on the left front side, the right front side,
and in the rear. @) For the sake of the environment
The climate control system warms, cools, dehu- Energy can be saved by switching off the A/C
midifies, and filters the air in the vehicle interior. mode.
It is the most effective when the windows and
panoramic glass roof* are closed. If there is a Gi) Tips
build-up of heat inside the vehicle, ventilation
—To prevent interference with the heating or
can help to speed up the cooling process. cooling output and to prevent the windows
The automatic climate control system automati- from fogging over, the air intake in front of
cally maintains a temperature once it has been the windshield must be free of ice, snow,
set. In all heating mode functions except defrost, and leaves.
the blower only switches to a higher speed once — Condensation from the cooling system can
the coolant has reached a certain temperature. drip and form a puddle of water under the
vehicle. This is normal and does not mean
Pollutant filter there is a leak.
The pollutant filter removes pollutants such as — The energy management system may tem-
dust and pollen from the air. porarily switch off certain functions, such as
the seat heating” or rear window defogger.
ZX WARNING These systems are available again as soon as
— You should not use the recirculation mode the energy supply has been restored.
for an extended period of time, because no — If the front passenger's seat heating* is
fresh air is drawn in and the windows can turned on, it will not turn on again automat-
fog when cooling mode is switched off. This ically if more than 10 minutes have passed
increases the risk of an accident. between switching the ignition off and on
— Individuals with reduced sensitivity to pain again.
or temperature could develop burns when
90
Warm and cold
3-zone deluxe automatic climate control
Applies to: vehicles with 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control system
B8W-0137
Fig. 91 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control system: cockpit controls
B8W-0138
Fig. 92 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control system: rear controls
Press the knobs, buttons or rocker switches to Observe the safety precautions > A\ in Descrip-
turn the functions on or off. When the function is tion on page 90.
switched on, the LED in the respective button or
OFF] Climate control system
knob turns on.
The [OFF] button switches the climate control
Some rocker switches can be assigned with multi-
system on or off. It also switches on when you
ple functions. The various functions can be acti-
press another button or a knob. Airflow from out-
vated by pressing on the switch multiple times.
side is blocked when the climate control system
On right-hand drive vehicles*, the functions of
is switched off.
the rocker switches @) and ©) are reversed.
The driver and front passenger settings can be A/C / A/C MAX* Cooling mode
8W1012721BC
adjusted separately. You can adjust the settings You can switch the respective cooling mode on
for the rear of the vehicle using the controls in and off with the rocker switch @).
the rear > fig. 92.
91
Warm and cold
The cooling mode only functions with the blower sure a continuous exchange of air inside the vehi-
turned on. The air is not cooled and humidity is cle. To have the blower regulated automatically,
not reduced when cooling mode is switched off. press one of the knobs (@).
This can cause fog on the windows. The cooling
Air distribution
mode switches off automatically at low outside
temperatures. You can use the rocker switches (2) to adjust the
vents where the air will flow out of. Press the
If you activate A/C ON, the cooling mode will be
rocker switches (2) repeatedly until the desired
automatically regulated. A/C OFF switches cool-
air distribution setting is displayed in the climate
ing mode off.
control system controls. To have the air distribu-
If you activate A/C MAX*, the cooling mode will tion regulated automatically, press one of the
operate with maximum output. To reduce unnec- knobs @).
essary energy usage, only use this function brief-
ly. SYNC Synchronization
Use the rocker switch (5) to select the function.
<= Recirculation mode
When synchronization is switched on, the set-
In recirculation mode, the air inside the vehicle is tings for the driver's side are applied to the front
circulated and filtered. This prevents the unfil- passenger's side and the rear (except for seat
tered air outside the vehicle from entering the heating/ventilation*). If the settings on the front
vehicle interior > A\ in Description on page 90. passenger's side or in the rear are changed, the
synchronization will automatically switch off and
Pressing the <> button switches recirculation
3-ZONE will appear in the display.
mode on or off manually. You can also switch the
recirculation mode off by pressing the knob @ or SET REAR Function
the §% button.
Use the rocker switch G) to select the function.
AUTO Automatic mode When the function is switched on, you can adjust
all settings for the rear using the climate control
Automatic mode maintains a constant tempera-
system controls in the cockpit. The rear climate
ture inside the vehicle. Air temperature, airflow
control system controls cannot be operated at
and air distribution are controlled automatically.
the same time. This function switches off auto-
You can switch automatic mode on or off by
matically after a certain period of time or after
pressing the knob @).
leaving the menu.
Temperature
a Seat heating*
You can adjust the temperature between 60°F
The seat heating temperature can be set at mul-
(+16°C) and 84°F (+28°C) by turning the knob
tiple levels. Press the w button once to switch on
©. If outside of this range, LO or HI will appear
the highest level. Press the button again to de-
in the climate control system display. In both set-
crease the temperature one level at a time. The
tings, the climate control runs constantly at the
seat heating is off when all of the LEDs are off.
maximum cooling or heating level. The tempera-
ture is not regulated. #4 Seat ventilation*
The temperature can be adjusted in the rear us- The seat ventilation intensity can be set to multi-
ing the rear controls > fig. 92. ple levels. Press the £J button once to switch on
the highest level. Press the £4 button again to
$= Blower
decrease the intensity one level at a time. The
You can adjust the volume of air generated by the seat ventilation is off when all of the LEDs are off. >
blower to your preference using the rocker switch
@. The blower should always run at a low setting
to prevent the windows from fogging and to en-
92
Warm and cold
& Defrosting Auto recirculation

The windshield and side windows are defrosted When switched on, automatic recirculation con-
or cleared of condensation as quickly as possible. trols the recirculation mode automatically. You
Align the outer air vents with the side windows. must press the && button if fog forms on the win-
The maximum amount of air flows mainly from dows.
the vents below the windshield. Recirculation
mode switches off. The temperature should be Steering wheel heating
set at 72 °F (+22 °C) or higher. The temperature
is controlled automatically. Sica Lie mola
Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating
You can switch the defroster on or off using the
X& button. You can switch the function off by > Press the @ button on the multifunction steer-
pressing a knob (4). ing wheel to switch the steering wheel heating
on and off.
@ Rear window defogger
The rear window defogger only operates when
the engine is running. It switches off automati- Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating
cally after 10 to 20 minutes, depending on the
@ Steering wheel heating: on / Steering wheel
outside temperature.
heating: off
To prevent the rear window defogger from
This message appears if you switched the steer-
switching off automatically, press and hold the
ing wheel heating on or off by pressing the but-
® button for more than three seconds. This is
ton on the multifunction steering wheel.
stored until the ignition is switched off.
Steering wheel heating: malfunction! See own-
Vents
er's manual
You can open or close the center and rear vents in
If this message appears, there is a malfunction.
the cockpit and the vents in the rear center con-
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
sole using the ridged thumbwheels. The levers
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
adjust the direction of the airflow from the vents.
malfunction repaired.
Residual heat
You can activate the residual heat function when Fluids in the A/C system
the ignition is switched off by pressing the knob Refrigerant in the A/C system
@ (left side). The residual heat from the coolant
is used to heat the vehicle interior. The residual The sticker in the engine compartment provides
heat function switches off automatically after information about the type and amount of refrig-
about 15 minutes. erant used in the vehicle’s A/C system. The stick-
er is located in the front section of the engine
compartment or at the front or back of the hood.
Additional settings
Applies to: vehicles with 3-zone deluxe automatic climate Symbol Meaning
control system
A
Warning: the A/C system must only
You can adjust additional settings. be serviced by qualified technicians.
ss
Refrigerant type
HICLE > Air conditioning.
at
8W1012721BC
Lubricant type >
93
Warm and cold
Symbol | Meaning
Refer to the service information
(only available for authorized Audi
dealers or authorized Audi Service
Facilities)
e The A/C system must only be serv-

Ri} iced by qualified technicians.
& Flammable refrigerant
Make sure all components are dis-

posed of correctly and never install
q components in the vehicle that have
been removed from old vehicles or
taken from recycling.
Lubricant in the A/C system

The sticker in the engine compartment provides
information about the type and amount of refrig-
erant oil used in the vehicle’s A/C system. For the
refrigerant oil quantity, refer to the Technical Da-
ta > page 287.
ZX WARNING
To ensure secure and safe operation, the A/C
system must only be serviced by qualified
technicians and certified technicians (SAE
standard J2845).
@ Tips
— Never repair the A/C system evaporator with
components from old vehicles or from recy-
cling.
— New replacement evaporators for portable
A/C systems must be certified and labeled
as such, so that they comply with the SAE
standard J2842 HFO-1234yf and R744.
94
Driving
Driving Switching on and off

If you would like to switch the ignition on or off
Starting the vehicle without starting the engine, follow these steps:
(eta > Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button without
pressing the brake pedal.
Switching the ignition off automatically

To prevent the vehicle battery from draining, the
ignition and possibly the exterior lighting may
switch off automatically.
Requirements:
— The Start/Stop system must have stopped the
engine.
— You must have left the vehicle for longer than
Fig. 93 Center console: starting the engine
30 seconds.
— The ignition must be switched on.
Requirement: the key must be in the vehicle.
Among other indicators, the system detects that
Starting the engine
you have left the vehicle based on the following
> Press and hold the brake pedal. factors:
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button. The
— The driver's door has been opened.
engine will start.
— The driver's safety belt has been unbuckled.
Equipment that uses a lot of electricity is switch- — The brake pedal is not being pressed.
ed off temporarily when you start the engine. If
The ignition will also be switched off after 30 mi-
the engine does not start immediately, the start-
nutes or if you lock the vehicle from the outside.
ing procedure stops automatically after a short
time. If this is the case, repeat the starting pro-
cedure after approximately 30 seconds.
Z\ WARNING
—To reduce the risk of asphyxiation, never al-
Stopping the engine low the engine to run in confined spaces.
> Bring the vehicle to a full stop. — Never turn off the engine before the vehicle
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button. The has come to a complete stop. Switching it
engine will switch off. off before the vehicle has stopped may im-
pair the function of the brake booster and
Applies to: vehicles with steering lock: The steer-
power steering. You would then need to use
ing is locked when you turn off the engine and more force to steer and brake the vehicle.
open the driver's door. The steering lock helps
The fact that you cannot steer and brake as
prevent vehicle theft. “P” must be engaged on usual may increase the risk of accidents and
vehicles with an automatic transmission. serious injuries.
Stopping the engine in an emergency — Secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-
iting the vehicle > page 96.
If necessary in an emergency, the engine can also
be stopped while driving using the emergency off
CG) Note
function*.
— Avoid high engine speed, full throttle, and
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button twice in
8W1012721BC
heavy engine load if the engine has not

a row or press and hold it one time. reached operating temperature yet. You
could damage the engine.
95
Driving
— If the engine has been under heavy load for Service Facility to have the malfunction correct-
an extended period of time, heat builds up ed.
in the engine compartment after the engine
is switched off and there is a risk of damag- When driving
ing the engine. For this reason, let the en-
gine run at idle for approximately two mi- Starting to drive, stopping, and parking
nutes before shutting it off.
Starting from a stop
G) Tips > Press and hold the brake pedal.

> Start the engine.
— Brief noises are normal when starting and
> Select a gear.
stopping the vehicle and are no cause for
> Release the parking brake.
concern.
> Release the brake pedal. The vehicle may roll.
— For up to 10 minutes after stopping the en-
> Press the accelerator pedal to accelerate.
gine, the radiator fan may turn on again au-
tomatically or it may continue to run, even if Securing the vehicle against rolling
the ignition is switched off.
Secure your vehicle to prevent it from rolling be-
— It may not be possible to start the vehicle in
fore exiting the vehicle.
extremely low temperatures.
— Power will be fully available once the engine > Set the parking brake.
is at operating temperature. > Select the “P” selector lever position.
> If parking on a steep road, turn the steering
Messages wheel so that your vehicle will roll against the

curb in case it should start to move.
= Engine start system: malfunction! Please
If one of these measures is not possible, for ex-
contact Service
ample because there is no vehicle power, you
There is a malfunction in the engine start system. must secure your vehicle against rolling using ad-
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer ditional measures.
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the > Only park the vehicle on a level surface.
malfunction repaired. > Use suitable objects to block the front and rear
wheels.
B Remote control key: key not detected. Is the
key still in the vehicle? Set the parking brake before selecting the “P” se-
lector lever position. This prevents too much
The vehicle key was removed from the vehicle
stress from being placed on the locking mecha-
while the engine is running. If the vehicle key is
nism when parking on a steep surface.
no longer in the vehicle, you cannot switch the ig-
nition on or start the engine once you stop it. You
also cannot lock the vehicle from the outside. ZA WARNING
— Always set the parking brake when leaving
Remote control key: hold back of key
your vehicle, even if for a short period of
against the designated area. See owner's man-
time. If the parking brake is not set, the ve-
ual
hicle could roll away, increasing the risk of
The battery in the vehicle key may be drained or an accident.
there may be a malfunction. To start the vehicle, — Do not leave your vehicle unattended while
you must also hold the vehicle key against the lo- the engine is running, because this increases
cation shown ?) > page 95, fig. 93. the risk of an accident.
If the malfunction remains, drive immediately to
— If the parking brake is set, it can release au-
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
tomatically when the accelerator pedal is
pressed. To reduce the risk of an accident, >
96
Driving
do not inadvertently press the accelerator — The hill hold assist cannot hold the vehicle
pedal and always shift into “P” when the ve- on inclines in every scenario (for example,
hicle is stopped. on slippery or icy ground).
— If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition
off and take the key with you. This is espe- Gears and driving programs
cially important when leaving persons or an-
imals in the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle
RAZ-0410:
R (y—
could start unintentionally, the parking
brake could release, or electronic equipment
could activate, which increases the risk of an (2—*
accident. N
i
— No persons or animals should be left in a
locked vehicle. Locked doors make it more
difficult for emergency workers to enter the D/S
vehicle, which puts lives at risk. NEI
~~
— If you do not begin driving immediately af- Fig. 94 Center console: selector lever
ter releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle
may begin to roll backward. Press the brake The automatic transmission shifts automatically
pedal or set the parking brake immediately. depending on the selected gear and the current
driving style. When driving with a moderate driv-
@) Note ing style, upshifting early and downshifting late
will help to improve fuel economy. When driving
If you have to stop on an incline, always press
with a sporty driving style, the transmission per-
the brake pedal to hold the vehicle in place to
mits higher RPMs.
reduce the risk of the vehicle rolling back-
ward. Do not try to hold the vehicle in place The gears are displayed next to the selector lever.
by pressing and holding the accelerator pedal.
— P (Park)
The transmission can overheat, which increas-
—R (Reverse): driving in reverse
es the risk of damage.
—N (Neutral): idle
—D (Drive)
Hill hold assist
Selecting a gear
If you take your foot off of the brake pedal when
driving on hills, the braking force will be held for Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
several seconds. At that time, you can start driv- — Bring the vehicle to a full stop and press the
ing without the vehicle rolling backward. brake pedal.
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed, — Press the release button () on the selector lev-
the engine must be on, and the vehicle must be er.
traveling uphill. —To select the nearest gear, move the selector
lever forward or back until you feel the first
> To activate hill hold assist, press and hold the pressure point.
brake pedal for several seconds while the vehi-
—To skip a gear (for example, move from “D” to
cle is stationary. “R”), move the selector lever past the pressure
point in the desired direction.
ZA WARNING —The label next to the selector lever for the se-
— If you do not begin driving immediately af- lected gear will light up.
8W1012721BC
ter releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle

may begin to roll backward. Press the brake
pedal or set the parking brake immediately.
97
Driving
“N” (Neutral) gear To switch between the current driving program

In the “N” gear, power is not transmitted to the and “S”, push the selector lever toward the rear.
driving wheels. Use the “N” gear in a car wash
(with conveyor belts), for example.
ZA WARNING
— Before you start driving, check if the label
If you unintentionally select “N” while driving
for the desired selector lever position next
(faster than 1 mph (2 km/h)), you can also shift
to the selector lever is lit up.
back to “D” without pressing the brake pedal.
— Secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-
For safety reasons, the vehicle cannot be locked iting the vehicle > page 96.
when the transmission is in the "N” gear. — Power is still transmitted to the wheels
when the engine is running at idle. To pre-
“Pp” (Park) gear
vent the vehicle from “creeping”, you must
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. keep your foot on the brake in all selector
lever positions (except "P" and "N") when
The vehicle is secured from rolling away by the
the engine is running.
parking lock when in the “P” gear.
— To reduce the risk of an accident, do not
— Bring the vehicle to a full stop and press the press the accelerator pedal when changing
brake pedal. gears if the vehicle is stationary and the en-
— Press the “P” button @) on the selector lever. gine is running.
— The “P” next to the selector lever will light up. — Never select the “R" or "P” gears while driv-
“P” engages automatically if you switch the en- ing. Doing so could cause an accident.
gine off while the “D” or “R” gear is selected. If — The vehicle can roll even if the ignition is
you switch the engine off in “N”, “P” will engage switched off.
automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
@) Tips
If you want to switch from “P” to “D” or “R”, the
If you shift between “D” and “R” within one
engine must be running.
second, you do not need to press the brake
If you cannot shift out of “P”, for example be- pedal. This makes it possible to “rock” if it is
cause the vehicle has no power, you may need to stuck, for example.
use the emergency release for the parking lock
=> page 100.
Selecting a driving program

Various driving programs can be selected when in
the “D” gear. The programs influence when the
transmission shifts and how the accelerator ped-
al responds.
The selected driving program is displayed in the

instrument cluster.
—D (Drive): normal driving mode

— S (Sport): sporty driving mode
If you select the Dynamic mode in Audi drive se-

lect*, the “S” driving program will be activated.
When the ignition is switched off, the driving pro-
gram may be reset to “D”.
98
Driving
Manual shifting If you stop using the shift paddles temporarily,

the transmission will switch back to automatic
mode. To keep shifting manually, tilt the selector
RAZ-0411
lever toward the front passenger's side.
iG) Tips
— The transmission only allows manual shift-
ing when the engine speed is within the per-
mitted range.
— The transmission automatically shifts up or
down before critical engine speed is
Fig. 95 Center console: shifting manually with the selector
lever reached.
Accelerator pedal
You can accelerate the vehicle using the accelera-

tor pedal.
Maximum acceleration
If you press the accelerator pedal all the way

down, the motor’s full power will be used and
you will reach maximum acceleration, also called
Fig. 96 Steering wheel: shift paddles* “kick-down”.
You can shift the gears manually when in “D” JX WARNING

mode. The transmission must be in tiptronic
The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle
mode. You can shift into manual shifting mode
could swerve on slick or slippery road surfaces
while the vehicle is stationary or while driving.
when using kick-down, which increases the
Shifting with the selector lever risk of an accident.
> To switch to manual shifting mode, tilt the se-

lector lever toward the front passenger's side
=> fig. 95. “M” will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
> Upshifting: push the selector lever forward @).
> Downshifting: push the selector lever toward
the rear ©).
> To switch back to automatic mode, tilt the se-
lector lever toward the driver's side.
Shifting with the shift paddles

Applies to: vehicles with shift paddles
> Upshifting: press the @) shift paddle 9 fig. 96.

> Downshifting: press the ©) shift paddle.
> To switch back to automatic mode, press and
hold the (4) shift paddle or push the selector
8W1012721BC
lever toward the rear.
99
Driving
Manually releasing the parking lock > Turn the engine off again.
> Grasp the socket wrench with both hands and
carefully pull it upward to remove.
B8W-0047
> Reinsert the cover and rubber mat.
ZA WARNING
— Only use the parking lock emergency release
if the vehicle is secured against rolling
= page 96. An unsecured vehicle may roll,
which increases the risk of an accident.
— Only activate the emergency release while
on a level surface or a slight slope.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, you must
B8W-0162
not drive when the emergency release is ac-
tivated.
C) Note
Due to the risk of damage, carefully remove
the socket wrench when you reset the parking
lock.
Fig. 98 Front cup holder: parking lock emergency release

Messages
The emergency release is located in the front cup
i Transmission: malfunction! Safely stop vehi-
holder under a cover.
cle
You will need the screwdriver and the socket
Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle as soon
wrench from the vehicle tool kit in order to re-
as possible in a safe location and secure it so it
lease > page 261. Use the flat side of the reversi-
does not roll > page 96. See an authorized Audi
ble screwdriver blade.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
Releasing the parking lock using the sistance.
emergency release & Transmission: too hot. Please stop vehicle
> Secure the vehicle against rolling > page 96.
Do not continue driving. Select "P" and contact an
> Remove the rubber mat.
> Pry the cover off the opening using the screw-
Facility for assistance.
driver inserted in the slot.
>» Insert the socket wrench from the vehicle tool fal Transmission: too hot. Please adapt driving
kit into the opening. style
> Turn the socket wrench clockwise until it stops The transmission temperature has increased sig-
@ and press it downward until it locks into nificantly. Drive very cautiously or take a break
place Q). from driving until the temperature returns to the
> Leave the socket wrench inserted.
normal range and the indicator light turns off.
Resetting the parking lock & Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
> Press the brake pedal and start the engine. ue driving. See owner's manual
> Keep the brake pedal pressed and engage the
following selector lever positions one after the
other: "N","D", and back to ""N".
100
Driving
There is a system malfunction in the transmis- fs} Selector lever: malfunction! Gear change on-
sion. You may continue driving. Drive to an au- ly possible if using both shift paddles.
There is a system malfunction in the selector lev-
Facility soon to have the malfunction corrected.
er. You can continue driving with restricted func-
[@] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin- tion. The selector lever is not working. Gears can
ue driving with limited function. Please contact only be selected by tapping both shift paddles at
Service the same time when the vehicle is stationary. The
“P” gear is automatically engaged when you turn
There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
off the engine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer
sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to
mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or
have the malfunction corrected.
may no longer shift at all. The engine may stall.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized fs] Selector lever: malfunction! You can contin-
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the ue driving. Please contact Service
malfunction corrected.
There is a system malfunction in the selector lev-
[@] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin- er. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal-
ue driving with limited function. No reverse er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
gear malfunction repaired.
There is a system malfunction in the transmis- fs} P button: malfunction! Auto P when engine
sion. The transmission is switching to emergency off. Please contact Service
mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or
There is a malfunction in the "P" button on the
may no longer shift at all. The engine may stall.
selector lever. The “P” gear is automatically en-
You cannot engage the reverse gear. Drive to an
gaged when you turn off the engine. Drive to an
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
rected.
rected.
& Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
Move selector lever to automatic position
ue driving in D until engine is off
There is a malfunction in the tiptronic mode. End
There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
tiptronic mode by pushing the selector lever to
sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
the left into the "D/S" position.
mode. If you turn the engine off, you will not be
able to select any other gears after restarting the
engine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au- Drive system
thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
the malfunction corrected.
A new vehicle must be broken in within the first
fal Danger of rolling away! P not possible.
1,000 miles (1,500 km) so that all moving parts
Please apply parking brake
work smoothly together, which helps to increase
— The parking lock was released using the emer- the service life of the engine and other drive com-
gency release > page 100. Or ponents.
— The parking lock can no longer be engaged.
Do not drive higher than two-thirds of the maxi-
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
mum permitted engine RPM during the first 600
ized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
miles (1,000 km) and do not use full accelera-
the malfunction corrected. Secure the vehicle
tion. The engine can be increased RPM gradually
8W1012721BC
against rolling before exiting the vehicle

during the next 300 miles (500 km).
=> page 96.
101
Driving
ient and environmentally-friendly — The vehicle battery will gradually drain if

9g the vehicle is not driven for long periods of
time, or if electrical equipment is used
Your driving style greatly influences the amount when the engine is not running. To ensure
of fuel and energy consumed, the environmental
that the vehicle can still be started, the
impact, and the wear on the engine, brakes, and electrical equipment will be limited or
tires. Note the following information for efficient
switched off.
and environmentally-conscious driving:
— Turn off electrical equipment that is not need- I Cr

Te (1
ed, for example seat heating*.
— Anticipate upcoming traffic situations while B Drive system: malfunction! Safely stop vehi-
driving to avoid unnecessary acceleration and cle
braking. There is a malfunction in the drive system. The
— Avoid driving at high speeds. brake booster and the power steering may stop
— Avoid adding extra weight to the vehicle if pos- working. Stop the vehicle immediately or as soon
sible, for example by not leaving roof racks or as possible and do not continue driving. Secure
bike racks installed when they are not needed. the vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehi-
— Make sure the tire pressure is correct. cle > page 96. Have the problem corrected by an
— Have maintenance performed regularly on the authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
vehicle. Facility.
— Do not let the engine run while the vehicle
B Drive system: malfunction! Please contact
parked.
Service
— Do not drive with winter tires during the summ-
er. There is a malfunction in the drive system. Drive
— Use the Start/Stop system. slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
— Utilize the engine braking effect. Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction cor-
— Avoid driving short distances when possible. rected.
@® Tips Start/Stop system

The amount of noise produced by the vehicle
can increase significantly when driving with a Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
sporty style. Show respect to others around
you and the environment with the way you op- The Start/Stop system can help increase fuel
erate your vehicle, especially at night. economy and reduce CO2 emissions.
In Start/Stop mode, the engine shuts off auto-

ME ey matically when stopped, for example at a traffic
light. If certain conditions are met, the engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent ener-
may stop before the vehicle has come to a com-
gy management system for distributing electrici-
plete stop. If you press the accelerator pedal
ty. This significantly improves the starting ability
when this happens, the engine will start and driv-
and increases the vehicle battery life.
ing power will be transmitted.
@) Tips The ignition and important assist systems such

as the brake booster will remain available during
— If you drive short distances frequently, the
the Stop phase. The engine will restart automati-
vehicle battery may not charge enough
cally when needed.
while driving. As a result, convenience func-
tions for electrical equipment may be tem- The Start/Stop system is automatically activated
porarily unavailable. once the ignition is switched on.
102
Driving
Switching the Start/Stop system off and on

@) Tips
The )* button is located above the selector lev-
— Press the brake pedal during a Stop phase
er in the center console. The LED in the button
to keep the vehicle from rolling.
turns on when the function is switched off.
— The ignition will turn off if you press the
> Press (A)°* to switch the system on or off. START ENGINE STOP] button during a Stop
phase.
If you switch the system off during a Stop phase,
— If you leave the vehicle briefly during a Stop
the engine will start again automatically.
phase and then enter again, the driver's
Basic requirements door must be closed and the safety belt
must be fastened in order for the engine to
— The driver’s door and the hood must be closed
be able to restart.
and the driver’s safety belt must be fastened.
— You can control if the engine will stop or not
—"P","N", or "D" must be engaged.
by reducing or increasing the amount of
—The steering wheel must not be turned far in ei-
force you use to press the brake pedal. For
ther direction.
example, if you only lightly press on the
— The vehicle must have driven faster than 2 mph
brake pedal in stop-and-go traffic or when
(3 km/h) since the last time it stopped.
turning, the engine will not switch off when
— The vehicle is not in trailer mode.
the vehicle is stationary. If you press the
brake pedal harder, the engine will switch
@ Note
off.
Always switch the Start/Stop system off when
driving through water > page 103.
Starting and stopping the engine automat-
ically
@ Tips
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
— Depending on the driving situation, the en-
The system checks if certain conditions are met
gine may already stop when coasting before
before and during the Stop phase, and deter-
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
mines if the engine stops and how long it re-
— If you select the "D" position after shifting
mains stopped. For example, if power usage is
into reverse, the vehicle must be driven fast-
high, the engine will not be stopped. Along with
er than 6 mph (10 km/h) in order for the
other conditions, the following factors influence
Start/Stop system to become active again.
the automatic engine start or stop:
This makes it possible to maneuver without
stopping the engine. — Environmental conditions (slopes, inclines, ele-
vation, temperature)
Stopping and starting the engine — Battery (charge status, temperature, power us-
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system age)
— Engine temperature
> Press and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle
— Assist systems
has stopped. The @] indicator light appears in
— Driving behavior
the instrument cluster once the engine stops
automatically. Depending on the engine, the Gy indicator light
> The engine starts again when you remove your may appear if the engine is not stopped.
foot from the brake pedal. The indicator light
turns off.
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
If the parking brake is set, the engine will only
8W1012721BC
start again when the accelerator pedal is pressed. Drive system: please start the vehicle manually >
103
Driving
This message appears when specific conditions braking heavily several times while driving at
are not met during a Stop phase. The Start/Stop high speeds can clean the brake rotors > A\.
system will not be able to restart the engine. The
Brake pads
engine must be started with the
START ENGINE STOP] button. New brake pads do not achieve their full braking
effect during the first 250 miles (400 km). They
Vehicle starting system: malfunction! Please
must be “broken in” first. However, you can com-
contact Service
pensate for the slightly reduced braking force by
There is a malfunction in the Start/Stop system. pressing firmly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy
Drive the vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or braking during the break-in period.
authorized Service Facility as soon as possible to
Brake pad wear depends largely on the way the
vehicle is driven and on operating conditions.
Brake pad wear increases when driving frequently
Brakes in the city or short distances or when using a very
General information sporty driving style.
You can apply the vehicle's brakes using the brake Ceramic brakes
Applies to: vehicles with ceramic brakes
pedal.
Ceramic brakes provide excellent deceleration
Operating noise rates.
Noises may occur when braking depending on the
The break-in period for new ceramic brakes may
speed, braking force, and outside conditions such
be significantly longer than for standard brake
as temperature and humidity.
rotors. Due to the properties of the material,
Braking effect they may cause noises at lower speeds. Ceramic
brakes also absorb more moisture in wet condi-
The response time from the brakes depends on
tions. Therefore, there will temporarily be less
the weather and environmental conditions. To
braking force than when the brakes are dry. You
ensure the optimal braking effect, the brake sys-
can compensate for this by pressing the brake
tem is cleaned at regular intervals. This is done
pedal harder.
by applying the brake pads to the brake rotors for
a short period of time when driving at high Automatic post-collision braking system
speeds when the windshield wipers are switched
The automatic post-collision braking system can
on.
help to reduce the risk of sliding and of addition-
If the brake system becomes damp, for example al collisions after an accident. If the airbag con-
after driving in heavy rain, the braking effect may trol module detects a collision, the vehicle is
be delayed. Other factors that could temporarily braked by the ESC.
increase the response time of the brakes include:
The vehicle does not brake automatically if one of
— Wet conditions the following occurs:
— Low temperatures, ice, and snow
— The driver presses the accelerator pedal, or
— Roads covered in salt
— The braking force generated by the pressed
— Dirty brake pads brake pedal is greater than the braking force
Corrosion that would be initiated by the system
— The ESC, the brake system, or the vehicle elec-
Corrosion may form on the brake rotors if there is
trical system is not functioning
no heavy braking, if the vehicle is not driven for
long periods of time, or if the vehicle is not driv-
en frequently or for long distances. In this case,
104
Driving
ZA WARNING There is a malfunction in the brake system. If

[S/ Bana fA also turn on, there is a malfunc-
— Only apply the brakes for the purpose of tion in the ABS, ESC, and braking distribution. If
cleaning the brake system when road and the brake booster is not working, you have to use
traffic conditions permit. You must not en- much more force when braking the vehicle.
danger other road users and increase the
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi
— Due to the risk of injury, only have an au- dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi sistance. Read and follow the other safety pre-
Service Facility work on the brake system. cautions > A\.
Incorrect repairs could impair the function. Hie / © Brake pads: wear limit reached. You
— Never let the vehicle roll while the engine is can continue driving. Please contact Service
stopped because this increases the risk of an
The brake pads are worn. Drive to an authorized
accident.
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as
— During automatic braking maneuvers, the
soon as possible to have the malfunction correct-
brake pedal may move downward automati-
ed.
cally. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
place your foot under the brake pedal. Brake booster: limited functionality. You can
continue driving. Please contact Service
@) Note
There is a brake booster malfunction. The brake
— Never let the brakes “rub” by pressing the booster is available, but its effectiveness is re-
pedal lightly when braking is not actually duced. The braking performance may be different
necessary. This can cause the brakes to over- compared to the usual performance. Drive to an
heat and increases braking distance and authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
causes wear. Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
— Observe the important information for driv- rected.
ing downhill > page 107. This especially ap-
Brake booster: deactivated. See owner's manual
plies when towing a trailer.
The brake booster remains active for a brief peri-
@) Tips od of time after switching off the ignition. Secure
— In vehicles with an electromechanical brake the vehicle against rolling > page 96.
booster, the resistance in the brake pedal Other indicator lights
may vary depending on the driving situation
(such as if driver assistance system are ac- When you switch the ignition on, the EG i @
tive). indicator light turns on briefly to check the func-
— If you retrofit your vehicle with a front spoil- tion. If the indicator light does not turn on, there
is a system malfunction.
er, wheel covers or similar items, make sure
that the air flow to the brakes is not ob- file / © stays on, there is a malfunction in
structed. Otherwise the brake system can the brake system.
overheat.
@- A high load was placed on the brakes from
— Also refer to the information about brake
driving downhill for a long period of time. Follow
fluid > page 229.
the instructions in the message to utilize the en-
gine braking effect and to relieve the brakes.
Z\ WARNING
8W1012721BC
Ga 7 @ Brakes: malfunction! Stop vehicle

safely If a malfunction occurs in the ABS, ESC, and
braking distribution, interventions that >
105
Driving
stabilize the vehicle will no longer be availa- pressed. To reduce the risk of an accident,
ble. This could cause the vehicle to swerve, do not inadvertently press the accelerator
which increases the risk that the vehicle will pedal and always shift into “P” when the ve-
slide. Do not continue driving. See an author- hicle is stopped.
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa- — If the power supply fails, you cannot set the
cility for assistance. parking brake once it is released, or release
it if it is set. Secure the vehicle against roll-
Electromechanical ing before exiting the vehicle > page 96. See
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
parking brake
Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Operating the parking brake
G) Tips
The electromechanical parking brake is used to
— On steep inclines, especially when in trailer
secure the vehicle from rolling away unintention-
mode, the vehicle may roll backwards unin-
ally.
tentionally when starting to drive. To reduce
The ©) switch is located under the selector lever the risk of this happening, pull and hold the
in the center console. It turns on when the park- switch while pressing the accelerator
ing brake is set. You can release the parking brake pedal. If enough drive power has built up at
manually or automatically when you start to the wheels and the vehicle does not roll
drive. backwards, then release the switch to start
to drive.
Setting and releasing the parking brake
— If you leave the vehicle when “D” or “R” are
> Setting: pull the ©) switch. engaged, the parking brake will be set auto-
> 1f BM / © appears, the parking brake is hold- matically.
ing the vehicle. You can remove your foot from — Noises when the parking brake is set and re-
the brake pedal. leased are normal and are not a cause for
> Releasing: when the ignition is switched on, concern.
press and hold the brake pedal and press the ©) — The parking brake goes through a self-test
button. cycle at regular intervals when the vehicle is
If the red indicator light flashes, the braking stopped. Any noises associated with this are
force has not built up enough or it has decreased. normal.
You can also secure the vehicle by selecting the
“P” gear or pressing the brake pedal. Make sure Emergency braking function
the indicator light is off before you start driving.
Emergency braking should only be used in an
Automatically releasing the parking brake emergency, if the standard brake pedal is mal-
when starting to drive functioning or obstructed. When the emergency
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed braking function is activated, the braking effect is
and the driver’s safety belt must be fastened. similar to a heavy braking maneuver.
> Press the accelerator pedal to start to drive. > Pull and hold the @) switch while driving.
» An audio warning signal will sound and emer-
ZA\ WARNING gency braking will begin.
> If you press the accelerator pedal, emergency
—To reduce the risk of an accident, always
braking will be canceled.
make sure the vehicle is situated safely
while stationary.
— If the parking brake is set, it can release au-
tomatically when the accelerator pedal is
106
Driving
ZA WARNING The vehicle cannot be held in place automatically.

Press the brake pedal to secure the vehicle from
Heavy braking while driving through curves or rolling away unintentionally.
in poor road or weather conditions can cause
the vehicle to slide or the rear of the vehicle to
swerve, which increases the risk of an acci-
Special driving situations
dent. Driving uphill and downhill
When driving uphill, downhill, or at high alti-

Messages tudes, note the following information:
ERG / GB) Parking brake: malfunction! Safely — Drive slowly and carefully.
stop vehicle. See owner's manual — Do not try to turn around if you cannot safely
Gg / @ Parking brake: malfunction! Please drive on an incline or hill. Instead, drive in re-
release parking brake verse.
— When driving down hills, you can activate the
If one of the two messages appears, there is a hill descent control if you press the brake pedal
malfunction in the parking brake. If the message
while driving in “D” gear. The automatic trans-
appears while stationary, check if the parking
mission will select a gear suitable for driving
brake is released and can be reset. If this is the
down the hill and will attempt to maintain the
case, switch the ignition off and back on.
speed at which the vehicle was traveling at the
If the message stays on, if the parking brake can- time the brake pedal was pressed. Press the
not be released, or if the message appears while brake pedal if necessary. The hill descent con-
driving, do not continue driving. Secure the vehi- trol will switch off once the hill levels out or
cle against rolling before exiting the vehicle you press the accelerator pedal.
=> page 96. See an authorized Audi dealer or au- — Utilize the engine braking effect when driving
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. downhill by selecting the “S” driving program
=> page 98. This especially applies when towing
ww Parking brake: malfunction! Please contact
a trailer. This reduces the load on the brakes.
Service
— Apply the brakes in intervals and do not press
There is a malfunction in the parking brake. Drive the brake pedal continuously.
to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi — Use the hill hold assist > page 108.
Service Facility immediately to have the malfunc-
tion corrected. Do not park the vehicle on inclines ZA WARNING
and secure it against rolling before exiting the ve- — Only drive on inclines that your vehicle is de-
hicle > page 96. signed to handle. Do not exceed the hill
xt | / Parking brake: warning! Vehicle parked climbing ability of your vehicle. Your vehicle
too steep could tip or slide.
— Do not drive at an angle on steep inclines
The braking force may not be enough to secure
and hills. If your vehicle is about to tip, you
the vehicle from rolling away. Park the vehicle in
must immediately start steering in the di-
a place with less of an incline.
rection of the downward slope to reduce the
fa / Parking brake: applied risk of an accident.
— Always be ready to brake when using the hill
The parking brake is set. Press and hold the brake
descent control function.
pedal to release the parking brake.
Take over!
8W1012721BC
107
Driving
Offroad driving creating waves, because they could splash

Applies to: allroad above the lower edge of the body. Oncoming
vehicles could also create waves.
Your vehicle is not an offroad vehicle. Note the
— Do not stop the vehicle while in the water.
following points when driving offroad:
— Drive in reverse.
— Drive slowly and carefully. — Do not turn the engine off.
—To reduce the risk of underbody damage, pay
attention to the vehicle's ground clearance and ZA WARNING
drive across raised areas of the ground with the After driving through water, press the brake
wheels on one side of the vehicle, instead of al- pedal carefully to dry the brakes so that the
lowing the center of the vehicle to pass over the full braking effect will be restored.
raised areas.
— To reduce the risk of becoming stuck, drive @) Note
through sandy or swampy areas at a steady
Vehicle components such as the engine, drive
speed and without stopping, if possible.
system, suspension, or electrical system can
If necessary, use the following functions: be severely damaged by driving through wa-
ter
— Audi drive select* Offroad mode > page 110
— Hill hold assist* > page 108
Gi) Tips
— Limit ESC > page 114
If possible, avoid driving through salt water
ZA WARNING because it increases the risk of corrosion. Use
fresh water to clean any vehicle components
Only drive in terrain that is suitable for the ve-
that come into contact with salt water.
hicle and your driving ability.
@ For the sake of the environment Hill descent assist

Applies to: vehicles with hill hold assist
Avoid actions that are damaging to the envi-
ronment. Show respect for the natural envi- The “2 button is located above the selector lever
ronment and remain on marked routes. in the center console. It lights up when the sys-
tem is turned on.
G) Tips
Hill descent assist can assist you when driving
Clean your vehicle after driving offroad. Dirt down hills by maintaining a constant vehicle
and stones falling off your vehicle can affect speed by automatically braking all four wheels.
other road users. You can adjust the speed using the accelerator
and brake pedals. The regulation depends on the
Driving through water hill and the vehicle speed.
If you must drive through water, follow these in- > Switching on: press “2.
structions: > Switching off: press “2 again.
— Check the stability of the ground, the current, Active regulation

and the water depth. If the ground is unstable, Regulation begins shortly after you start driving
there is a strong current, or there are waves, and is possible at speeds up to approximately 19
the water must only reach up to the lower edge mph (30 km/h) and on hills that have an approxi-
of the body at the most. mately 6-60% grade. If these conditions are met,
— Deactivate the Start/Stop system*. regulation will be activated and the indicator
— Drive carefully and no faster than at walking light will turn on.
speeds to prevent the front of the vehicle from
108
Driving
Ready mode
If one of the requirements for active regulation is
not met, the system will be in ready mode. The
indicator light will turn on. Once the require-
ments are met again, the system will be able to
provide active regulation again.
— Be ready to apply the brakes at all times

when using the hill hold assist.
— Always adjust the speed to the visibility,
weather, road, and traffic conditions. The
system cannot replace the driver's atten-
tion.
— The system cannot maintain a constant vehi-
cle speed in all situations, for example when
on smooth or slippery ground. This can in-
crease the risk of an accident.
If you select the Audi drive select* Offroad

mode, hill descent assist will switch on.
8W1012721BC
109
Driving dynamic
Driving dynamic Individual - Provides the option for personalized

vehicle settings. Press &% to configure the mode
Audi drive select = page 110, Individual settings.
Introduction
G) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
When the ignition is being switched on, indi-
Drive select makes it possible to experience dif- vidual systems, such as the drive system, will
ferent types of vehicle characteristics in one vehi- be reset to a balanced setting. Select the cur-
cle. With different driving modes, the driver can rent mode again to attain its full configura-
switch the setting, for example from sporty to tion.
comfortable. This allows you to adjust the set-
tings to your personal preferences. This makes it
Individual settings
possible to combine settings such as a sporty
drivetrain setting with comfortable steering.
The equipment in your vehicle will determine
Selecting an Audi drive select mode which settings you can adjust.
Drive
The sie button is located above the selector lever The drive system will react to accelerator pedal
in the center console. moves more quickly or in a more balanced man-
> Press the left or right arrow key until the de- ner. The shift points are located in higher or low-
sired mode appears in the MMI. Or: er engine speed ranges on vehicles with automat-
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- ic transmissions.
HICLE > Audi drive select. Depending on the setting, the drive power at the
rear axle will be distributed with the sport differ-
You can change the driving mode when the vehi-
ential* to be more sporty or moderate
cle is stationary or while driving. If traffic per-
=> page 112.
mits, briefly remove your foot from the accelera-
tor pedal after changing modes so that the mode Steering
you have selected will be activated for the drive
The power steering will adapt. Light steering is
system.
suitable for long trips on highways or smooth
The following modes may be available depending driving around curves, for example.
on the equipment:
Suspension
Offroad - Provides assistance when driving off-
The suspension adjusts to be tighter or more
road. The ESC will be restricted and the hill de-
comfort-oriented when it comes to compensat-
scent assist* will be activated. The vehicle will ex-
it this mode after the ignition is switched off. ing for uneven spots on the road.
Comfort - Provides a comfort-oriented vehicle Engine sound

setup and is suited for long drives on highways. The engine sound adapts and can be subtle to
Auto - Provides an overall comfortable yet dy- sporty. In the automatic setting, the engine
namic driving feel and is suited for everyday use. sound depends on the selected driving program.
Dynamic - Gives the driver a sporty driving feel

and is suited to a sporty driving style. The “S”
driving program is selected.
110
Driving dynamic
Suspension speed. The settings depend on the selected Audi

drive select* mode.
CET tes un) Led
Applies to: vehicles with suspension control Dynamic steering
Applies to: vehicles with dynamic steering
The adaptive dampers are an electronically-con-
The driving dynamic and driving stability are in-
trolled damping system. The firmness of the sus-
creased by the steering ratio based on the speed.
pension will adapt to the driving conditions and
At reduced speeds, steering is direct in order to
the driving situation. The settings depend on the
provide agile steering behavior and keep the
selected Audi drive select* mode.
steering effort as minimal as possible when the
driver is maneuvering the vehicle. This sets the
Ground clearance steering to be less sensitive at higher speeds in
The vehicle height and clearance can be influ- order to provide improved vehicle control.
enced by the following factors:
— Change in temperature
— Change in load a Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
Z\ WARNING The power steering may have failed. Adapt your

driving style immediately to compensate for the
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure no one fact that it may be more difficult to turn the
gets pinched when the vehicle level is chang- steering wheel, and stop your vehicle in a safe lo-
ing, for example when cleaning the under- cation as soon as possible. Secure the vehicle
body or the wheel housings. against rolling before exiting the vehicle
=> page 96. Do not continue driving. See an au-
@) Note thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Always make sure there is enough clearance Facility for assistance.
above and below the vehicle. This is especially
|e —e| Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
important for entrances with height restric-
tions, for example, before driving into under- There is a malfunction in the electronic steering
ground garages. You could also scrape the lock. You cannot turn the ignition on. Secure the
ground when driving over the edges of curbs vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehicle
or on steep ramps, which could damage your = page 96. Do not tow your vehicle because it
vehicle. cannot be steered. See an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Werle a Steering: malfunction! You can continue
driving
8 | Suspension: malfunction! You can continue
driving There is a malfunction in the steering system.
Steering may be more difficult or more sensitive.
There is a malfunction. See an authorized Audi
Adapt your driving style. Have the steering sys-
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
tem checked immediately by an authorized Audi
sistance.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Please
note that the red indicator light may turn on af-
Steering ter restarting the engine. Do not continue driving
if it does.
8W1012721BC
l@-| Steering lock: malfunction! Please contact

Electromechanical steering supports the driver's
Service >
steering movements by electronically adapting
the power steering depending on the vehicle
111
Driving dynamic
There is a malfunction in the electronic steering snow and ice. Always read and follow safety pre-
lock. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi cautions > A\.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have
the malfunction repaired. ZA WARNING
Dynamic steering: correcting steering wheel — Even in vehicles with all wheel drive, you
position should adapt your driving style to the cur-
rent road and traffic conditions to reduce
The steering is reinitializing. The steering wheel the risk of an accident.
will move easily after starting the vehicle. Reiniti- —The braking ability of your vehicle is limited
alization might be necessary if the steering wheel to the traction of the wheels. In this way, it
was moved while the engine was switched off. is not different from a two wheel drive vehi-
The display turns off if the initialization was suc- cle. Do not drive too fast because this in-
cessful. creases the risk of an accident.
ZA\ WARNING — Note that on wet streets, the front wheels

can “hydroplane’” if driving at speeds that
Do not tow your vehicle if there is a malfunc- are too high. Unlike front wheel drive
tion in the electronic steering lock because vehicles, the engine RPM does not increase
this increases the risk of an accident. suddenly when the vehicle begins hydro-
planing. Adapt your speed to the road condi-
@) Tips tions to reduce the risk of an accident.
— If there is a malfunction, the steering wheel
may be crooked when driving straight. Sy amet
—Ifthe Ba or fal indicator light only stays on Applies to: vehicles with sport differential
for a short time, you may continue driving.
The sport differential distributes the drive power
to the rear axle based on the situation. The goal
All wheel drive (quattro) is a high level of agility and ability to accelerate
on curves. The vehicle is very responsive to steer-
Applies to: vehicles with all wheel drive ing. The settings depend on the selected Audi
drive select* mode.
The all-wheel drive system distributes the driving
power variably to the front and rear axle to im-
WEE Tel
prove the driving characteristics. It works togeth-
er with selective wheel torque control, which can it} All-wheel drive: malfunction! You can con-
activate when driving through curves tinue driving. Please contact Service
=> page 113.
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
Applies to: vehicles with quattro ultra: If the driv- or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
ing situation does not require all wheel drive, malfunction repaired.
then the rear section of the drivetrain will decou-
ple to save fuel. The system constantly deter- it} Sport differential: malfunction! Please con-
tact Service
mines and anticipates if all wheel drive is needed.
This allows the rear drivetrain to recouple shortly Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
before it is needed. or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
The all-wheel drive system is designed for high malfunction repaired.
engine power. Your vehicle is exceptionally pow- it} All-wheel drive: too hot. Please adapt driv-
erful and has excellent driving characteristics ing style. See owner's manual
both under normal driving conditions and on
112
Driving dynamic
The transmission temperature has increased sig- Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR)

nificantly due to the sporty driving manner. Drive ASR reduces drive power when the wheels begin
in a less sporty manner until the temperature re- spinning and adapts the power to the road condi-
turns to the normal range and the indicator light tions. This will increase the driving stability.
switches of.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
it} Sport differential: temperature too high.
Please adapt driving style The EDL applies the brakes to wheels that are
slipping and transfers the drive power to the oth-
The transmission temperature has increased sig-
er wheels. This function is not available at higher
nificantly due to the sporty driving manner. Drive
speeds.
in a less sporty manner until the temperature re-
turns to the normal range and the indicator light In extreme cases, EDL automatically switches off
switches of. to keep the brake on the braked wheel from over-
heating. The vehicle is still functioning correctly.
Z\ WARNING EDL will switch on again automatically when con-
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or author- ditions have returned to normal.
ized Audi Service Facility if the sport differen- Selective wheel torque control
tial is faulty or malfunctioning. The repair
must be performed by trained personnel us- Selective wheel torque control is used when driv-
ing the correct oil in order to ensure safety. ing on curves. Braking is targeted toward the
wheels on the inside of the curve as needed. This
allows more precise driving in curves.
Electronic Stabilization
Control Power steering
The ESC can also support vehicle stability
through steering.
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) supports
driver safety. It reduces the risk of slipping and ZA\ WARNING
improves driving stability. ESC detects critical sit- —The ESC and its integrated systems cannot
uations, such as if the vehicle is oversteering or overcome the limits imposed by natural
understeering, or if the wheels are spinning. physical laws. This is especially important on
slippery or wet roads. If the systems begin
The brakes are applied or the engine torque is re-
acting to stabilize your vehicle, you should
duced in order to stabilize the vehicle.
immediately alter your speed to match the
The following stabilization functions are integrat- road and traffic conditions. Do not let the in-
ed into the ESC, among others: creased safety provided tempt you into tak-
ing risks. This could increase your risk ofa
collision.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when brak- — Please note the risk ofa collision increases
ing. The vehicle can still be steered even during when driving fast, especially through curves
hard braking. Apply steady pressure to the brake and on slippery or wet roads, and when driv-
pedal. Do not pump the pedal. ing too close to objects ahead. There is still
A pulsing in the brake pedal indicates that the a risk of accidents because the ESC and its
system is acting to stabilize the vehicle. integrated systems cannot always prevent
collisions.
— Accelerate carefully when driving on
8W1012721BC
smooth, slippery surfaces such as ice and

snow. The drive wheels can spin even when
113
Driving dynamic
these control systems are installed and this ZA\ WARNING

can affect driving stability and increase the
— When the ESC is switched off or limited,
risk of a collision.
there will be no vehicle stabilization or it will
be limited. The driving wheels could spin
Gi) Tips
and the vehicle could swerve, especially on
The ABS and ASR only function correctly when slick or slippery road surfaces, which in-
all four wheels have a similar wear condition. creases the risk of an accident.
Different tire sizes can lead to a reduction in — Because of the increased risk of an accident,
engine power. only drive with the ESC switched off or limit-
ed when it is necessary. Reactivate the ESC
as soon as possible.
The So button (or 2, depending on the model)

for controlling the ESC is located in the center
(i) Tips
console, in front of the selector lever. The ESC is — If you select the Audi drive select* Offroad
automatically switched on when the ignition is mode, hill descent assist will switch on.
switched on. — If the ESC is limited, switched off, or mal-
functioning, systems with an automatic
Limiting ESC braking intervention function may not be
In some situations, it may make sense to limit fully available.
the stabilizing function of the ESC so that the — If malfunctions occur in other systems or
wheels can spin, for example to rock a vehicle to certain driver assist systems are active, the
free it when it is stuck or to drive with snow ESC must be switched on by the system. The
chains. The ESC can also be limited to provide ESC may switch on automatically and can-
more sporty driving characteristics with fewer not be operated with the button.
stabilizing corrective actions.
—To limit the ESC, press the oF button briefly.

The B indicator light will turn on. BB /ABS} / B © Stabilization control (ESC/
— To completely reactivate the ESC stabilization ABS): malfunction! See owner's manual
function, press the button again. The indicator
There is a malfunction in the ABS or EDL. This al-
light turns off.
so causes the ESC to malfunction. The brakes still
When ESC is limited, allroad models switch to function with their normal power, but ABS is not
Offroad mode. All other model versions switch to active.
Sport mode. Sport mode is particularly suited for
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
driving on an even road surface. Offroad mode is
designed for uneven terrain or loose ground. Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
malfunction corrected.
Switching off ESC
Other indicator lights
For a more active control of the vehicle where the
it a blinks while driving, the ESC is actively reg-
stabilizing functions of the ESC cannot intervene,
ulating. Operating noises may occur. If the indi-
the ESC can be switched off.
cator light stays on, the ESC has been switched
—To switch off the ESC, press and hold the Sor off due to system needs. The indicator light turns
button for more than three seconds. The B off when the system is fully functional.
and Ea indicator lights turn on.
— To completely reactivate the ESC stabilization
function, press the button again. The indicator
lights turn off.
114
Trailer towing
Trailer towing CG) Note

Driving with a trailer Longer inclines cannot be driven without a
suitable cooling system, especially if the out-
eT e e eeu) side temperatures are high. Otherwise, this
Your vehicle is primarily intended for transport- increases the risk of engine damage.
ing people and luggage. However, if you drive
with a trailer, follow the technical requirements, Operating instructions
the operation and driving tips, and the legal reg-
Towing capacity
ulations.
Your vehicle can only be operated with class 1 or
Driving with a trailer affects the vehicle's energy
class 2 trailers.
usage, performance, and wear. It also requires
higher concentration from the driver. Load distribution
Poor cargo load and distribution can negatively
Z\ WARNING impact vehicle handling. Load the trailer based
Do not transport any people in a trailer due to on the following criteria as much as possible:
the risk of fatal injury.
— Store objects in the vehicle luggage compart-
ment, if possible. The vehicle should always
Technical requirements carry the heaviest possible load and the trailer
Trailer hitch should have the lightest possible load.
— Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
Only use a trailer hitch with a removable ball heavy objects are as close to the axle as possi-
hitch mount and ball hitch. The trailer hitch must
ble.
be permitted for the vehicle, the trailer and the
— Secure objects so that they do not slide.
permitted total weight of the trailer being
— Utilize the maximum permitted tongue weight
pulled. Above all, it must be securely and safely
if possible.
attached to the vehicle trailer.
Tires
Never mount a trailer hitch on the bumper. The
trailer hitch must be mounted in a way that does Set the tire pressure on your vehicle for a “full
not impair the function of the bumper. Do not load”; see the tire pressure sticker > page 245. If
make any changes to the exhaust system and the necessary, also adjust the tire pressure on the
brake system. trailer according to the manufacturer's specifica-
tions.
Check regularly if the trailer hitch is securely
mounted. Always follow the instructions given by The trailer and the vehicle should be equipped
the trailer hitch manufacturer. with winter tires when driving in winter tempera-
tures.
Trailer brakes
Outside mirrors
If the trailer has its own brake system, then fol-
low the manufacturer specifications. However, If you cannot see the traffic behind the trailer
the brake system on the trailer must never be with the standard exterior mirrors, then you
connected to the vehicle brake system. must attach additional exterior mirrors. Adjust
them so you have a sufficient visibility behind
Engine cooling system
you.
Driving with a trailer means a higher load on the
8W1012721BC
Exterior lighting
engine and the cooling system. The cooling sys-
tem must be designed for additional load and Follow the legal regulations for lighting on your
contain enough coolant > @®. trailer that are applicable in the country where >
115
Trailer towing
you are operating the vehicle. Contact an author- Hill

ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- When you start driving uphill or downhill, trailers
ty for more information. may tilt or sway sooner than when driving ona
Before you start driving, check all lighting equip- level surface. If small swaying movements have
ment on the trailer while it is hitched to the vehi- already occurred, you can stabilize the trailer by
cle. firmly braking immediately. Never attempt to
“straighten out” the trailer by accelerating.
The headlight range control automatically ad-
justs the light range of the headlights. Downshift before driving on hills to utilize the en-
gine braking effect > A\.
Safety chains
Brakes
Make sure the safety chains are correctly applied
when pulling a trailer. The chains should hang When using a trailer with overrun brakes, first
enough so that the trailer can drive around brake gently then quickly. This reduces the risk of
curves. However, they must not touch the jerking while braking if the trailer wheels lock up.
ground.
Engine coolant temperature
@) Note Pay attention specifically to the coolant tempera-
Attachments retrofitted on the vehicle may ture display when there are high outside temper-
cause damage, especially on the trailer hitch atures, and when driving on long inclines
ball head. In cases of damage, have the func-
=> page 14. Shift to a higher gear in a timely man-
tion checked by an authorized Audi dealer or
ner.
authorized Audi Service Facility.
Z\ WARNING
@ Tips Constant braking causes the brakes to over-
— Block the wheels with chocks when parking heat and can substantially reduce braking per-
on inclines if the trailer is loaded. formance, increase braking distance, or cause
complete failure of the brake system.
— Audi recommends having the vehicle in-
spected between the inspection intervals if
you tow a trailer frequently.
— Avoid driving with a trailer during the vehi-
cle break-in period.
Driving with a trailer
Driving with a trailer requires extra caution.
Speed
Adhere to the legal speed limits. Follow the legal
regulations that are applicable in the country
where you are operating the vehicle.
As the speed increases, the driving stability of

the trailer decreases. Therefore you should not
exceed the maximum legal speed limit when
there are unfavorable road, weather, and/or wind
conditions. This especially applies when driving
downhill.
116
Assist systems
Assist systems System limitations
General information ZA\ WARNING

Sra eel delay —The use of an assist system cannot over-
come the natural laws of physics. A collision
ZA\ WARNING cannot be prevented in certain circumstan-
— As the driver, you are always completely re- ces.
sponsible for all driving tasks. The assist — Warnings, messages, or indicator lights may
systems cannot replace the driver's atten- not be displayed or initiated on time or cor-
tion. Give your full attention to driving the rectly, for example, if vehicles are approach-
vehicle, and be ready to intervene in the ing very fast.
traffic situation at all times. — Corrective interventions by the assist sys-
— Activate the assist systems only if the sur- tems, such as steering or braking interven-
rounding conditions permit it. Always adapt tions, may not be sufficient or they may not
your driving style to the current visual, occur. Always be ready to intervene.
weather, road, and traffic conditions.
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve- @) Tips
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- — Due to the system limitations when detect-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of ing the surrounding area, the systems may
an accident. Store objects securely while warn or intervene unexpectedly or too late
driving. in certain situations. The assist systems may
— For the assist systems to be able to react also interpret a driving maneuver incorrectly
correctly, the function of the sensors and and then warn the driver unexpectedly.
cameras must not be restricted. Note the in- — The systems may not function as expected
formation on sensors and cameras in unusual driving situations, such as driving
=>page 118. offroad, on unpaved roads, on loose ground,
on inclines, or on grooves in the road.
@ Tips — The systems may not function correctly in
— Pay attention to applicable local regulations unclear traffic situations, such as turning
relating to driving tasks, leaving space for lanes, exit ramps, construction zones, rises
emergency vehicles, vehicle distance, speed, or dips that obstruct visibility, intersections,
parking location, wheel placement, etc. The toll stations, or city traffic.
driver is always responsible for following — The detection of the surrounding area can
the laws that are applicable in the location be limited, for example by vehicles driving
where the vehicle is being operated. ahead or by rain, snow, heavy spray, or light
— You can cancel a steering or braking inter- shining into the camera.
vention by the system, by braking or accel- — The steering wheel touch recognition may
erating noticeably, steering, or deactivating be limited when you wear gloves. Steering
the respective assist system. intervention requests from the steering as-
— Always check the assist systems settings be- sist systems may occur more frequently.
fore driving. The settings could have been — If accessories have been mounted on the
changed, for example by other drivers. steering wheel, the steering assist systems
may be limited. The frequency of steering
intervention requests from the steering as-
sist systems may vary as well.
8W1012721BC
117
Assist systems
Surrounding area Radar sensors
detection Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area

surrounding the entire vehicle may be detected
Senso d camera coverage areas
> fig. 99 ©.
The wheel sensors on the rear corners of the vehi-
cle are positioned so that the adjacent lanes to
the left and right are detected on roads with a
normal lane width.
Ultrasonic sensors
Depending on vehicle equipment, various areas

may be displayed in the MMI using the ultrasonic
sensors > fig. 99.
The range of the displays depends on the location

of the ultrasonic sensors:
@ Approximately 4 feet (1.20 m)
@® Approximately 3 feet (0.90 m)
@® Approximately 5.2 feet (1.60 m)
©® Approximately 3 feet (0.90 m)
© Approximately 3 feet (0.90 m)
The side area ©) is detected and evaluated when
passing. There may have been changes to the sur-
rounding area after switching the ignition off and
on again, after opening the doors, or if the vehi-
B8V-0687
cle is left stationary for a period of time. In this

case, the area will appear black until the area has
been detected and evaluated.
Cameras
Use the camera image on the display to assist you
only if it shows a good, clear picture. Keep in
mind that the image in the display is enlarged
Fig. 100 Rearview camera coverage area and distorted. Under certain circumstances, ob-
jects may appear different and unclear on the dis-
The assist systems analyze the data from various
play.
sensors and cameras installed in the vehicle. Do
not use any assist systems if there is damage in The rearview camera can only detect the area
there area of the sensors and cameras or on the marked in red > fig. 100. Only this area is dis-
vehicle underbody. Damage can impair the func- played on the center display. > A\.
tion of the sensors and cameras or cause mal-
functions. Have an authorized Audi dealer or au- ZX WARNING
thorized Audi Service Facility check their func- Sensors and cameras have spots in which the
tion. surrounding area cannot be detected. Objects,
animals, and people may only be detected
with limitations may not be detected at all.
Always monitor the traffic and the vehicle's >
118
Assist systems
surroundings directly and do not become dis- — External ultrasonic sensors, such as those in
tracted. other vehicles, can interfere with the sen-
sors.
() Note — The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 99
and cameras > fig. 100 are diagrams and do
— Obstacles may disappear from the measure-
not represent a true-to-scale image of the
ment range when approaching them, even if
sensor ranges.
they were already detected.
— The system complies with United States FCC
—Insome situations, the ability of the sen-
regulations and ISED regulations
sors and cameras to detect and display cer-
=> page 284.
tain objects may be limited.
— Objects located above the coverage area,
Locations of the sensors and cameras
such as bumpers on parked cars, garage
doors that are partially open, or objects
[RAZ-0820
that are hanging
— Low obstacles
— Narrow objects, such as barrier chains, fo-
liage, poles, or fences
— Projecting objects, such as trailer draw
bars
— Objects with certain surfaces and struc-
tures, such as fabric
Fig. 101 Front area: sensors and cameras
@) Tips
— The sensors and cameras and the areas
around them must not be obstructed be-
cause this can impair the function of the
systems that depend on them. Make sure
that the sensors and cameras are free of
snow, ice, and other deposits. Do not use
any accessories, stickers, or other objects
that extend into the range of the sensors
and cameras.
Fig. 102 Rear area: sensors and cameras
— On vehicles that have factory-installed li-
cense plate brackets on the front of the ve- Front area
hicle, the brackets may only be replaced
with ones that are the same size and made
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-
of the same material. Do not install any li- ing sensors and cameras may be installed:
cense plate brackets on the front of vehicles — Camera behind the windshield
that do not have factory-installed brackets. — Peripheral cameras on the exterior mirrors
Otherwise, the function of the system could — Front peripheral camera in the radiator grille
be impaired. — Front and side ultrasonic sensors
— The function of the sensors and cameras — Front radar sensors at the corners of the bump-
may be limited when light and visibility con- er >
ditions are poor, for example when driving
into a tunnel, when there is glare, or when
8W1012721BC
there are reflective objects.
119
Assist systems
Rear area

ing sensors and cameras may be installed:
— Rearview camera in the luggage compartment
lid
— Radar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle
— Rear and side ultrasonic sensors
@ Tips
— The locations of the sensors may differ
slightly depending on vehicle equipment.
— Some sensors are installed under vehicle
components and cannot be seen from the
outside.
120
Driving information
Driving information Camera-based traffic

Speed warning system sign recognition
Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition

Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system
The speed warning system helps the driver to

stay below a specified maximum speed. A warn-
ing threshold can be set in the MMI for this pur-
pose.
Once the speed slightly exceeds the stored
threshold, the speed warning system will alert
the driver with an indicator in the instrument
cluster and a warning tone. Once the speed drops
below the stored maximum speed, the indicator Fig. 103 Instrument cluster: traffic sign recognition
will turn off.
The traffic sign recognition shows the traffic
Setting a threshold is recommended if you would
signs detected by the front camera in the instru-
like to be reminded when you reach a certain
ment cluster display and in the head-up display”.
maximum speed. Situations where you may want
Data from the navigation system is also included
to do so include driving in a country with a gener-
in the display. Up to three traffic signs can be dis-
al speed limit or if there is a specified maximum
played in the instrument cluster at once. The
speed for winter tires.
speed limit that is currently applicable is dis-
@) Tips played in the status line. If necessary, it will be
hidden if the system detects that turning right is
Regardless of the speed warning system, you
prohibited at a red light. The display in the head-
should always monitor your speed using the
up display* can be switched off > page 25.
speedometer and make sure you are adhering
to the legal speed limit. Within the limits of the system and depending
on the market, speed limit restrictions @ in
school zones, highways, construction zones, or at
Setting the warning threshold
night may be displayed.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Limitations

VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Speed warning. The traffic sign recognition is subject to certain
system limitations and may be unavailable or on-
Messages ly partially available in the following situations:
— When visibility is poor, such as in snow, rain,
iol Manually set speed limit XX mph fog, or heavy spray
(km/h) exceeded — When there is glare, for example from oncom-
ing traffic or the sun
The stored speed was exceeded.
— At high speeds
—If the camera's visual field > page 118 is cov-
ered, for example by dirt or stickers. For infor-
mation on cleaning, see > page 255.
8W1012721BC
— If the traffic signs are completely or partially

covered, for example by trees, snow, dirt, or
other vehicles
121
Driving information
— If traffic signs do not conform to the standard IY ett

Tel -1
format Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
— If traffic signs are damaged or bent
Traffic sign recognition: currently unavaila-
— If traffic signs are displayed on sign holders
ble. Camera view limited due to environmental
with electronic signs
conditions
— If the traffic signs or the roadways have
changed, and the navigation data is no longer The camera’s visual field is covered. Clean the
up-to-date windshield.
Traffic sign recognition: currently limited.

Z\ WARNING See owner's manual
— Observe the safety precautions and note the
This message appears if navigation system data
cameras > page 117.
is not available, for example on newly-construct-
ed roads. The speed limit display will be tempo-
— Under some circumstances, traffic sign rec-
rarily limited, which increases the risk of an incor-
ognition may not detect traffic signs correct-
rect display. If this message continues to appear,
ly or detect them at all. As a result, the sys-
drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or
tem may not display the correct speed limit
authorized Audi Service Facility to have the mal-
or any speed limit.
function repaired.
@) Tips No traffic sign information available
— Traffic sign recognition does not adapt your Depending on the area, there is no valid naviga-
vehicle's speed to match the speed Limit. tion data and no speed limits were detected. This
— The display in the instrument cluster is may also appear if there is a recommended
based on the units of measurement used for speed, but no speed limit (for example when
speed in the country where the vehicle is be- driving on and off the expressway).
ing operated. As a result, a display of 50 in
Malfunction! See owner's manual
the instrument cluster can mean either mph
or km/h, depending on the country. The system may not function correctly so it has
been switched off. See an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
Function currently unavailable. See owner's
Accessing traffic sign recognition manual
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func- If this message appears on vehicles without cam-
tions tab > Traffic signs. era-based traffic sign recognition, then the traffic
light information function is currently unavaila-
Setting a traffic sign based speed warning ble. See > page 124.
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Speed warning.
You can select a warning threshold. If you exceed

this, then the current detected speed limit will be
shown in the display with an exclamation point
for the duration that it is exceeded and it will
blink for a short time.
122
Driving information
Traffic light information — If data transmission is deactivated in the priva-

cy settings
— If the subscription has expired
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information
If this is the case, the menu item will be grayed-
out or it will not be possible to select it.
ZX WARNING
— When traffic light information is shown, al-
so always pay attention to the traffic situa-
tion, the distance to other vehicles, and the
area around the vehicle. The driver is always
responsible for assessing the traffic situa-
tion.
Fig. 104 Instrument cluster: traffic light information dis-
— Always adapt your speed to the current
play
weather, road and traffic conditions. The dis
The traffic light information gives you a speed played information must never cause you to
recommendation in order to reach the next traffic ignore legal traffic regulations and pose a
light when it is green @, or it informs you of the safety risk.
wait time at the next red light 2). Once traffic — Regardless of the traffic light information,
light data is received, the traffic light information you should always monitor your speed using
will be displayed in the instrument cluster and in the speedometer and make sure you are ad-
the head-up display*. If the vehicle is in an area hering to the legal speed limit.
with traffic light information but cannot receive a — The traffic light information does not adjust
traffic light signal, then a gray traffic light sym- your vehicle's speed to the speed recom-
bol will be displayed @). mendation shown in the display.
General information limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
The traffic light information is subject to system cameras > page 117.
limitations and may be unavailable or only parti-
ally available in the following situations: (i) Tips
—If the permitted speed limit is exceeded — Traffic light information was only available
in select cities at the time this manual was
— If driving below a certain speed limit
printed.
— If the next traffic light is less than approxi-
— Traffic light information is not available na-
mately 100 feet (30 m) away
tionwide.
—If the estimated wait time at a red light is less
than four seconds
— The functions depend on the navigation da-
ta* being up-to-date and correct identifica-
— If there is no traffic light data available
tion by the traffic sign recognition*.
— If emergency response vehicles or public transit
— Incorrect values from the camera-based
systems are active
traffic sign recognition* or outdated naviga-
— If traffic lights are in construction zones or be-
tion system* map data can result in missing
ing serviced
or incorrect display images.
— If there are warnings from the camera-based
— Certain traffic lights can automatically ad-
traffic sign recognition*
just to the current traffic situation. If this
— If the camera-based traffic sign recognition* is
8W1012721BC
occurs, the display of traffic light informa-

malfunctioning or not available
tion can change suddenly.
—If the data connection has been interrupted
123
Driving information
— The traffic signs on the road always take pri- — The vehicle is not equipped with traffic sign rec-
ority over the display. The driver is always ognition.
responsible for adhering to the regulations — There is no valid license
applicable in the country where the vehicle — Traffic light information is not available in that
is being operated. area
— Units of measurement and language set-
tings are displayed based on how they were Lap timer
set in the MMI system settings > page 212.
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information You can record and evaluate lap times with the
Switching traffic light information on and lap timer. You can operate the lap timer using the
off multifunction steering wheel > page 13.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Opening the lap timer
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Traffic light in-
> Select in the instrument cluster: Vehicle func-
formation.
tions tab > [| button > Lap times.
Accessing traffic light information An additional indicator appears in the head-up
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func- display*.
tions tab > Traffic signs.
ZA\ WARNING
@® Tips Your focus should always be on driving your
If another tab or another function is selected vehicle safely. As the driver, you have com-
in the instrument cluster, the traffic light in- plete responsibility for safety in traffic. To re-
formation will appear in the status bar on the duce the risk of an accident, only use the lap
instrument cluster. timer functions in such a way that you always
maintain complete control over your vehicle in
all traffic situations.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information
G) Tips
Malfunction! See owner's manual
You can retrieve information from the trip
The system could not be configured, for example computer while the lap timer stopwatch is
due to a network malfunction. Switch the igni- running.
tion off and shut down the vehicle to restart the
system. Wait several minutes until the vehicle ey sae |
has shut down completely and then switch the Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
ignition back on.
Requirement: the lap timer must be open
Function currently unavailable. See owner's => page 124.
manual
Timing laps
There is a temporary system malfunction. Check
if one or more of the following situations applies > To start timing manually, select Start lap 1 in
and correct the issue if necessary: the menu.
> To start timing automatically as soon as you be-
— Traffic light information is switched off gin to drive, select Start lap 1 by driving off or
— Data transmission is deactivated Start by driving off in the menu.
124
Driving information
> To start timing a new lap after driving a lap, se- Resetting lap statistics
lect New lap in the menu. This starts timing Requirement: the lap statistics menu must be
the next lap at the same time. displayed.
After completing a lap, the difference between > To reset the lap statistics, press and hold the
the last lap and the previous best lap time will be left thumbwheel until the message No lap
indicated with a won
“~” or an“+”.
times have been recorded yet. appears.
Pausing timing and displaying a split time
@) Tips
> To insert a pause @ select Pause in the menu.
> To resume timing, select Resume in the menu. The lap statistics list the lap times for the last
> To display a split time, select Split time in the 30 laps. The fastest and slowest lap times out
menu. The split time appears for approxi- of up to 99 measured laps are also displayed.
mately ten seconds in the instrument cluster.
The current lap timing will continue running. Integrated Toll Module
Canceling lap timing
Applies to: vehicles with Integrated Toll Module
The timing of the current lap will stop. The lap
time will be erased and will not be included in the Depending on the region, you can pay toll fees in
statistics. certain countries using the Integrated Toll Mod-
ule (ITM). It replaces a separate transponder for
> Select Cancel lap in the menu.
detecting toll fees. The system electronics are in-
Resetting the time tegrated in the rearview mirror housing.
> Select Reset lap times in the menu. To use the ITM in toll zones, you must register
and activate it.
G) Tips
Registration
— A maximum of 99 lap times can be meas-
ured. > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Settings & Service > Vehicle informa-
— If timing is paused, you can continue it later
tion Toll module.
even if you switch the ignition off.
> Note the Integrated Toll Module ID.
— Saved lap times cannot be individually de-
> To register the ITM, go to the displayed web ad-
leted from the total results.
dress and follow the instructions.
— The saved lap timer values will remain after
switching the ignition off. Activation
> To activate the ITM, press CD in the MMI.
yo e-) a(t)
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer Entering the number of passengers
Displaying lap statistics Depending on the number of passengers and the

region, a lower toll fee may be charged. You must
You can display the number of laps driven
either enter the number of passengers or deacti-
the fastest lap “+”, the slowest lap “-”, and the
vate the ITM based on the laws applicable in the
average time “®” in the instrument cluster.
area where you are driving.
> Select in the instrument cluster: Vehicle func-
> To enter the number of passengers, select the
tions tab > E] button > Lap statistics.
appropriate button in the MMI.
> Turn the thumbwheel down or up to display the
8W1012721BC
> To deactivate the ITM, press @ in the MMI. >

individual lap times.
> To return to the lap timing that was started, se-
lect the [I button > Lap times.
125
Driving information
@ Tips
— The driver is responsible for specifying the
correct number of passengers and activat-
ing or deactivating the ITM.
— Malfunctions can occur when detecting tolls
if both the ITM and transponder are activat-
ed. Deactivate the system not being used or
remove it as necessary.
— Ifa rearview mirror is replaced, you must
register the new ITM and remove the old
ITM from the account.
> page 284.
Display
Applies to: vehicles with Integrated Toll Module
The selected number of passengers is displayed

in the MMI status bar > page 22.
The i symbol in the status bar and a notifica-

tion in the MMI will indicate if there is a faulty
connection between the ITM and the MMI or if
the ITM is faulty. If the connection interference
continues or the ITM is faulty, drive immediately
to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility.
126
Driver assistance
Driver assistance Switching the system on

Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
Cruise control system
BFV-0220
The cruise control system assists the driver in

maintaining a constant speed above approxi-
mately 15 mph (20 km/h). The system maintains
the desired speed by braking and accelerating.
ZA WARNING
Fig. 105 Operating lever: switching the system on
— Always pay attention to the traffic around
your vehicle when the cruise control system
is in operation. As the driver, you are always
responsible for controlling your vehicle > To switch the system on, pull the lever toward
speed and the distance between your vehicle you to position ©.
and other vehicles.
The Gia or i$) indicator light and the corre-
— For safety reasons, cruise control should not sponding message will appear in the instrument
be used in the city, in stop-and-go traffic, on cluster.
winding roads, and when road conditions are
poor (such as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain,
and conditions that could lead to hydroplan-
ZA\ WARNING
ing), because this increases the risk of an ac- If the brakes are malfunctioning (for example,
cident. overheating) while the cruise control system
— Switch the cruise control off temporarily is switched on, the regulating functions may
shut off automatically.
when driving in turning lanes, highway exits,
or in construction zones.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, you should estate Rem lad lite: Rag ena)
only resume the stored speed if it is suitable speed
for the current traffic conditions. Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
When the vehicle is stationary, you can preselect

() Note the cruise control speed or activate the speed
Before driving downhill a long distance ona while driving.
steep hill, decrease your speed and select a
Requirement: the system must be switched on.
lower gear. This makes use of the engine brak-
ing effect and reduces the load placed on the > To preselect a cruise control speed when the ve-
brakes. hicle is stationary, tap the lever toward @)/G)
=> page 127, fig. 105.
@ Tips > To activate the cruise control speed, pull the
The brake lights turn on when the brakes are lever toward position @ while driving.
applied automatically. > To set the current driving speed as the cruise
control speed, press the button @) on the lever.
The active cruise control speed is indicated with

the Gg or kl indicator light in the instrument
8W1012721BC
cluster. >
127
Driver assistance
An additional indicator appears in the head-up

display*.
ZA WARNING
Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal
could override the cruise control. This will pre-
Changing the cruise control speed
vent braking interventions by the system.
Requirement: the system must be switched on.

See me Lai
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
in small increments, tap the lever up to the

When you switch the system off, the cruise con-
first level toward @)/G) > page 127, fig. 105.
trol speed will be erased.
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed
in larger increments, tap the lever up to the Requirement: the system must be switched on.
second level toward @)/G). > To switch the system off, press the lever toward
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed @ (locked into place) > page 127, fig. 105, or
continuously, tap and hold the lever at the first > Switch the ignition off.
or second level toward @)/G).
Overriding or deactivating the cruise Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
control speed
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system Gir / 3) Speed control system: currently un-
available. See owner's manual
You can override or deactivate the cruise control
system. When you deactivate the system, your If the indicator light turns on and this message
cruise control speed will be stored and you can appears, the cruise control system has been deac-
resume that speed. tivated. There is a temporary malfunction, for ex-
ample the brakes are overheating. Switch the
Requirement: the system must be switched on
cruise control system on again later.
and the regulated speed must be activated.
Overriding Efficiency assist

> To temporarily override the cruise control
speed, press the accelerator pedal. Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist
> To resume the stored regulated speed, remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal. Efficiency assist can assist the driver with predic-
tive information in order to reduce fuel consump-
If you override the cruise control system for a tion. Depending on vehicle equipment, the sys-
long period of time, the cruise control system tem may access data from the navigation system,
will be deactivated. The [Ud or [RM indicator the camera behind the windshield, and the radar
light will be displayed and the cruise control sensors.
speed will be saved.
Adjusting the efficiency assist
Deactivating
You can adjust efficiency assist functions individ-
> To deactivate the cruise control speed, press ually. The settings depend on the vehicle equip-
the lever toward @) (not locked into place) ment.
=> page 127, fig. 105, or
> Press the brake pedal. — Predictive messages > page 129.
— Predictive control > page 133.
128
Driver assistance
Situation symbols speed in the country where the vehicle is be-

Depending on vehicle equipment, the following ing operated. As a result, a display of 50 in
symbols may be shown. The symbols indicate the the instrument cluster can mean either
situation to which the efficiency assist is respond- km/h or mph, depending on the country.
ing. — Except for the road network, which is re-
corded in the navigation system’s map infor-
Some symbols only appear if Predictive messag- mation, certain functions may not be availa-
es are switched on, and some symbols only ap- ble.
pear if Predictive control is switched on and Audi — Certain settings are automatically stored
adaptive cruise control” is actively regulating the and assigned to the remote control key be-
vehicle. ing used.
Symbol |Description
Predictive messages
Slow down
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist
(predictive messages only)
Adjustment to curves along route The symbol BS appears in the instrument cluster
(predictive control only) Additional display if efficiency assist recommends removing
symbols are shown in the Driver as- your foot from the accelerator pedal.
sistance display. Additional symbols that indicate the situation to
Speed limit which the efficiency assist is reacting are shown
Speed limit in the Driver assistance display > page 129, Sit-
uation symbols.
Exit ahead
Requirements
Intersection ahead — The cruise control system* or Audi adaptive

cruise control* must not be actively regulating.
— The vehicle speed must be at least 20 mph
Traffic circle ahead
(30 km/h).
(predictive control only) If the indica- — The remaining distance until the situation is
tor light turns on in green and red, it reached must be large enough to allow the sys-
is indicating that there is a difference tem to react to the situation.
between the speed limit and the set — The automatic transmission is not in the “S”
speed. driving program.
ZA WARNING Switching messages on and off

You can switch the system off or on. The adjust-
Observe the safety precautions and note the
ment options depend on the vehicle equipment.
cameras > page 117. Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > (Charging & Efficiency) > Efficiency as-
@ Tips sist > Predictive messages.
— The functions depend on the navigation da-
ta* being up-to-date and correct identifica- Z\ WARNING
tion by the traffic sign recognition*. — Observe the safety precautions and note the
— The system only detects traffic signs that limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
specify a speed limit. cameras > page 117.
8W1012721BC
— The display in the instrument cluster is — Pay attention to traffic and the area around
based on the units of measurement used for your vehicle when efficiency assist is >
129
Driver assistance
switched on. The driver is always responsible jam assist can assist the driver to stay within the
for assessing the traffic situation. lane detected by the system > page 138.
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist: Predic-

@ Tips tive control can adjust the set speed based on
— The traffic signs on the road always take pri- traffic and road conditions > page 133.
ority over the display. The driver is always
responsible for adhering to the regulations Z\ WARNING
applicable in the country where the vehicle Observe the safety precautions and note the
is being operated. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
— When a route is planned using the naviga- cameras > page 117.
tion system*, then system displays messag-
es based on an assumed route. Without @) Tips
route guidance, the system displays mes-
The system complies with United States FCC
sages based on an assumed route.
regulations and ISED regulations > page 284.
— The wording of the message may vary de-
pending on the selected Audi drive select*
mode and the selected gear.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Audi adaptive cruise

control
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, Audi adaptive

cruise control may consist of the following func-
tions:
Within the limits of the system, the adaptive Fig. 106 Example: driving into a curve
speed and distance control assists the driver in
controlling the speed and the set distance to the In some situations, the adaptive cruise control
vehicle driving ahead. If the system detects a ve- function is limited and you must assume control
hicle driving ahead, the adaptive cruise control of the vehicle when necessary, for example by ap-
can brake and accelerate your vehicle within the plying the brakes.
limits of the system. On open roads with no traf-
— When driving into a curve > fig. 106 and out of
fic, it functions like a cruise control system. The
a curve, the system may react to a vehicle in the
stored speed is maintained. When approaching a
neighboring lane and apply the brakes. You can
vehicle driving ahead, the adaptive cruise control
override the system by pressing the accelerator
system automatically brakes to match that vehi-
pedal briefly.
cle's speed and then maintains the set distance
— The system works with the various sensors and
as much as possible. As soon as the system does
cameras in the vehicle. Vehicles can only be de-
not detect a vehicle driving ahead, adaptive
tected once they are within the area and range
cruise control accelerates up to the stored speed.
covered by the sensors > page 118, fig. 99.
In stop-and-go traffic, the vehicle may brake to a — When driving around tight curves, a vehicle
full stop and then may also start driving again driving ahead that was previously detected may
automatically under certain conditions. no longer be detected, and the system may ac-
Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist: In celerate unexpectedly.
traffic jams or in stop-and-go traffic, the traffic
130
Driver assistance
— The system does not react to a stationary vehi- @ - @, you can find more detailed information
cle in the same lane if it expects that you can about the system. The displays depend on the
easily drive around the stationary vehicle by country and equipment.
turning the steering wheel.
— The system cannot react to stationary objects, Display th thespeedsmeter
such as vehicles at the end of a traffic jam, es- @ Marking for the set speed
pecially when traveling at high speeds. @ Current vehicle speed
— The system has a limited ability to detect © Available speed range for the adaptive cruise
vehicles that are a short distance ahead, off to control (example)
the side of your vehicle, or moving into your
iane: Image in the Driver assistance display
— Objects that are difficult to detect, such as mo- The display only appears when the Driver assis-
torcycles, vehicles with high ground clearance, tance display is open in the on-board computer
or vehicles with an overhanging load, may be > page 16.
detected late or not detected at all. Messages and settings
— The system does not respond to people, ani-
COG®
Detected vehicle driving ahead
mals, or objects that are crossing or approach-
Set target distance
ing from the opposite direction.
If you fall below the set distance, the dis-
ZA WARNING tance bars turn red from the bottom upward.
Your vehicle
©O©©OQ®
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and Availability of Audi active lane assist
cameras > page 117. Availability of traffic jam assist
Indicator lights
BI alo A - The speed/distance control is active. No
vehicles were detected ahead. The stored speed
is maintained.
RAZ-0205.
a - The speed/distance control is active. A vehi-

cle was detected ahead. The system controls the
speed and distance from the vehicle driving
ahead, and accelerates and brakes automatically.
A - The speed/distance control is active but the

vehicle is not ready to drive. A vehicle was de-
tected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will
BI3 not start driving automatically.
9)
nN|
fac B - The speed/distance control is active but the
vehicle is not ready to drive. No vehicles were de-
tected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will
not start driving automatically.
aA - The automatic braking is not enough to

maintain a sufficient distance from a vehicle driv-
Fig. 108 Instrument cluster: driver assistance display ing ahead. You must intervene > page 137, Driv-
er intervention request. >

8W1012721BC
Indicator lights and messages in the speedome-

ter @ -@ inform you about the driving situation
and the settings. In the Driver assistance display
131
Driver assistance
ZA\ WARNING You can set any speed between 15 mph

(20 km/h)» and the maximum possible speed
Observe the safety precautions and note the range @)?) > page 131, fig. 107.
cameras > page 117. Pausing cruise control
The control can be stopped at any time:
Operating Audi adaptive cruise control > While driving or when the vehicle is stationary:
Press the lever away from you in the direction
of the arrow. Or
RAZ-0096
» While driving: Press the brake pedal.
The Ba indicator light turns off.
Resuming regulation
The previously set speed can be resumed at any
time after a pause.
> To resume cruise control while driving, pull the

lever toward you in the direction of the arrow.
> To resume cruise control when stationary, pull
the lever toward you in the direction of the ar-
B4M-0232
row while pressing the brake pedal.
Changing the speed

> To increase or decrease the set speed in smaller
increments, briefly tap the lever toward G) or
© to the first level.
> To increase or decrease the set speed in larger
increments, briefly tap the lever toward () or
Fig. 110 Operating lever: changing the speed © to the second level.
> To increase or decrease the set speed quickly,
Switching on hold the lever toward @) or () until the mark-
> To switch on the adaptive cruise control, pull ing in the speedometer @) page 131, fig. 107
the lever up to position @ until it engages. has reached the desired speed.
Storing the speed and activating regulation Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist: Predic-
tive control can automatically adjust the set
If you have switched the system on, you can set
speed based on traffic and road condi-
the current speed as the “regulated speed” and
tions > page 133.
activate regulation:
Preselecting a speed
> Press the [SET] button (2). The set speed is indi-
cated with a marking in the speedometer (@) You can also preselect the speed when adaptive
=> page 131, fig. 107 and shown in the instru- cruise control is not active by moving the lever in
ment cluster > A\. the desired direction @)/@). Activate the previ-
> To save the speed while the vehicle is station- ously selected speed by pulling the lever toward
ary, also hold the brake pedal down. you in the direction of the arrow.
D_ Analog instrument cluster: 20 mph (30 km/h)

2) Depends on the country and engine
132
Driver assistance
Switching off — If you switch the ignition or the adaptive

If you do not want to use the adaptive cruise con- cruise control system off, the set speed is
trol for a long period of time, you can switch it erased for safety reasons.
off. — When adaptive cruise control is switched
on, the ESC and ASR automatically switch
> Push the lever away from you into position @) on.
until it clicks into place. — The system cannot be switched off or it may
The indicator light and the set speed will turn off. be interrupted if the road exceeds the maxi-
mum possible grade for safe operation.
Z\ WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions and note the Predictive control
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control and effi-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and ciency assist
cameras > page 117.
— The activated adaptive cruise control is only With predictive control, efficiency assist adapts
an assist system, and the driver is still re- the set speed in adaptive cruise control @
sponsible for controlling the vehicle. The => page 131, fig. 107 based on detected speed
driver is especially responsible for braking, limits and the upcoming route. Once the system
steering, starting to drive, and controlling no longer detects any incidents ahead, adaptive
the speed and the distance from other cruise control will accelerate back up to the last
vehicles. speed that the driver set. After switching on the
— Turn on the adaptive cruise control only if ignition, the availability of predictive control is
the surrounding conditions permit it. Always indicated by a message when the adaptive cruise
adapt your driving style to the current visu- control is first activated.
al, weather, road, and traffic conditions. Incident symbols indicate the situation to which
— Switch adaptive cruise control off temporari- predictive control is reacting > page 129, Situa-
ly when driving in turning lanes, on express- tion symbols.
way exits or in construction zones. This pre-
vents the vehicle from accelerating to the Requirements
stored speed when in these situations. — Predictive control is switched on in the MMI
— If you press the [SET] button @) when driv- => page 137.
ing at speeds below 15 mph (20 km/h)», — Adaptive cruise control is actively regulating
the minimum possible speed that the sys- => page 132.
tem can maintain will be set. If no vehicle is — The system can only react to speed limits that
detected ahead of you, the vehicle will accel- are 15 mph (20 km/h)” or higher.
erate up to that speed.
Overriding control
(i) Tips The driver can override the predictive control to
— Always keep your hands on the steering the route ahead at any time by pressing the ac-
wheel so you can be ready to steer at any celerator or brake pedal. If the system changes
time. The driver is always responsible for the vehicle speed to adapt to speed limits, you
adhering to the regulations applicable in can change the speed using the lever
the country where the vehicle is being oper- => page 132, fig. 110.
ated.
8W1012721BC
) Analog instrument cluster: 20 mph (30 km/h)
133
Driver assistance
Messages applicable in the country where the vehicle

If and a message with Predictive control is is being operated.
displayed when there is a malfunction, the effi- — Ifa speed limit is detected, the marking @
ciency assist functions are unavailable or limited. = page 131 of the set speed limit will be ad-
justed even if Audi adaptive cruise control is
A message that indicates the cause and possible not actively regulating.
solution may appear with some displays. The — Control by the system depends on which
weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor adaptive cruise control driving program is
may be covered. Clean the area in front of the set or on the selected Audi drive select*
sensors > page 119 and try to turn on the sys- mode.
tems again later. — After switching on the ignition and first
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author- driving onto a freeway or similar road with-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- out a speed limit, the system will regulate
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct- the speed to 80 mph (130 km/h). Then
ed. the system adjusts to the last speed set by
the driver.
ZA WARNING — There is no adaptation to speed limits when
— Observe the safety precautions and note the driving through highway interchanges and
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and when driving on or off the expressway.
cameras > page 117. — The system can fail to provide control or the
— Pay attention to traffic and the area around control may be faulty if the values from the
your vehicle when predictive control is camera-based traffic sign recognition* are
switched on. The driver is always responsible incorrect or the navigation system map data
for assessing the traffic situation. is outdated.
— The system does not consider “right of way” — When route guidance is switched on, the
rules and does not respond to traffic lights, system adapts to the route provided by the
so lack of driver attention in these situations navigation system. Driving without route
can increase the risk of an accident. guidance or leaving a route can result in
— The speed when driving through curves may faulty control.
be different from what you as a driver would
do or may not be suitable for the weather Setting the distance
and road conditions. If necessary, apply the Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
brakes and reduce the selected speed to be

B4M-0234
maintained in the Adjustment to curves

along route setting to reduce the risk of an
accident.
@ Tips
— Predictive control can exceed or drop below
the maximum permitted speed. The driver
is responsible for adhering to the permitted
speed limit. Fig. 111 Operating lever: setting the distance
— The traffic signs on the road always take pri-
ority over the display. The driver is always If you adjust the speed, you must also change the
responsible for adhering to the regulations time gap to the vehicle driving ahead. The higher >
D_ In certain countries
134
Driver assistance
the speed, the greater the distance that is need- Sym- Meaning
ed. bol
> Tap the rocker switch to display the distance The time between is approximately 2.4
that is currently set. seconds. This setting corresponds toa
> To increase or decrease the distance in incre- distance of approximately 219 feet
ments, tap the switch again toward @) or (). (100 m) when traveling at 62 mph
D
(67 m/h).
The newly-set distance will be shown briefly, for
example with the [eg indicator light. In the Driv- The time between is approximately 3.6
er assistance display, a graphic display is shown seconds. This setting corresponds toa
instead of the indicator lights > page 131,
distance of approximately 328 feet
1D
fig. 108. The display matches the functions of (100 m) when traveling at 62 mph
the indicator lights. (100 m/h).
When approaching a vehicle driving ahead, the Z\ WARNING

adaptive cruise control system brakes to match Observe the safety precautions and note the
that vehicle's speed and then adjusts to the set limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
distance. If the vehicle driving ahead accelerates, cameras > page 117.
then the adaptive cruise control will accelerate
up to the speed that you have set. (i) Tips
The following distances can be set: — When setting the distance, the driver is re-
sponsible for adhering to any applicable le-
Meaning
gal regulations.
— Depending on the selected driving program
The time between is approximately 1 and distance, driving behavior when acceler-
second. This setting corresponds toa ating may vary from moderate to sporty
distance of approximately 92 feet = page 137, Adjusting adaptive cruise con-
(100 m) when traveling at 62 mph
trol.
(28 m/h). — The distances provided are specified values.
The time between is approximately 1.3 Depending on the driving situation and how
seconds. This setting corresponds toa the vehicle ahead is driving, the actual dis-
distance of approximately 118 feet tance may be more or less than these target
nD
(100 m) when traveling at 62 mph distances.

(36 m/h).
The time between is approximately 1.8 Overriding control
seconds. This setting meets the general Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
recommendation of “half the speed
[RAZ-0096
shown on the speedometer”. This cor-

responds to a distance of approximate-
ly 164 feet (SO m) when traveling at
62 mph (100 km/h).
8W1012721BC
Fig. 112 Operating lever: decreasing the distance
135
Driver assistance
Requirement: adaptive cruise control must be Driving in stop-and-go traffi

switched on. Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Overriding control
You can completely override the control, for ex-
ample when passing or if you would like to accel-
erate more quickly.
> To accelerate manually, pull the lever toward

you in the direction of the arrow and hold it
there, or press the accelerator pedal.
Applies to: vehicles with safe start monitor
> To resume the usual cruise control, release the
Fig. 113 Instrument cluster: safe start monitor
lever or remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. Stopping with adaptive cruise control
When you are in the Driver assistance display, The adaptive cruise control system also assists
the message Overridden will appear. you in stop-and-go traffic!). Within the limits of
the system, your vehicle may brake and remain at
Decreasing the distance
a stop ifa vehicle driving ahead stops.
The function decreases the set distance and pro-
vides assistance, for example when merging Starting to drive with adaptive cruise control
when a lane is ending. As long as the message a ready to drive and A
> To further reduce the distance to the vehicle is displayed, your vehicle will begin driving when
ahead temporarily, pull the lever toward your- the vehicle ahead starts to move > /\.
self in the direction of the arrow and hold it in If you are stopped for several seconds, your vehi-
that position. cle will no longer drive autonomously for safety
> To resume the system control, release the lever. reasons, and the message will turn off.
The adaptive cruise control reduces the distance > To extend B ready to drive mode for several
and, if necessary, accelerates the vehicle above seconds or reactivate, pull the lever briefly to-
the set speed. When you are in the Driver assis- wards you in the direction of the arrow
tance display, the message Overridden will ap- => page 135, fig. 112.
pear. > To resume manual control of the vehicle, tap
the accelerator pedal.
ZX WARNING
Safe start monitor
— Observe the safety precautions and note the Applies to: vehicles with safe start monitor
cameras > page 117. The vehicle can still start to drive even if certain
obstacles are detected when starting to drive
— Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal
=> /\. If the surrounding area detection detects
could override the cruise control. Braking in-
an obstacle, you will be alerted to the danger by
terventions and corrective actions by the
the A indicator light.
system may not occur.
If you are in the Driver assistance display, the
display @ © fig. 113 and the message Warning!
will also appear. An audio signal will also sound.
Your vehicle will drive more slowly when starting. >
)) Depending on the engine
136
Driver assistance
This may also occur in some situations when The display @ only appears when the Driver as-
there is no apparent obstacle. sistance display is open in the on-board comput-
er > page 16.
> Press the brake pedal to slow your vehicle
down.
ZA WARNING
ZA WARNING Observe the safety precautions and note the
— Observe the safety precautions and note the cameras > page 117.
cameras > page 117.
— If the message B& ready to drive!) appears, Adjusting adaptive cruise control
your vehicle will start driving even if there is
an obstacle between your vehicle and the ve- You can adjust the system individually. The set-
hicle ahead. To reduce the risk of an acci- tings depend on the vehicle equipment.
dent, always make sure there are no obsta-
cles between your vehicle and the vehicle
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Audi adaptive
driving ahead.
cruise control.
@ Tips Possible settings:
For safety reasons, the adaptive cruise control
Applies to: vehicles without Audi drive select
will only be active if
Driving program - Depending on the selected
—The driver's safety belt is fastened
driving program and distance, the vehicle han-
— All doors and the hood are closed dling will be adjusted from Sport to Moderate.
— Your vehicle is not stopped for a long period
of time
Vehicle handling will be adjusted based on the

Driver intervention request set distance and the selected Audi drive select
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control mode > page 110.
al3
3
S||
S|ee| Store last distance - The last distance that was
set will be stored after the ignition is switched
off. If the distance is not stored, distance B
(time distance of approximately 1.8 seconds) is
automatically preset every time the ignition is
switched on.
Fig. 114 Instrument cluster: request for driver interven-

Predictive control > Set speed limit - adaptation
tion to speed limits can be switched On or Off. Regu-
lation With tolerance can also be selected, if de-
The request for driver intervention instructs you sired. In this scenario, you may fall below or ex-
to take over if the adaptive cruise control braking ceed the set speed in favor of increased efficien-
function is not able to maintain a sufficient dis- cy.
tance to the vehicle driving ahead. The system
Predictive control > Adjustment to curves along
will warn you of the hazard with the A indicator
route - Adjustment based on the road ahead can
light and the message Distance!. An audio signal
be adjusted. The setting influences vehicle
will also sound.
8W1012721BC
D_ This is not available in some countries.
137
Driver assistance
handling with predictive control, for example the Traffic jam assist supports the driver when driv-
speed for driving through curves. ing in traffic jams or in heavy traffic.
@) Tips In a speed range under 40 mph (65 km/h), the

system can help to keep the vehicle within a lane
Certain settings are automatically stored and calculated by the system. Within the limits of the
assigned to the remote control key being system, the system controls the steering auto-
used. matically when adaptive cruise control is switch-
ed on. Since traffic jam assist is only an assist
system, the driver must always keep his or her
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control hands on the steering wheel and be ready to
steer. The driver can override the control at any
If or is displayed when there is a mal-
time by actively steering.
function, the adaptive cruise control or traffic
jam assist functions may be unavailable or may The system is designed for driving on express-
be limited. ways and highways.
A message that indicates the cause and possible Requirements for using traffic jam assist:
solution may appear with some displays. The
> The traffic jam assist is preselected in the MMI
weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor
settings: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE >
may be covered. Clean the area in front of the
Driver assistance > Traffic jam assist.
sensors > page 119 and try to turn on the sys-
> Adaptive cruise control must be switched on
tems again later.
and active > page 132.
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
If you open the Driver assist display in the on-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
board computer => page 16, the indicator
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
light and the message Traffic jam assist will turn
ed.
on when a traffic jam is detected.
Please take over!
Activating or deactivating traffic jam assist
This message appears if the vehicle rolls back
> To activate or deactivate traffic jam assist,
when starting on a slight incline, even though the
press the > fig. 115 button.
systems are active. Press the brake pedal to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling or starting to move. Always switch off traffic jam assist in the
following situations:
Traffic jam assist — When increased attention is needed from the
driver
Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist — In construction zones

— In city driving
— On stretches of road with curves
B8V-0692
—In unclear traffic situations such as at intersec-

tions or toll stations
— The turn signal was activated.
Indicator lights
Traffic jam assist is available.
B and B - Traffic jam assist is switched on.

Fig. 115 Turn signal lever: button for traffic jam assist and Vehicles driving ahead were detected. Your vehi-
Audi active lane assist cle adapts while driving.
138
Driver assistance
B - Traffic jam assist switches off if the driver responsible for following the laws that are
does not take over steering after multiple driver applicable in the location where the vehicle
intervention requests. The system brakes the ve- is being operated.
hicle until it is stationary. — If traffic jam assist was deactivated through
the MMI, you can continue operating the
Steering intervention request
Audi active lane assist using the > fig. 115
If no steering activity is detected or the steering button > page 141. The traffic jam assist
power from the system is not sufficient, the driv- functions are no longer available.
er steering intervention request will alert the — You are not necessarily guided to the center
driver using audio and visual signals, such as of your lane.
or E. Take over the steering and keep your
hands on the steering wheel so that you will be Messages
ready to steer at any time. Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist
If the driver does not take over steering, adaptive if &. or |i is displayed when there is a mal-
cruise control (with traffic jam assist) will be function, the traffic jam assist functions may be
switched off. The system brakes the vehicle until
unavailable or may be limited.
it is stationary.*
A message that indicates the cause and possible
ZA WARNING solution may appear with some displays. The
cameras page 117.
tems again later.
— The activated traffic jam assist is only an as-
sist system, and the driver is still responsi- If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
ble for controlling the vehicle. The driver is ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
especially responsible for braking, steering, ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
starting to drive, and controlling the speed ed.
and the distance from other vehicles.
— Turn on the traffic jam assist only if the sur-
rounding conditions permit it. Always adapt
your driving style to the current visual,
weather, road, and traffic conditions.
— Switch the traffic jam assist off temporarily
when driving in turning lanes or highway ex-
its. This prevents the vehicle from accelerat-
ing to the stored speed when in these situa-
tions.
@) Tips
— Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel. The driver is always responsible for
adhering to the regulations applicable in
the country where the vehicle is being oper-
ated.
— Pay attention to applicable local regulations
8W1012721BC
relating to driving tasks, leaving space for

emergency vehicles, etc. The driver is always
139
Driver assistance
Distance warning @ The actual distance is smaller than the set

distance and you will be informed about the
danger.
Applies to: vehicles with distance warning
Adjusting the distance warning
S|iS
9]nN
‘|ja The system can be switched off or on in the MMI
and you can customize the distance warning
threshold. The settings depend on the vehicle
equipment.
— Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Distance warn-
ing.
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise control:
Fig. 116 Instrument cluster: display of the current dis- Messages
tance
1f Bo is displayed when there is a malfunc-
tion, the distance warning functions may be un-
RAZ-0400
available or may be limited.

sensors > page 119 and try to turn the system on
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control again later.
Fig. 117 Instrument cluster: distance warning
General information ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
At speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
km/h), this function measures the distance to the ed.
vehicle ahead as time. If the distance falls below

the warning threshold and remains there, the
ZA\ WARNING
system will warn you of the hazard with the & Observe the safety precautions and note the
indicator light. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 117.
Image in the Driver assistance display
Gi) Tips
The display only appears if the Driver assistance
— The driver is always responsible for adhering
display is selected in the on-board computer
to the regulations applicable in the country
= page 16 and the adaptive cruise control is not
where the vehicle is being operated.
actively controlling the vehicle.
— You may fall below the warning threshold
@ Detected vehicle driving ahead briefly when passing or when quickly ap-
@ Use the markings to help you estimate the proaching a vehicle driving ahead. There is
distance to an obstacle. Each marking repre- no warning in this scenario. A warning is giv-
sents approximately one second. en only if you fall below the warning thresh-
@® Set warning threshold. Depending on the set- old for an extended period of time.
tings, the display will be colored in from the
bottom to the top.
140
Driver assistance
Audi active lane assist/ The system functions in the speed range of ap-
proximately 40 mph - 155 mph (65 km/h -
lane departure warning
250 km/h).
General information
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control and traf-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist fic jam assist
The Audi active lane assist/lane departure warn- If the conditions are met, traffic jam assist
ing (called only Audi active lane assist in the vehi- switches on at speeds under approximately
cle displays and in the information that follows in 40 mph (65 km/h) > page 138.
this Owner's Manual) can detect lane marker
lines within the limits of the system. If you are
Z\ WARNING
approaching a detected lane marker and it ap- Observe the safety precautions and note the
pears likely that you will leave the lane, the sys- limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
tem can warn you with corrective steering anda cameras > page 117.
steering wheel vibration, if necessary.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
Display and warning

The availability, readiness to provide warnings,
and the warnings are indicated with indicator
lights. Audi active lane assist is ready to provide
warnings if an object is detected on at least one
side of the lane where your vehicle is traveling.
Fig. 118 Instrument cluster: driver assistance display
Driver assistance Indicator lights Meaning

display Audi virtual | Instrument
cockpit cluster (analog)
@ White 71% 7% Audi active lane assist is activated, but is not
lines ready to provide warnings.
@ Green ex 7\ Audi active lane assist is activated and ready to
line(s) provide warnings.
@ Red 7X 7 \ Blinking Audi active lane assist will warn you with correc-
line tive steering before exiting the lane. If the system
must intervene for a long period of time, a mes-
sage will request the driver to drive in the center
of the lane. The steering wheel will also vibrate
lightly when exiting the lane.
If the system is switched on but is not ready to — The speed is below the activation speed
provide warnings, one of the following systems — The lane is too narrow or too wide
limits or situations could be the cause: — The curve is too narrow
— The necessary lane marker lines have not been — The driver's hands are not on the steering
8W1012721BC
detected (for example, in a construction zone wheel

or because the lines are obstructed by snow, — Visibility is obstructed by a rise or dip.
dirt, water, or lighting)
141
Driver assistance
Steering intervention request — The system does not provide any corrective
If Audi active lane assist intervenes multiple steering or steering wheel vibrations if it de-
times when no steering activity is detected, the tects that you are passing another vehicle.
steering intervention request will provide a warn- — The image in the Driver assistance display
ing using audio and visual signals, such as BE. only appears if it was opened in the on-
Take over the steering and keep your hands on board computer > page 16.
the steering wheel so that you will be ready to
steer at any time. The system may no longer be Scale Rie mela
ready to provide warnings after a short time, and Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
it will only become active again later.
B8V-0692
If the driver does not take over steering, Audi ac-
tive lane assist will be switched off.
Behavior when a turn signal is active

Applies to: vehicles with side assist: The system
will not warn you if you activate a turn signal be-
fore crossing the lane marker line. In this case, it
assumes that you are changing lanes intentional-
ly. Fig. 119 Turn signal lever: button for Audi active lane as-
sist
Applies to: vehicles with side assist: If the turn
signal is activated, Audi active lane assist is > To switch the system on or off, press the button
ready, and a lane change has been classified as on the turn signal lever > fig. 119. The respec-
critical by lane assist due to vehicles traveling be- tive indicator light in the instrument cluster
side you or due to approaching vehicles, then a will turn off or on.
noticeable corrective steering movement will oc-
cur briefly before exiting the lane. This will at-
ZA WARNING
tempt to keep your vehicle in the lane.
ZX WARNING limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 117.
cameras > page 117. Adjusting Audi active lane assist
— The system warns the driver that the vehicle
is leaving the lane using corrective steering. You can adjust Audi active lane assist individually.
The driver is always responsible for keeping The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
the vehicle within the lane.
— Corrective steering may not occur at all in > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
certain situations, such as during heavy VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Audi active lane
braking. Always be ready to intervene.
assist/Lane departure warning.
Possible settings:
G) Tips
— Steering correction - In the Late setting, the
— Always keep your hands on the steering
steering correction will only occur shortly be-
wheel so you can be ready to steer at any
fore a wheel crosses a detected lane marker
time. The driver is always responsible for
line. In the Early setting, steering correction
adhering to the regulations applicable in
occurs continuously in order to help the driver
the country where the vehicle is being oper-
keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. If the >
ated.
142
Driver assistance
steering correction cannot be set, the steering — Audi pre sense rear monitors the rear traffic
correction will function in the Late setting. behind your vehicle and can react to an impend-
— Vibration warning - You can select if you would ing rear impact.
also like to be warned using a vibration in the — The swerve assist can help you to steer the ve-
steering wheel. hicle around an obstacle during an evasive ma-
neuver that is detected as critical.
@) Tips — The turn assist can detect vehicles in the oppo-
Certain settings are automatically stored and site lane as critical during a turning maneuver
assigned to the remote control key being and react with braking maneuvers.
used.
Audi pre sense safety measures
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense

Depending on the vehicle speed and the vehicle
iff or is displayed when there is a malfunc- equipment, the following functions may be initi-
tion, the active lane assist functions may be un- ated in certain situations:
available or limited. — Visual and audio warnings
A message that indicates the cause and possible — Reversible tensioning of safety belts
solution may appear with some displays. The — Closing the windows and panoramic glass roof
weather conditions may be too poor or the cam- — Adjusting the seats
era may be covered. Clean the area in front of the — Other preemptive safety measures by individual
camera > page 119 and try to turn on the sys- systems
tems again later.

ZA\ WARNING
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- Observe the safety precautions and note the
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct- limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
ed. cameras > page 117.
G) Tips
Audi pre sense
— Depending on the risk situation that is de-
Introduction tected and the selected Audi drive select*
mode, not all preemptive safety measures
Within the limits of the system, the Audi pre may be initiated under certain circumstan-
sense functions can initiate measures in certain ces. Certain functions can be adjusted or
driving situations to protect the vehicle occu- skipped if necessary.
pants and other road users. Depending on the ve- — Audi pre sense may also be limited or un-
hicle equipment, various Audi pre sense systems available under certain circumstances, for
may be installed: example if:
— There are passengers with unfastened
— Audi pre sense basic can react during emergen-
safety belts
cy and dangerous braking maneuvers and un-
— After turning on the ignition, as long as
stable driving situations (such as oversteering
the FJ or indicator light is on.
or understeering).
— When driving in reverse.
— Audi pre sense city and Audi pre sense front
— The front passenger's airbag is switched
can detect an impending frontal impact and re-
off
8W1012721BC
act with warnings, braking interventions, and

— There is an airbag control module mal-
preemptive safety measures for the vehicle oc-
function
cupants.
143
Driver assistance
— System functions may not be available if Up to speeds of approximately 155 mph

the ESC is limited or switched off, or if (250 km/h), the system may react to the follow-
there is a malfunction. ing situations:
—Avehicle driving ahead clearly applies the
NU ee elie brakes
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense basic — When approaching a vehicle ahead that is clear-
ly traveling more slowly
Audi pre sense basic is automatically active at
— When approaching a stationary vehicle
speeds of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and
higher. Audi pre sense basic can trigger preemp- Prewarning
tive safety measures during emergency braking
To warn about detected dangers, Audi pre
and dangerous braking maneuvers as well as in
sense1) / {@) will appear in the instrument clus-
unstable driving situations, such as oversteering
ter and an audio signal will sound.
or understeering > page 143, Audi pre sense
safety measures. A brief application of the brakes
The message Audi pre sense Bo / (@) will warn Ifa collision is imminent, there may be an acute
you about the danger. warning using a brief application of the brakes.
You will also be warned about the danger by an
Z\ WARNING indicator in the instrument cluster display. You
Observe the safety precautions and note the may only be able to avoid a collision by swerving
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and or braking strongly.
cameras > page 117.
Automatic braking force increase
If there is an impending collision and you are not
ON Tee ee La)
applying the brakes enough, the braking force
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense city
may be increased, depending on the situation.
Within the limits of the system, Audi pre sense
Automatic braking
city can warn about an impending front end colli-
sion and brake the vehicle strongly, if necessary. If you do not react to the acute warning, the sys-
The system uses the camera behind the wind- tem may apply the brakes with strong braking
shield and is available at speeds above approxi- force within the limits of the system in order to
mately 6 mph (10 km/h). reduce the speed of impact in the event of a colli-
sion.
Driving situations
If the brakes are applied until the vehicle is sta-
The situations to which the system reacts de-
tionary, © / Please take over! will appear in
pends on the vehicle speed.
the instrument cluster and you must take over
Automatic braking interventions are available at control of the vehicle.
vehicle speeds up to approximately 50 mph
(85 km/h). ZA\ WARNING
Up to speeds of approximately 50 mph — Observe the safety precautions and note the
(85 km/h), the system may react to the following limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
situations: cameras > page 117.
— Pedestrians are moving inside your lane — Audi pre sense cannot overcome natural
physical laws. It is a system designed to as-
sist and it cannot prevent a collision in every
circumstance. The driver must always inter-
vene. The driver is always responsible for
braking at the correct time. Do not let the >
144
Driver assistance
increased safety provided tempt you into crossing or oncoming vehicles, bars, railings,
taking risks. This could increase your risk of or railcars.
a collision.
— Audi pre sense city does not react to certain ONT eee
objects, such as animals, crossing or oncom- Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense rear
ing vehicles, bars, railings, or railcars.
— Audi pre sense may be limited or unavailable Within the limits of the system, Audi pre sense
in curves or when it is dark. rear uses data from radar sensors at the rear cor-
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve- ners of the vehicle and calculates the probability
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- of a rear-end collision with the vehicle behind
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of you.
an accident. Store objects securely while Audi pre sense preemptive safety measures can
driving. be initiated if the risk of a collision with the vehi-
cle behind you is detected.
G) Tips
Certain system functions may not be available ZA WARNING
if the ESC is limited or switched off — Observe the safety precautions and note the
=> page 114, if there is a malfunction, or if the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
hill hold assist* is switched on > page 108. cameras > page 117.
— Audi pre sense rear does not react to pedes-
ON eee Reels trians, animals, crossing objects, and ob-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense front jects not detected as vehicles.
Audi pre sense front provides the same scope of

G) Tips
functions as Audi pre sense city, with a few ex-
ceptions > page 144. The system has an exten- Audi pre sense rear functions may also switch
sive field of view due to additional sensors that off if there is a malfunction in the side assist
system.
are installed. Because of this, vehicles that are
braking or traveling significantly more slowly can
be detected earlier and more clearly, depending Rati
on the limits of the system. Applies to: vehicles with swerve assist
The following features apply to Audi pre sense The swerve assist can help you to steer the vehi-
front: cle around an obstacle detected in a critical area.
— Automatic braking interventions are available If you avoid an obstacle after the acute warning,
at vehicle speeds up to approximately 155 mph then the swerve assist assists you by applying
(250 km/h) slight steering adjustment to correct your steer-
—The system does not detect pedestrians ing wheel angle as long as you are actively steer-
ing. Swerve assist is available at speeds between
ZA WARNING approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 90 mph
(150 km/h).
— Observe the safety precautions > A\ in Audi
pre sense city on page 144.
ZA\ WARNING
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and — Observe the safety precautions and note the
cameras > page 117. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 117. >
— Audi pre sense front does not react to cer-
8W1012721BC
tain objects, such as pedestrians, animals,
145
Driver assistance
— Swerve assist does not react to pedestrians, > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
animals, crossing objects, and objects not HICLE > Driver assistance > Audi pre sense.
detected as vehicles.
Setting the prewarning
Gi) Tips You can adjust the warning time for the prewarn-
ing”) individually (Early/Medium/Late) or switch
— System functions may not be available if the
the prewarning off.
ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a
malfunction. Set the warning time for the early warning to
— An indicator in the instrument cluster will Early at first. If you feel that the prewarnings ap-
inform you when there is an intervention. pear too early, then set the warning time to Me-
dium. The Late warning time should only be set
Turn assist in special circumstances.
(i) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with turn assist
When turning left), turn assist can help to re- — If Audi pre sense is switched off, it switches
duce the risk of a collision with an oncoming ve-
on again automatically once the ignition is
hicle by using braking action to keep your vehicle
switched on again).
in its lane. The function is only available when
— Switch Audi pre sense off when you are not
the turn signal is turned on and at speeds up to
using public streets, when loading the vehi-
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
cle onto a vehicle carrier, train, ship, or oth-
er type of transportation, or when towing
ZA WARNING the vehicle. This can help to prevent an un-
— Observe the safety precautions and note the desired intervention from the Audi pre
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and sense system.
cameras > page 117. — Certain settings are automatically stored
— The turn assist does not react to pedes- and assigned to the remote control key be-
trians, animals, crossing objects, and ob- ing used.
jects not detected as vehicles.
@) Tips
ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a re) or is displayed when there is a malfunc-
tion, the Audi pre sense functions may be un-
malfunction.
available or may be limited.
— An indicator in the instrument cluster will
inform you when there is an intervention. A message that indicates the cause and possible
PNM lm e es) weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense may be covered. Bring the vehicle to a full stop,
switch the ignition off, and clean the area in front
You can switch Audi pre sense and the associated of the sensors > page 119.
systems on or off, or adjust them individually.
The adjustment options depend on the vehicle If the message still appears after switching the
equipment. ignition on again, have an authorized repair facili-
ty correct the malfunction as soon as possible.
2) When making a right turn in countries with left-hand drive

vehicles.
2) Incertain countries
146
Driver assistance
Side assist is less than 9 mph (15 km/h), the display in

the exterior mirror will turn on.
Description
Applies to: vehicles with side assist Information stage
If you do not activate a turn signal, the system
will inform you about objects classified as critical
:
by turning on the display in the respective exteri-
or mirror. The display remains dim in the infor-
mation stage so that you are not distracted while
looking forward.
Warning stage
Once you activate a turn signal, the system will
inform you about objects classified as critical by
turning on the display in the respective exterior
mirror.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the display

may also provide a warning when the turn signal
is not activated: if driver assist systems detect
that your vehicle is about to leave a lane, the dis-
play will blink to warn you about objects classi-
fied as critical. You can also be warned with cor-
rective steering > page 141, Audi active lane as-
Fig. 120 Driving situations and exterior mirror display sist/lane departure warning.
General information System limitations

Side assist monitors the blind spot and traffic be- The system uses the data from the radar sensors
hind your vehicle and provides assistance when at the rear corners of the vehicle > page 119,
you are changing lanes. If the system detects an fig. 102. They are designed to detect the left and
object approaching and classifies it as critical, the right adjacent lanes when the road lanes are the
display @ in the exterior mirror on that side of normal width. In some situations, the system
the vehicle will turn on, may react to vehicles in your own lane or lanes
that are not directly adjacent to yours, or to ob-
Driving situations jects on the side of the road. In this case, the dis-
The side assist warning is active at speeds above play will turn on even though there is no vehicle
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) and can help in in the critical area. These situations may include:
situations such as the following:
— Driving on the edge of your own lane
@ Your vehicle is being passed. The faster an- — Narrow lanes
other vehicle approaches from behind, the
— Curves
sooner the display in the outside mirror will
— High barriers on the side of the road
turn on.
@® There are vehicles traveling in the same direc- ZA WARNING
tion as you in a lane adjacent to yours. The
display in the exterior mirror will turn on
when the detected object is in the “blind
cameras > page 117. >
8W1012721BC
spot”, at the latest.

@® You are slowly passing another vehicle. If the
difference in speed between the two vehicles
147
Driver assistance
— The display may not appear on time when IY ett

Tel -1
vehicles are approaching or being passed Applies to: vehicles with side assist
very quickly.
fg or Eg is displayed when there is a malfunc-
tion, the side assist and exit warning system
functions may be unavailable or may be limited.
— If the window glass in the driver's door or
front passenger's door has been tinted, the
display in the exterior mirror may be incor-
rect.
may be covered. Clean the sensor area at the rear
— The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 120
corners of the vehicle > page 119, fig. 102 and
are diagrams and do not represent a true-
try to turn the systems on again later.
to-scale image of the sensor ranges.
— The system complies with United States FCC If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
regulations and ISED regulations ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
=> page 284. ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
ed.
OTe eed
Applies to: vehicles with side assist Exit warning
You can adjust the side assist to your preferences.
The settings depend on the vehicle equipment. Applies icles with exit warning system

VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Side assist.
Possible settings:
The system can be switched on and off. If the sys-

tem is switched on, the displays in the exterior
mirrors will turn on briefly each time the ignition
is switched on.
Brightness - Change the brightness only when

side assist is switched on, so that the selected
setting can be checked in the exterior mirror dis-
plays. Adjust the brightness to a level where the
display will not interfere with your view ahead.
Because the display brightness automatically
adapts to the ambient light, it may have already
been adjusted to the highest or lowest setting
during the automatic adaptation.
@ Tips
— If you switch side assist on or off, the exit Fig. 122 Front door: exit warning
warning will also switch on or off.
— Certain settings are automatically stored General information
and assigned to the remote control key be- Within system limits, the exit warning system
ing used. can detect traffic approaching from behind such
as vehicles, and provide assistance based on this
information when you are exiting the vehicle >
148
Driver assistance
=> fig. 121. The system uses the data from the ra- — The display brightness for the exit warning
dar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle. system cannot be adjusted.
—The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 121
Displays and warnings
If a door is opened while the vehicle is stationary, to-scale image of the sensor ranges.
the warning strip @ on that door and the display — The system complies with United States FCC
@ on that side of the vehicle will blink if another regulations and ISED regulations
road user is detected in a critical situation, If an- => page 284.
other road user that is classified as critical is ap-
proaching while a door is already open, the dis-
plays on that door will turn on.
The same messages apply for the exit warning

system and side assist > page 148.
ZA WARNING
cameras > page 117.
— Always pay attention to traffic and to the
area around your vehicle. The exit warning
system does not replace the attention of the
vehicle occupants. The vehicle occupants are
always responsible for opening the doors
and exiting the vehicle.
— The exit warning system does not respond
to people and cannot warn you about every
type of approaching objects, such as cyclists.
Always monitor the traffic as well as the ve-
hicle's surroundings with direct eye contact.
— The display may not appear in time when
vehicles are approaching very quickly.
— The exit warning system does not react to
stationary objects or pedestrians.
— The exit warning system will not provide
alerts if your vehicle is pulled too far into
the parking space so that it is hidden by ad-
jacent vehicles.
@) Tips
— The exit warning is switched on or off by the
side assist warning > page 148.
— The exit warning system can be available for
up to approximately three minutes after un-
locking the vehicle and opening the door as
well as after switching off the ignition. Then
8W1012721BC
the displays flash briefly and the system

switches off.
149
Parking and maneuvering
Parking and ZA WARNING

maneuvering Observe the safety precautions and note the
Introduction
cameras > page 117.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, various
parking aids will help you when parking and ma- @ Tips
neuvering. Audi recommends practicing parking in a traf-
Parking aid fic-free location or parking lot to become fa-
miliar with the systems. Practice parking in
The parking aid plus assists you while parking good light and weather conditions.
using audio and visual signals to warn you about
objects detected in front of, behind, and next to*
Parking aid plus
the vehicle > page 150.
The rearview camera shows the area behind the Ne ELS EUR
Applies to: vehicles with parking aid plus
vehicle in the center display. The lines in the rear-
view camera image help you to park and maneu-
B8W-0164
ver > page 152.
The peripheral cameras are an addition to the

rearview camera and help you to see various
areas around the vehicle while parking and ma-
neuvering > page 152.
The rear cross-traffic assist can warn you of ap-

proaching cross traffic when driving in reverse or
exiting a parking space > page 156.
Fig. 123 Center console: parking aid button
Assisted parking
General information
Park assist helps you to locate suitable parking
The parking aid assists when parking and maneu-
spaces and to park in them and exit them. Park
vering by providing warnings about obstacles. If
assist controls the steering movements when
the ultrasonic sensors on the vehicle > page 119
parking in free parking spaces. The driver is still
detect an obstacle, the system will provide audio
responsible for accelerating, braking, and shift-
and visual warnings.
ing gears. The driver must always monitor the
area around the vehicle and supervise the parking Activating and deactivating
Procedure > page 157.
Requirement: the vehicle speed must be under
Settings options approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
You can adjust parking aid functions individually. > Press the P” button in the center console.
The adjustment options depend on the vehicle When activating, a brief tone will sound and
equipment. the LED in the button will turn on.
— Automatic activation > page 150
Automatic activation
— Front and rear volume > page 151
— Entertainment fader > page 151. > The system activates automatically when re-
— Clean rearview camera > page 153 verse gear is engaged while the engine is run-
— View > page 154 ning. A brief tone will sound.
— Rear cross-traffic assist > page 156 If Automatic activation is switched on in the
MMI and if the vehicle approaches an obstacle at >
150
speeds below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), If the sensors detect an obstacle, audible and vis-
the parking aid will switch on automatically. Au- ual signals will warn you.
dible signals will sound once the obstacle is with-
Visual warnings
in the sensor detection area.
» Applies to: MMI: To switch Automatic activa- The visual warnings in the center display help you
tion on or off, select on the home screen: VEHI- to detect the critical vehicle area and to estimate
CLE > Parking aid > Automatic activation. the distance to an obstacle.
Automatic deactivation Red segments (@) show detected obstacles that

are in your vehicle's path. The red lines @) mark
The distance indicator for the parking aid plus
the expected direction of travel based on the
will deactivate automatically when driving for-
steering angle. A white segment (3) indicates a
ward faster than approximately 6 mph (10
detected obstacle that is outside of the vehicle's
km/h).
path. The closer your vehicle comes to the obsta-
cle, the closer the segments will move to the ve-
ZA\ WARNING hicle. The collision area has been reached when
Observe the safety precautions and note the the next to last segment is displayed. Obstacles
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and in the collision area, including those outside of
cameras > page 117. the vehicle's path, are shown in red. Do not con-
tinue driving farther.
©) Note
Audio signals
Keep enough distance from the curb to avoid
damage to the rims. The closer your vehicle gets to a detected obsta-
cle, the shorter the time between the audible sig-
@ Tips nals. A continuous tone sounds when an obstacle
is less than approximately 1 foot (0.30 m) away
— If the parking aid is switched off, it can only
from the front or rear of the vehicle. A continu-
be reactivated automatically when one of
ous tone sounds when an obstacle is less than
the following conditions is met:
approximately 0.7 feet (0.20 m) away from the
— The vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h)
sides* of the vehicle. Do not continue driving for-
— The ignition was switched off and back on
ward or in reverse >@).
again
— The parking brake was set and then released > To deactivate audio signals while parking, press
— The “P” gear was engaged and released «Jin the center display. The audio signals will
again be automatically activated again the next time
the parking aid is activated.
Adjusting the volume

Applies to: vehicles with parking aid plus
You can adjust the volume to your preferences.

HICLE > Parking aid. Or:
> Press|] in the center display when the parking
aid is active.
Possible settings:
Front volume - Volume for the front and side*

8W1012721BC
Fig. 124 Center display: distance display

area.
Rear volume - Volume for the rear area.
151
Entertainment fader - The volume of the audio/

G) Tips
video source is Lowered when the parking aid is
activated. — The segments in the side area* are detected
and analyzed when passing. If you switch
The new level is demonstrated briefly* when the the ignition off and on again or open the
volume is adjusted. door, or if the vehicle is stationary for a peri-
Error messages od of time, the surrounding area may have
changed in the meantime. In this scenario,
If P4 appears, the sensor in the respective area the side area* will appear black until the
or the speaker is faulty. Drive immediately to an area has been detected and evaluated.
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service — If the distance to an obstacle remains con-
Facility to have the malfunction repaired. stant, the volume of the distance warning
iffy or is displayed when there is a malfunc- gradually lowers after a few seconds until it
tion, the parking aid functions may be unavaila- is muted (this does not apply to the continu-
ble or may be limited. ous tone). If the obstacle comes closer than
it was before the sound was muted, the
tone will sound again. If the obstacle be-
comes farther away than it was before the
sound was muted, no tone will sound. Pay
attention to the vehicle's surroundings
when you start to drive.
tems again later.
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author- Rearview camera and

peripheral cameras
ed. Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras
ZA\ WARNING
B8V-0629
cameras > page 117.
— Sensors and cameras have spots in which
the surrounding area cannot be detected.
Objects, animals, and people may only be
detected with limitations may not be detect-
ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
vehicle's surroundings directly and do not Fig. 125 Orientation line display when parking
become distracted.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a rearview
@) Note camera or multiple peripheral cameras may be
— Keep enough distance from the curb to available.
avoid damage to the rims. The rearview camera helps you to park or maneu-
— Applies to: vehicles with park assist: If you ver using the orientation lines.
park in short parking spaces using park as-
sist, a continuous tone will sound from the The peripheral cameras expand the vehicle over-
parking aid when the distance to an object is view to include various views around the vehicle
less than approximately 0.7 feet (0.20 m). that can be selected.
Do not continue driving farther.
152
ZA WARNING (ead a)
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and Depending on vehicle equipment, you may be
cameras > page 117. able to manually initiate rear view camera clean-
ing.
Activating and deactivating > Move the window wiper lever S7 into the posi-
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras tion for cleaning the rear window © & page 58.
=
g
gz
=&
ZA\ WARNING
a Observe the safety precautions and note the
cameras > page 117.
Fig. 126 Center console: parking aid button
Activating and deactivating

> Press the P4 button in the center console.
When activating, a brief tone will sound and
the LED in the button will turn on. Or
> Press CJ in the center display if the visual dis-
tance indicator is shown > page 151, fig. 124. Fig. 127 Center display: aiming at a parking spot
The system can be activated at low speeds, such

When parking with the rearview camera or pe-
when maneuvering. ripheral camera, the parking aid plus audio and
Automatic activation visual warnings* will also assist you > page 151.
The system activates automatically when reverse Visual orientation lines

gear is engaged while the engine is running. A
@ The orange orientation lines show the vehi-
brief tone will sound.
cle's direction of travel >@. Turn the steer-
Automatic deactivation ing wheel until the orange orientation lines
align with the parking space.
The system will deactivate automatically once
@ You can use the horizontal blue markings to
the vehicle exceeds a certain speed while driving
help you estimate the distance to an obsta-
forward.
cle. Each marking represents approximately 3
feet (1 meter). The blue area represents an
ZA WARNING extension of the vehicle's outline by approxi-
Observe the safety precautions and note the mately 16 feet (5 meters) to the rear.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and @® You can recognize the rear bumper in the
cameras > page 117. lower display.
@ You should stop driving in reverse when the
red orientation line touches the edge of an
8W1012721BC
object, at the latest.
153
Symbols Objects, animals, and people may only be

Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
If 2/€9/< is displayed and the display area ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
represented by that symbol is not available, then vehicle's surroundings directly and do not
the camera on the that side is not available. The become distracted.
power exterior mirrors may have been folded in
or a door or the luggage compartment lid may C) Note
have been opened. — The orange orientation lines @) show the di-
If # is displayed, there is a system malfunction rection the rear of the vehicle will be travel-
and the display area represented by that symbol ing, based on the steering wheel angle. The
is not available. The camera is not working in this front of the vehicle swings out more than
area. the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty of
distance so that an exterior mirror or a cor-
If one of the symbols continues to be displayed,
ner of the vehicle does not collide with any
drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or
obstacles.
authorized Audi Service Facility to have the mal-
— Keep enough distance from the curb to
function repaired.
avoid damage to the rims.
ZA\ WARNING — Only use the images provided by the camera

on the rear of the vehicle when the luggage
— Observe the safety precautions and note the compartment lid is completely closed. Make
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and sure any objects you may have mounted on
cameras > page 117. the luggage compartment lid do not block
— Sensors and cameras have spots in which the rearview camera.
Operating the peripheral cameras

Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
> To select a view, press (2) - ) in the center dis-

play or tap in an area to show the vehicle in the
side view ).
Selecting a view in the side area
The vehicle surroundings are shown in the side
area of the display. You can switch between a vis-
ual display (Graphic) and the vehicle surround-
Fig. 128 Center display: peripheral cameras.
ings (Camera).
On vehicles with peripheral cameras, you can se- > Select |- ] > View in the center display when the
lect among different views. parking aid is active.
Selecting the views

> To display the entire selection bar, tap the cur-
rent view (d) or swipe at the edge of the selec-
tion bar from left to right.
2 Requirement: The vehicle surroundings (Camera) must be

selected in the View in the side area.
154
Symbol/Descrip-
Description
tion
Front corner This view makes it easier to drive out of tight parking spaces or areas and
or Display selection intersections with poor visibility. It shows an almost 180° panorama view
© |O|} © |/@] ©
bar in front of the vehicle.

Front This view assists you in using the full area for maneuvering in front of the
G;/@}
vehicle.
This view helps you to maneuver and position the vehicle more precisely.
Surroundings _ |The area around the vehicle is shown using the camera images. The vehi-
cle image is shown by the system > A\.
Réae This view assists you in using the full area for maneuvering behind the ve-
hicle. This is the rearview camera image.
This view can assist you when driving out of tight parking spaces or areas
Rear corner with poor visibility. It shows an almost 180° panorama view behind the
vehicle.
This view helps you to see the distance between the front tires and the
Front tires
curb and the steering wheel angle when parking.
This view helps you to detect the distance between the rear wheels and
Rear tires
the curb when parking.
Steering wheel an- The red lines represent the estimated direction of travel based on the
gle steering wheel angle >@.
ZA\ WARNING (@) Tips

— Observe the safety precautions and note the — Depending on the selected gear, it will auto-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and matically switch between the Front and
cameras > page 117. Rear views. If you switch the view manually,
— The Surroundings view is created from the the automatic front/rear camera change will
individual camera images. The vehicle image be temporarily deactivated.
is shown by the system. Objects and obsta- — When first activated while a forward gear is
cles above the camera are not displayed. engaged, the Front corner is displayed.
@) Note
— Only use the images provided by the camera
on the rear of the vehicle when the luggage
compartment lid is completely closed. Make
sure any objects you may have mounted on
the luggage compartment lid do not block
the rearview camera.
— The front of the vehicle swings out more
than the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty
of distance so that an exterior mirror or a
corner of the vehicle does not collide with
any obstacles.
8W1012721BC
155
Rear cross-traffic assist — Audible warnings: a continuous tone may

sound as an additional warning when driving in
reverse.
Applies to: vehicles with rear cross-traffic assist
— Automatic brake activation: if you do not react
to a warning, a brief braking by the system can
warn you of a potential collision with an ap-
proaching object.
The audible warning signal and the automatic

brake activation occur only when driving in re-
verse.
Switching on and off

— Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Parking aid > Rear cross-traffic assist.
Or:
— Select L.--] > Rear cross-traffic assist in the cen-
ter display when the parking system is active.
Messages
re or > is displayed when there is a mal-
function, the rear cross traffic assist functions
may be unavailable or may be limited.
Fig. 130 Center display: rear cross-traffic assist display
General information solution may appear with some displays. The
The rear cross-traffic assist monitors the area be-
may be covered. Clean the sensor area in the ve-
hind and next to the vehicle using radar sensors
hicle rear and try to turn the systems on again
at the rear corners of the vehicle. The system can
later.
detect moving objects that are approaching, such
as vehicles > fig. 129. A display in the MMI and If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
various warnings provide assistance when exiting ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
a parking space. ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
ed.
Requirements
— The parking aid is switched on > page 150 or ZA\ WARNING
reverse gear is selected. — Observe the safety precautions and note the
— The speed when driving in reverse must not be limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
higher than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). cameras > page 117.
— The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide
Displays, warnings, and braking
alerts about people and cannot warn you
— Display: the display @ appears only when the about every type of approaching objects,
parking aid is active. For vehicles with peripher- such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic
al cameras, this only happens in the Rear and as well as the vehicle's surroundings with di-
Rear corner camera views. Arrows show the direct eye contact.
rection from which the cross traffic is approach- — The system may not react if objects are ap-
ing. proaching very quickly.
— The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide
alerts if your vehicle is parallel or diagonally
156
parked or if your vehicle is pulled too far in- ing options

to the parking space so that it is hidden by Applies to: vehicles with park assist
adjacent vehicles.
— Once an automatic brake activation occurs,

the system cannot initiate another activa-
tion for several seconds.
ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a
malfunction.
— If there is an audio warning signal from the
rear cross-traffic assist, then the parking aid
may not be able to provide audio warnings
about detected obstacles under certain cir-
cumstances.
=> page 284.
— The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 129
to-scale image of the sensor ranges. Fig. 131 Parking options overview
Parking options
Assisted parking
@ Backing into parallel parking spaces
(ee eile laced)
@ Backing into perpendicular parking spaces
Applies to: vehicles with park assist
@®) Driving forward into perpendicular parking
If your vehicle is equipped with park assist, this spaces that you have already driven past
system helps you find suitable parking spaces. @) Driving forward into perpendicular parking
Parking spaces are measured using ultrasonic spaces if you have already driven to the space
sensors on the sides of the vehicle. yourself and the front of the vehicle is al-
The system helps you to park while the driver ready in the space
monitors the vehicle's surroundings with the
Options for exiting parking spaces
parking aids, cameras*, and direct eye contact.
The vehicle moves the steering wheel autono- @ Exiting parallel parking spaces
mously.
You can also drive into a perpendicular park-

Observe the safety precautions and note the ing space yourself and then activate the sys-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and tem. If this is the case, the front of the vehi-
cameras > page 117. cle should already be in the space () so that
the sensors can measure the space.
8W1012721BC
157
Parking space search be displayed. The system automatically suggests

Applies to: vehicles with park assist a parking option @).
a If the parking space allows different parking op-
&
g tions, they can be selected manually. Press one of
S3
3 the suggested parking options
(@ in the center
display.
Starting the parking process

As soon as the vehicle has reached the correct po-
sition, a P will appear in the center display above
the selected parking space @). The roof in the
parking aid display @) may show the required
braking or driving direction.
> Keep the vehicle as parallel as possible to the

parked vehicles or to the side of the road.
>» Make sure that the parking space is suitable for
your vehicle >@).
> Start the assisted parking process > page 159.
Maneuvering area
Fig. 133 Center display: activated parking space search The vehicle can go off course during the parking
process > A\. If there are obstacles within the
Activating the parking space search maneuvering area that block or endanger the
> To activate the parking space search, press the parking process, for example on the opposite
Pe button in the center console, or side of the street, a message may appear. You
> To activate the parking space search when the may need to drive farther forward and stay closer
parking aid is switched on, press P@ in the cen- to the row of parking spaces.
ter display.
The LED in the button will turn on and the display

Z\ WARNING
for finding a parking space will appear in the cen- — Observe the safety precautions and note the
ter display > fig. 133. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 117.
Searching for parking spaces — The driver is always responsible when enter-
> Drive forward to the row of parking spaces at a ing or exiting a parking space and during
low speed. For the best parking results, the ve- similar maneuvers.
hicle should be approximately 3 feet (1 m) from — Sensors and cameras have spots in which
the row of parking spaces. the surrounding area cannot be detected.
> The parking space search is first done on the Objects, animals, and people may only be
side of your lane. To switch the side for the detected with limitations may not be detect-
parking space search, activate the turn signal ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
for that side. Depending on vehicle equipment, vehicle's surroundings directly and do not
you may also be able to press on the side next become distracted.
to your vehicle in the center display.
@) Note
Selecting the parking space
— Parking spaces classified as suitable by the
If the system finds a parking space that could be system may have been detected incorrectly. >
suitable for the vehicle length and width, it will
158
The driver must decide if the parking space

displayed is suitable for the vehicle.
ZA\ WARNING
— Certain conditions near the parking space — Observe the safety precautions and note the
may cause the parking process to fail, such
as if the parking space is near trees or posts, cameras > page 117.
or if the ground is covered, for example, — The driver is always responsible when enter-
with gravel, snow, or ice. ing or exiting a parking space and during
similar maneuvers.
@) Tips — Do not use this function if the vehicle cannot
move freely, for example when on a vehicle
— Ifyou did not drive past a suitable parking
jack.
space too quickly, the parking space search
— Sensors and cameras have spots in which
can also be activated afterward by pressing
Pe.
Objects, animals, and people may only be
— The Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
must not be switched off during the parking
ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
process. If the ESC intervenes, the parking
vehicle's surroundings directly and do not
process will be canceled.
become distracted.
— You can also drive into a perpendicular park-
ing space yourself and then activate the sys-
@) Note
tem. If this is the case, the front of the vehi-
cle should already be in the space @) — Do not use the park assist systems when
=> page 157, fig. 131 so that the sensors transporting cargo that extends out of the
can measure the space. vehicle, when snow chains are mounted, or
— The system is not available when certain as- when the parking space is on a hill or in-
sist systems are switched on. cline.
— If there are suitable parking spaces on both — Park assist guides the vehicle either away
sides of the street, for example on a one- from curbs or onto them if other vehicles
way street, you can change the side where are parked on the curb. Make sure that your
the system is searching for parking spaces vehicle's tires and rims are not damaged.
by activating the turn signal for the other Resume control of the vehicle in time or
side or by pressing on that side in the center stop the parking process if needed to pre-
display. vent damage.
— The park systems do not provide support for
assisted parking on tight curves. G) Tips
Follow the legal regulations in the country
Park assist where you are located when using Park assist.
ere eure)
Parking with the park assists
The park assist helps you when parking and exit-

Requirement: a suitable parking space must be
ing parking spaces after the parking space
found and selected > page 157. The vehicle must
search. The park assist takes over the steering of
initially be stationary.
the vehicle while the driver accelerates, brakes,
and monitors the vehicle's surroundings. Park as- In the center display, arrows and symbols on the
sist can be interrupted at any time. vehicle roof 2) > page 158, fig. 133 indicate
8W1012721BC
what action is needed, such as applying the >
159
brakes or changing the direction. Park assist automatically steers the vehicle out of the parking
tomatically steers the vehicle into the parking space while the driver presses the pedals.
space while the driver presses the pedals.
> Start the engine.
>» After stopping the vehicle briefly, make sure > Press the Pe button in the center console.
the actual direction the vehicle is traveling > Wait until a message appears in the center dis-
matches the direction indicated by the park as- play that specifies the direction of travel re-
sist. quired to exit the parking space.
> Remove your hands from the steering wheel. > Activate the turn signal on the desired side or,
> Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. If the depending on vehicle equipment, press that
traffic situation permits, accelerate carefully side next to the vehicle in the center display.
> AX. The maximum parking speed is approxi- » Make sure the actual direction the vehicle is
mately 4 mph (7 km/h). traveling matches the direction indicated by the
> Follow the visual instructions in the center dis- park assist.
play and the warning tones until the parking > Remove your hands from the steering wheel.
process has ended. > Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. If the
traffic situation permits, accelerate carefully
ZX WARNING > AX. The maximum speed for exiting a parking
space is 3 mph (5 km/h).
> Follow the visual instructions in the display and
the warning tones until the vehicle has finished
cameras > page 117.
exiting the parking space.
— The park assist is an assist system. The driv-
>» The process of exiting the parking space has
er is still responsible for monitoring the ve-
ended if additional corrective movements are
hicle's surroundings and preventing colli-
no longer necessary and the specified steering
sions when using the system.
wheel angle is sufficient to drive out of the
— When using park assist to drive into or out
parking space. Resume control of the steering
of a parking space, the steering wheel turns
wheel >@).
quickly on its own. Reaching into the steer-
ing wheel spokes while this is happening can
result in injury.
ZA WARNING
G) Tips limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 117.
You can also cancel the driving direction set
— The park assist is an assist system. The driv-
by the system by shifting between a forward
er is still responsible for monitoring the ve-
gear and reverse gear. Based on the position
hicle's surroundings and preventing colli-
of the vehicle, the system then calculates the
additional steering and driving directions for sions when using the system.
maneuvering. — When using park assist to drive into or out
of a parking space, the steering wheel turns
quickly on its own. Reaching into the steer-
Exiting parking spaces with park assist
ing wheel spokes while this is happening can
result in injury.
If you parked the vehicle in a parallel parking
space, park assist can help you drive out of it. @) Note
In the center display, arrows and symbols on the Resume steering immediately after the last
vehicle roof @) > page 158, fig. 133 indicate corrective movement and the takeover
what action is needed, such as applying the prompt, so that the specified steering wheel
brakes or changing the direction. Park assist au- angle is not recentered.
160
Interrupting the park assists

Park assist will be canceled automatically in the

following scenarios:
— You switch the system off.
— You start steering.
— The speed is too high.
— The time limit is exceeded.
— An obstacle is detected.
— ESC intervenes.
Resume control of the vehicle, end the parking

process manually, or:
— You can resume the parking process in some sit-
uations. Press the Pe button in the center con-
sole.
— To continue exiting the parking space, switch
the engine off and on. Press the Pe button.
ZX WARNING
cameras > page 117.
Messages
If the Be oe] or fd indicator light turns on, the

park assist is not available or was interrupted.

tems again later.

ed.
8W1012721BC
161
Telephone
Telephone @) Note
Introduction Read the information about Audi connect, and
Applies to: vehicles with telephone be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=> page 173.
You can operate various telephone functions easi-
ly through the MMI in your vehicle. @) Tips
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip- — The Bluetooth connection range is limited
ment, the following options may be available: to inside the vehicle.
— Connecting a cell phone with Bluetooth —Aselection of supported Bluetooth devices
— Using two telephones can be found in the database for tested mo-
— Using the Audi phone box bile devices at www.audi.com/bluetooth.
ZX WARNING Setup
— Medical experts warn that mobile devices
Connecting a mobile phone via Bluetooth
can interfere with the function of pacemak-
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
ers. Always maintain a minimum distance of
about 7.9 inches (20 cm) between the mo- Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
bile device antennas and the pacemaker. the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
— Do not carry the mobile device in a pocket settings must be open on your mobile device dur-
directly over the pacemaker when the ing the connection setup. The mobile device to be
phone is switched on. connected must not be actively connected to any
— Switch the mobile device off immediately other Bluetooth device. The MMI must only be
if you suspect it may be interfering with connected to one mobile device.
the pacemaker. > Enable the Bluetooth function and visibility on
— Do not use the voice recognition system* the MMI = page 213 and the mobile phone.
=> page 26 in emergencies because your > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
voice may change in stressful situations. The PHONE.
system may take longer to dial the number > Follow the system instructions. The available
or may not be able to dial it at all. Dial the Bluetooth devices will be displayed after sever-
emergency number manually. al seconds.
— Switch your mobile device off in areas where > Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
there is a risk of an explosion. These loca- displayed Bluetooth devices.
tions are not always clearly marked. This > To update the list, press OQ.
may include gas stations, fuel and chemical
A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
storage facilities or transport vehicles, or lo-
cations where fuel vapors (such as propane generated.
> Confirm the PIN on your mobile device.
or gasoline vapor in vehicles or buildings),
chemicals or large quantities of dust parti- > Follow the system instructions.
> Pay attention to any other system prompts on
cles (such as flour, sawdust or metal) may
be present in the air. This also applies to all the MMI and on your cell phone.
other locations where you would normally After connecting successfully
turn your vehicle engine off.
The cell phone contacts are automatically loaded
— The demands of traffic require your full at-
in the MMI. This process can take several mi-
tention. Always read the chapter > page 19,
nutes, depending on the number of contacts.
Traffic safety information.
Depending on your cell phone and the connection
type, you can use the following functions:
162
Telephone
Handsfree Applies to: mobile devices with Bluetooth Mes-

Requirement: your cell phone must be connected sage Access Profile (MAP): You can send and re-
to the MMI via a Bluetooth Hands Free Profile
ceive messages with both mobile devices
=> page 170.
(Bluetooth HFP).
You can use the hands-free system. You can make Connecting another mobile device
calls using the antenna on your mobile device. Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
to the MMI. The vehicle must be stationary and
Sending and receiving messages
the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
See > page 170. settings must be open on your mobile device dur-
ing the connection setup. The mobile device to be
@ Tips connected must not be actively connected to any
— Pay attention to any system prompts dis- other Bluetooth device.
played on your mobile device or the MMI,
> Enable the Bluetooth function and visibility on
for example if the system should connect
the MMI = page 213 and the mobile phone.
automatically in the future. Depending on
the mobile device, you may need to down-
PHONE > (°, or
load contacts and confirm access to your
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
messages separately.
SETTINGS > Connected devices > Telephone 1
— You can also search for the MMI on your mo-
or Telephone 2 > New connection.
bile device using the Bluetooth device
> Follow the system instructions. The available
search.
Bluetooth devices will be displayed after sever-
— You only have to pair your device one time. al seconds.
Bluetooth devices that are already paired
> Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
automatically connect to the MMI when the
displayed Bluetooth devices.
Bluetooth function is switched on, when > To update the list, press O.
they are within range, and when the ignition
is switched on. The last connected mobile A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
device is given first priority. generated.
— You can manage additional settings for con- > Confirm the PIN on your mobile device.
nected mobile devices in the Connected de- > Follow the system instructions.
vices menu > page 214. > Pay attention to any other system prompts on
— When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth the MMI and on your cell phone.
connection to the mobile device will auto- After connecting successfully
matically disconnect. Depending on your
mobile device, phone calls in progress may See > page 162, After connecting successfully.
be automatically redirected from the MMI Switching between two mobile devices
to your mobile device so that you can con-
tinue the call on your phone. Requirement: phone 1 and phone 2 must be con-
nected to the MMI.
Using two telephones > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Applies to: vehicles with telephone, and Audi phone box PHONE > <1.
You can connect two mobile phones to the MMI
@) Note
at the same time using the Bluetooth HFP, for ex-
ample a business phone and a private phone. You Read the information about Audi connect, and
8W1012721BC
can be reached in your vehicle through both mo- be sure to note the connectivity costs section
bile phones. => page 173.
163
Telephone
Disconnecting a mobile device maneuvers, which increases the risk of an ac-

Applies to: vehicles with telephone cident. Store objects securely while driving.
> To disconnect a Bluetooth device from the MMI,

use the Connected devices menu > page 214.
(@) Note
Applicable to U.S.A.
Operation of the Audi phone box is subject to

Using the Audi phone
the following requirements of the Federal
box Communications Commission:
General information — This is a CONSUMER device.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box — BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE-
VICE with your wireless provider and have
your provider’s consent. Most wireless pro-
viders consent to the use of signal boosters.
Some providers may not consent to the use
of this device on their network. If you are
unsure, contact your service provider.
— You MUST operate this device with approved
antennas and cables as specified by the
manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed
at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person.
Fig. 134 Front center console: Audi phone box with con-
— You MUST cease operating this device im-
nections
mediately if requested by the FCC or a li-
Depending on vehicle equipment, you may be censed wireless service provider.
able to use the following functions with the Audi — WARNING: E911 location information may
phone box: not be provided or may be inaccurate for
— Make phone calls using the vehicle’s exterior calls served by using this device.
antenna
— Charge a mobile device using the USB input @) Note
— Charge a mobile device wirelessly Applicable to Canada
— Reminder signal In Canada, operation of a Zone Enhancer,

such as an Audi phone box, is subject to the
Limitations following requirements of the Innovation,
In some situations, the functions of the Audi Science and Economic Development Canada
phone box may be limited or temporarily unavail- (ISED):
able. For example, this may happen if — This is a CONSUMER device.
— There is one more than mobile device in the — BEFORE USE, you MUST meet all require-
Audi phone box ments set out in CPC-2-1-05. At the time of
— The mobile device is located in a bag or a pro- printing this user manual, the CPC-2-1-05
tective case client procedures circular of ISED Canada
— There are objects between the Audi phone box was available at the following web page:
and the mobile device http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.
— The mobile device is not positioned in the cen- nsf/eng/sf08942.html.
ter of the Audi phone box — You MUST operate this device with approved
antennas and cables as specified by the
Z\ WARNING manufacturer. Antennas MUST NOT be in-
stalled within 20 cm of any person.
Loose objects can be thrown around the vehi-
cle interior during sudden driving or braking
164
Telephone
— You MUST cease operating this device im- Charging a mobile device wirelessly
mediately if requested by ISED or a licensed Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
wireless service provider.
You can charge your mobile device wirelessly us-
— WARNING: £911 location information may
ing the Audi phone box.
not be provided or may be inaccurate for
calls served by using this device. Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
Your mobile device must meet the Qi standard.
@) Tips > Make sure that the wireless charging function is
The system complies with United States FCC switched on:
regulations and ISED regulations > page 284. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > General > Reminder signal and
Making phone calls using the exterior mobile device charging.
enter) > Switch the Mobile device wireless charging
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box function on.
With the Audi phone box, you can make calls us- > To charge your mobile device wirelessly, lay it
ing the exterior antenna on the vehicle. Using the on the @ symbol @ © page 164, fig. 134 in the
external antenna helps when there is a low signal center of the Audi phone box with the display
and also provides better reception quality. facing up.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. Z\ WARNING

> To make phone calls through the vehicle's exte- — The mobile device may become hot during
rior antenna using your mobile device, lay your wireless charging. Pay attention to the tem-
device on the phone symbol @) > page 164, perature of your mobile device and be care-
fig. 134 in the center of the Audi phone box ful when removing it from the Audi phone
with the display facing up. box.
— An alternating magnetic field is used for
eT cliem aCe a me ema Beh) mills wireless charging. Maintain a minimum dis-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box tance of approximately 2.4 inches (6 cm) to
the Audi phone box charging plate. The
You can charge your mobile device using a special
thresholds for prolonged exposure at this
USB adapter with the Audi phone box
distance comply with ICNIRP1998. There-
=> page 202.
fore, interactions such as irritation of senso-
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. ry organs, malfunctions of active implants
(such as pacemakers, infusion pumps, or
> To charge your mobile device via USB, connect it
neurostimulators) or effects on passive im-
to the USB input
@ > page 164, fig. 134.
plants (such as prosthetic limbs) is highly
unlikely. If you have an implant, consult a
@ Tips medical specialist if you have any questions.
— You can purchase a USB adapter from an au- You can also switch the function for wireless
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi charging in the Audi phone box on and off.
Service Facility, or at specialty stores. You can continue to charge your mobile de-
— Audi recommends using Audi Genuine Ac- vice using a cable connection.
cessories. Audi has verified their reliability,
safety, and suitability. (i) Tips
— The maximum charging output is 5 W.
8W1012721BC
—The charging time and temperature will vary

depending on the mobile device being used.
165
Telephone
Mobile device reminder signal > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box PHONE.
When the device reminder signal is switched on, The following phone functions will be available:
you will be notified that your mobile device is still @ Search
in the Audi phone box when you leave the vehicle. GB! CAULLISE cscs x a cress x x onoowne x x vreeatn « 166
Requirement: your mobile device must be located ()! Favorites! eee ss cee ss ears se Pes 167
in the Audi phone box (if Qi-capable) or connect- @ Contacts ..................00. 167
ed to the Audi music interface with a USB adapt- MEY! Voicemail. csiciss . csesese s sxsxece v = 208 168
er, and the Audi smartphone interface must be
© Dial phone number ............ 168
active or your iPhone must be connected to the
@ Switch telephones ............. 169
MMI via Bluetooth and charging using a USB
adapter connected to the Audi music interface.
Managing call lists
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Applies to: vehicles with telephone
SETTINGS > General > Reminder signal and
mobile device charging.
|RAX-0145]
2D | catttist
eee o—@
The following settings may be available, depend- Pec CPE
CNet ed)
ing on vehicle equipment: Cree aL eoer |
Albinson, Mary (2)
— Signal tone SOME e271
001718765432 (1)
— Off
Spoken cue Fig. 136 Center display: call list
this setting is switched on at the factory. Opening call lists using the MMI
Mobile device notes: reminder, charge level > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
PHONE > Call list.
When this function is switched on, the charge
status of your mobile device is displayed. You will Opening call lists using the multifunction
also be reminded not to forget your mobile de- steering wheel
vice when Leaving the vehicle.
> Select in the instrument cluster: Telephone tab
> ) button > Call list.
Using the telephone
Possible call list symbols:
Accessing the telephone functions
Missed calls
QOOOCLO
Dialed numbers
Gi Accepted calls
Editing a telephone number
a0 l,
© Ly>B cy Display business card ........... 168
Number of interactions with a con-
a8
a PY =.) tact
If more than one interaction with a contact or

Fig. 135 Center display: selection menu number has taken place, the last one is displayed
in the form of an arrow @), @), or @).
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
to the MMI. Press and hold a contact or a phone number in
the list until the Options menu appears.
166
Telephone
Depending on your mobile device, the following Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
options may be available: to the MMI.
— Store as favorite > page 167.
Opening the directory
— Send text message > page 170.
— Send e-mail > page 171. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
PHONE > Contacts.
Edit number
The contacts will be displayed. You can change
Edit a phone number before dialing it. the sort order > page 170, Sort order.
Show history Deleting imported contacts
Requirement: you must have had more than one Requirement: you must have imported at least
interaction with a contact. one contact > page 170.
All interactions with a contact or a number are > Select: Contacts > Z > one or more text mes-
displayed. sages > Delete > (Done). The imported contacts
are deleted.
Managing favorites
Directory options
> Press and hold a contact in the directory until
You can store contacts for all connected mobile
the Options menu appears.
devices as shortcuts in the favorites list.
Depending on your mobile device, the following
Selecting favorites using the MMI
options may be available:
PHONE > Favorites. — Store as favorite > page 167.
— Send contact: you can select Text message or
Opening favorites using the multifunction E-mail > page 170.
steering wheel
— Send text message > page 170.
> Select in the instrument cluster: Telephone tab — Send e-mail > page 171.
> 2) button > Favorites.
i) Tips
Storing favorites
— Pay attention to any synchronization
> Press YY page 168 in the business card, or prompts on your mobile device when down-
> Press Store as favorite in the options loading contacts.
=> page 166.
— The contacts from the mobile device may
Deleting favorites not be transferred in alphabetical order. If
there are too many entries, contacts with
> Press W © page 168 in the business card, or different first letters may be missing in the
> Select: Favorites > Z > one or multiple favor- MMI.
ites or Select all > Delete > (Done).
— Only the contacts from the active connected
mobile device are displayed.
@) Tips — The contacts in the local MMI memory are
The favorites can only be edited via the MMI. always visible and can be accessed by other
users.
Managing the directory — After switching off the ignition and exiting
Applies to: vehicles with telephone the vehicle, the mobile device directory will
8W1012721BC
be loaded when the MMI is started again if

You can manage up to four directories in the
the mobile device is within range and the >
MMI.
167
Telephone
Bluetooth function is switched on in the mo- — Using text input in the MMI > page 23.
bile device and the MMI. — Using voice operation > page 26.
— Only the contacts in the local MMI memory
can be deleted. Call options
Opening business cards

> To accept or end a call, press the @ button on
the multifunction steering wheel. Operating
The business card shows you details about a con- => page 13 and > page 29.
tact.
Depending on your mobile device, the following
> To open a business card, press ona contact in options may be available in the MMI when there
the directory, or is an incoming call:
> Press © in the call list©) > page 166, fig. 136.
— Answer
Possible options in the business card: — Decline
> Call: press on a phone number. — Message
> Storing a favorite: press YY.
> Deleting a favorite: press Ww. If you exit the vehicle during a phone call, the
> Sending a text message: press |]. Bluetooth connection will be disconnected. De-
> Starting navigation: press on an address. pending on your mobile device, phone calls in
> Sending an e-mail: press on an e-mail address. progress may be automatically transferred from
> Send contact: you can select Text message or the MMI to your mobile device.
E-mail > page 170.
@) Tips
Listening to voicemail The radio or media playback is muted during a

Applies to: vehicles with telephone phone call.

During a phone call
PHONE > Voicemail.
Requirement: there must be no voicemail num-

Depending on your mobile device and the type of
ber stored.
connection, the following options may be availa-
> Entering the voicemail number: enter the de-
ble during a call:
sired number. Press OK.
— End call...
Requirement: a voicemail number must be stor-
— Mute
ed.
> Dialing the voicemail number: press Voice- Sending a tone sequence
mail. The call begins immediately.
Press Numbers. You can enter tone sequences
(DTMF) and send them to the other party on the
@ Tips call.
This service must be set up and activated by
the mobile phone service provider. Hold
Puts the current call on hold. To resume the call,
Dialing a telephone number press Resume.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may

have the following options for dialing a phone
number:
168
Telephone
Answering an incoming call Microph. input

One of these options will be available, depending You can adjust the input level of the microphone
on the mobile phone service provider: using the slider.
— Answer: the current phone call will be put on
hold. The incoming call will be answered. @ Tips
— Replace: the active call will be replaced with The call waiting function must be activated in
the incoming call. your mobile device to be alerted about an in-
coming call during an active call.
Declining an incoming call
If you select Decline, the incoming call will be de- Making an emergency call
clined. Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Conference Requirement: a mobile device must be connected

Requirement: two phone calls must be in prog- to the MMI.
ress. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Depending on your mobile phone service provid- PHONE > Dial number > the local emergency
er, you can add a call on hold and up to five active call number (for example, 911) > Dial.
callers to a conference call.
Z\ WARNING
Swap call
— Because your phone works with radio sig-
Requirement: two phone calls must be in prog- nals, a connection cannot be guaranteed un-
ress. der all circumstances. Do not rely on only
You can alternate between two phone calls. your phone when it comes to essential com-
munication (such as during a medical emer-
Additional call options gency).
Press More. — Always follow the instructions given by the
emergency personnel during an emergency
Depending on the mobile device being used and call and only end the call when they instruct
the type of connection, the following options you to do so.
may be available:
Transfer call to mobile device Settings

Transfer the current call to your mobile device or Phone settings
Bluetooth headset*. Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Switch to hands-free > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Transfer the current call from your mobile device PHONE > ©.
to the MMI.
The following options may be possible, depend-
Add call ing on your mobile device:
You can start a new call. The current call will be — Decline with text message
put on hold. — Edit voicemail number
Remove conference member Switching between two mobile devices

You can remove conference call members individ- Requirement: phone 1 and phone 2 must be con-
8W1012721BC
ually when a conference call is active. nected to the MMI.
169
Telephone
Switch telephones: the device name of the avail- Importing contacts

able mobile device is displayed. You can switch Requirement: a USB storage device must be con-
the phone by pressing the button. nected to the Audi music interface > page 202.
Ringtone and volume settings The USB storage device contains contacts in the
vCard format (.vcf). They must not be located in
— Ringtone and message volume: you can adjust sub-folders.
the volume using the slider.
— Ringtone: select a ringtone from the list. Applies to MMI: Select: Import contacts > Search
— Microphone input level: you can adjust the infor import data > USB device 1/USB device 2 >
put level of the microphone using the slider. desired contacts or Select all contacts > Start
import.
Data module serial number (IMEI)
Applies to: vehicles with data module G) Tips
The serial number (IMEI) will be displayed. —The imported contacts are stored in the lo-
cal MMI memory.
Directory settings — There should be no other files or folders on
Applies to: vehicles with telephone the storage medium containing the contacts
to be imported.
— Apple devices and MTP devices (such as
PHONE > Contacts > ©.
smartphones) are not recognized as USB
Switching between two mobile devices storage devices.
Requirement: telephone 1 and telephone 2 must

be connected. Messages
Switch telephones: the device name of the avail- Text messages
able mobile device is displayed. You can switch Applies to: vehicles with telephone
the phone by pressing the button. Requirement: your mobile device must be con-
The directory for the selected phone will be dis- nected to the MMI via Bluetooth Message Access
played. Profile (Bluetooth MAP).
Hide grayed-out contacts > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
MESSAGES > (:) > e-mail (phone 1)/e-mail
When this function is switched on, contacts that
(phone 2)*.
have no phone numbers stored for them will be
hidden. The following functions are available:
Sort order — New text message*

— Inbox
You can sort the contacts by Last name or First
name. — Sent
— Outbox*
Download contacts — Drafts*
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected — Deleted
to the MMI. User defined*
To update the contacts in the MMI, you can man- If necessary, user-defined folders will be copied
ually download your mobile device contacts. De- to your mobile device.
pending on the mobile device, you may need to
disconnect and reconnect the Bluetooth connec- Message options
tion to update the contacts. Press ona text message.
170
Telephone
Depending on the country, the following options — Outbox

may be available: — Drafts*
— Read out — Deleted*
— Reply
User defined*
— Forward
— More If necessary, user-defined folders will be copied
to your mobile device.
To switch between messages, press < or >.
Message options
Press More. Depending on your mobile device
and the selected mailbox, additional options may Press on an e-mail.
be available: Depending on the country, the following options
— Call may be available:
— Forward — Read out
— Navigate — Reply
— Extract numbers — Reply all
— Send again — Forward
— More
Settings
Press 2}. To switch between messages, press < or >.
Press More. Depending on your mobile device

New text message notification
and the selected mailbox, additional options may
When the function is switched on, an envelope be available:
in the MMI status bar will indicate when there is — Call
a new text message.
— Forward
G) Tips — Extract e-mail

— Navigate
Only new received messages may be displayed — Extract numbers
depending on your mobile device.
— Show all recipients
— Send again
Applies to: vehicles with telephone Settings
Requirement: your mobile device must be con- Press 2}.

nected to the MMI via Bluetooth Message Access New e-mail notification
Profile (Bluetooth MAP).
When the function is switched on, an envelope
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: in the MMI status bar will indicate when there is
MESSAGES > (©) > e-mail (phone 1)/e-mail a new e-mail.
(phone 2)*.
@) Note
The following functions are available:
Read the information about Audi connect, and
— New e-mail be sure to note the connectivity costs section
— Inbox = page 173.
— Sent
8W1012721BC
171
Telephone
Troubleshooting
The information that follows lists some trouble-

shooting options. They depend on the equip-
ment.
Problem Solution
Pairing the mobile device to the Make sure the requirements for connecting a mobile phone have
MMI failed. been met > page 162, or
make sure you did not accidentally decline the PIN for establishing
a connection on your mobile phone. If necessary, repeat the pair-
ing process > page 162.
After pairing, not all contacts or Avoid using special characters in names.
no contacts have been loaded in- Avoid using contact groups on your mobile device.
to the MMI. Check for prompts on your mobile device when connecting via
Bluetooth.
Certain telephone functions are The telephone functions depend on the mobile device service pro-
grayed out or not available. vider and the mobile device you are using.
Some telephone functions may Check if the Bluetooth settings on your cell phone are limited or
be switched off or not available, individual Bluetooth settings are deactivated. This may be the
even though the mobile device is case with business cell phones.
supported.
The MESSAGES menu is not avail- Make sure your mobile device has an option to show messages op-
able. tion and that it is enabled.
Wireless cell phone charging is Check if wireless charging with the Audi phone box is switched on.
not working or is interrupted. Check if your mobile device is Qi-capable.
Make sure your mobile device is positioned correctly in the Audi
phone box > page 164 and that there are no objects located be-
tween the phone box and the phone.
172
Audi connect
Audi connect rate data plan is strongly recommended. For

more information, contact your cell phone
General information service provider or refer to the owner's man-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect ual for your Wi-Fi device.
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip- — You are responsible for all precautions taken
for data protection, anti-virus protection,
ment, the following functions may be available:
and protection against loss of data on mo-
— Audi connect Infotainment bile devices that are used, for example, to
— Audi connect vehicle control access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hot-
spot.
ZA WARNING — In areas with poor GPS reception or outside
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only use the coverage range of the respective cell
Audi connect services and the Wi-Fi hotspot phone service provider, some functions
only if the traffic situation permits it. Read and/or services may not be available, it may
and follow the guidelines provided in not be possible to send or receive data, or
= page 19, Traffic safety information. functionality may be limited.
— It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile
devices and other similar devices when the @) Tips
vehicle is stationary because, like all loose — The availability of services depends on the
objects, they could be thrown around the in- subscription.
side of the vehicle in a crash and cause seri- — Audi merely provides access to third party
ous injuries. Store these types of devices se- services through the MMI and does not as-
curely while driving. Also read the warnings sume any responsibility for the content and
in the chapter > page 71. availability of these services.
— Use of the most up-to-date mobile network
() Note standard is not available in every country.
— The connection costs of Audi connect Info- Contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
tainment services are included in the price thorized Audi Service Facility or your cell
of Audi connect Infotainment during the phone service provider for additional infor-
subscription period with some exceptions. mation.
Please note that there may be additional — Availability, scope, providers, screen display,
charges when using some services. For ex- and costs of services may vary depending on
ample, this applies to online radio/ the country, model, model year, end device
podcasts, additional online data, or for In- and rates.
ternet connections and services that use the — All services can be modified, activated/deac-
Wi-Fi hotspot. Depending on the country, tivated, renamed, and enhanced without
data plans may need to be purchased for further notification.
these Internet connections and services
= page 177. For additional information, see Audi connect
my.audi.com.
Infotainment
— In certain situations, the Wi-Fi hotspot data
connection may be established as a replace-
ment for the SIM card on your Wi-Fi device. Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
This feature depends on the configuration
With Audi connect Infotainment services, online
of your Wi-Fi device and operating system.
information is transmitted directly to the vehicle.
8W1012721BC
This could result in fees depending on your

cell phone service provider, especially if you An Internet connection is required to use Audi
are using this feature while abroad. A flat connect Infotainment. Depending on the country >
173
Audi connect
and vehicle equipment, the Internet connection > Follow any additional system prompts on your
may be established using an embedded SIM card Wi-Fi device if necessary.
(eSIM).
Your device is successfully connected with the
ZA WARNING MMI's Wi-Fi hotspot.
Always follow the information found in > A\

Z\ WARNING
in General information on page 173.
Always follow the information found in > AV
@) Note
Always follow the information found in >@ in C) Note
General information on page 173.
Always follow the information found in © in
Embedded SIM card
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and an
embedded SIM card
@ Tips
The system complies with United States FCC
The data connection for Audi connect Infotain-
regulations and ISED regulations > page 284.
ment services is made through an embedded SIM
card (eSIM card) that is installed in the vehicle.
You can use the Audi connect Infotainment serv-
Audi connect
ices immediately. Infotainment services
@) Note
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
Always follow the information found in >@ in
General information on page 173. Some Audi connect Infotainment services must
be configured through your personal myAudi ac-
count at my.audi.com before using them for the
Using a Wi-Fi hotspot
first time.
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
You can connect up to eight Wi-Fi devices (such G) Tips

as smartphones) with the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot. If —A myAudi user must be logged in for some
the MMI is connected to the Internet Audi connect Infotainment services.
= page 173, the connected Wi-Fi devices can also — Some Audi connect Infotainment services
use the MMI’s Internet connection. must be activated at my.audi.com.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. A — Depending on the country, you may be able
data plan must be available > page 177. to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
— For detailed information on configuration,
visit my.audi.com.
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi
Switch on the Wi-Fi hotspot.
Services
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi > Wi-
Fi hotspot settings. The access data for the Wi- Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
Fi hotspot is displayed. Switch on the visibility ment, the following services may be available:
of the Wi-Fi hotspot if necessary.
> Switch the Wi-Fi function on in your mobile de- Weather information
Applies to: MMI
vice and connect it to the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot
using the authentication data that is shown. > Press WEATHER on the home screen.
174
Audi connect
Editing settings: Select: WEATHER > Ga. Functions on demand

> To display the weather for a location, press ona
location in the list. Displaying purchased functions
> To display the weather for your current loca- Applies to: vehicles with functions on demand
tion, press on the location that is marked with Depending on the country and vehicle equip-
the crosshairs. ment, you can purchase functions on demand
Requirement: route guidance must be active. through a myAudi account in the myAudi app at
> To display the weather at your destination, any time.
press on the location that is marked with the The following options are available for displaying
flag FB. purchased functions in the vehicle.
Adding a location: select: WEATHER > G4 > Ina > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
new city > a location. PURCHASES.
Removing a location: select: WEATHER > 44 > Z
> one or more locations or Select all > Delete. @ Tips
— Equipment installed at the factory may be
Online news
displayed as purchased functions.
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — The availability of functions in the myAudi
NEWS. app varies depending on the country. For
Access to the calendar additional information, visit my.audi.com.
— At the time this manual was printed, func-
Requirement: the myAudi app must be installed tions on demand was a planned function.
and open on your mobile device. Access to your Functions on demand is not available in your
calendar must be enabled on your mobile device. vehicle.
You must be logged into the myAudi app with
your myAudi login data and you must have select-
Messages
ed your vehicle. The Wi-Fi function on your mo-
Applies to: vehicles with functions on demand
bile device and the MMI must be enabled and
your mobile device must be paired to the MMI Ifa message about a function that requires a li-
Wi-Fi hotspot > page 176, Wi-Fi. cense is displayed, the function is no longer avail-
able. Check the MMI Purchases menu to see if
You can display the your mobile device calendar
you have a license for this function or if the Li-
on the MMI.
cense has expired. Purchase the function if neces-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: sary using functions on demand.
CALENDAR.
Audi connect vehicle
Z\ WARNING control services
@) Note Using Audi connect vehicle control services, you

Always follow the information found in >@ in can perform tasks such as viewing data about
General information on page 173. your vehicle or control vehicle functions remote-
ly.
8W1012721BC
You can view and use services available for your

vehicle at my.audi.com or through the myAudi
app.
175
Audi connect
Information about the services and the corre- Settings

sponding app was accurate at the time this man-
ual was printed. The scope of services depends
on the country and equipment. There may be Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
changes over the service life of the vehicle. Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
ZA WARNING > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:

SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi
— Always follow the information found in > AA
in General information on page 173. Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
— Driver messages, text messages, and illumi- ment, the following functions may be available:
nated warning and indicator lights in the ve-
hicle always take priority over information Wi-Fi
from the Audi connect services. The infor- When the function is switched on, the MMI's Wi-
mation displayed by the Audi connect serv- Fi hotspot is active and Wi-Fi devices can be con-
ices should not cause you to take safety nected to the hotspot.
risks. This can result in the vehicle breaking
down in traffic and to serious injuries or ac- Wi-Fi hotspot settings
cidents. The Wi-Fi connection between the MMI and your
Wi-Fi device is encrypted. You can change the fol-
G) Tips lowing information if needed.
— Accessing specific data or controlling func- — Access point (SSID): name of the Wi-Fi hot-
tions remotely depends on the charge level spot.
of the vehicle battery. Therefore, these — Password: an initial password was set at the
functions only have limited availability after factory in the MMI. Audi recommends changing
switching off the ignition. the initial password. Only use secure passwords
— An eSIM card establishes the Internet con- that conform to the general guidelines for se-
nection for Audi connect vehicle control cure passwords. For more information, refer to
services. The costs for this are included in reputable and current sources on password se-
the price of Audi connect vehicle control curity.
services. The cell phone network, for exam-
ple, must be available to use these services. Allow data connection through Wi-Fi
When the function is switched on, mobile devices
can use the Internet connection through the Wi-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control Fi hotspot. A data plan is needed to do this.
Create a myAudi account by registering in the

myAudi app or at my.audi.com, depending on
ZA\ WARNING
your country. Always follow the information found in > A\
>» Set the key user > page 30.
> Install the myAudi app on your mobile device @) Note
and log in with your access information.
@ Tips
Some services require you to enter a 4-digit
PIN that you set up during registration.
176
Audi connect
Data plans!)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect
Data plans must be purchased in order to use cer- to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
tain services >(@) in General information on — Depending on the country, there may be re-
page 173. strictions on the use of data plans (such as
You can purchase data plans at my.audi.com. mobile phone service providers) when driv-
ing in other countries.
— If selling your vehicle, you should delete the
vehicle from the customer portal for the cell
phone service provider to avoid being charg-
ed for additional purchases.

Troubleshooting

ment.
Audi connect Infotainment serv- Some Audi connect Infotainment services must be activated or
ices: individual Audi connect Info- configured through your personal myAudi account before using
tainment services are grayed out or | them for the first time. You can find detailed information online
not available. at my.audi.com.
Wi-Fi hotspot: it is not possible to Check if Wi-Fi is activated in the MMI > page 176.
connect through Wi-Fi. Delete all existing Wi-Fi connections on your mobile device and
restart it.
8W1012721BC
D_ Not available in every market.
177
Emergency call
Emergency call work coverage area for the mobile phone service
provider selected by Audi.
Overview
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function @ Tips
An emergency call is a combination of data trans- — The emergency call function cannot be deac-
mission and a phone call. The data transmission tivated in the Infotainment system settings.
from your vehicle forwards important informa- — The availability of the TPS emergency call is
tion, such as the vehicle and position data, to the limited to certain times.
emergency call center. —The costs for call and data connections for
TPS emergency calls is included in the price
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
of the services.
ment, the following functions may be available:
With the emergency call, you can call for help in Functions
dangerous situations as quickly as possible. Use Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
this function when emergency help is needed
=> page 178. A TPS emergency call can be made manually or
automatically > page 178.
— Audi connect emergency call (TPS emergency
call). This eCall system uses emergency call
centers operated by third party providers. Making an emergency call
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
With online roadside assistance, you can request
assistance if there is a breakdown or a minor acci-
dent > page 179.
A WARNING
In areas with poor GPS reception or outside
the coverage range of the respective cell
phone service provider, some functions and/or
services may not be available, it may not be
possible to send or receive data, or functional-
ity may be limited. Fig. 137 Front headliner: cover for the emergency call but-
ton
iG) Tips Manual emergency call

To see which data can be transmitted, visit
your Audi country or sales region website at
www.audi.com. > Tap the cover (J) to open it.
> Press and hold the emergency call button until
Emergency call the LED @) blinks. The emergency call will be
made.
> If the emergency call button is pressed by mis-
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function take, then press it again immediately and hold
it until the LED stays on. The emergency call
The services are provided through a SIM card in-
will be canceled.
stalled in the vehicle. Services are provided as-
suming that the cell phone network required for Automatic emergency call
the installed SIM card is functioning and availa-
The vehicle electrical system initiates an auto-
ble for use. The services made availably by Audi
matic emergency call under certain circumstan-
are only available within the mobile phone net-
ces, for example if an airbag deploys. The LEDin >
178
Emergency call
the emergency call button (2) will blink. The Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
emergency call will be made. The emergency call malfunction corrected.
cannot be canceled.
LED status
Online roadside
assistance
— Green - The emergency call function is availa-
ble.
— Red - There is a malfunction in the emergency Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
call function. Contact an authorized Audi dealer

An online roadside assistance call )) is a combina-
or authorized Audi Service Facility. Note the
tion of data transmission and a phone call. The
messages about the availability of the emer-
data transmission from your vehicle forwards im-
gency function > page 179.
portant information to the Audi service center,
— Off - The emergency call function is not availa-
such as the vehicle and position data.
ble, perhaps because no network is available.
Warnings Cee Te Re tee cary

Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
If there is a critical system failure in the emer-
gency call systems, the vehicle occupants will re-
RAZ-0443
ceive the following warning: see > page 179, LED
status and > page 179, Messages.
@) Tips
If the emergency call is canceled due toa
poor connection, then the system automati-
cally tries to connect again.
Messages Fig. 138 Front headliner: online roadside assistance but-

ton
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
& Emergency call function: malfunction! Lim- Calling online roadside assistance
ited availability. Please contact Service
> Press the button (@). The LED in the button
If this indicator light turns on and this message turns red. The online roadside assistance call
appears, the emergency call function is restrict- will be made.
ed. For example, you cannot call the emergency > If you press the button () by mistake, then
call center, but data may still be transmitted un- press it again.
der certain circumstances. Drive to an authorized
Audi incident assistance
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
mediately to have the malfunction corrected. A minor accident may be detected by the vehicle
electrical system. You are able to select between
&S Emergency call function: malfunction! Func-
online roadside assistance and an emergency call
tion unavailable. Please contact Service
in the MMI. >
If this indicator light turns on and this message
appears, you cannot make an emergency call.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
8W1012721BC
)) The availability of the services offered depends on the

country and may change in the future.
179
Emergency call
If the roadside assistance call is canceled due

to a poor connection, then the call must be
made again.
180
Navigation
Navigation the traffic regulations that are applicable in

the country where you are operating the ve-
Opening navigation hicle. In the event that the driving directions
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
contradict traffic regulations, always follow
the traffic regulations applicable in the
country where you are operating the vehicle
to reduce the risk of an accident.
() Note
Fig. 139 Route guidance not started =>© in General information on page 173.
The navigation system directs you to your desti- (i) Tips

nation, around traffic incidents, and on alterna-
— Snow and obstructions on the GPS antenna
tive routes, if desired.
or trees and large buildings can impair sat-
Opening navigation ellite reception and affect the system's abil-
ity to determine the vehicle position. Sever-
» Applies to: MMI: Press NAVIGATION on the
al deactivated or malfunctioning satellites
home screen.
can also interrupt GPS reception and affect
After accessing the navigation for the first time, the system's ability to determine the vehicle
the map is displayed. position.
— Because street names sometimes change,
Opening navigation using the multifunction
steering wheel the names stored in the MMI may in rare
cases differ from the actual street name.
> Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Select
— Applies to: multifunction steering wheel:
the Navigation tab in the instrument cluster. Depending on the selected function, opera-
> To display navigation when route guidance has tion through the center display may be re-
started, select in the instrument cluster: the quired.
button > Map.
— Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Info-
The following functions are available in the MMI: tainment: Depending on the country and ve-
hicle equipment, additional services may be
@ Open the Select destination menu
available.
=> page 183, fig. 140.
— An additional indicator will appear in the
@ Open the intelligent search > page 182.
head-up display.
@ Switch between the map and the menu:
press A repeatedly until the desired function
is displayed.
myAudi navigation
You can find additional information about the
MMI navigation works seamlessly with the myAu-
map update at > page 186, Map operation.
di app.
ZA WARNING Your destinations (favorites, last destinations)
— The demands of traffic require your full at- are synchronized through your myAudi account.
tention. Always read the chapter > page 19, All important destinations can be displayed in
Traffic safety information. the vehicle and in the myAudi app.
8W1012721BC
— The route calculated by the navigation sys-

tem is a driving recommendation. Follow
181
Navigation
To load destinations in the vehicle automatically, > To display all categories and search for a POI,
Audi recommends logging into the vehicle with a select: |---| > a category (such as restaurants) >
myAudi user > page 30. a POI.
myAudi navigation functions: Change search area
— You can send destinations and routes from the Requirement: route guidance must be active.
myAudi app to the vehicle > page 184. >» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
— Active route guidance in the myAudi app can be NAVIGATION > &.
continued in the MMI. > To change the search area, press (a) / 29 /Pre-
— Depending on the situation, it may be possible peatedly until the desired search area is select-
to continue active route guidance from the MMI ed.
in the myAudi app to continue navigating to the
destination after leaving the vehicle. Online search)
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online search
Entering a destination You can use the results from a search engine pro-
vider to find a navigation destination.
Intelligent search for navigation
CEC Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Internet > page 173, Audi connect.
Using the intelligent search, you can enter the > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
data for a navigation destination in any order all NAVIGATION > © >G.
> Enter one or more search terms into the input
at once (for example, 5th Avenue New York).
Likewise, you can search for points of interest, field.
contacts, previous destinations, or favorites in or-
> The search engine provider shows suggestions
£ to narrow down the search.
der to navigate to the desired destination.
> Press on suggestions until the desired destina-
Opening a menu tion appears in the results list. If necessary, use
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: one finger to swipe upward or downward until
NAVIGATION > 2. the suggestions £ or destinations 9 appear.
> Press on the desired destination 9. The Details
Intelligent search menu will be displayed.
> Enter one or more search terms into the input » Press Start.
field. See > page 23, Text input. Route guidance will be activated and the map will
>» Press on the desired destination in the results be displayed > page 185, fig. 142.
list. The Details menu will be displayed.
> Press Start. Route guidance will be activated G) Tips
and the map will be displayed > page 185,
— The MMI input suggestions depend on the
fig. 142.
last navigated destinations.
Online Points of Interest — The navigation system always searches for
the fastest route. You can have alternative
> Searching for points of interest: enter the
routes displayed if necessary > page 187.
name of a POI.
> Select: a symbol for a POI category (such as — If the destination cannot be found, it may
not be stored in the navigation database. >
i >a POI, or
)) Audi provides access to services from third party provid-

ers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because
that depends on the third party provider.
182
Navigation
Check the spelling of the term that was Accessing previous destinations
searched or check the search area > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
=> page 182.
NAVIGATION > (8) > Last destinations > select
— Distances to points of interest are displayed a destination > Start.
as a straight-line distance from your current > Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Select
location. The actual distance from your cur- in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab >
rent location to the point of interest is up- button > Last destinations > a destination.
dated automatically. The list of points of in-
terest that were found is not resorted when Deleting previous destinations
this happens. >» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > (85) > Last destinations > Z >
Select destination select one or more entries or Select all > Delete
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system > (Done).
Gi) Tips
RAX-0146
| perce cae a
A
D || w
Last
9
Cea a
The last route will be automatically deleted
from the list if you start a new route guidance
| Cesare Pics
after canceling the route.
Setting a favorite as the destination

Fig. 140 Menu: select destination Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Opening a menu You can access frequent destinations in the favor-

Applies to: MMI ites. You can quickly and easily start route guid-
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen. ance using the home address or business address
> If the map is displayed, press 88 @) > page 181, function.
fig. 139. Requirement: a favorite must be stored
=> page 187.
The following functions are available > fig. 140:
@ Last destinations e 183 > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Q), FaVOrites was scenes
sy ones es eras 183 NAVIGATION > (Ga) > Favorites > select a desti-
nation > Start.
@ Contacts ...................., 183
@ Received destns. & routes ....... 184
in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab >
button > Favorites > a destination.
Loading previous destinations
SY lad dled ee Cully
Your last destinations and routes can be loaded Applies to: vehicles with MMI and navigation system
directly as a navigation destination.

You can navigate directly to contacts.
As soon as you start route guidance, the destina-
Requirement: a contact must have an address
tion is automatically saved in the last destina-
stored.
tions. Your previous destinations are marked with
the © symbol. » Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > (5) > Contacts > a contact.
If you use myAudi navigation, your previous des-
> Press on the address for a contact.
8W1012721BC
tinations will be synchronized with your myAudi

> Press on a suggested address. The Details
account > page 181.
menu will be displayed.
> Press Start.
183
Navigation
@ Map preview: to zoom in on the map pre-

@) Tips
view, press on the map.
— Ifa contact is grayed out, there is no ad-
@ Route criteria: see > page 192.
dress stored for that contact.
® More: additional functions.
— Navigation to geographic coordinates for a
@ Weather: Requirement: the MMI must be
contact is not possible.
connected to the Internet > page 173, Audi
connect. Also see > page 174.
Loading received destinations and routes
© Applies to: MMI and telephone
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con-
nect Infotainment Call: Requirement: a mobile device must be
connected to the MMI > page 162. You will
You can search for destinations or routes in the
make a direct call to the phone number that
myAudi app and send to the vehicle.
is stored for the destination.
Requirement: the MMI and the mobile device © Start: starts navigation to the displayed des-
must be connected to the Internet > page 173, tination directly. The map will be displayed
Audi connect. You must have the myAudi app in- => page 186, Map operation.
stalled on your mobile device. @) Parking: press Parking to search for a park-
> Send a destination or route in the myAudi app ing space at the destination. You can use the
to the vehicle. parking space as the destination or stopover.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Details: Requirement: the MMI must be con-
NAVIGATION > (5) > Received destns. & nected to the Internet > page 173, Audi con-
routes. nect.
> Make sure you are logged into the vehicle and ©) Display of distance/driving time to the des-
the myAudi app with the same myAudi account. tination
The received destination and routes will be @® Weather at the destination: Requirement:
loaded automatically. the MMI must be connected to the Internet
> Navigating to a destination: press on a desti- = page 173, Audi connect.
nation.
> Deleting destinations: select: Z > one or more
Selecting a destination from the map
entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).
A point on the map can be used as the destina-

Applies to: vehicles with navigation system tion.
Opening the map

eee Applies to: MMI
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen.

> If necessary, press A to display the map.
Adjusting the scale

ZeScu &
ene Orn rae
> Select: 9/ > select a scale.
Fig. 141 Details
Marking the destination
After you have selected a destination, the details > Press and hold a point on the map until a mark-
will be displayed. Route guidance is will not be ing appears or the address for the selected des-
active yet. tination is shown.
The functions depend on the vehicle equipment

and the selected destination.
184
Navigation
Selecting map content (such as POIs) as the Map

destination
Requirement: map content must be displayed
=>page 191.
> Press on map content on the map (for example,

ii).
Selecting the destination
> Select: 4 > Start.
Route guidance will be activated and the map will

be displayed > page 185, fig. 142.
eee)
Pn ae
ST) ee mee EL
You can enter additional destinations during ac-

tive route guidance.
Entering a stopover ie ie [Mena

Fig. 143 Marked map object
Requirement: route guidance must be active.
> Enter a destination > page 182. Opening the map

Applies to: MMI
Displaying stopovers or the route plan
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen.
All destinations are listed in the route plan. > If necessary, press /\ to display the map.
> Press on Pin the side menu on the map
The following list gives an overview of the infor-
=> page 185, fig. 142.
mation displayed on the map. Press on any func-
Editing stopovers tion (for example, alternative routes) to show ad-
ditional options.
> Press on Pin the side menu on the map
=> page 185, fig. 142. Select destination > page 183
OO
> Adding a stopover: Select: Add destination > Enter a destination using intelligent search
select a destination > Add to route. => page 182
> Moving a stopover: press Z. Touch the > sym- Cancel route guidance > page 185
bol and move the entry to the desired position. Current route
COOH
Press Done.
Request spoken prompt
> Deleting a stopover: Select: Z > one or more
Alternative routes > page 187
entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).
Display active destinations, stopovers, or
route plan > page 185. The distance to the
Stopping route guidance
destination including the calculated arrival
time is displayed.
Requirement: route guidance must be active and Online traffic information > page 190
©®
the map must be displayed. Altitude

> Applies to: MMI: Press BX > page 185, fig. 142.
8W1012721BC

button > Cancel route guidance.
185
Navigation
@) Displays the maximum permitted speed): Symbol Description

within city limits, on expressways, and on
* Favorites > page 187
highways.
x Previous destinations display
Current vehicle position
O88
Route information > page 192 Traffic information

Name of the street on which you are current- — Colored warning symbols: traffic incidents
ly driving ahead that are on your route.
Start route guidance for a marked destina- — Grayed out warning symbols: traffic incidents
®
tion > page 184, Selecting a destination that are not on your route.
from the map — All traffic incidents will display in color when
Display details for the destination route guidance is inactive.
©
=> page 184 — Warning symbols with arrow: traffic incident

Intelligent search nearby that you have been routed around, for example
OO
Adjust the map orientation. See also @.

=> page 191
Navigation settings > page 191 Map operation
©®

Adjust the scale. Press the magnifying glass
to switch automatic zoom > page 191 on or You can operate the map > page 185, fig. 142
off directly on the map. The © symbol ap- with the movements described in the following
pears when this function is switched on. information.
Marked destination. See > page 184, Select-
©
ing a destination from the map Moving the map
Map contents (points of interest, favorites). > Drag your finger across the map in the desired
®
When there are multiple map contents in the direction.

immediate vicinity, the symbols are shown
Moving the map quickly
stacked on the map. To display a list of indi-
vidual symbols, press a’: > fig. 143. Press on > Swipe your finger across the map in the desired
a POT in the list. direction and lift your finger off the map.
Center the map to the current vehicle posi-
Zooming in on the map
tion
>» Place two fingers on the map and pull your fin-
Traffic incidents and display of estimated
gers apart, or
losses of time on the route.
> Double-tap on the map with one finger.
— Green: traffic is flowing freely.
— Orange: stop-and-go traffic Zooming out on the map
— Red: traffic jam or traffic obstructions.
> Place two fingers on the map and pull your fin-
Additional possible symbols on the map gers together, or
> Double-tap on the map with two fingers.
Symbol Description
@ Home address > page 187, Favor- Rotating the map
ites > Rotate the map using two fingers.
Business address = page 187, Fa-
Tilting the map
vorites
> Drag upward or downward with two fingers. >
2) Only applies to vehicles without camera-based speed limit

display.
186
Navigation
@) Tips Alternative routes

Certain gestures may not be available on all
touch displays or in every menu. 3
S|
ny
&<
te guidance
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and Audi virtual

cockpit
Fig. 145 Display of alternative routes in the overview map
Opening alternative routes

Requirement: route guidance must be started
= page 182 and the map must be displayed
=> page 186.
> Press on (7 in the side menu on the map

=> page 185, fig. 142.
Fig. 144 Instrument cluster: default view: turning maneu-
ver when route guidance has started @ Current route
The distance to the destination and the calculat-
Requirement: route guidance must be on
ed arrival time will be displayed for the current
=> page 182.
route.
The following information will be displayed in the
driver information system, if available:
@ Alternative route
The difference in travel time compared to the se-
@ Current vehicle position
lected route will be displayed.
@A bar graph appears when there is an upcom-
ing turn. The fewer the bars that are shown, the Displaying alternative routes in the
foreground
shorter the distance is until the turn. If there is
no upcoming turn immediately ahead, the dis- > Press @ in the corresponding information win-
tance to the destination or stopover, the calculat- dow, or
ed arrival time, and a direction arrow for the up- > Press and hold the information window for the
coming maneuver will be displayed in the right corresponding alternative route (for example,
speedometer. If there is no upcoming maneuver, @° fig. 145).
the distance to the next maneuver will be dis-
Select route
played.
> Press on the information window for the corre-
@® Lane recommendation
sponding route (for example @) >fig. 145).
Additional functions
Favorites
You can access frequent destinations in the favor-

8W1012721BC
ites. You can quickly and easily start route guid-

ance using the home address or business address
function.
187
Navigation
Accessing favorites Requirement: the Parking notification must be

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: switched on > page 22, Notification center. The
NAVIGATION > (8) > Favorites. MMI must be connected to the Internet
=> page 173, Audi connect. Route guidance must
If you use myAudi navigation, your favorites will be active, you must be close to your destination,
be synchronized with your myAudi account and a notification must be displayed or an item
=> page 181. on the map must be marked.
Storing favorites > Press on the notification. Or: press on | on the

> Press YY in the Details menu > page 184, map.
fig. 141. > To navigate to a parking: space, press ona col-
ored marking on the map.
Storing a home address or business address > Select: 2 > Start.
> Press Home address or Business address. Depending on availability, colored markings on
When accessed for the first time, you will be the map indicate the probability of open parking
prompted to set the address. spaces.
> Select: Create now > entera destination > OK.
Color Description
Editing a favorite
Green High probability
Requirement: the favorites list must be dis-
Orange |Medium probability
played.
Red Low probability
> Setting a favorite as a destination: press ona
favorite.
Satellite map
> Deleting favorites: in the Details menu, press
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and satellite map
¥* © page 184, fig. 141, or select: Z > one or
more entries or Select all > Delete > (Done). You can display the navigation map with satellite
> Moving a favorite: press Z. Touch the sym- images.
bol and move the entry to the desired position. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Press Done.
@ Tips > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:

NAVIGATION > ©} > Map settings > Satellite
— After deleting the home address or business
map).
address, only the address is deleted and the
entry will still be displayed in the favorites. The map view is based on data packets received
— Please note when moving favorites that from the Internet in the form of satellite images,
items 1 and 2 are reserved for the home ad- which are then combined with the roadways from
dress and business address. the > page 185, fig. 142 standard map view.
On-street parking (i) Tips

Applies to: navigation system and on-street parking —The satellite map!) is updated regularly
whenever the function is opened. The proc-
In supported areas, you can display parking along
ess may take several seconds.
the route.
— When the satellite map display is switched
on ) with the 3D position map type, the >

188
Navigation
display automatically switches to the 2D You can check the status of the download process
map type when driving through tunnels. and the installation in the notification center
— Depending on the Internet connection, the > page 22.
standard map may also be displayed when
the satellite map is switched on )). @) Note
Map update be sure to note the connectivity costs section
= in General information on page 173.

@ Tips
You can update the map data in the MMI witha Because of the high volume of data, Audi rec-
map update. The functions depend on the coun- ommends performing the map update using
try and vehicle equipment. the USB connection > page 190.
— Map update through online map update
=> page 189. Map update through the myAudi App
Applies to: vehicles with map update through the myAudi app
— Map update through the myAudi app.
— Import a map update from the USB connection With the map update through the myAudi app,
to your MMI > page 190. you can update the map material in your naviga-
— Map update at an authorized Audi dealer or au- tion system.
thorized Audi Service Facility. This can result in
additional costs. Downloading updates
Requirement: you must have a registered myAudi
Online map update account. Your vehicle must be registered in your
Applies to: vehicles with online map update myAudi account.
Using map update online, you can update the > Install the myAudi app on your mobile device
map material in your navigation system directly and log in with your login information. Use the
from your vehicle. same myAudi account that you use in the vehi-
cle for your myAudi user.
The MMI determines regions based on the vehicle
> Download the map material in the myAudi app.
position. Based on this, update data for these re-
gions are available for your MMI. Installing updates
Start map update > Log in as a myAudi user in the vehicle

Applies to: MMI => page 30.
> Connect your smartphone to the vehicle’s Wi-Fi
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
hotspot > page 174. The MMI detects the map
material on your smartphone. The map update
> To always allow automatic map updates, select will start automatically.
on the home screen: SETTINGS > System main-
You can check the status of the installation in the
tenance > Automatic online map update. The
notification center > page 22.
MMI starts the map update automatically in
the background when new map material is
available.
8W1012721BC

189
Navigation
Map update using the USB connection The following information can be displayed
Applies to: vehicle map updates using the USB connection > fig. 146:
With the map update, you can update the map @ Amessage will appear if the MMI calculates a
material in your navigation system. better route for the current route guidance.
The predicted delay takes into account future
Requirement: you must have created a myAudi
changes to the traffic situation on the route.
account at my.audi.com. Your vehicle must be
Press on an item ina list @ and select the
registered in your myAudi account.
better route. More information can be found
Downloading updates under > page 187.
@ Atraffic message is displayed. The distance
> Download the map update at my.audi.com and
to the hazardous area is calculated from the
store it on a USB flash drive. For additional in-
current vehicle position.
formation, visit my.audi.com.
@® The traffic messages are only shown when
Installing updates route guidance is active. Press ona line to
> Connect the USB flash drive to the Audi music display details about it.
interface > page 202.
> Open the notification in the notification center
G) Tips
on > page 22 and press on the notification. — Particularly critical traffic information, such
> Press Next. The status of the installation is as warnings about wrong-way drivers, is au-
shown in the display. tomatically displayed as a notification.
— Traffic information is not available in some
Traffic incidents countries.
Introduction
Traffic rerouting
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online traffic
information
By receiving traffic information, your MMI calcu-

[RAX-0180]
a ites lates a better route if available and the possible

The current delay along the route is 30 min.
earch Ogata time saved compared to the current route.
Abetter
route is available. Time saved: 15 min
ocd ec Traffic rerouting
nN
b> Nt)
> Start route guidance.
© fOMm au)
The MMI uses a notification or a note in the traf-
Fig. 146 traffic information overview fic information @ > page 190, fig. 146 to indi-
cate a better route. You can decide which route
Open traffic information you would like to use.
Requirement: the map must be displayed
To select a better route, you have the following
=> page 186.
options:
> Press on the traffic jam symbol in the side > Notification: press F. The better route will be
menu on the map > page 185, fig. 142. used for route guidance, or press on the notifi-
cation. Press on the information window for the
Display traffic report details
better route (for example @) > page 187,
> Press on the traffic report @) > fig. 146. fig. 145).
> To display the previous or next traffic report, > Note in the traffic information: press on the
press < or. list entry @ > page 190, fig. 146. Press on the
information window for the better route (for
example (2) > page 187, fig. 145).
190
Navigation
OTN eee late celeurl

ela) Please note that a setting applied to the multi-
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online traffic function steering wheel is only valid for the in-
information strument cluster map.
The MMI can receive real-time online traffic infor- Map settings
mation about congestion, accidents, road con-
struction, and other incidents. Satellite map: see > page 188.
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Traffic: you can display current traffic informa-
Internet > page 173, Audi connect. Traffic infor- tion on the map.
mation must be switched on in the MMI — Free flowing traffic
>page 191. — Traffic obstructions
— Traffic incidents
Traffic information will be displayed on the
standard map > page 185, fig. 142. Map colors
— Automatic: the map display adapts to the light-
Online traffic information is also displayed on the
ing conditions (for example, by changing from
standard map > page 188.
day to night when driving through a tunnel).
G) Tips — Day or Night
— Having the online traffic information func- Map orientation

tion switched on provides the most accurate — 2D heading-up map/2D north-up map: the
reports of traffic situations and traffic fore- current vehicle position is displayed. The map is
casting. Your vehicle transmits and process- oriented in the direction of travel or to the
es its anonymous, encrypted position infor- north.
mation at regular intervals to the traffic da- — 3D heading-up map: the current vehicle posi-
ta provider. You can switch off data transfer tion is shown on a three-dimensional map and
at any time > page 278. is aligned to the direction of travel.
— The online traffic information network is — Overview: the entire route from the vehicle po-
not available in all countries, and the cover- sition to the destination or the next stopover is
age is not nationwide. displayed on the map. The map is oriented to
the north.
Settings Automatic zoom
— On: the map scale is adapted automatically de-
You can adjust the navigation system settings in pending on the type of road being traveled (ex-
the instrument cluster and in the MMI display pressway, highway, other roads) so that you al-
separately. The settings depend on the country ways have an optimal overview of the road
and vehicle equipment. ahead. When route guidance is active, the scale
is adjusted automatically for a better detailed
Accessing settings view when there are upcoming maneuvers.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — Intersection: when route guidance is active, the
NAVIGATION > ©}. scale is adjusted automatically for a better de-
tailed view when there are upcoming maneu-
Accessing settings using the multifunction vers.
steering wheel — Off
MMI map contents/Map content: you can switch
the display of additional information (such as
8W1012721BC
button.
POIs) on the map in the center display on or off. >
191
Navigation
Voice guidance
Voice guidance: you can adjust the navigation
prompts. With the Traffic setting, the MMI will
only give prompts if there are traffic incidents on
your route.
Voice guidance during phone call
Entertainment fader during navigation: the au-

dio playback volume is temporarily lowered when
navigation prompts are active.
Route criteria
You can adjust which route criteria should be al-
lowed or avoided for the route calculation.
HOV/carpool lanes
Highways
Toll roads
Ferries
Route information
When this function is switched on and route
guidance is active, route information
=> page 185, fig. 142 is displayed. The next ma-
neuver will be displayed at the bottom. POIs and
traffic information will also be displayed. Press
route information to display a preview of the next
maneuver on the map. You can switch the follow-
ing information on or off in route information.
— Points of interest along the route
— Traffic incidents
Presentation mode
In presentation mode, the system simulates driv-
ing on the display along the planned route with-
out the vehicle actually moving. You can use
Specify starting point when you would like to
calculate a route starting from a location other
than the current vehicle position, for example.
Simulating route guidance: start route guidance
and press presentation mode.
@ Tips
You can change the volume of navigation an-
nouncements while one is playing > page 29.
192
Radio
Radio be muted since they can no longer be re-

ceived.
General information © Radio ID
Selecting the radio Your radio ID and contact data for your satel-
lite radio provider are displayed.
ey Channel number
e®
ney) os 2 ) % No reception
\) ea
102.9 1)2 FM-HDB The station cannot be received.
(3) OME 4)
aa In addition to the symbols for the usual frequen-
e 106.7 ama my cy bands, the following information may also be
available depending on vehicle equipment:
Symbol | Description
fa RAX-0190)
mee
The station provides information in
eo £0010 0—=@)
the background for an online station
Saray alternative. Online station tracking
ca must be switched on for this
=> page 199.
The station is received through the In-
Fig. 148 Center display: SiriusXM station list ternet.
The system attempts to receive the
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the radio
station/podcast through the Internet.
may support the FM, AM, and SiriusXM (satellite
radio) frequency bands. Using the HD Radio re-
G@) Tips
ceiver* also allows you to receive radio stations
on the FM and AM bands in digital format. — Contact the SiriusXM* provider if you would
like to receive satellite programming.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the se- — Buildings, tunnels, bridges, open areas, oth-
lected station list, the following information will er vehicles or objects on the vehicle roof can
be displayed: affect reception.
@ Station list — Satellite radio* is not available in all re-
Shows the stations that are currently availa- gions.
ble. The station list updates automatically.
@ Stations Adjusting the radio using the MMI
For example, the station name may be dis-
> Applies to: MMI: To set a frequency band, select
played depending on availability.
on the home screen: RADIO > Source a catego-
@ HD Radio technology
ry.
FM/AM stations that can be received by digi-
> Applies to: MMI: To set a station, select on the
tal radio are marked with the HD Radio tech- home screen: RADIO > Source > a category >a
nology symbol H). station/podcast*.
If reception quality declines, the radio auto- > To select a frequency, follow the instructions
matically switches to the analog FM/AM sta- under > page 195, Free text search.
tion depending on availability.
@ Additional audio programs Adjusting the radio using the multifunction
8W1012721BC
Digital HD Radio stations may contain multi- Tare maa 118

ple additional audio programs. If you lose re-
ception, the additional audio programs will Requirement: radio mode must be on. >
193
Radio
> Select the radio/media tab in the instrument > To select a station or a source, turn and press
cluster. the left thumbwheel.
> To switch between radio and media, select the
button > Switch to radio/Switch to media. @) Tips
> Turn the left thumbwheel to display the station
Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: De-
list. 5 .
, : = pending on the selected function, operation
> fe switch to a different source, press the [=] through the MMI may be required.
utton.
Radio functions
[RAX-0191
Cora ei)
tee
Fig. 149 Center display: left side: playback view of radio functions, right side: sources
Operating The following functions may be available depend-

> Applies to: MMI: To open the playback view @, ing on the selected radio station/podcast* and
select on the home screen: RADIO > Source > a
the vehicle equipment:
category > a station/podcast*.
> Applies to: MMI: To open the sources (2), select
on the home screen: RADIO > Source.
Symbol/Description | Description
® ao Displaying categories in a frequency band.
@ Source Displays sources in the Radio menu.
© Frequency band Shows the current station frequency band.
Indicates that on demand content is playing. The MMI must be con-
© ON nected to the Internet and a data plan must be available for this
=> page 177.
@ w/e See > page 196.
& Settings > page 199.
Depending on availability, you can switch between the image views:
press on the station logo. Use one finger to swipe to the right or left
Station logo
to switch between the Station logo and Cover art (album cover). Al-
©
so see > page 199, Online additional data.
194
Radio
Symbol/Description |Description
a Go back one level.
|@/@O|O|O\O|©
Search See > page 195.
Last stations See > page 196.
Presets See > page 196.
FM Displays stations from the FM frequency band.
Online See > page 197.
Displays stations from the SiriusXM frequency band.
SiriusXM Combines SiriusXM Live channels and on demand content, depend-
©
ing on vehicle equipment.

AM Displays stations from the AM frequency band.
Q|
Start over Go to the beginning of the broadcast.

Related Channels, artists, and shows related to the content that is currently
playing.
® Subscribe Log in to be able to play the content.
Switch to WEB Switch manually to Internet reception.
Switch to SAT Switch manually to satellite reception.
(©) More Access options for the current station > page 198.
Selecting the previous or next track: press /I< or >I.
@ aca Going to the beginning of the recording: press and hold Nix.
Going to the live program: press and hold >!I. The i symbol will
be displayed.
@ K/>| Select the previous/next station.
DAI Start or stop playback
® Wg Unmutes or mutes playback.
@ List The station list is displayed > page 193.
Depending on availability, the station name as well as program in-
@ Info section formation, for example, may be displayed. Also see > page 199,
Online additional data.
® Note Opening free text search

RADIO > Source > Search.
=@ in General information on page 173. Entering search terms
@) Tips You can enter multiple search terms at once in

= any order.
Not all functions are available in every source
and on every touch display. The following information may be available:
eet
Symbol | Description
Results from the list: Last stations
8W1012721BC
Using intelligent search, you can search for sta- yy | Results from the list: Presets >
tion names, frequencies, program types (such as
News), podcasts*, or online radio stations*.
195
Radio
Symbol | Description Editing a preset
(| Results from a Station list > Deleting presets: press Ww in the playback view,
For ex- or
ample, Station frequency band > In the presets list, select: Z > one or more sta-
tions or Select all > Delete > (Done).
Requirement: the presets list must be displayed.

TS ae La (ela) > Moving a preset: press a.
> Touch the $ symbol and move the entry to the
You can listen to the last stations that were desired position.
played in all frequency bands. > Press Done.
Accessing last stations
Live Sports
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM
RADIO > Source > Last stations.
Using the Live Sports category, you can find live
Listening to last stations
commentary about your favorite teams during a
> Press ona station. live sports broadcast. Depending on vehicle
equipment, you may be able to switch commen-
Deleting last stations
tary that favors a certain side on or off.
> Select: Z > select one or more stations or Se-
lect all > Delete > (Done). Accessing live games
RADIO > Source > SiriusXM > Sports > Live
Sports > a game.
You can store your favorite stations from every
frequency band in the presets list. The score, the status of the game, and if necessa-
ry the current possession of the ball are dis-
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM: Channels, played.
shows, and sports teams will be stored in the fa-
vorites as Smart Favorites. After switching the ig- Saving/deleting a favorite team
nition and the MMI on, the smart presets store > Press W/W.
radio programs at a specific time.
Switching commentary on or off
Selecting presets using the MMI
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Internet. A data plan must be available
RADIO > Source > Presets > a preset. => page 177.
Storing presets > Press ())/tQ).

> Press on ¥ (@) in the playback view > page 194,
fig. 149. Radio text
Requirement: a list with radio stations must be Program information (for example, general text
displayed > page 193, fig. 147. messages, artist, composer, song) is displayed in
> Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op- the radio text.
tions menu appears.
Requirement: the selected radio station must
> Press Store as preset.
support the radio text function.
196
Radio
Opening radio text Previous selection

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: The station/podcast list for the last station or
RADIO > select a frequency band (such as FM) podcast that was playing will be displayed.
> select a station > More > Radio text.
Top stations
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following
The favorite online radio stations are displayed.
functions may be available:
Filter list
Displaying previous radio text entries
> Select: 2 > (a category) > a station/podcast.
> Swipe downward with one finger. The last radio
text entries are displayed if they are available. The following categories are available:
Scrolling through radio text entries — Countries
> Swipe upward or downward with one finger. — Genres
— Languages
Showing Radio Text Plus information
— Editor's picks
If a radio text entry is displayed with a color, a — Themes
phone number or a navigation destination for the — Nearby
station is available as radio text plus information.
@) Note
You have the following options:
Selecting the destination be sure to note the connectivity costs section
> Select: a navigation destination marked in col- =@ in General information on page 173.
or > Set as destination.
@) Tips
Call
— Depending on the Internet connection and
> Select: d phone number marked in color > Call. network traffic, the connection may be lost
when online radio is playing.
@ Tips — Online radio reception may not be possible
A call to a phone number stored in the radio if Internet service is throttled.
text will start immediately. — Online media usage depends on the service
availability of the third party provider.
—The range and screen display of online me-
Online radio
dia services from third party providers in the
General information vehicle can vary.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and on- — Please note that it may not be possible to
line radio
play some online radio stations in certain
You can listen to various radio stations or pod- countries.
casts on the Internet using online radio. — Audi only provides access to online radio
and does not assume any responsibility for
the content of these services.
Internet. A data plan must be available
=> page 177.
Accessing online radio through the MMI

8W1012721BC
RADIO > Source > Online.
197
Radio
Listening to podcast favorites

Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and on- Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
line radio
displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
Opening podcasts using the MMI stored.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: > Select: a podcast > a podcast episode.
RADIO > Source > Online > Podcasts.
Browsing through podcast favorites
Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
Listening to a podcast displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
stored.
> Select: a podcast > a podcast episode.
> Press < or >.
Search
> Press 2. Displaying all podcast favorites
The following functions are available in the pod- Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
cast playback view: displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
stored.
Displaying podcast episodes
> Press All.
> Press List.
Editing podcast favorites
Starting/stopping podcast playback
> Deleting podcast favorites: press Y in the
> Press /II. playback view, or
> In the podcast favorites list, select: All > Z >
Previous/next podcast
one or more podcasts, or Select All > Delete >
> PressKi/ DI. (Done).
Changing the playback position Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
> You can adjust the playback position using the displayed.
knob.
> Moving podcast favorites: Select: All > Z.
> Touch the $ symbol and move the entry to the
Displaying the online radio menu desired position.
> Press Done.
> Press Ba.
Switching to radio Options and settings

> Press Source. The sources in the Radio menu
are displayed.
Requirement: the playback view @) > page 194,
Podcast favorites
fig. 149 must be displayed.
You can store podcasts in the podcast favorites.
> Press More (9), or
Requirement: the playback view for a podcast
Requirement: a list with radio stations or pod-
must be displayed.
casts* must be displayed > page 193, fig. 147.
> Press YY @ © page 194, fig. 149. > Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
Requirement: a list with podcasts must be dis- tions menu appears.
played.
> Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
tions menu appears.
> Press Save podcast.
198
Radio
Depending on the selected source and vehicle be loaded depending on the availability from the
equipment, the following functions may be avail- different providers.
able.
Online station tracking
— Store as favorite > page 196. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
— Radio text > page 196. Internet. A data plan must be available
— Save podcast > page 198, Podcast favorites. => page 177. A station provides information in
Related content the background for its online station alternative
and is identified with the ™} symbol.
Channels, artists, and shows related to the con-
tent that is currently playing. During reception loss in the FM frequency band,
the radio tuner can establish a data connection
and switch to an online station alternative, if it is
available. If available, you can receive your local
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: radio stations in every region of your country on-
RADIO > ©}. line. This may result in additional costs >@®. The
symbol indicates a station that is currently be-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following received online.
ing settings may be available: — Automatic/Off: activates or deactivates auto-
HD Radio FM/HD Radio AM matic switching to online station alternatives.
— With request: switching to online station alter-
You can switch HD Radio reception on or off.
natives must be confirmed manually.
SiriusXM Tune Start
Preferred online radio data rate
If you play a smart preset when this function is
Depending on the selected radio station, you may
switched on, the song currently playing on the
be able to adjust the data rate for Internet radio
channel will play from the beginning.
=> page 197 and for the Online station tracking.
SiriusXM subscription status For optimal sound playback, press High. To re-
This option is available when your subscription is duce data usage, press Low.
about to expire or has already expired. The expi-
ration date for your license is displayed. () Note
Call SiriusXM: the telephone number and radio Read the information about Audi connect, and
ID of your satellite radio provider are displayed.
=@ in General information on page 173.
To call your satellite radio provider using the
MMI, press Call SiriusXM.
@) Tips
Online additional data Delays may occur when switching automati-
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the cally between normal frequency bands and
Internet. A data plan must be available online radio.
=> page 177.
When the function is switched on, additional in-

formation (such as album cover, artist, track) will
Troubleshooting
8W1012721BC

ment.
199
Radio
A station is no longer displayed in the sta- | Store the station as a preset in advance. Access the pre-
tion list. sets using the presets list > page 196.
Online radio: no playback from online ra-_ | Check if a data plan has been purchased for the applicable
dio. country and it is available > page 177.
200
Media
Media CG) Note

General information Read the information about Audi connect, and
There may be different media sources and con- =@ in General information on page 173.
nections available depending on the vehicle
equipment. For example, you can play media files
Bluetooth audio player
using a connected USB drive or connect your mo-
bile devices to the Audi music interface and oper- With the Bluetooth audio player, you can play
ate them through the MMI. music wirelessly through the MMI from your
Bluetooth-capable mobile device (such as a cell
Media and format restrictions: the MMI (includ-
phone).
ing the USB storage device connection) was test-
ed with a variety of products and media on the Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
market. However, there may be cases where indi- the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
vidual devices or media and audio/video files may settings will open on your mobile device during
not be recognized, may play only with restric- the connection setup. The Bluetooth function and
tions, or may not play at all. visibility of the MMI > page 213 and mobile de-
vice must be switched on.
Restricted functionality: reset the MMI to the
factory default settings if functionality is restrict- Connecting a mobile device
ed > page 213.
Digital Rights Management: please note that MEDIA > Source > Connect external device >
the audio/video files are subject to copyright pro- New connection. The available Bluetooth devi-
tection. ces will be displayed after several seconds.
Files that are protected by DRM and are identi- > Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
fied with the symbol f@ will not play. displayed Bluetooth devices.
> To update the list, press OQ.
Data security: never store important information
on mobile devices. Audi is not responsible for A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
damaged or lost files and media. generated.
> Confirm the PIN on your mobile device.
Loading times: the more files/folders/playlists
there are on a storage medium, the longer it will After connecting successfully, the mobile device
take to load. To reduce the amount of time it will be displayed in the Connected devices menu
takes the audio/video files to load, use a storage as a Bluetooth audio player.
medium that only contains audio/video files, and Playing media > page 203.
create subfolders (for example, for each artist or
album). @ Tips
Additional information: when playing, audio — Check for any connection requests on your
files are automatically displayed with any addi- Bluetooth device.
tional information that is stored (such as the ar- — Multiple Bluetooth audio players can be
tist, track and album cover). If this information is paired with the MMI, but only one at a time
not available on the medium, the MMI will revert can be active as a Bluetooth audio player
to the local Gracenote metadata database or => page 214.
search online if necessary. See > page 207, On- — The supported media functions (such as
line additional data. However, in some cases, the shuffle, list view, categories, search, op-
8W1012721BC
additional information may not be displayed. tions) depend on the Bluetooth device being
used. >
201
Media
— Note the volume setting on your Bluetooth @ USB adapter for devices with a mi-
device. Audi recommends setting your mo- cro USB connection
bile device to the maximum volume when @ USB adapter for Apple devices with
using it as a Bluetooth audio player. a Lightning connection
—Aselection of supported Bluetooth devices @ USB adapter for devices with USB
can be found in the database for tested mo- type C connection
bile devices at www.audi.com/bluetooth.
() Note
Amazon Alexa Handle the USB adapter carefully. Do not al-
Applies to: vehicles with Amazon Alexa Integration low it to be pinched.
You can play various Amazon Alexa content using
@ Tips
the MMI. The voice recognition system is used to
operate it. Apple devices with a dock connector can only
be charged using a USB adapter designed for
Requirement: Amazon Alexa must be activated
devices with a dock connector. Data cannot be
=> page 27.
transmitted.
> Start Amazon Alexa using the voice recognition
system. Audi music interface
MEDIA > Source > Amazon Alexa. Connect your mobile devices to the Audi music in-
terface in order to operate them through the
@) Note MMI and charge the batteries.
Read the information about Audi connect, and The Audi music interface USB ports are located in
be sure to note the connectivity costs section the center console in the front and in the rear*
=> page 173. and are labeled with the «> symbol. If multiple
USB devices are connected to the USB ports (for
Multimedia connections example, a smartphone and a USB flash drive),
all of these devices can be used as the playback
USB adapter cable source.
Connecting or charging mobile devices using

[RAH-9202
a USB adapter
> Connect the matching USB adapter to the Audi
music interface USB port and connect it to the
mobile device, such as a smartphone.
The battery will charge automatically.
Mobile devices connected to the Audi music inter-

face can be started and operated using the MMI
Fig. 150 Audi Genuine Accessories: USB adapter => page 203.
You can connect your mobile devices through the Disconnecting a mobile device from the Audi
Audi music interface to the MMI using the USB music interface
adapter and charge the battery at the same time. > Remove the USB adapter cable from the Audi
You can purchase the USB adapter cable from an music interface.
authorized Audi dealer or at specialty stores:
202
Media
ZA WARNING fer to your mobile device owner's manual

for more information.
Driving requires your complete and undivided — The USB adapter on the Audi music inter-
attention. As the driver, you have complete re- face will support iPod touch or iPhone devi-
sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate ces from the 5th generation or newer with
mobile devices while driving, because this in- the lightning connector.
creases the risk of an accident. —Aselection of supported devices can be
found in the database for tested mobile de-
@) Note vices at www.audi.com/mp3.
— Pull the cable out of the Audi music inter-
face carefully so that the USB ports are not Playing media
damaged.
— Use a USB extension cable to connect devi-
ces that have an integrated USB connector
(such as a USB stick) to reduce the risk of The following sources can be selected depending
damage to your USB device and the Audi on the vehicle equipment:
music interface. — Amazon Alexa > page 202.
— Extremely high or low temperatures that — USB device = page 202.
can occur inside vehicles can damage mobile — External device: you can connect external devi-
devices and/or impair their performance. ces via Bluetooth and use the Bluetooth audio
Never leave mobile devices in the vehicle in player > page 201, or you can connect an exter-
extremely high or low temperatures. nal device directly to the Audi music interface
=> page 202.
G) Tips
— Always follow the information found in Accessing media
=> page 82.
Playing media files using the MMI
—When you switch the ignition off, the USB
ports are still supplied with power until the > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
energy management intervenes. MEDIA > Source > a source. Depending on the
— Do not use an additional adapter cable or connected device, the symbol for a source may
USB extension cable to connect mobile devi- change. The device name may be displayed (for
ces to the Audi music interface that already example: myPhone).
have a cable or that must be connected with > Select a track from the categories in the media
a USB adapter cable (9 page 202, fig. 150). center > page 204.
Using an additional adapter or US extension
Playing media files using the multifunction
cable may impair functionality. steering wheel
— Functionality is not guaranteed for mobile
devices that do not conform to the USB 2.0 Requirement: a media source must contain me-
specification. dia files > page 203.
— USB hubs are not supported. > Select the radio/media tab in the instrument
— Video playback through the Audi music in- cluster.
terface is not supported on Apple devices > Turn the left thumbwheel to display the play-
and MTP devices (such as smartphones). list.
— iPod touch or iPhone malfunctions also af- > To switch to a different source, press the [=]
fect the operation of the MMI. Reset your button.
8W1012721BC
mobile device in these situations. > To select a media file or a source, turn and
— Audi recommends updating the iPod touch press the left thumbwheel.
or iPhone software to the latest version. Re-
203
Media
> To switch between radio and media, select in @ Categories

the instrument cluster: the =] button > Switch The media center will display categories depend-
to radio/Switch to media.
ing on the connected device, the selected source
content, and the connection type.
G) Tips
Last played tracks
— For safety reasons, the video image is only
displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On- The last played media file will be played.
ly the sound from the video plays while driv-
Artists
ing.
— Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: All available artists are displayed.
Depending on the selected function, opera- > Select: an artist > an album > a song.
tion through the center display may be re-
quired. Playlists
All playlists and smart playlists in the source are
displayed.
> Select: a playlist > a song.

canoe
RAX-0158
ISTE etal g
Smart playlists
Last played tracks: the tracks that were dis-
played last are displayed.
Most played tracks: the tracks that are played

most frequently are displayed.
Fig. 151 Center display: media center
Folders
There are various categories available in the me-
The folder structure or track/chapter list is dis-
dia center. You can also search for media files
played.
across sources. The current music track continues
playing while you search the MMI. > Select: a folder > a song.
Opening the media center Compilations

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: You can control your compilations through the
MEDIA > Source > a source > a category. MMI.
@ Source symbol > Select: a compilation > a song.
The symbol for the source that is currently in use Composers

is displayed. Depending on the connected device,
All available composers are displayed.
the symbol for the source may change. As an ex-
ample, a USB stick is shown connected to the > Select: gd composer > an album > a song.
Audi music interface.
iTunes Radio
@ Source device name > Press ona radio station.
The device name of the source that is currently in
Audio books
use is displayed.
You can control your audio books on the MMI.
> Press on an audio book.
204
Media
Podcasts — Read the information about Audi connect,
You can control your podcasts through the MMI. and be sure to note the connectivity costs
section >@ in General information on
> Select: a podcast > a podcast episode. page 173.
Genres
G@) Tips
All available genres are displayed.
— Only the categories supported by the medi-
>» Select: a genre > an artist > an album > a song. um are available.
— For safety reasons, the video image is only
Videos
displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On-
All available video files are displayed. ly the sound from the video plays while driv-
ing.
> Press on a video.
—When synchronizing a portable device with
Tracks Cloud services, playlists may display incor-
rectly in the MMI. Use the media center in
All available tracks are displayed.
the device.
> Press on a track. — Applies to: iPod touch/iPhone: Note the in-
formation about the Audi music interface
Albums
and the supported devices > page 202.
All available albums are displayed.
> Select: an album > a track.
@ Note
— Cloud services and the iTunes radio category

always require an Internet connection.
tele mitardatelary
[RAX-0037,
Baa aeCit)
Ca
The Rock Band
The bigB
eee)
ns
eae)
nc
@
Fig. 152 Center display: left side: playback view; right side: playlist
Operating source > a category (for example, Artists > Al-

bum) > a track.
8W1012721BC
> Applies to: MMI: To open the playback view (),

select on the home screen: MEDIA > Source > a
> To open the playlist @, select List in the play-
back view @..
205
Media
The following functions may be available depend-

ing on the selected media source and the vehicle
equipment:
Symbol/Description Description
The media center categories are displayed based on the active
©) oo
oo
source > page 204.
@ Source Displays sources in the Media menu.

Applies to: playback view: Device name of the source that is current-
ly playing.
Source/device name
Applies to: media center view: Source that you are currently brows-
ing > page 204.
Requirement: a media source with album covers must be selected
or the covers must be available online > page 207, Online addition-
Album cover in the play-
al data.
©
Sanaa Displays the current album cover.

Display the playlist: press on the cover.
@ & Settings > page 207.
Current track informa- | Display of Track and Artist. Highlights the track that is currently
tion playing.
© List Browsing in the list: drag your finger upward or downward.
Requirement: a media source with album covers must be selected
Album cover in the play- or the covers must be available online > page 207, Online addition-
© list al data.
Displays the current album cover.
@ More Opens options > page 207.
O Off Switching between off/playlist/track: press @.
® O Playlist The tracks in the current playlist will repeat continuously in a loop.
© Track The current track will repeat continuously in a loop.
Selecting the previous/next track (or station/chapter): press Kl or
Dl.
@ lea/D Fast forward/rewind: to fast forward or rewind within a track, press
and hold PI or K.
Jumping to the beginning of a track: press on K after the first
three seconds of play time.
@ DAI Start or stop playback
@ =d When this function is switched on, all files in the playlist will play in
random order.
@ List The playlist @) is displayed.
@ Playback position The bar shows the current playback position in the track.
@ Info section Display of Track, Artist, and Album.
G) Tips aay aay laa)
Not all functions are available in every source You can search across all active sources, for ex-
and on every touch display. ample for tracks and video files.
206
Media
Opening the search The following table gives an overview of the as-
Requirement: the selected source must support pect ratios. The possible aspect ratios depend on
the search function. the source or video file being played.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Aspect ra-
Description
MEDIA > Search. tio B
The MMI detects the picture for-
Entries that contain the entered search term are
Auto mat of the source and displays the
listed in the results list. Each result is marked
image in the optimal ratio.
with the symbol for a category in the media cen-
The image is fixed in the corre-
ter > page 204.
sponding ratio. Select one of these
4:3,
You can search for the following categories: options if the image is distorted or
16:9
— Artists a section of the image is cut off or
— Albums blurry when Auto is selected.
— Tracks The image is enlarged to fill the en-
— Genres an tire display.
— Videos The image is displayed in the ratio
of the source format. Select this
Options and settings Original option if the image is distorted or a
section of the image is cut off or
blurry when Auto is selected.
Context-dependent functions and settings may
be available depending on the selected source,
the connected mobile device, and the connection
type.
Accessing settings
Requirement: the playback view must be dis-
played @) > page 205, fig. 152.
MEDIA > ©.
> Press More @).
ing settings may be available:
Play more like this
Online additional data
The track currently playing is quickly analyzed for
features such as artist, genre, mood, and beat,
Internet. A data plan must be available
and a smart playlist with similar tracks will be
=>page 177.
shown.
When the function is switched on, additional in-
Aspect ratio
formation (such as album cover, artist, track) will
Audi recommends the Auto setting for the pic- be loaded depending on the availability from the
ture format. If you press on an aspect ratio, you different providers.
will see a preview of the setting on the screen.
Press OK to apply the selected aspect ratio.
Supported media and file formats

8W1012721BC
The USB storage device connection supports the

following media file properties:
207
Media
Audio/video files
Audi music interface: mobile devices > page 202 such as iPhones,
MTP players, and USB storage devices in “USB Device Subclass 1 and
Supported media
6” that conform to USB 2.0: USB sticks, USB MP3 players (Plug-and-
Play capable), external USB flash drives, and hard drives
USB storage devices: exFAT, FAT, FAT32, NTFS.
File system USB storage device partitions (primary/logical*): 2 per USB connec-
tion.
Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNG with max. 800x800 px. The album cover
Metadata from the medium or from Gracenote® is displayed, depending on
availability.
Playlists -M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX
USB mass storage device: max. 50,000 files per medium; max. 1,000
Number of files
files per playlist/folder
Audio files
Format File extension
MPEG 1/2 Layer 3 -mp3
Up to maximum 320 kbit/s
Windows Media Audio 9/10
wis 48 kHz sampling frequencies
MPEG 2/4 .m4a; .m4b; .aac
Opus Opus; .0gg; .oga
FLAC flac
ALAC .m4a 48 kHz sampling frequency
Monkey's Audio -ape
Video files
Format File extension
MPEG 1/2 -Mpg; .mpeg
MPEG4 AVC (H.264) -.mp4; .m4v; .mov; .avi
up to maximum 15 Mbit/s and
Windows Media Video 9 wmv; .asf
warn, 285 1920x1080 px at maximum 30 fps
MPEG-H (H.265/HEVC) -mp4; .mov
VP8/VP9 .webm
Flash video flv; .f4v
not always display, depending on the sys-

G) Tips
tem language.
— The media sources do not support the Win- — The manufacturer of the storage device can
dows Media Audio 9 Voice format. provide information about its “USB Device
— For compressing MP3 files, Audi recom- Subclass”.
mends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The — Some MTP player functions are not support-
display showing the remaining play time ed, such as rating music tracks and video
may differ for audio files with variable bit playback.
rate.
— Special characters (such as those in ID3 tag
information) may display differently or may
208
Media
Troubleshooting
ment.
Problem Solution
Audi music interface/Bluetooth Read the instructions in the chapter > page 202, Multimedia
audio player: the mobile device is connections/> page 201, Bluetooth audio player.
not supported.
Audi music interface: the mobile For many mobile phones or mobile devices, playback is not possi-
device is not recognized as a ble when the battery level is too low (less than 5% charge level).
source. The mobile device will only be recognized as a media source in
the MMI after connecting if the battery charge level is sufficient.
Audi music interface: malfunc- The Bluetooth audio player function is switched on. Switch this
tions during audio playback function off > page 213 when you are not using the Bluetooth
through an iPod touch/iPhone. audio player.
Audi music interface: audio play- Make sure the USB mode M7P is selected in the settings on your
back through the connected mo- mobile device.
bile device is not possible.
Bluetooth audio player: interfer- Playback interference can occur when using the Bluetooth audio
ence with track display and audio player if a music player app from a third party provider is open.
playback. Audi recommends using the integrated media player on your
Bluetooth device (such as a smartphone).
8W1012721BC
209
Audi smartphone interface
Audi smartphone @) Note

interface Read the information about Audi connect, and
Setup
=> page 173.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
You can connect your smartphone to the MMI @) Tips

with a cable or wirelessly* using the Audi smart- — The functions that can be used depend on
phone interface. Certain content on your smart-
the following factors, among others:
phone is adapted in the MMI while driving and
— The brand of your smartphone
can be operated through the MMI.
— The version of the operating system in
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and your smartphone
the ignition must be switched on. iPhone genera- — The software version of the app used
tion 5 or higher with Lightning connector and iOS — The USB adapter cable and correct connec-
7.1.2 operating system or higher, or smartphone tion
with Android Auto app and Android 5.0 Lollipop — Your cell phone service provider
operating system or higher. — The customized settings on your smart-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: phone
SETTINGS > Connected devices > Audi smart- — One of the factors above or a combination
phone interface > New connection. of any of them could cause your smart-
> Connect your smartphone to the Audi music in- phone to be incompatible with the Audi
terface > page 202 using a USB adapter smartphone interface. Compatibility cannot
=> page 202, fig. 150, or be guaranteed for all types of smartphones.
> To connect your iPhone wireless*, switch on the For more information and assistance, refer
Bluetooth function and Wi-Fi on your iPhone. to the user guide and the manufacturer of
Open the Apple CarPlay settings in your iPhone. your smartphone.
In the MMI, press on your iPhone in the list of — Please note that you can only connect your
displayed devices. smartphone via the front Audi music inter-
> To update the list, press O. face in order to use the Audi smartphone in-
> Follow the system instructions. terface.
> Pay attention to any additional system prompts — Wireless Apple CarPlay* is not available in
on your smartphone, if applicable. all countries.
> Applies to: MMI: If you declined use of Apple — Wireless Apple CarPlay* was a planned func-
CarPlay or Android Auto the first time you con- tion at the time this manual was printed.
nected your smartphone, then select on the Wireless Apple CarPlay* is not available in
home screen: SETTINGS > Connected devices > your vehicle.
Audi smartphone interface > a smartphone. — Wireless Apple CarPlay* is only possible in
> Follow the system instructions. vehicles without a navigation system or
without a detected vehicle position (GPS da-
Z\ WARNING ta) if the following requirement is met: the
Driving requires your complete and undivided embedded SIM card for the vehicle must be
attention. As the driver, you have complete re- logged into the mobile phone network
=> page 173.
sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate
mobile devices while driving, because this in- — If the connected smartphone has voice con-
trol, you can operate your smartphone using
creases the risk of an accident.
the external voice recognition system
=> page 27.
210
Audi smartphone interface
— The menu language shown in the MMI is — Usage of the Audi smartphone interface de-
based on the settings in your smartphone. pends on the availability of services through
— Some MMI functions are not available when third party providers.
there is an active Audi smartphone interface — Audi merely provides access to third party
connection. services through the MMI and does not as-
— You cannot connect any mobile devices via sume any responsibility for the content of
Bluetooth when an Audi smartphone inter- these services.
face connection is active.
Troubleshooting

ment.
Problem Solution
Audi smartphone Check the battery charge level on your smartphone.
interface cannot be Check the USB cable and use a different one if necessary.
opened. Check if Android Auto or Apple CarPlay is available in the country where the vehi-
cle is being operated.
Android Auto: check if the Android Auto app is installed on your smartphone.
Connecting the Make sure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB
smartphone to the adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface
MMI failed. => page 202.
Apple CarPlay: check if Apple CarPlay is activated on your iPhone.
Android Auto: check in the Android Auto app if Android Auto permits new
vehicles.
Wireless connection: open the settings for Bluetooth and Apple CarPlay on your
iPhone. Remove your vehicle. Open the connection manager in the MMI
= page 214. Delete your iPhone in the Telephone 1 and Audi smartphone inter-
face submenus. Repeat the connection process. Restart the MMI > page 19. Re-
start your iPhone.
The smartphone is Make sure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB
not automatically adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface
detected. => page 202.
Check if the requirements needed to connect a smartphone have been met.
8W1012721BC
211
Additional settings
Additional settings
System settings Keyboard
See > page 23.
Introduction
General settings are described in this chapter.

You can find specific settings in the chapters
about those settings. The available settings de- Requirement: an audio source must be active.
pend on the vehicle equipment. » Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Sound.
Date and time
Possible settings:
— Treble
SETTINGS > General > Date & time.
— Bass
Possible settings: — Balance/fader
— Speed dependent volume control
— Automatically set date and time
— Subwoofer
— Surround level
— Date format Focus

— Time format
You can optimize the sound distribution for vari-
— Automatic time zone
ous locations in the vehicle.
— Time zone
3D effect
Cental ah ey You can adjust the intensity of the 3D effect.
With the Medium setting, you will hear an opti-
mal 3D effect for all sources.
SETTINGS > General > Measurement units.
Possible settings: Plea ee ely
— Speed > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:

— Distance SETTINGS > Announcements & tone.
— Temperature
Possible settings:
— Volume
— Pressure — Announcement volume
— Consumption (engine) — Welcome sound
Language and keyboard ZA WARNING

Adjust the volume of the audio system so that
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
SETTINGS > Language & keyboard.
lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all
Language times.
You can change the languages for the display,

Gi) Tips
navigation announcements, and the voice recog-
nition system. The volume is automatically adjusted to a pre-
set level when the MMI is switched on.
212
Additional settings
Bluetooth — Map material update for the navigation system

=> page 189.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: — Have the software update performed by an au-
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Bluetooth thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Bluetooth Facility. This can result in additional costs.
You can select a setting for visibility of the MMI ZA\ WARNING
to other Bluetooth devices. To connect a new
— Perform the installation only when the vehi-
Bluetooth device, the Visible setting must be se-
cle is stationary. Otherwise, this increases
lected. If Invisible is selected, a Bluetooth con-
the risk of an accident
nection will only be possible with paired devices.
— If the installation fails, contact an author-
If Off is selected, no Bluetooth device can be con-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
nected.
Facility immediately to have the malfunction
Bluetooth audio player corrected.
When this function is switched on, the profile

will load automatically when your Bluetooth au- Online system update
dio player is within range. Applies to: vehicles with online system update
Bluetooth name With the online system update, you can update
the software directly in the vehicle.
The MMI’s Bluetooth name is displayed and can
be changed. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Factory default settings Downloading updates

Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. Requirement: notification for an online system
update will appear in the center display.
SETTINGS > System maintenance > Restore > Press on the notification, or
factory settings. > Open the notification in the notification center
> Follow the system instructions. on page 22 and press on the notification.
The settings will be reset. The system will re-
start. This may take some time. You can also check manually if an update is avail-
able.
@ Tips > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > System maintenance > Software
Make sure that not only the settings were de-
update > Search for updates > desired update
leted but also the stored data, if necessary.
> Continue.
Software update
The MMI will start the download. You can check
Introduction the status of the download process in the notifi-
Applies to: vehicles with software update
cation center > page 22.
You can update your vehicle’s software.
Installing updates
The functions depend on the country and vehicle Requirement: an online system update must be
equipment: downloaded and a notification must be shown in
8W1012721BC
— Update through the online system update the center display.

=> page 213.
> Stop the vehicle safely.
213
Additional settings
> Press on the notification, or Possible menu items:

> Open the notification in the notification center
— Telephone 1
on > page 22 and press on the notification.
> Follow the system instructions. — Telephone 2
— Audio player
Depending on the scope of the update, the online — Wi-Fi hotspot
system update may only be started if you follow
— Headset
these instructions:
> Switch the emergency flashers off, if necessary Audi smartphone interface
> Make sure that the starter battery is charged. You can connect your smartphone to the MMI
> To start the update, exit and lock the vehicle.
=> page 210.
The MMI will start the installation. When the up-
myAudi app
date has ended, a notification will be displayed.
This function is available if the myAudi app is in-
Z\ WARNING stalled on your mobile device and started, and if
the mobile device is connected with the vehicle’s
Depending on the scope of the installation,
Wi-Fi hotspot.
the ignition must not be switched on during
the installation to ensure the installation
() Note
completes successfully.
©) Note be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=>page 173.
=@ in General information on page 173.
Managing connected devices
Requirement: the connected devices menu must

@ Tips be displayed > page 214.
The software update may take some time.
Connecting a device
WEE Tel Requirement: Bluetooth visibility must be acti-

Applies to: vehicles with online system update vated in the MMI & page 213 and mobile device.
Online system update: incomplete. Warning! > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
Vehicle functions limited > To search for and connect your mobile device,
press New connection > page 162.
If an error occurs when installing an online sys-
tem update, certain functions such as the emer- Selecting a connected device
gency call function may not be available. Drive to > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi > Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
Service Facility immediately to have the malfunc- displayed devices. The connection will be made.
tion corrected.
Disconnecting a connected device
Connected devices > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
> Press on the connected mobile device. The se-
Displayed connected devices
lected mobile device will be disconnected from
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and the MMI.
the ignition must be switched on.
Deleting a device
> Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1. >
SETTINGS > Connected devices.
214
Additional settings
> Press and hold an element until the Options — About Audi connect
menu is displayed.
> Press Delete. ONC lad nel M nail
If a device is listed multiple times, it will be de-
leted from all menu items. Requirement: a smartphone must be connected
to the MMI > page 210.
PXe Keli
a Cela] Mey Lately
Depending on the selected function, additional SETTINGS > Connected devices > Audi smart-
options may be available. phone interface.
> Press and hold an element until the Options
Requirement: the connected devices menu must
menu is displayed.
be displayed > page 214.
> Press Legal notes.
> Press ona menu item, such as Telephone 1.
» Press and hold an element until the Options
menu is displayed.
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
Bluetooth profile the ignition must be switched on.
You can switch desired profiles on or off sepa- > Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func-
rately in the MMI. tions tab > page 13.
Favorite >» Press and hold the E=] button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel until the display appears.
To set a paired mobile device as the default
phone, activate this function in the MMI. Possible options:
When the mobile device is in range and the Blue- — Engine code
tooth function on the mobile device and in the — Software information
MMI is switched on, the default phone will be — Version information
given priority over the other Bluetooth devices
and will be connected directly to the MMI.
Head-up display
Applies to: vehicles with head-up display
Legal information
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
General information the ignition must be switched on. The head-up
display is switched off.
Information on the software licenses can be
found online at www.audi.com/softwareinfo. > To display the license text in the head-up dis-
play, press and hold the S? button @
Multi Media Interface = page 25, fig. 19 until the display appears.

SETTINGS > General.
Subscriptions
Version information
Legal notes
8W1012721BC
Possible options:
— Software information
215
Additional information
Additional information
Brands and licenses
This manual does not contain any symbols, such
as ® or ™, to identify trademarks or registered
trademarks. However, the absence of these sym-
bols does not constitute a waiver of any rights as-
sociated with these names.
Apple, iPhone, iPod touch, Apple CarPlay, Light-

ning, and iTunes Radio are trademarks of Apple
Inc.
10S is a trademark or, in the USA and other coun-

tries, a registered trademark of Cisco and is used
under license.
Other product and manufacturer names may be

trademarks of their respective owners.
216
Checking and Filling
Checking and Filling CG) Note

Fuel — Filling the tank just one time with leaded
fuel or other metallic additives will cause
Types of gasoline permanent deterioration to the catalytic
The correct gasoline grade is stated on the inside converter function.
of the fuel filler door. — When gasoline with an octane rating that is
too low is used, high speeds or heavy engine
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter load can lead to engine damage.
and must only be driven with unleaded gasoline.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gas-

@ Tips
oline. For additional information on TOP TIER De- The vehicle may be filled with fuel that has a
tergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com. higher octane rating than what is required by
the engine.
The individual gasoline grades are differentiated
by octane ratings. This value is given with (R
+M)/2 equating to AKI or in RON. Gasoline mixture
The headings below match the sticker in the fuel Gasoline with alcohol or MTBE (Methyl-Tert-
filler door (examples): Butyl-Ether)
You can use unleaded gasoline mixed with alco-
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY MIN. (R+M)/2 87
hol or MTBE (generally labeled as oxygenated
Regular/ MIN. RON 91 Regular
compounds) as long as the fuel meets the follow-
Use regular gasoline with minimum 87 AKI / ing conditions:
91 RON > ©.
Gasoline with methanol content (methyl alco-
Audi recommends using premium gasoline with hol or methanol)
minimum 91 AKI / 95 RON to achieve the rated
— Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
horsepower and torque.
—No more than 3% methanol
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY PREMIUM MIN. (R — More than 2% solvent
+M)/2 91 / SUPER MIN. RON 95
Gasoline with ethanol content (ethyl alcohol or
Using premium gasoline with minimum 91 AKI / ethanol)
95 RON is recommended. — Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
If premium gasoline is not available, you can also —No more than 15% ethanol
use regular gasoline 87 AKI / 91 RON. However Gasoline with MTBE content
this does reduce the engine power slightly.
— Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY PREMIUM MIN. (R —No more than 15% MTBE
+M)/2 93 / SUPER PLUS MIN. RON 98
Gasoline adapted to the season
Using premium plus gasoline with at least 93
Many gasoline fuels are adapted to the seasons.
AKI / 98 RON is recommended.
When the season changes, refueling at high-traf-
If no premium plus gasoline is available, you can fic gas stations is recommended. It is more likely
also use premium gasoline with 91 AKI /95 RON. that the gasoline will be suitable for the season
However this does reduce the engine power there.
slightly.
@) Note
8W1012721BC
— Gasoline with methanol content that does

not meet the specified conditions may cause >
217
corrosion damage and damage to plastic or Refueling

rubber components in the fuel system.
— Do not use gasoline that does not meet the
specifications. Messages
— If you are unable to find out if a specific gas-
oline mixture meets the specifications, ask FA tank system: malfunction! Please contact
the gas station operator or their fuel suppli- Service
er. There is a malfunction in the fuel tank system.
— Do not use any gasoline mixture whose Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
composition cannot be identified. Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
— Audi does not assume any responsibility for malfunction corrected.
damage to the fuel system or for perform-
ance problems caused by using gasoline Fueling procedure
mixtures different from those specified.
This type of damage also does not fall under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty or under
the emissions control system warranty.
— If you notice a higher fuel consumption or
poor handling or performance problems due
to such gasoline mixtures, Audi recom-
mends fueling with unblended gasoline.
Gasoline additives
Fig. 153 Right rear side of the vehicle: opening the fuel
An important issue for many automobile manu- filler door
facturers is combustion residue in the engine
that results from the use of certain fuels.
Although types of gasoline differ depending on

the manufacturer, there are similarities. Certain
substances in the gasoline may cause deposits in
the engine. Additives in the gasoline that should
keep the engine and fuel system clean do not all
function equally.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gas-

Fig. 154 Fuel filler door with attached fuel cap
oline. For additional information on TOP TIER De-
tergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
The fuel filler door is unlocked or locked by the
If you use incorrect fuels over a long period of central locking system.
time, the maximum engine performance may be
> Unlock the vehicle if necessary.
impaired by combustion residue.
> Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to
open it > fig. 153.
@ Note
> Unscrew the tank cap counterclockwise.
— Damage or malfunctions caused by the use > Place the cap from above on the open fuel filler
of incorrect types of gasoline are not cov- door > fig. 154.
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. > Insert the fuel pump nozzle all the way into the
— Only gasoline additives that have been ap- fuel filler neck.
proved by Audi may be used. > Begin fueling. Once the fuel pump nozzle turns
off the first time, the fuel tank is full. Donot =>
218
continue fueling, or else the expansion space in

the tank will be filled with fuel.
ZA\ WARNING
> After the fuel pump has switched off, wait five Audi does not recommend transporting fuel
seconds before removing the nozzle to allow containers inside the vehicle. Fuel could leak
the rest of the fuel to finish dripping into the out of the container and ignite, especially dur-
fuel tank. ing an accident. This can cause explosions,
> Turn the fuel cap clockwise until it clicks into fires, and injuries.
place. —If you must transport fuel in a fuel contain-
> Close the fuel filler door and then press on the er, note the following:
left side until it latches. — Always place the fuel container on the
ground before filling. Never fill the fuel
The correct fuel type for your vehicle can be container with fuel while it is inside or on
found on a label located on the inside of the fuel the vehicle. Electrostatic discharge can oc-
filler door. For additional information on fuel, see cur while refueling and the fuel vapors
=> page 217. could ignite.
For the tank capacity in your vehicle, refer to the — When using fuel containers made of met-
Technical Data > page 287. al, the fuel pump nozzle must always re-
main in contact with the container to re-
To reduce the risk of fuel leaking out or vapors
duce the risk of static charge.
escaping, make sure that the fuel tank is closed
— Insert the fuel pump nozzle as far as pos-
correctly. Otherwise the Ey indicator light will
sible into the filler opening while refuel-
turn on.
ing.
ZX WARNING — Follow the applicable legal regulations in

the country where you are driving when
Improper fueling procedures and improper using, storing and transporting fuel con-
handling of fuel can lead to explosions, fires, tainers.
severe burns, and other injuries.
— Make sure that the fuel container meets
— Do not smoke. Keep away from open flames. the industry standards, for example ANSI
— The ignition must be switched off when re- or ASTM F852-86.
fueling.
— Mobile devices, radio devices, and other ra- C) Note
dio equipment should always be switched
— Remove fuel that has overflowed onto any
off when refueling. Electromagnetic rays
vehicle components immediately to reduce
could cause sparks and start a fire.
the risk of damage to the vehicle.
— If you do not insert the fuel pump nozzle all
— Never drive until the fuel tank is completely
the way into the filler tube, then fuel can
empty. The irregular supply of fuel that re-
leak out. Spilled fuel can ignite and start a
sults from that can cause engine misfires.
fire.
Uncombusted fuel may enter the exhaust
— Never get into the vehicle when refueling. If
system and increase the risk of damage to
there is an exceptional situation where you
the catalytic converter.
must enter the vehicle, close the door and
touch a metal surface before touching the
@) For the sake of the environment
fuel pump nozzle again. This will reduce the
— Do not overfill the fuel tank, or fuel could
risk of electrostatic discharge that can cause
flying sparks. Sparks can start a fire when leak out when the vehicle is warming up.
refueling. — Fuel should never enter the sewer system or
8W1012721BC
come into contact with the ground. >
1) Depending on the engine and country
219
pull, you could damage the emergency re-

@ Tips
lease mechanism.
The fuel filler door on your vehicle does not
lock if you lock the vehicle from the inside us-
Emissions control
ing the central locking switch.
system
Fuel filler door emergency release General information
Applies to: vehicles with manual fuel filler door release
If the central locking system malfunctions, the Z\ WARNING

fuel filler door can be unlocked manually. The temperature of the exhaust system is
high, both when driving and after stopping
the engine.
— Never touch the exhaust tail pipes once they
have become hot. This could result in burns.
— Do not park your vehicle over flammable
materials such as grass or leaves because
the high temperature of the emissions sys-
tem could start a fire.
— Do not apply underbody protectant in the
exhaust system area, because this increases
Fig. 155 Right side trim panel in the luggage compart-
ment: opening the trim panel
the risk of fire.
(er) 1 id (Rel Uae lg
Observe the safety precautions > page 220, Gen-

eral information.
The vehicle may only be driven with unleaded

gasoline, or the catalytic converter will be de-
stroyed.
Never drive until the tank is completely empty.

Fig. 156 Luggage compartment: fuel filler door emergency The irregular supply of fuel that results from that
release can cause engine misfires. Uncombusted fuel
could enter the exhaust system, which could
The emergency opening mechanism is located
cause overheating and damage to the catalytic
behind the right side trim panel in the luggage converter.
compartment.
> Open the cover in the side panel > fig. 155. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
> To unlock the fuel filler door, loosen the red
loop from the retainer and then pull on the If the S indicator light blinks or turns on, there
loop carefully > fig. 1569©. is a malfunction that is causing poor emissions
> Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to quality and that could damage the catalytic con-
open it > page 218, fig. 153. verter. Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
@) Note malfunction corrected.
Only pull on the loop until you feel resistance.

You will not hear it release. If you continue to
220
The indicator light can also turn on if the fuel fill- suddenly, even when the ignition is switched
er cap is not closed correctly > page 218), off.
— Never open the hood when there is steam or
Engine compartment coolant escaping from the engine compart-
ment, because there is a risk that you could
General information
be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is
Special care is required if you are working in the escaping.
engine compartment — The cap on the coolant expansion tank must
never be opened when the coolant is hot.
For work in the engine compartment, such as The cooling system is under pressure. There
checking and filling fluids, there is a risk of in- is a risk of burns
jury, scalding, accidents, and burns. For this
—To protect your face, hands, and arms from
reason, follow all the warnings and general
hot steam or coolant, cover the cap with a
safety precautions provided in the following in-
thick cloth when opening.
formation. The engine compartment is a dan-
— Do not remove the engine cover under any
gerous area in the vehicle. > A.
circumstances. This increases the risk of
Explanation of warnings (sticker in the engine burns.
compartment): — Due to the risk of electric shock, never touch
Hot engine components! the ignition cable or other components in

@ Rotating parts!
the electronic high-voltage ignition system
when the engine is running or is starting.
The radiator fan can switch on at any
— If a gear is engaged while the vehicle is sta-
[2 time!
tionary and the engine is running, do not
High voltage! Switch off the engine be- press the accelerator pedal inadvertently.
5 fore coming into contact with any igni- Pressing the accelerator pedal will cause the
tion system components! vehicle to move, and this could result in an
The catalytic converter can be damaged accident.
"71 if the oil level is too high! — If inspections or repairs must be performed
Always follow the instructions in the op- while the engine is running, moving compo-
Co erating manual. nents (such as the ribbed belt, generator,
and radiator fan) pose an additional risk.
ZA WARNING — Set the parking brake first and select the
— Turn the engine off. “P” (Park) selector lever position.
— Switch the ignition off. — Always make sure that no parts of the
— Set the parking brake. body, jewelry, ties, loose clothing, and
— Select the “P” (Park) selector lever position. long hair can be caught in moving engine
— Allow the engine to cool. components. Before any work, always re-
move any jewelry and/or ties, tie back long
— Keep children away from the engine com-
hair, and make sure all clothing fits close
partment.
to the body to reduce the risk of anything
— Never spill fluids on a hot engine. These flu-
becoming caught in engine components.
ids (such as the freeze protection contained
— Pay attention to the following warnings list-
in the coolant) can catch fire.
ed when work on the fuel system or on the
— Avoid short circuits in the electrical system.
electrical equipment is required.
— Never reach into the radiator fan. The fan is
temperature-controlled and can turn on — Do not smoke.
8W1012721BC
1) Depending on the engine and country
221
— Never work near open flames. Opening and closing the hood
— Always have a working fire extinguisher
The hood is released from inside the vehicle.
nearby.
— All work on the battery or electrical system
in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi-
cal burns, accidents, or burns. Because of
this, all work must be performed only by an
Service Facility.
— Limit your exposure to exhaust and chemi-
cals to as short a time as possible.
Z\ WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning:
— Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, certain flu-
ids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other Fig. 158 Unlocked hood: lever
reproductive harm.
— Battery posts, terminals and related acces- Make sure the wiper arms are not raised up from
sories contain lead and lead compounds, the windshield. Otherwise the paint could be
chemicals known to the State of California damaged.
to cause cancer and reproductive harms.
Wash hands after handling. Opening the hood
> With the door open, pull the lever >) below
O Note the instrument panel in the direction of the ar-
When filling fluids, be sure not to add any flu- row > fig. 157.
ids to the wrong reservoirs. Otherwise severe >» Raise the hood slightly > page 221.
malfunctions and engine damage will occur. > Press the lever > fig. 158 in the direction of the
arrow. This releases the hooks.
@ For the sake of the environment > Open the hood.
You should regularly check the ground under Closing the hood
your vehicle in order to detect leaks quickly. If
> Push the hood down until you override the
there are visible spots from oil or other fluids,
force of the struts.
bring your vehicle to an authorized Audi deal-
> Let the hood fall lightly into the latch. Do not
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to be
press itin. > AX.
checked.
Messages
B Warning! Hood is not locked. Stop vehicle
and check the lock
D_ The & symbol is not available in all countries.
222
The hood latch is not locked correctly. Stop im- this, always check the hood after closing it
mediately and close the hood. to make sure it is latched correctly. The hood
is latched if the front corners cannot be lift-
K WARNING ed.
— Never open the hood when there is steam or — If you notice that the hood is not latched
coolant escaping from the engine compart- while you are driving, stop immediately and
ment, because there is a risk that you could close it, because driving when the hood is
be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is not latched increases the risk of an accident.
escaping.
— For safety reasons, the hood must always be
latched securely while driving. Because of
NY [1
Fig. 159 Typical location of the reservoir and the engine oil filler opening (example)
Observe the safety precautions > page 221. ) Coolant expansion tank (-£) > page 228
@ Washer fluid reservoir (>) > page 233 Brake fluid reservoir (OC) > page 229
) Jump start points: (+) under the cover The coolant expansion tank and the engine oil
= page 232, Charging the 12 Volt vehicle filling opening may be located in different places
battery > page 268, Preparation within the engine compartment, depending on
Engine oil filler opening (%27) > page 225 the engine version.
8W1012721BC
Sticker* for engine oil specifications

=> page 224
223
Engine oil Add the amount of oil shown immediately

=> page 225.
If the engine oil level is too low
If you need to add engine oil, use an oil that is EA Please reduce oil level
listed on the sticker. The sticker is located at the There is too much oil in the engine and there is a
front of the engine compartment > page 223, risk of damaging the catalytic converter or en-
fig. 159. When using the engine oil listed on the gine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
sticker, you can adjust the oil level as often as thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
needed. engine oil extracted if necessary. Avoid high en-
If engine oil that meets the recommended speci- gine speeds, full acceleration, and heavy engine
fication is not available, in an emergency you loads.
may add a maximum of 1 quart (1 liter) of 3 Oil level sensor: oil change necessary. Please
ACEA C3 or API SN engine oil one time until the contact Service
next oil change.
Fuel has entered the engine oil. This will cause
For more information on the correct engine oil the engine oil level to rise slowly and the engine
for your vehicle, contact an authorized Audi deal- oil quality to decrease. Do not extract engine oil
er or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have the oil to reduce the level, because this will increase the
changed by an authorized Audi dealer or author- risk of engine damage. Drive to an authorized
ized Service Facility. Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
mediately to have engine oil extracted.
G) Tips
& Oil level system: malfunction! Please con-
Audi recommends using engine oils provided
tact Service
by Audi Genuine Parts.
The sensor that checks the engine oil level has
malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an author-
Messages
Hiturn off engine. Oil pressure too low ty to have the malfunction repaired.
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the 2 Oil pressure sensor: malfunction! Please
engine oil level > page 225. contact Service
— If the engine oil level is too low, add engine oil The sensor that checks the engine oil pressure
=> page 225. Only continue driving once the in- has malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an au-
dicator light turns off. thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
— If the engine oil level is correct and the indica- Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
tor light still turns on, turn the engine off and
i Please drive to warm up engine
do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as- Fuel has entered the engine oil, either due to low
sistance. outside temperatures or frequent short drives.
Drive until the engine is warm so that the fuel in
Applies to: vehicles with oil level warning
the engine oil will evaporate. Avoid high engine
2 Please add oil immediately.
speeds, full accelerating, and heavy engine loads
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the when doing this.
engine oil level > page 225 and add engine oil
immediately > page 225. G) Tips
3 Add max. x qt (x l) oil. You can continue The oil pressure warning =} is not an oil level
driving indicator. Always check the oil level regularly.
224
Checking the engine oil level and the road conditions. The dilution of oil
from condensation or fuel residue as well as
The engine oil level can be checked in the MMI.
the age of the oil also play a role. Because
Observe the safety precautions > page 221, Gen- engine wear increases with mileage, oil con-
eral information. sumption will increase again over time until
it may be necessary to replace worn compo-
> Park the vehicle on a level surface. nents.
> Shut the engine off when it is warm. — Because all these variables play a role, it is
> Switch only the ignition back on. not possible to define an oil consumption
> Wait approximately two minutes.
standard. Therefore, the oil level must be
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- checked regularly.
HICLE > Settings & Service > Oil level.
— If you believe that your engine has in-
> Read the oil level in the display. Add engine oil
creased its oil consumption, contact an au-
if the bar in the oil level indicator is just below
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
“min” > page 225.
Service Facility to determine the cause.
Please note that an exact oil consumption
© Note measurement must be done with the neces-
If the engine oil level is too low or too high, sary care and accuracy and may take time.
there is a risk of engine damage. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility is trained in accurately
@ Tips measuring the oil consumption.
The oil level indicator in the display is only an — You can find information on engine oil and
informational display. If the oil level is too engine oil capacities for the USA at www.
low, a minimum oil warning appears in the in- audiusa.com/help/maintenance, or for Can-
strument cluster. Add oil and close the hood. ada at www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/
The current oil level will be displayed on the customer-area/care-and-maintenance/
MMI the next time the ignition is switched on. audi-service-schedules.html, or call
800-822-2834.
@ Tips
The engine oil consumption may be up to Adding engine oil
0.5 quart/600 miles (0.5 liter/1,000 km), de-
B8K-2120
pending on driving style and operating condi-
tions. Consumption may be higher during the
first 3,000 miles (5,000 km). The engine oil
level must be checked regularly. It is best to
check each time you refuel your vehicle and
before long drives.
— Because of the lubrication and cooling of
the engine, combustion engines consume
oil. The oil consumption varies depending
Fig. 160 Engine compartment: engine oil filler opening
on the engine and may change during the cover
service life of the engine. Engines generally
consume more oil at the beginning during Observe the safety precautions > page 221, Gen-
the break-in period. Then oil consumption eral information.
stabilizes after the break-in period.
> Turn the engine off.
8W1012721BC
— Under normal conditions, oil consumption

> Open the hood & page 222.
depends on the quality and viscosity of the
oil, the engine RPM, the climate conditions,
225
> Unscrew the cap %~ for the engine oil filler

opening > fig. 160.
> Carefully add 0.5 quart (0.5 liter) of the correct — Oil should never enter the sewer system or
oil > page 224. come into contact with the ground.
> Close the engine oil filler opening cap. — Follow the legal regulations in the country
> Close the hood > page 222. where you are located when disposing of
> Restart the ignition after two minutes and read empty oil containers.
the current oil level in the MMI > page 225,
Checking the engine oil level. Changing engine oil
> Applies to: using engine oil that meets the rec-
Audi recommends having the oil changed at an
ommended specification: Add some more en-
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv-
gine oil again if necessary.
ice Facility.
ZA\ WARNING Observe the safety precautions > page 221, Gen-
— When adding oil, do not let oil drip onto hot eral information.
engine components. This increases the risk The engine oil must be changed at the intervals
of a fire. specified in the Warranty & Maintenance Book-
— You must close the cap on the oil filler open- let. This is very important because the lubrication
ing correctly so that oil does not leak out on- function of the oil gradually declines during regu-
to the hot engine and exhaust system when lar vehicle operation.
the engine is running, because this is a fire
hazard. The engine oil should be changed more frequent-
ly under certain circumstances. Have the oil
— Always clean skin thoroughly if it comes into
changed more frequently if you often drive short
contact with engine oil.
distances, your vehicle is predominantly in stop-
— Engine oil is poisonous and must be kept out
and-go traffic situations, is in very dusty environ-
of reach of children.
ments, or is operated for long periods of time in
— Store the engine oil securely in the original
temperatures below zero.
container.
Cleansing additives in the oil make fresh oil ap-
@) Note pear darker after the engine has run briefly. This
— The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not is normal and no reason to change the engine oil
cover damage or malfunctions if the recom- more frequently than recommended.
mended intended use of the vehicle and Because correctly disposing of engine oil is diffi-
maintenance measures listed in the Audi cult and special tools and technical knowledge
Owner's Manual and the Warranty & Main- are needed for an oil change, Audi recommends
tenance Booklet were not followed. having your engine oil changed by an authorized
— Only use high-grade engine oil that explicit- Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
ly meets the Audi oil quality standard for
If you change the engine oil yourself, please note
your vehicle. Using another oil may cause
the following important information:
severe vehicle damage.
— Do not mix any additives with the engine oil.
Additives may cause engine damage that is
Z\ WARNING
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited If you change the engine oil on the vehicle
Warranty. yourself, the following precautions must be
followed:
— Wear protective eyewear.
— Due to the risk of scalding, allow the engine
to cool down sufficiently. >
226
— Maintain enough distance when you are re- The coolant level is too low.
moving the oil drain plug. While doing this, Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the
keep your forearm parallel to the ground to coolant level > page 228.
reduce the risk of hot oil dripping down your
arm.
— If the coolant level is too low, add coolant
— Drain the oil into a container designed for => page 228. Only continue driving once the in-
this purpose that is large enough to hold the dicator light turns off.
full amount of oil in your engine. & Coolant temperature: too high. Please let
— Engine oil is poisonous. Always store out of engine run while vehicle is stationary
reach of children.
Let the engine run at idle for a few minutes to
— Prolonged contact of used engine oil with
cool off, until the indicator light turns off.
the skin may cause skin damage. Always
wash oil off immediately with soap and wa- — If the indicator light does not turn off, do not
ter to protect your skin. continue driving the vehicle. See an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
@) Note for assistance.
Do not mix any additives with the engine oil. | Coolant system: malfunction! Please turn
Additives may cause engine damage that is off engine
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited War-
Do not continue driving, shut the engine off, and
ranty.
switch the ignition off.
() For the sake of the environment — See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
— Before changing the engine oil, make sure Audi Service Facility for assistance.
you can dispose of the used engine oil cor-
Coolant additive
rectly.
— Engine oil must always be disposed of cor- The coolant additive is made of anti-freezing and
rectly. Do not dump it in the yard, in the for- corrosion protection agents. Only add the follow-
est, or in open water, river channels, or sew- ing coolant additives mixed with distilled water.
ers.
Coolant additive Specification
— Have your used engine oil recycled by bring-
Gl12evo TL774L
ing it to a used oil collection site or contact
a gas station. The amount of coolant additive that needs to be
mixed with water depends on the climate where
Cooling system the vehicle will be operated. If the coolant addi-
tive percentage is too low, the coolant can freeze
and damage the engine.
The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture Coolant Freeze protec-
of purified water and coolant additive at the fac- additive tion
tory. This coolant must not be not changed.
Warm min. 40% min. -13 °F
The coolant level is monitored using the B indi- regions max. 45% 25 °C)
cator light. However, occasionally checking the Cold min. 50% max. -40 °F
coolant level is recommended. regions max. 55% (-40 °C)
Messages
@) Note
8W1012721BC
/_E| Turn off engine and check coolant level. See

— Before the start of winter, have an author-
owner's manual
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service >
227
Facility check if the coolant additive in your The coolant expansion tank for some engines is
vehicle matches the percentage appropriate located in the water drip tray under a cover. If
for the climate. This is especially important necessary, remove the cover that is located under
when driving in colder climates. the windshield wiper on the front passenger's
— If the G12evo coolant additive is not availa- side.
ble in an emergency, do not add any other > Check the coolant level in the coolant expan-
additive. You could damage the engine. If sion tank > page 223, fig. 159 using the outer
this happens, only use distilled water and markings (2) > fig. 161. The coolant level must
restore the correct mixture ratio with the be between the markings (2) when the engine is
specified coolant additive as soon as possi- cold. When the engine is warm it can be slight-
ble. ly above the upper marking.
— Only refill with new coolant. » Applies to: vehicles with 6-cylinder engine:
— Radiator sealant must not be mixed with There is a float located in the coolant expansion
the coolant. tank. Read the coolant level using the coolant
— You can continue driving if the permitted level float. When the engine is cold, the float
G12evo coolant additive was not added. must be located between the MIN marking and
However, go to an authorized Audi dealer or the edge of the filler opening on the coolant ex-
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately pansion tank.
to have the coolant replaced to reduce the > When you add coolant to the expansion tank,
risk of engine damage. please refer to > page 227, Cooling system.
— Due to the risk of engine damage, the cool-
Adding coolant
ing system should only be refilled by an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Requirement: there must be a residual amount of
Service Facility. An authorized Audi dealer or coolant in the expansion tank >@).
authorized Audi Service Facility can also pro- If you must add coolant, use a mixture of water
vide you with important information about and coolant additive. Audi recommends mixing
the recommended coolant additive. the coolant additive with distilled water.
> Allow the engine to cool.

(Gitta diet lis
> Place a large, thick towel on the coolant expan-
sion tank cap.
RAZ-0540,
> Push the release button @ > fig. 161 on the

cap and carefully turn it to the left until you
feel resistance > /\.
> Push the release button again and remove the
cap completely.
» Add coolant in the correct mixture ratio
=> page 227 up to the MAX marking. Or, in
vehicles with a 6-cylinder gasoline engine, the
Fig. 161 Engine compartment - Coolant expansion tank: float must be located between the MIN mark-
@ cover with release button; @) markings ing and the edge of the filler opening on the
coolant expansion tank.
Observe the safety precautions > page 221, Gen- > Make sure that the fluid level remains stable.
eral information. Add more coolant if necessary.
> Vehicles with 6-cylinder engine: if necessary,
Checking the coolant level
press the float into the coolant expansion tank
> Park the vehicle on a level surface. using the cover.
> Switch the ignition off. > Turn the cap to the right to tighten it until you
> Open the hood > page 222. feel resistance a second time.
228
Coolant loss usually indicates that there is a leak. Brake fluid

Immediately drive your vehicle to an authorized
BFV-0229]
and have the cooling system inspected. If the
cooling system is not leaking, coolant loss can re-
sult from the coolant boiling due overheating
and then being forced out of the cooling system.
A WARNING
— The engine compartment in any vehicle is a
potentially dangerous area. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off, and allow the engine Fig. 162 Engine compartment: cap on brake fluid reservoir
to cool before working in the engine com-

partment. Always follow the information
found in > page 221, General information. eral information.
— Never open the hood if you can see or hear Checking the brake fluid level
steam or coolant escaping from the engine
The brake fluid reservoir is located under a cover
compartment. This increases the risk of
on the driver’s side.
burns. The cooling system is under pressure.
When you no longer see or hear steam or > Lift the cover > page 223, fig. 159 at both
coolant escaping, you may open the engine openings and remove it.
compartment with caution. > Read the brake fluid level on the brake fluid res-
— When working in the engine compartment, ervoir > page 223, fig. 159. The brake fluid lev-
remember that the radiator fan can switch el must be between the MIN and MAX markings
on even if the ignition is switched off, which of.
increases the risk of injury.
The brake fluid level is monitored automatically.
— Coolant additive and coolant can be danger-
ous to your health. For this reason, store the Messages
coolant in the original container and away
EG / @ Brakes: stop vehicle and check brake
from children. There is a risk of poisoning.
fluid level
® Note Stop the vehicle and check the brake fluid level.
See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Do not continue driving if the coolant expan-
Service Facility for assistance.
sion tank is empty. Do not add any coolant,
because air could enter the cooling system Changing the brake fluid
and damage the engine. See an authorized
Brake fluid should be changed at regular inter-
vals. Have the brake fluid changed by an author-
for assistance.
ty. The authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility will inform you of the replace-
ment intervals.
Z\ WARNING
— If the brake fluid level is below the MIN
8W1012721BC
marking, it can impair the braking effect and

driving safety, which increase the risk of an
229
accident. Do not continue driving. See an au- Switch off all electrical equipment that is not
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi needed. If necessary, some equipment will be
Service Facility for assistance. switched off automatically. Vehicle functions or
— If the brake fluid is old, bubbles may form in driving stability may be limited. Drive to an au-
the brake system during heavy braking. This thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
could impair braking performance and driv- Facility immediately.
ing safety, which increases the risk of an ac- z= Electrical system: low battery charge. Bat-
cident. tery will be charged while driving
— The brake fluid in your vehicle must meet
the standard VW 501 14 and is available at The starting ability may be impaired.
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized If this message turns off after a little while, the
Audi Service Facility. If this brake fluid is not vehicle battery has charged enough while driving.
available, another high-grade brake fluid of
If this message does not turn off, drive immedi-
equivalent quality may be used, and it must
ately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
meet the U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Stand-
Audi Service Facility.
ard (FMVSS) 116 DOT 4, Class 6.
@) Note
ZA\ WARNING
When there is an electrical system malfunc-
— If the brake fluid level is above the MAX
tion, vehicle functions may not work and driv-
marking, brake fluid may leak out over the
ing stability may be limited, which increases
edge of the reservoir and result in damage
the risk of an accident. Do not continue driv-
to the vehicle.
ing and switch the ignition off. See an author-
— Do not allow any brake fluid to come into
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
contact with the vehicle paint, because it
cility for assistance.
will corrode the paint.
Battery
Electrical system
ela lame (Tem eeecela)
If the = / B or = indicator light turns on,
there is a malfunction in the power supply, the Because of the complex power supply, all work on
battery, or the vehicle electrical system. batteries such as disconnecting, replacing, etc.,
should only be performed by an authorized Audi
mz / B Electrical system: malfunction! Safely
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility > A\.
stop vehicle
Multiple batteries with different technologies
Do not continue driving and switch the ignition
may be installed in your vehicle:
off > A\. See an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility for assistance. — Vehicle battery (for example, for starting the
engine, basic power supply) > page 231, 12
= Electrical system: malfunction! Restart not
Volt vehicle battery or > page 232, Other bat-
possible. Please contact Service
tery types
If you switch the ignition off, you will not be able — Auxiliary battery (for example, for recuperation
to restart the vehicle. Vehicle functions or driving or optional equipment) > page 232, Other bat-
stability may be limited. Drive to an authorized tery types
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
mediately. Not running the vehicle for long periods of
time
= Electrical system: malfunction! Please con-
The battery will gradually drain if the vehicle
tact Service
does not run for long periods of time. To ensure >
230
that the vehicle can still be started, the electrical so that it will not be destroyed by “freezing”
equipment will be limited or switched off. Some => page 232, Charging the 12 Volt vehicle
convenience functions, such as interior lighting battery.
or power seat adjustment, may not be available — There are electrical components under the
under certain circumstances. The convenience cargo floor behind a trim panel that warm
functions will be available again when you start up during operation. To reduce the risk of
the engine. the components overheating, do not store
objects such as blankets under the cargo
Even when electrical equipment is switched off,
floor. If the components overheat, they will
the equipment can still drain the battery if the
switch off temporarily. This will be indicated
vehicle is not driven for Long periods of time.
by a message that will be displayed in the
Deep draining results in a chemical reaction that
instrument cluster until the temperature re-
destroys the inside of the battery. The battery
turns to normal.
must be charged every month to prevent this
= page 232. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility for more infor- 12 Volt vehicle battery
mation.
Explanation of warnings:
Winter operation
Always wear eye protection.
Cold weather places an especially high load on
the 12 Volt vehicle battery. Have the battery Battery acid is highly corrosive. Always
checked by an authorized Audi dealer or author- wear protective gloves and eye protection.
ized Audi Service Facility before cold weather be-
® Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are
gins.
forbidden.
ZA WARNING A highly explosive mixture of gases can

form when charging batteries.
— All work on the battery or electrical system
in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi- Always keep children away from battery
cal burns, accidents, or burns. Because of acid and the battery.
this, all work must be performed only by an @/ | Always follow the instructions in the oper-
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi (QO | ating manual.
Service Facility.
— Never connect a charging cable or jump @) For the sake of the environment
start cable directly to the 12 Volt vehicle “© % Lead-acid batteries must be disposed of
battery. Only use the connections in the en- using methods that will not harm the environ-
gine compartment > page 232. ment. Do not dispose of them in household
trash. They contain harmful substances, such
ZA WARNING as sulfuric acid and lead, and also recyclable
California Proposition 65 Warning: raw materials. Contact an authorized Audi
— Battery posts, terminals and related acces- dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for
sories contain lead and lead compounds, more information.
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harms.
Wash hands after handling.
@) Note
8W1012721BC
— If the vehicle will be parked for long periods

of time, protect the battery against the cold
231
Other battery types rging the 12 Volt vehicle battery
Explanation of warnings:
Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are
& forbidden.
Always keep children away from battery
@) acid and the battery.
@/ | Always follow the instructions in the oper-
fQ) | ating manual.
ZA\ WARNING Fig. 163 Engine compartment: connectors for a charger or

jump start cables
All work on the batteries must only be per-
formed by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility.
eral information, > /\ in Battery general infor-
— Gases that escape from these different bat-
mation on page 231 and > /\.
tery types can be poisonous or flammable.
— The contents of these battery types can be Requirement: only use chargers with a maximum
corrosive. If any battery contents come into charging current of 14.8 volts. The battery ca-
contact with the skin, flush the affected bles remain connected.
area for at least 15 minutes with clean wa- The charging cable connections are located in the
ter. Then wash the affected area with soap. motor compartment. The ground point ©) is al-
Have the affected area examined by a medi- ways located on the vehicle body.
cal professional.
> Switch off the ignition and all electrical equip-
@) Note ment.
> Open the hood > page 222.
Components must not be connected to the
> Press the release lever on the positive terminal
battery terminals and wires on these battery
and fold the cover upward > fig. 163.
types because this increases the risk of dam-
> Clamp the charger terminal clamps to the jump
age, for example due to overvoltage.
start pins according to the instructions. (Hex
head bolt under a cover @), ground point on the
@ For the sake of the environment
vehicle body ©)).
“These types of batteries must be dis- > Insert the power cable for the charging device
posed of using methods that will not harm into the socket and switch the device on.
the environment. Do not dispose of them in >» At the end of the charging process, switch the
household trash. They contain harmful sub- charger off and pull the power cable out of the
stances and recyclable raw materials. Contact socket.
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi > Remove the charging device terminal clamps.
Service Facility for more information. > Close the cover on the positive terminal.
> Close the hood > page 222.
ZA WARNING
— Never connect a charging cable or jump
start cable directly to the 12 Volt vehicle
battery. Only use the connections in the en-
gine compartment > page 232. >
232
—A highly explosive mixture of gases can form Messages

when charging batteries. Only charge the 3 Please add washer fluid
battery in well-ventilated areas.
Fill the washer fluid for the windshield washer
— A drained battery can freeze at tempera-
system and the headlight washer system* when
tures around 32 °F (0 °C). Do not charge or
the ignition is switched off.
use a frozen or thawed battery. If ice forms,
the battery housing can crack and battery
@) Note
electrolyte can leak out, which increases the
risk of an explosion and chemical burns. — The concentration of anti-freezing agent
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or author- must be adjusted to the vehicle operating
ized Audi Service Facility for more informa- conditions and the climate. A concentration
tion. that is too high can lead to vehicle damage.
— Do not connect or disconnect the charging — Never add radiator anti-freeze or other addi-
cable while charging because this increases tives to the washer fluid.
the risk of an explosion. — Do not use a glass cleaner that contains
paint solvents, because this could damage
@) Tips the paint.
Read all of the manufacturer's instructions

for the charger before charging the battery. Service interval display
The service interval display detects when your ve-
Windshield washer hicle is due for service.
system The service interval display works in two stages:
— Inspection or oil change reminder: after driv-

B8W-0125
ing acertain distance, a message appears in the

instrument cluster display each time the igni-
tion is switched on or off. The remaining dis-
tance or time is displayed briefly.
— Inspection or oil change due: if your vehicle
has reached an inspection or oil change interval
or both intervals at the same time, the mes-
sage Inspection due! or Oil change due! or Oil
Fig. 164 Engine compartment: washer fluid reservoir cap change and inspection due! appears briefly af-
ter switching the ignition on or off.
eral information. Checking service intervals
The windshield washer reservoir © contains the You can check the remaining distance or time un-
cleaning solution for the windshield/rear win- til the next oil change or next inspection in the
dow* and the headlight washer system* Infotainment system.
> fig. 164, > page 223. The reservoir capacity Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
can be found in > page 287. HICLE > Settings & Service > Service intervals.
To reduce the risk of lime scale deposits on the
Resetting the indicator
spray nozzles, use clean water with low amounts
of calcium. Always add window cleaner to the wa- An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility will reset the service interval dis-
8W1012721BC
ter. When the outside temperatures are cold, an

anti-freezing agent should be added to the water play after performing service. >
so that it does not freeze.
233
If you have changed the oil yourself, you must re-

set the oil change interval.
Applies to: MMI: To reset the display, select on

the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service
> Service intervals.
@) Note
— Only reset the oil change indicator if the oil
was changed.
— Following the service intervals is critical to
maintaining the service life and value of
your vehicle, especially the engine. Even if
the mileage on the vehicle is low, do not ex-
ceed the time for the next service.
234
Wheels
Wheels —Always adapt your driving to

Wheels and Tires the road and traffic condi-
General information tions. Drive carefully and re-
duce your speed on icy or slip-
> Check your tires regularly for pery roads. Even winter tires
damage, such as punctures,
can lose traction on black ice.
cuts, cracks, and bulges. Remove
foreign objects from the tire () Note
tread.
—Please note that summer and
>If driving over curbs or similar winter tires are designed for
obstacles, drive slowly and ap-
the conditions that are typical
proach the curb at an angle. in those seasons. Audi recom-
> Have faulty tires or rims re-
mends winter tires during the
placed immediately. winter months. Low tempera-
>Protect your tires from oil,
tures significantly decrease
grease, and fuel.
the elasticity of summer tires,
>Mark tires before removing which affects traction and
them so that the same running
braking ability. If summer
direction can be maintained if
tires are used in very cold tem-
they are reinstalled. peratures, cracks can form on
>Lay tires flat when storing and the tread bars, resulting in
store them ina cool, dry location
permanent tire damage that
with as little exposure to light as can cause loud driving noise
possible.
and unbalanced tires.
—Burnished, polished or
A WARNING
chromed rims must not be
—Never drive faster than the used in winter driving condi-
maximum permitted speed for tions. The surface of the rims
your tires. This could cause the does not have sufficient corro-
tires to heat up too much. This sion protection for this and
increases the risk of an acci- could be permanently dam-
dent because it can cause the aged by road salt or similar
8W1012721BC
tire to burst. substances.
235
Wheels
Tire designations @ Tire construction

©
2
“R” indicates a radial tire.
2
x
©
oO
©) Rim diameter
Size of the rim diameter in inches.
© Load index and speed rating

The load index indicates the tire's
load-carrying capacity.
The speed rating indicates the
maximum permitted speed. Also
see > A in General information on
page 235.
“EXTRA LOAD”, “xl” or “RF” indi-

cates that the tire is reinforced or
Fig. 165 Tire designations on the side-
wall is an Extra Load tire.
Speed rat- /Maximum permitted speed
@ Tires for passenger vehicles ing
(if applicable) P up to 93 mph (150 km/h)
Q up to 99 mph (160 km/h)
“P” indicates a tire for a passen-
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
ger vehicle. “T” indicates a tire
Ss up to 110 mph (180 km/h)
designated for temporary use. T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
U up to 124 mph (200 km/h)
@ Nominal width
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Nominal width of the tire be- Vv up to 149 mph (240 km/h)?
tween the sidewalls in millime- Zz above 149 mph (240 km/h)?)
w up to 168 mph (270 km/h)?
ters. In general: the larger the
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
number, the wider the tire.
@ For tires above 149 mph (240 km/h),
@) Aspect ratio tire manufacturers sometimes use the
code “ZR”.
Height/width ratio expressed asa
percentage.
236
Wheels
@ US DOT number (TIN) and must also specify the materials

manufacture date used in the tire. These include
The manufacture date is listed on steel, nylon, polyester and other
the tire sidewall (it may only ap- materials.
pear on the inner side of the tire): @) Maximum permitted load
DOT... 2220... This number indicates the maxi-
means, for example, that the tire mum load in kilograms and
was produced in the 22nd week of pounds that the tire can carry.
the year 2020. @ Uniform tire quality grade
Audi Original Tires standards for treadwear,
traction and temperature
Audi Original equipment tires resistance
with the designation “AO” have
Treadwear, traction, and tempera-
been specially matched to your
ture ranges > page 251.
Audi. When used correctly, these
tires meet the highest standards @ Running direction
for safety and handling. An au- The arrows indicate the running
thorized Audi dealer or author- direction of unidirectional tires.
ized Audi Service Facility will be You must always follow the speci-
able to provide you with more in- fied running direction
formation. => page 266.
@) Mud and snow capability Maximum permitted
“M/S” or “M+S” indicates the tire inflation pressure
is suitable for driving on mud and This number indicates the maxi-
snow. /4\ indicates a winter tire. mum pressure to which a tire can
Composition of the tire cord be inflated under normal operat-
and materials ing conditions.
The number of plies indicates the

number of rubberized fabric lay-
ers in the tire. In general: the
8W1012721BC
more layers, the more weight a

tire can carry. Tire manufacturers
237
Wheels
Glossary of tire and loading Cord

terminology means the strands forming the
Accessory weight plies in the tire.
means the combined weight (in Cold tire inflation pressure
excess of those standard items means the tire pressure recom-
which may be replaced) of auto- mended by the vehicle manufac-
matic transmission, power steer- turer for a tire of a designated
ing, power brakes, power win- size that has not been driven for
dows, power seats, radio, and more than a couple of miles (kilo-
heater, to the extent that these meters) at low speeds in the three
items are available as factory-in- hour period before the tire pres-
stalled equipment (whether in- sure is measured or adjusted.
stalled or not).
Curb weight
Aspect ratio
means the weight of a motor ve-
means the ratio of the height to hicle with standard equipment in-
the width of the tire in percent. cluding the maximum capacity of
Numbers of 55 or lower indicate a fuel, oil, and coolant, air condi-
low sidewall for improved steer- tioning and additional weight of
ing response and better overall optional equipment.
handling on dry pavement.
Extra load tire
Bead
means a tire designed to operate
means the part of the tire that is at higher loads and at higher in-
made of steel wires, wrapped or flation pressures than the corre-
reinforced by ply cords and that is sponding standard tire. Extra load
shaped to fit the rim. tires may be identified as “XL”,
Bead separation “xl”, “EXTRA LOAD”, or “RF” on
the sidewall.
means a breakdown of the bond
between components in the bead.
238
Wheels
Gross Axle Weight Rating Maximum (permissible)

inflation pressure
(“GAWR’”)
means the load-carrying capacity means the maximum cold infla-

of a single axle system, measured tion pressure to which a tire may
at the tire-ground interfaces. be inflated. Also called “maxi-
mum inflation pressure.”
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(“GVWR”)
Normal occupant weight
means the maximum total loaded means 150 lbs. (68 kilograms)
weight of the vehicle. times the number of occupants
Groove seated in the vehicle up to the to-
tal seating capacity of your vehi-
means the space between two ad-
cle.
jacent tread ribs.
Occupant distribution
Load rating (code)
means distribution of occupants
means the maximum load that a
in a vehicle.
tire is rated to carry for a given in-
flation pressure. You may not find Outer diameter
this information on all tires be- means the overall diameter of an
cause it is not required by law. inflated new tire.
Maximum load rating Overall width
means the load rating for a tire at means the linear distance be-
the maximum permissible infla- tween the exteriors of the side-
tion pressure for that tire. walls of an inflated tire, including
Maximum loaded vehicle elevations due to labeling, deco-
weight rations, or protective bands or
ribs.
means the sum of:
Ply
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight means a layer of rubber-coated
(c) Vehicle capacity weight, and parallel cords.
8W1012721BC
(d) Production options weight
239
Wheels
Production options weight Rim

means the combined weight of means a metal support for a tire
those installed regular production or a tire and tube assembly upon
options weighing over 5 lbs. which the tire beads are seated.
(2.3 kg) in excess of those stand-
Rim diameter
ard items which they replace, not
means nominal diameter of the
previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, in-
bead seat. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to pur-
cluding heavy duty brakes, ride
chase new tires to match the new
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
rim diameter.
battery, and special trim.
Radial ply tire Rim size designation

means rim diameter and width.
means a pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the Rim width
beads are laid at substantially means nominal distance between
90 degrees to the centerline of rim flanges.
the tread.
Sidewall
Recommended inflation
means that portion of a tire be-
pressure
tween the tread and bead.
see > page 238, Cold tire infla-
tion pressure. Speed rating (letter code)
means the speed at which a tire is
Reinforced tire
designed to be driven for extend-
means a tire designed to operate
ed periods of time. The ratings
at higher loads and at higher in-
range from 93 mph (150 km/h)
flation pressures than the corre-
to 186 mph (298 km/h) > table
sponding standard tire. Rein-
on page 236. You may not find
forced tires may be identified as
this information on all tires be-
“XL”, “xl”, “EXTRA LOAD”, or “RF”
cause it is not required by law.
on the sidewall.
The speed rating letter code,
where applicable, is molded on
the tire sidewall and indicates the >
240
Wheels
maximum permissible road parisons among tires. The UTQG is

speeds. See also > A in General not a safety rating and not a guar-
information on page 235. antee that a tire will last fora
prescribed number of miles (kilo-
Tire pressure monitoring
system meters) or perform ina certain
way. It simply gives tire buyers
means a system that detects
additional information to com-
when one or more of a vehicle's
bine with other considerations,
tires are underinflated and illumi-
such as price, brand loyalty and
nates a low tire pressure warning
dealer recommendations. Under
telltale.
UTQG, tires are graded by the tire
Tread manufacturers in three areas:
means that portion of a tire that treadwear, traction, and tempera-
comes into contact with the road. ture resistance. The UTQG infor-
mation on the tires, molded into
Tread separation
the sidewalls.
means pulling away of the tread
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
from the tire carcass.
Number (TIN)
Treadwear indicators (TWI) This is the tire’s “serial number”.
means the projections within the It begins with the letters “DOT”
principal grooves designed to give and indicates that the tire meets
a visual indication of the degrees all federal standards. The next
of wear of the tread. See two numbers or letters indicate
=> page 244, Treadwear indicator the plant where it was manufac-
for more information on measur- tured, and the last four numbers
ing tire wear. represent the week and year of
manufacture. For example,
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
is a tire information system devel- DOT... 2220...
oped by the United States Nation- means that the tire was produced
al Highway Traffic Safety Adminis- in the 22nd week of 2020. The
tration (NHTSA) that is designed other numbers are marketing co-
8W1012721BC
to help buyers make relative com- des that may or may not be used >
241
Wheels
by the tire manufacturer. This in- number of seating positions. Re-

formation is used to contact con- fer to the table > table on
sumers if a tire defect requires a page 247 for the number of peo-
recall. ple that correspond to the vehicle
normal load.
Vehicle capacity weight
means the rated cargo and lug- New tires or wheels
gage load plus 150 lbs. (68 kilo-
Audi recommends having all work
grams) times the vehicle's desig-
on tires or wheels performed by
nated seating capacity.
an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Vehicle maximum load on the thorized Audi Service Facility.
tire These facilities have the proper
means that load on an individual knowledge and are equipped with
tire that is determined by distrib- the required tools and replace-
uting to each axle its share of the ment parts.
maximum loaded vehicle weight
>New tires do not yet have the
and dividing by two.
optimal gripping properties.
Vehicle normal load on the tire Drive carefully and at moderate
means that load on an individual speeds for the first 350 miles
tire that is determined by distrib- (500 km) with new tires.
uting to each axle its share of the > Only use tires with the same de-
curb weight, accessory weight, sign, size (rolling circumfer-
and normal occupant weight (dis- ence), and as close to the same
tributed in accordance with > ta- tread pattern as possible on all
ble on page 247) and dividing by four wheels.
two. >Do not replace tires individually.
At least replace both tires on the
Occupant loading and distri- same axle at the same time.
bution for vehicle normal load
> Audi recommends using Audi
for various designated seating
capacities Genuine Tires. If you would like
to use different tires, please
Refer to the tire inflation pressure
note that the tires may perform >
label > page 245, fig. 168 for the
242
Wheels
differently even if they are the

same size > A.
Z\ WARNING
—Do not use steel rims that are
>If you would like to equip your
17 inches or larger. Otherwise,
vehicle with a tire and rim com-
damage to the vehicle and an
bination that is different from
accident could result.
what was installed at the facto-
—Only use tire/rim combina-
ry, consult with an authorized
tions and suitable wheel bolts
Audi dealer or authorized Audi
that have been approved by
Service Facility before making a
Audi. Otherwise, damage to
purchase > A.
the vehicle and an accident
Because the spare tire® is differ- could result.
ent from the regular tires instal- —For technical reasons, it is not
led on the vehicle (such as winter possible to use tires from oth-
tires or wide tires), only use the er vehicles. In some cases, you
spare tire* temporarily in case of cannot even use tires from the
emergency and drive carefully same vehicle model.
while it is in use. It should be re- —Make sure that the tires you
placed with a regular tire as soon select have enough clearance
as possible. to the vehicle. Replacement
Applies to: vehicles with all wheel tires should not be chosen
drive: All four wheels must be simply based on the nominal
equipped with tires that are the size, because tires with a dif-
same brand and have the same ferent construction can differ
construction and tread pattern so greatly even if they are the
that the drive system is not dam- same size. If there is not
aged by different wheel speeds. enough clearance, the tires or
For this reason, in case of emer- the vehicle can be damaged
gency, only use a spare tire* that and this can reduce driving
is the same circumference as the safety and increase the risk of
regular tires. an accident.
8W1012721BC
243
Wheels
—Only use tires that are more —Inflation pressure that is too low
than six years old when abso- or high can increase tire wear
lutely necessary and drive considerably.
carefully when doing so. —Driving quickly through curves,
—Do not use run-flat tires on rapid acceleration, and heavy
your vehicle. Using them when braking increase tire wear.
not permitted can lead to ve- —Have an authorized Audi dealer
hicle damage or accidents. or authorized Audi Service Facili-
—If you install wheel covers on ty check the wheel alignment if
the vehicle, make sure they al- there is unusual wear.
low enough air circulation to —Have the wheels rebalanced if an
cool the brake system. If they imbalance is causing noticeable
do not, this could increase the vibration in the steering wheel.
risk of an accident. If you do not, the tires and other
vehicle components could wear
Tire wear and damage more quickly.
Treadwear indicator
Original equipment tires contain
N treadwear indicators in the tread
pattern, which are bars that are
LA
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) high and are

spaced evenly around the tire per-
Fig. 166 Tire profile: treadwear indica- pendicular to the running direc-
tor tion > fig. 166. The letters “TWI”
Tire wear
or triangles on the tire sidewall
indicate the location of the tread-
Check the tires regularly for wear.
wear indicators.
The tires have reached the mini-
mum tread depth !) when they >
D Obey any applicable regulations in the

country where the vehicle is being oper-
ated.
244
Wheels
have worn down to the treadwear

indicators. Replace the tires with
Z\ WARNING
Tread that has worn too low or
new ones > A.
uneven tread depths on the
Tire rotation tires can reduce driving safety.
Rotating the tires regularly is rec- This can increase the risk of an
ommended to ensure the tires accident because it has a nega-
wear evenly. To rotate the tires, tive effect on handling, driving
install the tires from the rear axle through curves, and braking,
on the front axle and vice versa. and because it increases the
This will allow the tires to have risk of hydroplaning when driv-
approximately the same length of ing through deep puddles.
service life.
Micmac)
For unidirectional tires, make sure
the tires are installed according to
B8W-0152
the running direction indicated on Kf)
the tire sidewall > page 266.
Hidden damage
Damage to tires and rims can of-
ten occur in locations that are hid-
Fig. 167 Driver's side B-pillar: tire pres-
den. Unusual vibrations in the ve-
sure label
hicle or pulling to one side may
indicate that there is tire damage.
B8K-1151
Reduce your speed immediately. SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL

NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL
pay FRONT
AVANT
nA
ARRIERE
On
Check the tires for damage. If no = a.

TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE
PNEU _| DIMENSIONS PRESSION DES PNEUS A FROID
damage is visible from the out- FRONT
AVANT, a KPA, Ml PSI
REAR
side, drive slowly and carefully to ARRIERE
‘SPARE
DE SECOURS
Wa KPA,
Ma KPA, Ml PSI
Ml PSI
the nearest authorized Audi deal-

er or authorized Audi Service Fa- Fig. 168 Tire pressure label
cility to have the vehicle inspect-
The correct tire pressure for tires
ed.
installed at the factory is listed on
8W1012721BC
a label. The label is located on the >
245
Wheels
B-pillar (driver's side) > fig. 167,

> fig. 168. The location may vary
Z\ WARNING
Always adapt the tire pressure
depending on the model.
to your driving style and the ve-
Use the tire pressure specified for hicle load.
a normal vehicle load when the —Overloading can lead to loss of
vehicle is partially loaded > table vehicle control and increase
on page 247. If driving the vehi-
the risk of an accident. Read
cle when fully loaded, you must and follow the important safe-
increase the tire pressure to the ty precautions in > page 248.
maximum specified pressure > A.
—The tire must flex more if the
Checking and correcting tire tire pressure is too low or if
pressure the vehicle speed or load are
>Check the tire pressure at least too high. This heats the tire up
once per month and also check it too much. This increases the
before every long drive. risk of an accident because it
> Always check the tire pressure can cause the tire to burst and
when the tires are cold. Do not result in loss of vehicle con-
reduce the pressure if it increas- trol.
es when the tires are warm. —Incorrect tire pressure increas-
>Refer to the sticker > fig. 168 es tire wear and has a negative
for the correct tire pressure. effect on driving and braking
>Correct the tire pressure if nec- behavior, which increases the
essary. risk of an accident.
>Save the changed tire pressure
> page 254. @) Note
> Check the pressure in the spare Replace lost valve caps to re-
tire (compact spare tire)*. Al- duce the risk of damage to the
ways maintain the maximum tire valves.
temperature that is specified for
the tire. (*) For the sake of the envi-
ronment
Tire pressure that is too low in-
creases fuel consumption.
246
Wheels
Uc ede] )
Please note that the information Make sure that the tire designa-
contained in the following table tion on your tire matches the des-
was correct at the time of print- ignation on the tire pressure label
ing, and the information is sub- and the tire pressure table.
ject to change. If there are any The following table lists recom-
differences, you should always mended tire pressures in cold
follow the tire pressure sticker tires according to the load and
=> page 245, fig. 167.
the size of the tires installed.
Model/ Tire designation Tire pressure
Engine Normal load Maximum load
(up to 3 people)
Front Rear Front Rear
PSI | kPA | PSI | kPA | PSI | kPA | PSI | kPA

A4 sedan: 225/50 R17 94Y 30 | 210 | 28 | 190 | 33 | 230 | 33 | 230
2.0L 245/40 R18 93Y 30 | 210 | 28 | 190 | 33 | 230 | 33 | 230
ic sled 225/50 R17 94H 32 | 220 | 29 | 200 | 36 | 250| 36 | 250
245/40 R18 97H 35 | 240 | 32 | 220 | 36 | 250 | 36 | 250
245/35 R19 93Y 35 | 240 | 32 | 220 | 36 | 250 | 39 | 270
A4 sedan: 225/50 R17 94Y 30 | 210 | 28 | 190 | 33 | 230 | 33 | 230
2.0L 245/40 R18 93Y 30 | 210 | 28 | 190 | 33 | 230 | 33 | 230
ou 225/50 R17 94H 32 | 220 | 29 | 200 | 36 | 250| 36 | 250
245/40 R18 97H 35 | 240 | 32 | 220 | 36 | 250 | 36 | 250
245/35 R19 93Y 36 | 250 | 33 | 230 | 41 | 280 | 44 | 300
S4 sedan: 245/40 R18 97H 35 | 240 | 32 | 220 | 38 | 260 | 38 | 260
3.0 liter 245/40 R18 97Y 36 | 250 | 33 | 230 | 39 | 270 | 39 | 270
S-cylinder 255/35 R19 96Y 39 | 270 | 35 | 250 | 44 | 300| 45 | 310
A4allroad: |225/55R1797Y 32 | 220 | 29 | 200 | 33 | 230 | 30 | 210
2.0L 245/45 R18 96Y 32 | 220 | 29 | 200 | 35 | 240 | 32 | 220
4-cylinder — (345/45R18100H | 32 | 220 | 32 | 220 | 35 | 2401 35 | 240
245/40 R19 98Y 35 | 240 | 32 | 220 | 38 | 260 | 35 | 240
a) Two people in the front, one person in the rear
A WARNING pressure > page 245 and load

8W1012721BC
Please note the important safe- limits > page 248.

ty precautions regarding tire
247
Wheels
Tires and vehicle load limits ger at a designated seating posi-

tion and the total weight of any
There are limits to the amount of
luggage in the vehicle. If you tow
load or weight that any vehicle
a trailer, the weight of the trailer
and any tire can carry. A vehicle
hitch and the tongue weight of
that is overloaded will not handle
the loaded trailer must be includ-
well and is more difficult to stop.
ed as part of the vehicle load.
Overloading can not only lead to
loss of vehicle control, but can al- The Gross Axle Weight Rating
so damage important parts of the (“GAWR”) is the maximum load
vehicle and can lead to sudden that can be applied at each of the
tire failure, including a blowout vehicle’s two axles.
and sudden deflation that can The fact that there is an upper
cause the vehicle to crash. limit to your vehicle’s Gross Vehi-
Your safety and that of your pas- cle Weight Rating means that the
sengers also depends on making total weight of whatever is being
sure that load limits are not ex- carried in the vehicle (including
ceeded. Vehicle load includes ev- the weight of a trailer hitch and
erybody and everything in and on the tongue weight of the loaded
the vehicle. These load limits are trailer) is limited. The more pas-
technically referred to as the vehi- sengers in the vehicle or passen-
cle’s Gross Vehicle Weight Rating gers who are heavier than the
(“GVWR”). standard weights assumed mean
that less weight can be carried as
The “GVWR” includes the weight
luggage.
of the basic vehicle, all factory in-
stalled accessories, a full tank of The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
fuel, oil, coolant and other fluids and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
plus maximum load. The maxi- are listed on the safety compli-
mum load includes the number of ance sticker on the driver’s side B-
passengers that the vehicle is in- pillar respectively on the front
tended to carry (“seating capaci- end of the driver's door.
ty”) with an assumed weight of
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each passen-
248
Wheels
Z\ WARNING Determining correct load

limit
Overloading a vehicle can cause
loss of vehicle control, a crash Use the example below to calcu-
or other accident, serious per- late the total weight of the pas-
sonal injury, and even death. sengers and luggage or other
—Carrying more weight than things that you plan to transport
your vehicle was designed to so that you can make sure that
carry will prevent the vehicle your vehicle will not be overload-
from handling properly and in- ed.
crease the risk of the loss of Steps for Determining Correct
vehicle control. Load Limit
—The brakes on a vehicle that 1. Locate the statement “THE
has been overloaded may not COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCU-
be able to stop the vehicle PANTS AND CARGO SHOULD
within a safe distance. NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OR XXX
—Tires on a vehicle that has LBS” on your vehicle’s placard
been overloaded can fail sud- (tire inflation pressure label)
denly, including a blowout and => page 245, fig. 168.
sudden deflation, causing loss 2. Determine the combined
of control and a crash. weight of the driver and pas-
—Always make sure that the to- sengers that will be riding in
tal load being transported - your vehicle.
including the weight of a trail- 3. Subtract the combined weight
er hitch and the tongue of the driver and passengers
weight of a loaded trailer - from “XXX” kilograms or “XXX”
does not make the vehicle pounds shown on the sticker
heavier than the vehicle’s => page 245, fig. 168.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. 4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For ex-
ample, if the “XXX” amount
8W1012721BC
equals 1400 lbs. and there will >
249
Wheels
be five 150 lbs. passengers in ZA WARNING

your vehicle, the amount of Wheel bolts that are tightened or repaired in-
correctly can become loose and result in loss
available cargo and luggage
of vehicle control, which increases the risk of
load capacity is 650 lbs. an accident. For the correct tightening specifi-
cation, see > page 266, Finishing.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650
— Always keep the wheel bolts and the threads
lbs.) in the wheel hub clean and free of grease.
5. Determine the combined — Only use wheel bolts that fit the rim.
— Always have damaged rims repaired by an
weight of luggage and cargo authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
being loaded on the vehicle. Service Facility. Never repair or disassemble
rims yourself, because this increases the risk
That weight may not safely ex-
of an accident.
ceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculat-
ed in Step 4. Winter tires significantly improve the vehicle's
6. If your vehicle will be towing a handling when driving in winter conditions. Be-
cause of their construction (width, compound,
trailer, load from your trailer tread pattern), summer tires provide less traction
will be transferred to your vehi- on ice and snow.
cle. Consult this manual to de- > Use winter tires on all four wheels.
> Only use winter tires that are approved for your
termine how this reduces the vehicle.
available cargo and luggage > Please note that the maximum permitted
speed may be lower with winter tires > A\ in
load capacity of your vehicle. General information on page 235. An author-
>Check the tire sidewall ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility can inform you about the maximum per-
(=> page 236, fig. 165) to deter-
mitted speed for your tires.
mine the designated load rating > Check the tire pressure after installing wheels
=> page 245.
for a specific tire.
The effectiveness of winter tires is reduced great-
Wheel bolts and rims ly when the tread is worn down to a depth of
0.16 in (4 mm). The characteristics of winter tires
Wheel bolts also decrease greatly as the tire ages, regardless
Wheel bolts must be clean and loosen/tighten of the remaining tread.
easily.
Rims
Reinstall summer tires at the appropriate
Rims with a bolted rim ring* or with bolted wheel time, because they provide better handling
covers* consist of multiple pieces. These compo- when roads are free of snow and ice. Summer
nents were bolted together using special bolts tires cause less road noise, tire wear, and fuel
and a special procedure. You must not repair or consumption.
disassemble them > A\.
250
Wheels
@) Tips Low-profile tires

Applies to: vehicles with low-profile tires
You can also use all season tires instead of
winter tires. Please note that in some coun- Compared to other tire/rim combinations, low-
tries where winter tires are required, only win- profile tires offer a wider tread surface anda
ter tires with the 44 symbol may be permit- larger rim diameter with shorter tire sidewalls.
ted. This results in an agile driving style. However, it
may reduce the level of comfort and increase
road noise when driving on roads in poor condi-
tion.
Snow chains improve both driving and braking in
Low-profile tires can become damaged more
winter road conditions.
quickly than standard tires when driving over
> Only install snow chains on the front wheels. large bumps, potholes, manhole covers, and
> Check and correct the seating of the snow curbs. Therefore, it is particularly important to
chains after driving a few feet, if necessary. Fol- maintain the correct tire pressure > page 245.
low the instructions from the manufacturer.
To reduce the risk of damage to the tires and
> Note the maximum speed of 30 mph
rims, drive very carefully on poor roads.
(50 km/h). Observe the local regulations.
Check your wheels regularly every 2,000 mi
Use of snow chains is only permitted with certain (3,000 km) for damage. For example, check for
rim/tire combinations due to technical reasons. bulges/cracks on the tires or deformations/cracks
Check with an authorized Audi dealer or author- on the rims.
ized Audi Service Facility to see if you may use
snow chains. After a heavy impact or damage, have the tires
and rims inspected or replaced immediately by
Use fine-mesh snow chains. They must not add an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
more than 0.53 in (13.5 mm) in height, including Service Facility.
the chain lock.
Low-profile tires can wear out faster than stand-
You must remove the snow chains on roads with- ard tires.
out snow. Otherwise, you could impair driving
ability and damage the tires.
Uniform tire quality grading
ZA WARNING — Tread wear
Using incorrect snow chains or installing snow — Traction AAABC
chains incorrectly can result in loss of vehicle — Temperature ABC
control, which increases the risk of an acci-
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
dent.
the tire side wall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width > page 236, fig. 165.
@) Note
For example: Tread wear 200, Traction AA, Tem-
Snow chains can damage the rims and wheel
perature A.
covers* if the chains come into direct contact
with them. Remove the wheel covers* first. All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Use coated snow chains. Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
@ Tips Tread wear
When using snow chains, it may be advisable The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
8W1012721BC
to limit the ESC > page 114. based on the wear rate of the tire when tested >
251
Wheels
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

AN WARNING
ernment test course.
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the govern- not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
ment course as a tire graded 100. tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
The relative performance of tires depends upon in combination, can cause heat buildup and
the actual conditions of their use, however, and possible tire failure.
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and ZA\ WARNING
differences in road characteristics and climate. Temperature grades apply to tires that are
properly inflated and not over or underinflat-
Traction
ed.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, Band C. Those grades represent the tire's
Tire pressure monitoring
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured un-
der controlled conditions on specified govern- system
ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire (1) General notes
marked C may have poor traction performance
oA. Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and inflat-
Temperature ed to the inflation pressure recommended by the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate tires of a different size than the size indicated on
heat when tested under controlled conditions on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. bel, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires).
Sustained high temperature can cause the mate-
rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
tire failure > A. (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure tell-
tale when one or more of your tires is significant-
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform-
ly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
ance which all passenger car tires must meet un-
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
the minimum required by law.
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
Z\ WARNING also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle's handling and stop-
The traction grade assigned to this tire is ping ability.
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
nering, hydroplaning or peak traction charac- proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re-
teristics. sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
sure telltale.
252
Wheels
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS Tire tread circumference and vibration character-
malfunction indicator to indicate when the sys- istics can change and cause a tire pressure warn-
tem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal- ing if:
function indicator is combined with the low tire
— The tire pressure in one or more tires is too low
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
— The tires have structural damage
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
— The tire was replaced or the tire pressure was
mately one minute and then remain continuously
changed and it was not stored > page 254
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
— Tires that are only partially used are replaced
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
with new tires
function exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, Indicator lights

the system may not be able to detect or signal If the @ indicator light turns on, there is a loss
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions of pressure in at least one tire .> A\ Check the
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the tires and replace or repair if necessary. Check and
installation of replacement or alternate tires or correct the pressures of all four tires and store
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS the pressure again > page 254.
from functioning properly. Always check the
ia Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
manual
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and fi appears after switching the ignition on or
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function while driving and the @ indicator light in the in-
properly. strument cluster blinks for approximately one
minute and then stays on, there is system mal-
If the tire pressure monitoring indicator function. Try to store the correct tire pressures
appears => page 254. In some cases, you must drive for
Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System in- several minutes after storing the pressures until
dicator the indicator light turns off. If the indicator light
The tire pressure indicator in the instrument does turn off or turns on again after a short peri-
cluster informs you if the tire pressure is too low od of time, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or
or if there is a system malfunction. authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to
Using the ABS sensors, the tire pressure monitor-
ing system compares the tire tread circumference ZA WARNING
and vibration characteristics of the individual
— If the tire pressure indicator appears in the
tires. If the pressure changes in one or more
display, reduce your speed immediately and
tires, this is indicated in the instrument cluster
avoid any hard steering or braking maneu-
display with an indicator light @ and a message.
vers. Stop as soon as possible and check the
If only one tire is affected, the location of that
tires and their pressure.
tire will be indicated.
— The driver is responsible for maintaining the
The tire pressures must be stored again each correct tire pressure. You must check the
time you change the pressures (switching be- tire pressure regularly.
tween partial and full load pressure) or after — Under certain conditions (such as a sporty
changing or replacing a tire on your vehicle driving style, winter conditions, or unpaved
=> page 254. The tire pressure monitoring system roads), the tire pressure monitoring system
only monitors the tire pressure you have stored. indicator may be delayed.
8W1012721BC
Refer to the tire pressure label for the recom-

mended tire pressure for your vehicle
= page 245, fig. 168.
253
Wheels
—The tire pressure monitoring system can al-

so stop working when there is an ESC mal-
function.
— Using snow chains may result in a system
malfunction.
— The tire pressure monitoring system in your
Audi was calibrated with “Audi Original
Tires” > page 242. Audi recommends using
these tires.
Selene Ma e-w egy

Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System in-
dicator
If the tire pressure changes or a tire is replaced,

it must be confirmed in the system.
> Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the

tire pressures in all four tires meet the speci-
fied values and are adapted to the load
=> page 245.
> Switch the ignition on.
HICLE > Settings & Service > Tire pressure
monitoring > Store tire pressure > Yes, store
now.
Do not store the tire pressures if snow chains

are installed.
254
Care and cleaning
Care and cleaning seals on the side windows, doors, lids or the sun-
roof* or at tires, rubber hoses, insulating materi-
General information al, sensors* or camera lenses*. Keep a distance of
at least 16 inches (40 cm).
Regular, proper care helps to maintain your vehi-
cle's value. It can also be a requirement when Do not remove snow and ice with a pressure
submitting warranty claims for corrosion damage washer.
and paint defects on the body.
Never use cone nozzles or high pressure nozzles.
The required cleaning and care products can be
The water temperature must not be above 140 °F
obtained from an authorized Audi dealer or au-
(60 °C).
thorized Service Facility. Read and follow the in-
structions for use on the packaging. Automatic car wash
Spray off the vehicle before washing.
ZA\ WARNING
Make sure that the windows and roof* are closed
— Using cleaning and care products incorrectly
and the windshield wipers are off. Make sure that
can be dangerous to your health.
the vehicle is still able to roll during the washing
— Always store cleaning and care products out
process in the car wash. Follow instructions from
of reach of children to reduce the risk of poi-
the car wash operator, especially if there are ac-
soning.
cessories attached to your vehicle.
@ For the sake of the environment If possible, use car washes that do not have
— Purchase environmentally-friendly cleaning brushes.
products if possible. Washing by hand
— Do not dispose of cleaning and care prod-
ucts with household trash. Clean the vehicle starting from the top and work-
ing downward using a soft sponge or cleaning
brush. Use solvent-free cleaning products.
Car washes
Washing vehicles with matte finish paint by
The longer that deposits such as insects, bird hand
droppings, tree sap or road salt remain on the ve-
hicle, the more the surface can be damaged. High To reduce the risk of damaging the paint when
temperatures such as those caused by sunlight washing, first remove dust and large particles
increase the damaging effect. from your vehicle. Insects, grease spots, and fin-
gerprints are best removed with a special cleaner
Before washing, rinse off heavy deposits with for matte finish paint.
plenty of water.
Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To re-
Stubborn deposits such as bird droppings or tree duce the risk of damaging the paint surface, do
sap are best removed with plenty of water and a not use too much pressure.
microfiber cloth.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water. Then
Also, wash the underside of your vehicle once clean using a neutral shampoo and a soft micro-
road salt stops being used for the season. fiber cloth.
Pressure washers Rinse the vehicle thoroughly again and let it air
When washing your vehicle with a pressure wash- dry. Remove any water residue using a chamois.
er, always follow the operating instructions pro-
Z\ WARNING
8W1012721BC
vided with the pressure washer. This is especially

important in regard to the pressure and spraying —To reduce the risk of accidents, only wash
distance. Do not aim the spray directly at the the vehicle when the ignition is off and
255
Care and cleaning
follow the instructions from the car wash —To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not
operator. wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
—To reduce the risk of cuts, protect yourself —To reduce the risk of damage, do not wash
from sharp metal components when wash- decorative decals* with a pressure washer.
ing the underbody or the inside of the wheel —To reduce the risk of damage to the surface,
housings. do not use insect removing sponges, kitchen
— After washing the vehicle, the braking effect sponges, or similar items.
may be delayed due to moisture on the — When washing matte finish painted vehicle
brake rotors or ice in the winter. This in- components:
creases the risk of an accident. The brakes — To reduce the risk of damage to the sur-
must be dried with a few careful brake appli- face, do not use polishing agents or hard
cations. wax.
— Never use protective wax. It can destroy

@) Note the matte finish effect.
— If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car — Do not place any stickers or magnetic
wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in signs on vehicle components painted with
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors. matte finish paint. The paint could be
Power folding exterior mirrors* must only damaged when the stickers or magnets
be folded in and out using the power folding are removed.
function.
—To reduce the risk of damage to the rims
(*) For the sake of the environment
and tires, compare the width between the Only wash the vehicle in facilities specially de-
wheels on your vehicle with the distance be- signed for that purpose. This will reduce the
tween the guide rails in the car wash. risk of dirty water contaminated with oil from
—To reduce the risk of damage, compare the entering the sewer system.
height and width of your vehicle with the
height and width of the inside of the car
wash.
Cleaning and care information

When cleaning and caring for individual vehicle are not listed, consult an authorized Audi dealer
components, refer to the following tables. The or authorized Audi Service Facility. Also follow
information contained there is simply recommen- the information found in > A.
dations. For questions or for components that
Exterior cleaning
Component Situation Solution
Windshield wiper | Deposits Soft cloth with glass cleaner, > page 59
blades
Headlights/ Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®
tail lights
Sensors/ Deposits Sensors: soft cloth with a solvent-free cleaning product
camera lenses Camera lenses: soft cloth with an alcohol-free cleaning sol-
ution
Snow/ice Hand brush/solvent-free de-icing spray >
256
Care and cleaning

Wheels Road salt Water
Brake dust Acid-free special cleaning solution
Exhaust tail pipes | Road salt Water, cleaning solution suitable for stainless steel, if nec-
essary
Decorative parts | Deposits Mild soap solution @), a cleaning solution suitable for stain-
and less steel, if necessary
trim
Paint Paint damage Repair with touch-up paint
Spilled fuel Rinse with water immediately
Surface rust Rust remover, then treat with hard wax; for questions, con-
sult an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility.
Corrosion Have it removed by an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility.
Water no longer Treat with hard wax (at least twice per year)
beads on the surface
of clean paint
No shine even though Treat with suitable polish; then apply paint protectant if
paint has been pro- the polish that was used does not contain any protectant
tected/paint looks
poor
Deposits such as in- Dampen with water immediately and remove with a micro-
sects, bird droppings, fiber cloth
tree sap, and road
salt
Grease-based con- Remove immediately with a mild soap solution ® anda
taminants such as soft cloth
cosmetics or sunblock
Carbon compo- Deposits clean the same way as painted parts > page 255
nents
Decorative decals | Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®
@) Mild soap solution: maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water
Interior cleaning
Window glass Deposits Glass cleaner, then wipe dry
Decorative parts | Deposits Mild soap solution®
and
trim
Plastic parts Deposits Damp cloth
Heavier deposits Mild soap solution ®), detergent-free plastic cleaning solu-
8W1012721BC
tion, if necessary
257
Care and cleaning

Displays/instru- | Deposits Soft cloth with LCD cleaner; dust in the lower area of the
ment cluster instrument cluster can be removed using a soft brush.
Controls Deposits Soft brush, then a soft cloth with a mild soap solution®
Safety belts Deposits Mild soap solution ®, allow to dry before letting them re-
tract
Textiles, Deposits adhering to | Vacuum cleaner
artificial leather, |the surface
Alcantara Water-based deposits Absorbent cloth and mild soap solution®
such as coffee, tea,
blood, etc.
Oil-based deposits Apply a mild soap solution ®), blot away the dissolved oil or
such as oil, make-up, dye, treat afterward with water, if necessary
etc:
Certain types of de- Special stain remover, blot with absorbent material, treat
posits such as ink, afterward with mild soap solution, if necessary®
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish,
etc.
Natural leather Fresh stains Cotton cloth with a mild soap solution®
Water-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth
such as coffee, tea, dried stains: stain remover suitable for leather
blood, etc.
Oil-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth and stain remover suitable
such as oil, make-up, for leather
etc. dried stains: oil cleaning spray
Certain types of de- Spot remover suitable for leather
posits such as ink,
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish,
etc.
Care Regularly apply conditioning cream that protects from
light and penetrates into the material. Use special colored
conditioning cream, if necessary.
Carbon compo- Deposits Clean the same way as plastic components
nents
@) Mild soap solution: maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water
Z\ WARNING es the risk of an accident. They can also cause

wiper blade chatter.
The windshield must not be treated with wa-
ter-repelling windshield coating agents. Un-
der unfavorable conditions, such as wetness,
() Note
darkness, and when the sun is low, these coat- — Headlights and tail lights
ings can cause increased glare, which increas-
258
Care and cleaning
— Never clean the headlights or tail lights —To reduce the risk of damage, do not use
with a dry cloth or sponge because the any rough powder or abrasive cleaning
lights could be damaged. products.
— Do not use any cleaning products that con- —To reduce the risk of damage, do not pol-
tain alcohol, because they could cause ish decorative decals that have a matte or
cracks to form. printed finish.
— Wheels — Due to the risk of damage, do not use an
— Never use any paint polish or other abra- ice scraper to remove snow and ice on win-
sive materials. dows with decorative decals on them.
— Damage to the protective layer on the — Displays and instrument cluster
rims, such as stone chips or scratches, — Make sure that the display and instrument
must be repaired immediately. cluster are switched off and have cooled
— Camera lenses down before cleaning. To switch off the
— Never use warm or hot water to remove center display, select on the MMI home
snow or ice from the camera lens. This screen: SETTINGS > Display & brightness
could cause the lens to crack. > MMI > Screen cleaning.
— Never use abrasive cleaning materials or — Displays, the instrument cluster, and the
alcohol to clean the camera lens. This trim surrounding it must not be cleaned
could cause scratches and cracks. with dry cleaning methods because they
— Door windows could become scratched.
— Remove snow and ice on windows and ex- — Make sure no fluids enter the spaces be-
terior mirrors with a plastic scraper. To re- tween the instrument cluster and the
duce the risk of scratches, move the scra- trim, because that could cause damage.
per only in one direction and not back and — Controls
forth. — Make sure that no fluids enter the con-
— Never remove snow or ice from door win- trols, because this could cause damage.
dows and mirrors using warm or hot water — Safety belts
because this could cause cracks to form. — Do not remove the safety belts to clean
—To reduce the risk of damage to the rear them.
window defogger, do not apply any stick- — Never clean safety belts or their compo-
ers on the heating wires on the inside of nents with chemicals or with corrosive flu-
the window. ids or solvents and never allow sharp ob-
— Decorative parts and trim jects to come into contact with the safety
— Never use chrome care or cleaning prod- belts. This could cause damage to the belt
ucts. webbing.
— Paint — If there is damage to the webbing, the
connections, the retractors, or the buck-
—To reduce the risk of scratches, the vehicle
must be free of dirt and dust before pol- les, have them replaced by an authorized
ishing or waxing. Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility.
—To prevent paint damage, do not polish or
wax the vehicle in direct sunlight. — Textiles, artificial leather, and Alcantara
—To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not — Never treat artificial leather or Alcantara
polish away rust spots. with leather care products, solvents, floor
— Remove cosmetics and sunscreen immedi- polish, shoe polish, spot remover, or simi-
ately because they could damage the lar products.

8W1012721BC
paint. — Have a cleaning specialist remove stub-

— Decorative decals born stains to reduce the risk of damage. >
259
Care and cleaning
— Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard ing the vehicle out of service (duration, location,
sponges, etc. when cleaning. etc.).
— Do not turn on the seat heating” to dry
the seat.
— Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
damage to the surface.
— Open hook and loop fasteners, for exam-
ple on clothing, can damage seat covers.
Make sure hook and loop fasteners are
closed.
— Natural leather
— Never treat leather with solvents, floor
polish, shoe polish, spot remover or simi-
lar products.
— Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
damage to the surface.
— Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. when cleaning.
— Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry
the seat.
—To help prevent the leather from fading,
do not leave the vehicle in direct sunlight
for long periods of time. If leaving the ve-
hicle parked for long periods of time, you
should cover the leather to protect it from
direct sunlight.
@) Tips
— Insects are easier to remove from paint that
has been freshly waxed.
— Regular waxing can prevent rust spots from
forming.
— Decorative decals can age due to environ-
mental conditions, which can result in dam-
age such as brittleness. The color may fade
if exposed to excessive sunlight.
Taking your vehicle out

of service
If you would like to take your vehicle out of serv-
ice for a long period of time, contact an author-
ty. You can receive information about the meas-
ures to take depending on the conditions for tak-
260
Emergency assistance
Emergency assistance > Applies to: sedan: Engage the plastic handle @)
in the luggage compartment seal.
General information > To remove the cargo floor cover completely,
pull it toward the rear at the plastic handle @).
> Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving
> Applies to: vehicles with spare tire: Turn the
traffic in the event of a breakdown. In the event
handle counter-clockwise and remove the spare
of a flat tire, park the vehicle ona level surface.
tire.
If you are ona steep hill, be especially careful.
> Applies to: sedan: Unhook the cargo floor cover
> Set the parking brake.
again before closing the luggage compartment
> Switch the emergency flashers on.
lid.
> Have the passengers exit the vehicle. They
should move to a safe place, for example be- Depending on vehicle equipment, the vehicle tool
hind a guard rail. kit, tire mobility kit, and compressor may be lo-
cated under another cover that is secured with a
Z\ WARNING handwheel.
Follow the steps given above. This is for your Applies to: vehicles with vehicle jack in the stor-
protection and the for the safety of others on age bag: The bag with the vehicle jack is secured
the road. to the tie-downs in the luggage compartment
and must be secured to the tie-downs again after
Equipment using it.
Vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit, and ZX WARNING

vehicle jack
Applies to: vehicles with vehicle jack in the storage bag
Applies to: vehicles with the vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit,
and vehicle jack A vehicle jack that is unsecured, incorrectly se-
cured, or not secured in the luggage compart-
ment may slide out of place when braking,
turning, or in an accident, which increases the
risk of injuries to vehicle passengers. To re-
duce the risk of an accident, never transport
the vehicle jack without securing it.
G) Tips
—Insome vehicles, the rear compartment
may not open.
Fig. 169 Luggage compartment: cargo floor cover
— The vehicle jack in your vehicle is mainte-
The vehicle tool kit, vehicle jack, tire mobility kit nance-free.
and compressor are stored in the luggage com-
partment under the cargo floor cover. Tire mobility kit
> Applies to: sedan: To open the front compart-
ment, lift the cargo floor cover by the strap (@). Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
> Applies to: allroad: To open the front compart-
> Read and follow the important safety precau-
ment, pull the cargo floor cover by the plastic
tions > page 261.
handle @) slightly toward the rear. Lift the car-
> Set the parking brake.
go floor cover over the front compartment.
> Select the “P” position.
8W1012721BC
> To open the rear compartment, lift the cargo

> Check if a repair with the tire mobility kit is pos-
floor cover by the plastic handle @).
sible > page 262.
261
Using the ti — If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical

Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit attention immediately.
— Keep the tire sealant away from children.
B8K-1475
(i) Tips
— If sealant leaks, allow it to dry in place. You
can then peel it off like a sticker.
— Note the expiration date on the sealant bot-
tle. Replace the tire sealant at an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility.
Fig. 170 Tire: tire damage that cannot be repaired — Radio reception can be interrupted when
operating the compressor.
The tire repair is only meant for temporary use. — Follow the legal regulations that are appli-
Change the damaged tire as soon as possible cable in the country where you are operating
oA. the vehicle.
If the tire is pierced by an object such as a nail,

do not remove the object from the tire. Repairing tires
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
The tire mobility kit can be used at temperatures
as low as -4 °F (-20 °C).
RAZ-0054)
The tire mobility kit must not be used:
—If the tire has cuts or punctures that are larger
than 0.16 in (4 mm) @ ° fig. 170
— If the rim is damaged (2)
— If you have driven with very low tire pressure or
without air in the tire @)
See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility for assistance in these situations.
Z\ WARNING
— Please note that the tire mobility kit cannot
be used in all situations, and that it may on-
ly be used temporarily.
— The tire sealant must not come in contact
with skin, eyes, or clothing.
— If tire sealant comes into contact with your
eyes or your skin, thoroughly rinse the af-
Fig. 172 Tire mobility kit connection
fected area immediately with clean water.
— Do not inhale the fumes.
Requirement: the tire mobility kit must be laid
— If you swallow any of the tire sealant, thor-
out and ready for use > page 261.
oughly rinse your mouth immediately and
drink a lot of water. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.
— Change your clothing immediately if it
comes into contact with tire sealant.
262
Setting up the tire mobility kit Once the compressor has cooled, you can con-
> Open the cover @) on the compressor!) tinue to use it.
fig. 171.
> Remove the connector
() and pressure hose (5) Completing
from the housing. Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
> Connect the compressor pressure hose © to

> Affix the sticker that says "max. 50 mph (max.
the flange © on the tire sealant bottle @). 80 km/h)" that is provided with the tire mobili-
> Insert the sealant bottle with the flange at the
ty kit within the driver's field of vision.
bottom into the opening @) on the compressor. > Stop the vehicle after driving for about 10 mi-
> Remove the valve cap from the faulty tire.
nutes and check the tire pressure.
> Connect the filler hose @) to the valve (7) > If the tire pressure is lower than 19 psi (130
> fig. 172. kPA), then the tire is too severely damaged. Do
> Connect the plug @) © fig. 171 to an outlet in
not continue driving.
the vehicle.
> Switch the ignition on.
ZA\ WARNING
Inflating a tire Pay attention to the following after repairing
> Move the switch (8) > fig. 172 on the compres- the tire:
sor into position I. — Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
> Inflate the tire to between 29 psi (200 kPA) — Avoid hard acceleration or braking and driv-
and 36 psi (250 kPA) and read the pressure on ing fast around curves.
the gauge. — The vehicle may become more difficult to
> If this tire pressure is not reached, remove the control.
filler hose. Drive slowly approximately 33 feet —If the tire is too severely damaged, see an
(10 m) forward or in reverse so that the sealant authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
can be distributed in the tire. Inflate the tire Service Facility for assistance.
again > A\.
©) For the sake of the environment
ZA WARNING You can give the used tire sealant bottle to an
— Read and follow the manufacturer's safety authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
precautions on the compressor and in the in- Service Facility for disposal.
structions on the bottle of sealant.
—Ifatire pressure of 29 psi (200 kPA) cannot @) Tips
reached after inflating for 6 minutes, then Remember to obtain a new bottle of sealant
the tire is too severely damaged. Do not con- from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
tinue driving. Audi Service Facility after repairing a tire.
— If the tire cannot be repaired with the tire
sealant, see an authorized Audi dealer or au- Changing a tire
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
@ Tips You must complete the preparation before

Do not operate the compressor for more than changing a tire.
six minutes continuously, or it can overheat.
> Read and follow the important safety precau-
tions > page 261.
8W1012721BC
2) The compressor may look different. However, the way it is

operated is generally the same.
263
> Set the parking brake. > Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn to
> Select the “P” position. the left. To achieve the required torque, hold
>» When towing a trailer: disconnect the trailer the end of the wheel wrench*. If the wheel bolt
from your vehicle. will not loosen, press carefully on the wheel
> Lay out the vehicle tool kit > page 261 and the wrench* with your foot. Hold onto the vehicle
spare tire > page 266. securely while doing this and make sure your
>» Switch the ignition off. footing is stable.
ZA\ WARNING ZA WARNING

The vehicle must also be secured to prevent it To reduce the risk of an accident, only loosen
from rolling when using the vehicle jack*. Use the wheel bolts gently one turn before raising
suitable objects to block the front and back of the vehicle with the vehicle jack*.
the wheel that is diagonal from the wheel
with the flat tire. Raising the vehicle
Applies to: vehicles with vehicle jack
Removing the caps
as
©&
Ss
g
=%
oo
me
@= (G) ?
Fig. 173 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps
> Slide the plastic clip from the vehicle tool kit
onto the cap until it engages > fig. 173.
> Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
Loosening the wheel bolts
©
i=
x©
a Fig. 176 Sill: positioning the vehicle jack
> Place the vehicle jack from the vehicle tool kit
ona firm surface. Use a flat, stable support if
necessary. Ona slippery surface such as tile,
you should use a non-slip pad such as a rubber
mat > A\.
> Find the marking on the sill that is closest to
Fig. 174 Wheel: loosening the wheel bolts
the tire that will be changed > fig. 175. Behind
the marking, there is a lifting point on the side
> Slide the wheel wrench* from the vehicle tool
sill for the vehicle jack.
kit all the way onto the wheel bolt.
> Turn the handwheel to raise the vehicle jack un-
der the lifting point on the side sill until the
264
bracket on the jack @) completely covers the Removing and installing a wheel
notch on the vehicle.
> Align the vehicle jack so the bracket (@) covers
| B8K-1479
the notch and the base (2) is flat on the ground.
The base @) must be directly under the mount-
ing point @.
> Mount the crank on the vehicle jack: insert the
crank into the opening on the handwheel. Turn
the crank to the left or right to secure it.
> Continue raising the vehicle jack with the crank
until the wheel lifts off the ground slightly.
ZA WARNING
—To reduce the risk of injury, make sure no
one is in the vehicle before raising it.
— Make sure the vehicle jack is stable. The risk
of injury is increased when the ground is
slippery or soft, because the vehicle jack
could slide or sink.
— Only raise your vehicle with the vehicle jack
provided by the factory. If you use a vehicle
jack designed for another vehicle, your vehi- Fig. 178 Wheel: alignment pin in the top hole
cle could slip and cause injury.
— Position the vehicle jack only at the desig- Removing a wheel
nated mounting points on the side sill and > Remove the top wheel bolt completely using
align the jack. Otherwise, the vehicle jack the hex socket in the screwdriver handle from
could slip and cause an injury if it does not the vehicle tool kit > fig. 177 and place it ona
have sufficient hold on the vehicle. clean surface.
—To reduce the risk of injury, do not raise any > Then install the alignment pin from the vehicle
other vehicles or other loads using the vehi- tool kit in the empty wheel bolt hole by hand
cle jack provided by the factory. > fig. 178.
— To reduce the risk of an accident, never start > Remove the rest of the wheel bolts.
the engine when the vehicle is raised. >» Remove the wheel >(). The alignment pin re-
—To reduce the risk of injury, no work should mains in the hole while doing this.
be performed under the vehicle while it is
Installing a wheel
raised.
Read the directions on > page 266 when instal-
() Note ling unidirectional tires.
Do not lift the vehicle by the sill. Position the > Slide the wheel on over the alignment pin >@.
vehicle jack only at the designated mounting > Install the wheel bolts and tighten them gently
points on the side sill. Otherwise, your vehicle using the hex socket.
could be damaged. > Remove the alignment pin and tighten the re-
maining wheel bolt.
> Carefully lower the vehicle using the vehicle
jack*.
8W1012721BC
> Tighten the wheel bolts in a diagonal pattern

using the wheel wrench*.
265
The wheel bolts must be clean and loosen and > The wheel bolt tightening specification must be
tighten easily. Check the contact surfaces for the 90 ft lbs (120 Nm). Have it checked as soon as
wheel and hub. Contaminants on these surfaces possible with a torque wrench. Drive carefully
must be removed before installing the wheel. until then.
> Have the faulty wheel replaced as quickly as
ZA\ WARNING possible.
— Read and follow the important information
and notes under > page 242. Space-saving spare tire
— Never use the hex socket in the screwdriver Applies to: vehicles with space-saving spare tire (Compact
spare tire)
handle or the hex socket wrench with the
ratchet to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts. The spare tire is intended for short-term use only.
This increases the risk of an accident, be- Have the damaged tire checked and replaced if
cause you will not be able to achieve the cor- necessary by an authorized Audi dealer or author-
rect tightening specification. ized Audi Service Facility as soon as possible.
There are some restrictions on the use of the

@) Note
compact spare tire. The compact spare tire has
When removing or installing the wheel, the been designed specifically for your type of vehi-
rim could hit the brake rotor and damage the cle. Do not replace it with the spare tire from an-
rotor. Work carefully and have a second per- other type of vehicle.
son help you.
The compact spare tire is located in the luggage
compartment under the cargo floor cover
Unidirectional tires
=> page 261.
A unidirectional tire profile is identified by arrows
The tire pressure must be adjusted to a specified
on the tire sidewall that point in the running di-
value listed on the tire pressure sticker
rection. You must always maintain the specified
=> page 245, fig. 168.
running direction. This is necessary to ensure the
tire's optimal performance in regard to adhesion, Snow chains
running noise, and friction, and to reduce the risk
For technical reasons, the use of snow chains on
of hydroplaning.
the compact spare tire is not permitted.
To benefit fully from the advantages of the uni-
If you have to drive with snow chains and a front
directional tire design, you should replace faulty
tire fails, mount the spare tire in place of a rear
tires as soon as possible and restore the correct
tire. Install the snow chains on the rear tire that
running direction on all of the tires.
you removed, and install that in place of the
front tire that failed.
> Reinstall the caps on the wheel bolts if necessa-

ZA\ WARNING
ry. — After installing a spare tire, the tire pressure
> Store the vehicle tool kit in its designated must be checked as soon as possible.
place. — Do not drive faster than SO mph (80 km/h)
> If the removed wheel does not fit in the spare with a compact spare tire. Driving faster
wheel well, store it securely in the luggage than that increases the risk of an accident.
compartment > page 83. — To reduce the risk of an accident, avoid hard
> Check the tire pressure on the installed wheel acceleration or braking and driving fast
as soon as possible. around curves with the compact spare tire.
> Correct the tire pressure and store it in the MMI — To reduce the risk of an accident, never drive
=> page 254. with more than one compact spare tire. >
266
— Normal summer or winter tires must not be Returning to storage

mounted on the compact spare wheel rim. > To release air, turn the valve insert. See an au-
() Note Facility.
Secure the spare tire in the spare tire well us- > Turn the valve insert back once the air has been
ing the handwheel in order to reduce the risk released.
of damage to other components. >» Wait several hours before placing the collapsi-
ble spare tire in the spare wheel well. Only then
will it fold down completely so that you can
Collapsible spare tire
Applies to: vehicles with collapsible spare tire
store it securely.
> Then screw the valve cap back onto the valve.
The collapsible spare tire is intended for short- > Secure the collapsible spare tire with the hand-
term use only. Have the damaged tire checked wheel.
and replaced if necessary by an authorized Audi >» Fold the cargo floor cover back into place.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon
as possible. Snow chains
There are some restrictions on the use of the col- Using snow chains on the collapsible spare tire is
lapsible spare tire. The collapsible spare tire has not permitted for technical reasons.
been designed specifically for your type of vehi- If you have to drive with snow chains and a front
cle. Do not replace it with the collapsible spare tire fails, mount the collapsible spare tire in place
tire from another type of vehicle. of a rear tire. Install the snow chains on the rear
The collapsible spare tire is located in the lug- tire that you removed, and install that in place of
gage compartment under the cargo floor cover. the front tire that failed.
Requirement: the vehicle tool kit > page 261 and Z\ WARNING
the compressor must be laid out.
— Only use the collapsible spare tire in emer-
Removing gencies and drive very carefully, especially if
it is more than six years old.
> Lift the cargo floor using the handle.
— The compressor and the hose can become
> Turn the handwheel counter-clockwise and re-
very hot during operation which increases
move it.
the risk of burn injuries.
> Remove the collapsible spare tire.
— After installing a collapsible spare tire, the
You must inflate the collapsible spare tire before- tire pressure must be checked as quickly as
hand in order to use it. possible to reduce the risk of an accident.
— Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)
Inflating
with the collapsible spare tire. Driving faster
> Remove the valve cap from the collapsible than that increases the risk of an accident.
spare tire. — To reduce the risk of an accident, avoid hard
> Tighten the compressor hose on the collapsible acceleration or braking and driving fast
spare tire valve. around curves with the collapsible spare
> Connect the compressor hose to a vehicle sock- tire.
et and switch it on. — Never drive using more than one collapsible
> Let the compressor run until the specified value spare tire, because this increases the risk of
on the tire pressure sticker is reached an accident.
> page 245, fig. 168 > ©. — Normal tires or winter tires must not be
8W1012721BC
> Screw the valve cap back onto the valve. mounted on the collapsible spare tire rim.
267
@) Note @) Note
The compressor must be switched off after six Jump start cables can cause considerable
minutes at the most to reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle electrical system if
overheating. Let the compressor cool down they are connected incorrectly.
for several minutes before using it again.
@) Tips
Jump starting — There must be no contact between the
vehicles, or else voltage could flow when
connecting the positive terminal and drain
You should only perform the steps that follow if the vehicle battery of the vehicle providing
you have the necessary tools and technical ex- the jump start.
pertise. — The drained vehicle battery must be con-
nected correctly to the electrical system.
If the engine does not start because the vehicle — Switch off electrical equipment that is not
battery is drained, you can jump start your vehi- needed.
cle using another vehicle. Jump start cables are
needed to do this.
Both vehicle batteries must have 12 V nominal

Both jump start cables must be connected in the
voltage. The voltage capacity (Ah) of the vehicle
correct order.
battery that is giving power must not be less
than the capacity of the drained vehicle battery.
Jump start cable
Only use a jump start cable with a large enough

diameter. Note the manufacturer's specifica-
tions.
Only use a jump start cable with insulated termi-

nal clamps.
Positive cable - usually red.

Fig. 179 Engine compartment: connectors for jump start
Negative cable - usually black. cables or a charger
ZA\ WARNING
— A drained battery can freeze at tempera-
tures around 32 °F (0 °C). If the vehicle bat-
tery is frozen, it must be thawed before con-
necting the jump start cables. If it is not,
the risk of an explosion and chemical burns
increases. After jump starting the vehicle,
drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility immediately to Fig. 180 Engine compartment: connectors for jump start
have the vehicle battery checked. cables or a charger
— Read the warnings when working in the en-
gine compartment > page 221. The jump start cable connections are located in
— Handling the jump start cables incorrectly the engine compartment.
may cause the vehicle battery to explode Follow the information about the vehicle battery
and lead to serious injuries. => page 230. >
268
Connecting the positive cable (red) to the — Keep ignition sources (such as open flames,
positive terminal burning cigarettes, etc.) away from the vehi-
> Open the cover on the positive terminal cle batteries to reduce the risk of an explo-
> fig. 179. sion.
1. Attach one end of the positive cable (red) to — Route the jump start cables so they cannot
the jump-start pin @ © fig. 180 on your vehi- get caught in the moving parts in the other
cle. vehicle's engine compartment.
2. Attach the other end of the positive cable
(red) to the positive terminal @ on the pow- () Note
er source. Please note that the connecting process previ-
Connecting the negative cable (black) to the ously described for the jump start cables is in-
negative terminal tended for when your vehicle is being jump
started.
3. Attach one end of the negative cable (black)
to the negative terminal@) on the power G) Tips
source.
4. Attach the other end of the negative cable Make sure that the connected jump start ca-
bles have sufficient contact with metal.
(black) to the jump-start pin @) on the vehi-
cle.
Towing
Starting the engine
General information
>» Start the engine in the vehicle giving the charge
and let it run at idle. You should only perform the steps that follow if
> Now start the engine in your vehicle, which has you have the necessary tools and technical ex-
the drained battery. pertise.
> If the engine does not start, stop the starting
Towing requires a certain amount of practice.
procedure after 10 seconds and then repeat it
Audi recommends contacting a towing company
after approximately 30 seconds.
to have the vehicle transported.
> Turn on the rear window defogger in your vehi-
cle in order to reduce any voltage peaks that You should only have your vehicle towed by an-
may occur when disconnecting the jump start other vehicle when disabled in exceptional cir-
cables. The headlights must be switched off. cumstances. Inexperienced drivers should not
> With the engines running, remove the cables in tow.
reverse order of the way they were installed.
> Close the cover on the positive terminal. Notes on towing
When the engine is stopped, the transmission
ZA WARNING will not be sufficiently lubricated if traveling at
— Never connect the jump start cable directly high speeds and long distances:
to your vehicle battery. Only use the connec- — The maximum permitted towing speed is 30
tions in the engine compartment. mph (50 km/h).
— Do not touch the non-insulated parts of the — The maximum permitted towing distance is 30
terminal clamps. The cable must also not miles (50 km).
come into contact with vehicle components
that conduct electricity when it is connected Additional information on towing with a tow
truck
to the positive vehicle battery terminal. This
8W1012721BC
can cause a short circuit. The vehicle may only be towed with the front axle
— The plugs on the battery cells must not be raised. Do not wrap any chains or cables around
opened. the brake lines. >
269
Tow bar and towing cable or when towing the vehicle. This can prevent
The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or tow- an undesired intervention from the pre
sense* system.
ing cable. Both drivers should be familiar with
the special considerations when towing, especial- — Follow the local legal regulations for tow-
ly when using a towing cable. ing.
Always make sure the traction force does not ex-

ceed the permitted level and there are no shock
loading conditions. There is always the risk of the Read and follow the important information under
coupling becoming overloaded when driving off- => page 269.
road.
Preparations
For the most safety and security, drive with a tow
> Only secure the towing cable or tow bar at the
bar. You should use a towing cable only ifa tow
designated towing loop > page 271.
bar is not available. Use a towing cable made of
> Make sure the towing cable is not twisted. Oth-
synthetic elastic cable similar elastic material.
erwise it could disconnect from the towing loop
ZA\ WARNING while towing.
> Switch the emergency flashers on in both
— Towing highly increases the risk of an acci-
vehicles > page 53. However, do not do this if it
dent, for example from colliding with the
prohibited by law.
towing vehicle.
— To reduce the risk of an accident, do not al- Towing vehicle (front)
low anyone to remain inside the vehicle
> Only start to drive when the towing cable is
when it is being transported by a tow truck
taut.
or a special transporter.
> Press the brake pedal very carefully.
> Avoid sudden braking or driving maneuvers.
@) Note
— If normal towing is not possible, for exam- Vehicle being towed (rear)
ple if the transmission is faulty or if the » Make sure the ignition is switched on so that
towing distance is greater than 30 miles the steering wheel is not locked and so that you
(50 km), then transport the vehicle on a can use the turn signals, the horn, and the
special carrier. windshield wipers if needed > A\.
— If the vehicle is towed by a tow truck at the > Switching it off before the vehicle has stopped
axle that is not permitted, this can cause se- may impair the function of the brake booster
vere damage to the transmission. and power steering. You would then need to
— The vehicle must not be tow started for use more force to steer and brake the vehicle.
technical reasons. > Release the parking brake > page 106.
> Select the “N” selector lever position.
G) Tips > Make sure the towing cable is always taut.
— If the power supply is interrupted, then it
will not be possible to move the selector ZA\ WARNING
lever out of the "P" position. The parking — Never tow a vehicle using a tow bar or tow-
lock must be released using the emergency ing cable if the vehicle does not have electri-
release before towing the vehicle cal power.
=> page 100. — If the vehicle runs out of power while it is
— Switch Audi pre sense* off > page 146 when being towed, stop towing the vehicle imme-
loading the vehicle onto a vehicle carrier, diately and consult an authorized Audi deal-
train, ship, or other type of transportation, er or qualified repair facility.
270
Rear towing loop
Fig. 181 Rear bumper: installing the towing loop
The threaded opening for the towing loop is lo-

cated on the right rear of the bumper.
> Remove the towing loop from the vehicle tool

kit > page 261.
> Press the cap inward with brief, strong pressure
> fig. 181. The cap will loosen from the bump-
er.
> Tighten the towing eye as far as it will go into
the mount. Use a suitable object to tighten the
towing eye completely and securely in the
mount.
>» After using, place the towing loop back in the
vehicle tool kit.
If the towing loop is not tightened until it

stops when installing, the threads may be
pulled out when towing the vehicle and result
in an accident.
Depending on the model, the shape of the cap

can vary.
8W1012721BC
271
Fuses and bulbs
A fuse that has blown will have metal strips that

have burned through.
The fuses are located in the footwell under the

foot rest (left-hand drive vehicle) @ r behind
the cover (right-hand drive vehicle)
fuses are located on the front side of the cockpit
(driver's side) © and under the left cover in the
luggage compartment(
> Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment

off.
> Check the table that follows to see which fuse
belongs to the equipment.
» Remove the screwdriver and the reversible Torx
bit from the vehicle tool kit > page 261.
> Remove the footrest or the corresponding cov-
er.
> Remove the colored plastic clip from the fuse
panel, if necessary > page 273, fig. 184.
> Remove the clip from the rear side of the cover
(©):
> Remove the fuse using the clip.
> Replace the blown fuse only with a fuse that
has the same amp rating.
Fig. 182 Driver's side footwell (left-hand drive vehicles): > Reinstall the plastic bracket.
footrest (@), front passenger's footwell (right-hand drive >» Reattach the footrest or the cover.
vehicles): cover
Fuse color identification
BBW-0257
Color Current rating

in amps
Zag
Black 1
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent [25
Green 30
Orange 40
Z\ WARNING
Do not repair fuses and never replace a blown
fuse with one that has a higher amp rating.
Fig. 183 Driver's side cockpit (left-hand drive/right-hand
This can cause damage to the electrical sys-
drive vehicles): cover ©, left side of luggage compartment:
cover () tem and increases the risk of fire.
272
Fuses and bulbs
x
@) Note $Ss
2
If a new fuse burns out again shortly after you 8
have installed it, have the electrical system

checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
t y.
G@) Tips
— The following table does not list fuse loca-
tions that are not used.
— Some of the equipment listed in the follow-
ing tables applies only to certain model ver-
sions or certain optional equipment.
3
=f
=& Fig. 185 Front passenger's footwell (right-hand drive vehi-
a
cle): fuse panel with plastic clip
f ) (brown)
No. | Equipment
1 | Catalytic converter heating
2 | Engine components
Exhaust doors, fuel injectors, radiator in-
let, crankcase housing heating
Vacuum pump, hot water pump, NOx sen-
4 |sor, particulate sensor, biodiesel sensor,
exhaust doors
Brake light sensor
6 | Engine valves, camshaft adjustment
Heated oxygen sensors, mass airflow sen-
sor, water pump
Fig. 184 Driver's footwell (left-hand drive vehicle): fuse Water pump, high pressure pump, high
panel with plastic clip 8 |pressure regulator valve, temperature
valve, engine mount
Hot water pump, motor relay, 48 V drive-
train generator, 48 V water pump
10 | Oil pressure sensor, oil temperature sensor
Clutch position sensor, 48 V drivetrain
11 |generator, water pump, 12 V drivetrain
generator
8W1012721BC
12 | Engine valves, engine mount

13 | Engine cooling
273
Fuses and bulbs
Fuse panel @) (brown) Fuse panel (©(black)

14 | Fuel injectors, engine control module 11 Left rear door control module, left rear
15 |Ignition coils, heated oxygen sensors power window
16 | Fuel pump 12 | Parking heater
(®) (red)
Fuse panel (0) (black)
Fuse panel
No. | Equipment No. | Equipment
Anti-theft alarm system Front seat electronic, seat ventilation,
rearview mirror, rear climate control sys-
2 | Engine control module
tem control panel, windshield heating, di-
3 Left front seat electronics, lumbar sup-
agnostic connection
port, massaging seat
2 Diagnostic interface, vehicle electrical sys-
4 | Automatic transmission selector lever
tem control module
5 |Horn
3 |Sound generator
6 |Parking brake
4 |Clutch position sensor
7 | Diagnostic interface
5S |Engine start, emergency shut-off
8 | Roof electronics control module
6 Diagnostic connection, traffic information
9 |Emergency call module antenna (TMC)
10 | Airbag control module 7 |USB input
11 Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC), An- 8 |Garage door opener
ti-Lock Braking System (ABS) 9 Audi adaptive cruise control, distance reg-
12 | Diagnostic connection, light/rain sensor ulation
13 | Climate control system 11 | Front camera
14 | Right front door control module 12 | Right headlight
15 | Climate control system compressor 13 | Left headlight
16 | Brake system pressure reservoir 14 | Transmission fluid cooling
Fuse panel
(©) (black) Fuse panel
(©) (red)
No. | Equipment No. | Equipment
Front seat heating 1 {Ignition coils
2 |Windshield wipers 2 |Climate control system compressor
Left headlight electronics S |Left headlight
4 Panoramic glass roof/ sliding/tilting sun- 6 |Automatic transmission
roof
7 |Instrument panel
5 |Left front door control module
8 | Climate control system blower
6 | Sockets
9 |Right headlight
7 Right rear door control module, right rear
10 | Dynamic steering
power window
11 | Engine start
All wheel drive control module
9 | Right headlight electronics
10 Windshield washer system/headlight
washer system control module
274
Fuses and bulbs
Fuse assignment - Driver's side of the Fuse assignment - Left side of the luggage
(ole 4o)ig compartment
GU -
|_8aw-0013]
Fig. 186 Driver side cockpit: fuse panel with plastic bracket
Fuse panel
No. Equipment
Convenience access and start authoriza-
B
tion control module

2 | Audi phone box, USB input
4 |Head-up display
5 |Audi music interface, USB input
6 | Front climate control system control panel eet ofihe uagage compartment: fuse panel
7 |Steering column lock
8 |Center display Fuse panel @) (black)
9 |Instrument cluster No. | Equipment
10 | Volume control 2 |Windshield defroster
11 | Light switch, switch module 3 |Windshield defroster
12 | Steering column electronics 5 |Suspension control
14 | Infotainment system 6 |Automatic transmission
16 Steering column electronics, steering 7 |Rear window defogger
wheel heating 8 |Rear seat heating
9 |Left tail lights
10 Airbag control module
Luggage compartment lid lock, fuel filler
ig door lock, convenience system control
module
12 Luggage compartment lid
Fuse panel
@) (red)
No. Equipment
Electric compressor
8W1012721BC
Fuse panel (©) (brown)

No. Equipment
Exterior antenna
275
Fuses and bulbs
2 | Audi phone box

If you still would like to try replacing the
Right front seat electronics, lumbar sup- bulbs in your vehicle yourself, read the warn-
port, massaging seat ings regarding working in the engine compart-
4 |Side assist ment > A\ in General information on
6 |Tire pressure monitoring system page 221.
Convenience access and start authoriza-

tion control module
8 | Auxiliary heating, tank module Make sure the covers are fitted correctly on
the headlight and tail light so that no water
TV tuner, data exchange and telematics
will leak in from the outside and the light
10 control module
function will not be impaired.
11 | Auxiliary battery control module
12 | Garage door opener
13 | Rearview camera, peripheral cameras
14 | Right tail lights
16 | Airbag control module
No. | Equipment
Exhaust treatment
Mm| Ww
WO) O};N]/
Right trailer hitch light

Trailer hitch
Left trailer hitch light
Trailer hitch socket
All wheel drive control module, sport dif-
10
ferential
11 | Exhaust treatment
Bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Audi recommends having a bulb replaced by an

Facility in cases of doubt. These facilities have
the correct tools and replacement parts as well
as the required technical knowledge.
LED lights*
Your vehicle is equipped with maintenance-free

headlights and tail lights. However, if a light bulb
needs to be replaced, please contact an author-
ty.
276
Data privacy
Data privacy airbags. These vehicle control modules store data

while driving normally that is required by an au-
Privacy notice thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility for diagnosis and repair purposes. Only
You can find information about responsibility for
certain types of data are recorded for a very short
data protection in the MMI.
period of time ifa control module has detected a
Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SET- system event. No noises, conversations, or im-
TINGS > General > Legal notes > About Audi ages will be recorded in the vehicle.
connect.
The data may include information such as the ve-
hicle speed, the direction of travel, and informa-
Image recording tion about the brake system, or also the behavior
Surrounding area monitoring of the restraint system in the event of an acci-
Applies to: vehicles with surrounding area monitoring dent. The stored data can be exported and down-
loaded with special devices, which must be con-
Some vehicle functions require the vehicle’s path nected directly to the vehicle.
to be detected and evaluated. This is done by
cameras installed permanently on the vehicle On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
that detect objects in the vehicle's surroundings There is a diagnostic connector socket in the driv-
(such as obstacles or guard rails). The live images er's side footwell to read out the various control
from the cameras are transmitted to the applica- modules and the event data recorder. Data re-
ble control module. garding the function and condition of the elec-
The camera images are transmitted to the appli- tronic control modules is stored in the event
cable control module and stored for processing. memory. Only have an authorized Audi dealer or
The control module analyzes the current camera authorized Audi Service Facility read out and de-
image using image evaluation software. This im- lete the event memory.
age evaluation software detects anonymized
technical measurements, such as distances to ob-
ZX WARNING
jects. The control module evaluates these techni- — Incorrect use of the connection port for the
cal measurements and makes it possible for the On Board Diagnostic System can cause mal-
assist systems to control the vehicle, if necessary. functions, which can then result in accidents
and serious injuries.
Data memories — Only allow an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility to read out the
engine data.
~
3.
o
g|
=z ash data recorder
x
a.
Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
Fig. 188 Driver's side footwell: connection port for the On ing how a vehicle's system performed. The EDR is
Board Diagnostic System (OBD) designed to record data related to vehicle dynam-
8W1012721BC
ics and safety systems for a short period of time,

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic control typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehi-
modules for various vehicle systems such as the cle is designed to record such data as:
277
Data privacy
— How various systems in your vehicle were oper- of Audi connect remote vehicle services, and
ating; adaptation to customer expectations. For exam-
— Whether or not the driver and passenger safety ple, various technical function data, environmen-
belts were buckled/fastened; tal data, driving data, and usage data will be col-
— How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the lected for a specific purpose and forwarded to
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, Audi. The data will be sent from the vehicle at
— How fast the vehicle was traveling. the time the data was collected.
These data can help provide a better understand- Applies to: MMI: You can find additional informa-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and in- tion about data collection in the MMI. Select on
juries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Legal
vehicle only ifa non-trivial crash situation occurs; notes > About Audi connect.
no data are recorded by the EDR under normal If you would like to deny data transmission to
driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. Audi, contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
name, gender, age, and crash location) are re- thorized Audi Service Facility for more informa-
corded. However, other parties, such as law en- tion. You also have the option to deactivate data
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the transmission within the privacy settings.
type of personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
aELa ata ae)
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip- Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
SETTINGS > Privacy settings.
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can read the in- When using Audi connect services or during data
formation if they have access to the vehicle or the collection, data will be transmitted from the ve-
EDR. hicle.
> To display additional information about the pri-
Data usage
vacy settings and the associated symbols in the
Audi can read out the information stored in the status bar, press @ in the MMI.
data memories or similar data, or give this infor-
mation to third parties, especially in the follow- Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
ing situations: Setting the maximum privacy settings
— If the vehicle owner or lessee agrees When the Activate privacy mode function is
— If there is an official request from the police switched on, the data connection is deactivated
— Ifa court or authorities request it or sending of data is restricted, but all safety-re-
If legally permitted, Audi can also use the data lated, legal, or contractually required Audi con-
for analysis of vehicle operation and safety per- nect services remain activated. The majority of
formance or provide this data to third parties for the Audi connect services are deactivated.
research purposes. When the function is switched off, the data con-
nection will be available in order to use Audi con-
Transmitted information nect services.
Data collection Adjusting individual privacy settings

Applies to: vehicles with data collection
In the MMI, you can adjust individually which da-
Depending on the country, Audi may collect data ta should be transmitted from the vehicle. If you
for the following purposes, for example: offer switch on a data category, the data will be trans-
and product optimization, public safety, provision mitted.
278
Data privacy
You can also deactivate individual services for vated by the key user, then they will re-
your vehicle at my.audi.com if you are logged into main available without restrictions and
the vehicle as the key user > page 30. These de- continue to transmit data.
activated services will not be available in the ve- — Stored destinations (favorites, last desti-
hicle. For additional information, visit my.audi. nations) are only stored in the vehicle. If
com.) you allow transmission of data again,
these destinations will be synchronized via
@) Note the myAudi account. To prevent synchroni-
You are responsible for all precautions taken zation of destinations, delete the destina-
for data protection, anti-virus protection, and tions before you allow data to be trans-
protection against loss of data on mobile de- mitted again.
vices that are used to access the Internet
through the Wi-Fi hotspot.
@ Tips
Audi collects, uses, stores and shares your per-
— The following interfaces are not affected by sonal information, such as contact data, vehicle
changes to the privacy settings: Bluetooth, data, usage data, driving data and precise geolo-
Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE), Wi-Fi, Audi cation, in order to provide you with the products
smartphone interface (ASI), Near Field
and services you have purchased or requested,
Communication (NFC), charging communi- and for a number of other purposes, for example,
cation (high-voltage system), Electronic Toll
to track quality issues, to performance and safe-
Collect (ETC), On-Board Diagnostic System ty, to meet our internal compliance or legal re-
(OBD) if equipped. quirements and to market to customers and po-
— If the maximum privacy settings are switch- tential customers. For a more complete list of
ed on, your vehicle may not receive security the data we collect, how we use it and with
updates and certificates for establishing an whom we share it, please visit your Audi nation-
encrypted connection, depending on vehicle al/sales region website at www.audi.com.
equipment. In order to receive security up-
dates and certificates, switch the maximum The collection, use and sharing may vary depend-
privacy settings off for at least ten minutes ing on your model and model year, your subscrip-
every six months. Make sure that your vehi- tion status, or the service offering. For example,
cle is connected to the Internet. A symbol in collection, use and sharing may vary between
the MMI status bar indicates if the required Audi connect services, if you have designated a
data connection is available > page 22. key user, or if you are driving a model equipped
— If the transmission of data is limited, it will with persistent data logging. Please review the
have the following effects on the exchange complete Privacy Statement to understand our
of data for Audi connect services and emer- data handling practices with respect to a particu-
gency calls, if equipped: lar service.
— The emergency call function will remain You can find additional information about our da-
available without restrictions and will con- ta privacy practices in your MMI.
tinue to transmit data.
> Applies to: MMI: On the home screen, select:
— If an online roadside assistance call is ini-
SETTINGS > General > Legal notes > About
tiated, no data will be transmitted, but a
Audi connect.
call will be made.
— If the Geofencing Alert, Speed Alert, Information about our privacy practices in con-
8W1012721BC
and/or Valet Alert services have been acti- junction with the mobile Audi connect
D In certain countries
279
Data privacy
application can be found in the Application’s Pri-

vacy Statement.
For additional information about the privacy

practices relating to Audi connect, myAudi, or
other websites, applications or online services as
well as your obligations with respect to using
these services, and for additional information re-
garding Audi connect terms and conditions,
please visit your Audi national/sales region web-
site at www.audi.com.
280
Accessories and technical changes
Accessories and — Replacement parts may not always be availa-

ble.
technical changes
— Navigation systems for vehicles built for the
Warranty U.S.A. and Canada will not necessarily work in
Europe, and may not work in other countries.
Your vehicle is covered by various warranties:
— New Vehicle Limited Warranty () Note

— Limited Warranty Against Corrosion Perforation Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle re-
— Emissions Control System Warranties: Federal sulting from these country-specific differen-
Emissions Control System Defect Warranty, ces.
Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
— Applies to: USA models: Kansas Safety Belt Maintenance, repairs,
Limited Warranty and technical modifi-
— Applies to: USA models: California Emissions
cations
Control Warranties: Short-term Emissions De-
fects Warranty, Long-term Emissions Defects Observe the safety precautions > page 221, Gen-
Warranty, TZEV models Emissions Defects eral information and > page 264, Raising the ve-
Warranty, California Emissions Performance hicle.
Warranty
General information
You can find detailed information in your Warran-
ty & Maintenance Booklet and in the California Due to the increasing complexity of technology in
Emissions Booklet*. these vehicles, as well as the safety and environ-
mental standards that apply, you can only per-
form a very limited amount of repairs and modifi-
Audi Literature Shop cations to the vehicle yourself.
Service information is made available as soon as Proof of maintenance work may be required to
possible after a model is introduced and can be submit a claim within the warranty period.
ordered in the Audi Literature Shop: http://
literature.audiusa.com We recommend that you have your vehicle serv-
iced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility and that Audi Genuine Parts
Driving in other
and Audi Genuine Accessories are used. This
countries helps to ensure that your vehicle's functionality,
Government regulations in the United States and performance, and safety are not impaired.
Canada require motor vehicles to comply with Maintenance and repairs
emissions regulations and safety standards.
Your vehicle was designed to help keep mainte-
Therefore, vehicles that were produced for the
nance requirements to a minimum. Some regular
U.S. and Canadian markets are different from
maintenance is required to help ensure that your
vehicles produced for other countries.
vehicle runs in a safe, economical, and reliable
If you plan to use your vehicle outside of the manner. Please refer to your Warranty & Mainte-
United States or Canada, it is possible that: nance Booklet for more detailed information
— Fuel may have a significantly lower octane rat- about vehicle maintenance.
ing. Unsuitable fuels can cause engine damage. When operating the vehicle under more extreme
— Proper maintenance and repair work may not operating conditions, for example when outside
8W1012721BC
be possible because special service equipment, temperatures are very low or in very dusty envi-
tools, or measuring devices needed for your ve- ronments, certain maintenance should be per-
hicle may not be available. formed between the specified intervals.
281
Usually maintenance and repair work requires — Never perform any work in the engine com-
special tools, measuring devices, and other partment unless you know exactly how to
equipment that is available to trained vehicle carry out the job and have the correct tech-
technicians in order to help ensure that your vehi- nical information and the correct tools.
cle and all of its systems operate correctly, relia- — If you are uncertain about what to do, have
bly, and safely. Performing work on the vehicle the work performed by an authorized Audi
incorrectly can impair the operation and reliabili- dealer, an authorized Audi Service Facility,
ty of your vehicle and may void one or more of or another qualified workshop. Serious per-
your vehicle's warranties. sonal injury may result from improperly per-
formed work.
Technical Modifications
Interference with electronic components, their @) Note
software, the wiring, and data transfer may cause
— Maintenance work, repairs, or technical
malfunctions. Because of the way electronic com-
modifications to the vehicle (such as instal-
ponents are interconnected, such malfunctions
ling additional equipment) that is not per-
can also impair systems that are not directly in-
formed correctly can cause vehicle damage.
volved. This means that you risk both a substan-
— If emergency repairs must be performed,
tial reduction in the operational safety of your ve-
take your vehicle to an authorized Audi deal-
hicle and increased wear of vehicle components.
er or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon
Some convenience functions, such as the conven- as possible.
ience turn signal function, individual door open- — Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle
ing function, and displays, can be reprogrammed resulting from failure to comply with these
using special workshop equipment. If functions guidelines.
are reprogrammed, the information and descrip-
tions about these functions in this Owner's Man- @) For the sake of the environment
ual may no longer apply to the changed func-
— Regular maintenance can help protect the
tions. Audi recommends that an authorized Audi
environment.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility perform
— Technical modifications to the vehicle can
and verify any reprogramming procedures.
have a negative impact on fuel consumption
ZA\ WARNING and vehicle emissions.
Maintenance work, repairs, or technical modi- @) For the sake of the environment
fications to the vehicle (such as installing ad-
Certain components in your vehicle such as
ditional equipment) that is not performed
undeployed airbag modules, pretensioners
correctly can cause serious injuries and in-
and remote control batteries may contain Per-
crease the risk of an accident.
chlorate Material - special handling may ap-
ply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
Z\ WARNING perchlorate. When the vehicle or parts of the
The engine compartment in any motor vehicle restraint system including airbag modules
is a potentially dangerous area and can cause and safety belts with pretensioners are scrap-
serious personal injury. ped, all applicable laws and regulations must
— Always use extreme caution when doing any be observed. Your authorized Audi dealer is
work in the engine compartment. Always familiar with these requirements and we rec-
follow commonly accepted safety practices ommend that you have your dealer perform
and use common sense. Never risk personal this service for you.
injury.
282
netic waves can cause malfunctions in the ve-

@) Tips
hicle. Observe the regulations in the country
Because of your vehicle's aluminum body de- where the vehicle is being operated and the
sign, all service and repair procedures affect- instructions from the radio equipment manu-
ing the body should be performed by an au- facturer.
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv-
ice Facility, who will perform the work accord-
Reporting Safety Defects
ing to Audi factory specifications. Only Audi
Genuine Parts are used when Audi experts Applicable to U.S.A.
perform repair or service procedures. Failure
to use Audi Genuine Parts or Audi Genuine Ac- If you believe that your vehicle
cessories or performing repairs incorrectly
may result in severe vehicle damage, such as
has a defect which could cause a
corrosion. crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately in-
Accessories and parts
form the National Highway Traffic
Consult with an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility before purchasing ac-
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
cessories or replacement parts. Audi recom- addition to notifying
mends having your vehicle serviced by an author-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- Audi of America, Inc.
ty and using Audi Genuine Parts and Audi Genu-
2200 Ferdinand Porsche Drive
ine Accessories.
Herndon, VA 20171
Audi does not endorse the use of products and
accessories that it has not evaluated, even if the If NHTSA receives similar com-
product is approved by a certified testing agency
or government agency. plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
ZA WARNING
defect exists in a group of
— Installing unapproved accessories or incor-
rect replacement parts can cause vehicle vehicles, it may order a recall and
damage and can increase the risk of an acci- remedy campaign. However,
dent.
— On vehicles that have factory-installed li- NHTSA cannot become involved in
cense plate brackets on the front of the ve- individual problems between you,
hicle, the brackets may only be replaced
with ones that are the same size and made
your dealer, or Audi of America,
of the same material. Do not install any li- Inc.
cense plate brackets on the front of vehicles
that do not have factory-installed brackets. To contact NHTSA, you may call
Otherwise, the function of the system could
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-
be impaired.
free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-
@) Note 800-424-9153); go to http://
8W1012721BC
A correctly-installed exterior antenna is re-

www.safercar.gov;
quired for operating radio equipment in the
vehicle. Otherwise, the increased electromag-
283
or write to: Transport Canada

Administrator NHTSA Motor Vehicle Safety Investiga-
1200 New Jersey Ave., tions Laboratory
S.E. West Building 80 Noel Street
Washington, DC Gatineau, QC
20590. J8Z OA1
You can also obtain other infor- For additional road safety infor-
mation about motor vehicle safe- mation, please visit the Road
ty from http://www.safercar.gov. Safety website at:
English:
Applicable to Canada
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
If you live in Canada and you be- motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm
lieve that your vehicle has a de-
French:
fect that could cause a crash, in- http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/
jury or death, you should immedi- securiteautomobile/menu.htm
ately inform Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls. Declaration of
You should also notify Audi Cana- compliance for telecom-
munications equipment
da.
and electronic systems
Canadian customers who wish to Your vehicle may be equipped with various radio
report a safety-related defect to systems, depending on vehicle equipment. The
manufacturer is not liable for radio malfunctions
Transport Canada, Defect Investi-
that are caused by unauthorized changes to the
gations and Recalls, may either equipment.
call Transport Canada toll-free at: FCC Part 15.19
Tel.: 1-800-333-0510 or This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
Tel.: 1-819-994-3328 (Ottawa re- conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
gion and from other countries) interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
TTY for hearing impaired: may cause undesired operation.
1-888-675-6863 FCC Part 15.21
or contact Transport Canada by Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
mail at:
void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
284
RSS-Gen
@) Tips
This device contains licence-exempt transmit-
Additional information or supplements about
ter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation,
the radio systems based on the vehicle equip-
Science and Economic Development Canada’s li-
ment and country can be found on the follow-
cence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the
ing website: www.audi.com/generalinfo
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, in-

cluding interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
RSS 102
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radi-
ation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrol-
led environment. This equipment should be in-
stalled and operated with minimum distance of
20 cm (8 inches) between the radiator and your
body. This transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
Integrated Toll Module* - FCC (USA) and

ISED (Canada)
This device complies with FCC rules part 90 and
Innovation, Science, and Economic Development
Canada RSS-137. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference that may be re-
ceived including interference that may cause un-
desired operation. WARNING: The transmitter
has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED
rules. Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the de-
vice.
This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radi-

ation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrol-
led environment. End Users must follow the spe-
cific operating instructions for satisfying RF ex-
posure compliance. This transmitter must be at
least 20 cm (8 inches) from the user and must
not be cotocated or operating in conjunction
8W1012721BC
with any other antenna or transmitter.
285
Technical data
Technical data The sticker contains the following vehicle data:
Identification data @ Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

@ Vehicle type, engine output, transmission
Vehicle data label ® Engine and transmission codes
—S>SSESESES>S>S>E>E>>—s FA @ Paint and interior codes
WOOK X-XOK KKK) © Optional equipment numbers
(Hae osccn XX x XXKKKNKK
Fim = YXX XXX Vehicle identification number (VIN)
27] XX XXXXXXX XX. X.X XX The VIN is located in the following areas:
XXX KW x XX
(3)—-Wwoee / GER. 1B
ENG. CODE / TRANS. CODE XXXX XXX XXX — Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
@ i XK XKNK XK XX HICLE > Settings & Service > Vehicle informa-
tion.
EOA 7D5 4UB 6XM 5SG SRW — On the vehicle identification label
2EH JOZ 1LB 1AS 1BA
3FC SMU 7X1 — At the front behind the windshield*
FOA 9G3 0G7 OYH OJF
6) TL6 3KA 8EH U1A X9B QZ7 — Inthe motor compartment on the right side
1xXw 8Q3 9Q8 824 D2D
716 CV7 7KO 4X3 2K2
34 AKC 3Y0 413 5D2 Notes about technical data
1SA 7GB QIA 4GQ
The values may vary based on special equipment

et as well as market-specific equipment and meas-
uring methods.
Fig. 189 Vehicle identification label Please note that the specifications listed in the
vehicle documentation always take precedence.
The vehicle identification label > fig. 189 is locat-
ed in the luggage compartment under the cargo @ Tips
floor cover. Any technical data that is missing was not
available at the time of printing.
The vehicle identification label information can
also be found in the Warranty & Maintenance
booklet.
Vehicle data
Length (in (mm)) Width (in (mm)) Width across the Height at curb
mirrors (in (mm)) weight (in (mm))
A4 allroad 187.5 (4,762) 72.7 (1,847) 79.6 (2,022) 58.8 (1,493)
A4 Sedan 187.5 (4,762) 72.7 (1,847) 79.6 (2,022) 56.2 (1,428)
S4 Sedan 187.5 (4,762) 72.7 (1,847) 79.6 (2,022) 56.2 (1,428)
286
Technical data
Capacities
Fuel tank 15.3 gal (58 L)

Windshield and headlight washer system* 5.1 qt (4.8L)
A/C system refrigerant oil
The exact type and amount of refrigerant oil in
the A/C system is specified on the sticker on the
refrigerant compressor.
Refrigerant oil 100/110 g® +/-10g

@) The specifications depend on vehicle equipment.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The maximum permitted load on the front axle
@ or the rear axle @) is listed on the safety cer-
|
Le |
tificate on the side area of the door or on the

driver's door pillar.
Load
The maximum permitted load is listed on the tire
pressure label on the driver's door pillar.
Roof load
Applies to: sedan
Fig. 190 Safety certificate The maximum permitted roof load is 198 lbs
(90 kg).
B8U-0380
Applies to: allroad

Fig. 191 Safety certificate
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The maximum permitted total weight @ of the
vehicle is listed on the safety certificate on the
side area of the door or on the driver's door pillar.
8W1012721BC
287
Index
Numbers and
Symbols ASR
3-zone deluxe automatic climate control.... 91 refer to Anti-Slip Regulation............
Audi active lane assist...............005
A Cleaning the camera area..............
Audi adaptive cruise control
A/G.cooling MOde:. 6 « vice a 6 assis av arene «ow 91
Cleaning the sensors...............005
A/C system refrigerant oil............00. 287 Predictive control..............000005
Accelerator pedals ¢ wes 2 naan ox news s crew 99 Traffic jam assistwax < » sees ss eeee ss eens
also refer to Accelerator pedal........... 99 Audi adaptive light..............--..00-.
AGCOSSOMIES « sresis as isso 4 o ansnine ao atowen 8 He 283
Audi connect
Active lane assist TEfEFLO CONNEC: « = ewan ss news ss Hea Fs
refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 141 AUdidrive SeleCt ws s y oem s i ween ya eee 4
Adaptive cruise control................. 130 Audi music interface..............0000-
Adaptive dampers...............0.-005 111 Audio files........ 0.00.00 cece eee eee
Adjusting air distribution (automatic climate
control system) ................0 eee eee 92
Adjusting the brightness................. 55
Adjusting the sound..............-..00- 212
Adjusting the temperature (automatic climate
control system) ......... 0.0.00 cee eee eee 92
Adjusting the volume.............0
eee ee 29
Adjusting the volume (announcements).... 212 Safety measures... ......
eee eee e wees
Adjusting the welcome sound............ 212 Audi side assist
Airbag’system . « sss 5 sees se een se cee ee 71 refer to Side assist............-..000-5
Alarm system Audi smartphone interface..............
refer to Anti-theft alarm system.......... 36 Legal information...................5
Alignment pin (changing the wheel)....... 261 Audi virtual cockpit
All-weather lights...............-.000005 51 refer to Instrument cluster..............
AS@ASON tifeSmman: + » swe se meee s Hee Be 250 AUTO
All wheel drive Automatic climate control system........
refer toquatto sews s ween ss ween as wens 112 Automatic headlights ..................
Amazon Alexa integration Auto Lock (central locking) ...............
Media:playback:. jo sscee oo cise a enero oo 202 Automatic climate control system.........
Operating...............0..0..0.0000. 27 Automatic luggage compartment lid....
AMI Automatic transmission............-...05
refer to Audi music interface........... 202 Automatic wipe/wash system.............
Android Auto Average consumption...................
refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 210 Average speed... 0... ee eee eee eee
Anti-lock braking system............0005 113
Anti-Slip Regulation.................05. 113 B
Anti-theft alarm system...........-...04. 36
Bag hooks........
2.52.
Apple CarPlay
Band
refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 210
refer to Frequency band...............
288
Index
Battery Cell phone

Charging (12 Volt vehicle battery)....... 232 refer to Telephone............00
eee eee 162
Vehicle battery (12 Volt)............... 230 Cell phone compartment
Winter operation (12 Volt vehicle battery) . 231 refer to Audi phone box............... 164
BLOCK POU cei: «x were: oo ceamewe oo semen 2 o seems 187 Central locking...... cece eee cree eee 33
BLOWN: sess: ¢ = seene « x wanes g 2 meee 5 2 ee 4 ee 92 AULOILOGK « coos 2 5 seme 5 5 ete so wows Go eG 33
Bluetooth Convenience key sie © « socsais 2 6 srvoem + 6 voese 38
Audio playen snus « 2 sassws ae suesens ov srw 9 2 3 201 Convenience opening and closing......... 46
Connecting adevice..............0000- 214 Luggage compartment lid............... 4l
Connecting a mobile phone............ 162 Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 36
Deleting a device MessageS ......--.
0c cece eects 35
Device overvieW............00-.0
eee Remote control key........:0ee
eee ee eee 38
Disconnecting a device................ 214 SEUNG’: © wave: s 2 wecems ve arene @ aetna ¥ ewee 34
Displaying profiles..................0. 215 Vehicle key... 0... cece eee ee eee ee 38
Selecting adevice.............0..000. 214 Central locking switch..............0000. 35
Specifying a favorite.................. 215 Ceramic Drakesinis © «cassie © x seve ¥ @ suena # ane 104
Boost... 6... eee eeeeee 15 Certification): « . cee: ss wean ov enw os eee « 284
Boost pressure indicator................. 15 Charging
Brake fluid refer to Power sourceS..........-.000005 82
Checking the brake fluid level........... 229 Charging the battery
BrakeS.. 0... eee eee 104 Mobile devices..................00005 202
Brak@fluid(: = = sams = « eam = woven se pee as 229 USB': « meme 2 ¢ anus © naueu & x REINS & ¥ ORE & 165
Emergency braking function............ 106 Witelessis «secs x x woos 2 v cervaue a x stone 2 9 oon 165
0) 107 Child safety lock
New brake pads............. 00s e eee 104 Climate control system controls in the rear. 44
Braids « savay » © aaiwa & Raeoe ¢ & SanDR ES Se ES 216 POWEr WINDOWS! si: = © xsnas 4 § Seen & & Maram 4 es 44
Break-in security feature............00005 36 Rear dOOrsis + o omc sc sami oo me oases 44
Breaking in Child safety seats..............---.00005 76
New brake pads..............----000- 104 Securing to the top tether anchor........ 80
NeWetiresis « wcuin as maces a meme a 2 emma ee 242 Securing with a safety belt.............. 79
Browser Securing: with LATCH s « sw « & nome « ¢ sans « 78
refer to Media center...............00. 204 ClEATIAG saves 5 x nore 5 2 wows ot eee xe eee 255
Businessiaddressis i s, svessns sc scan a a veamiws a aa 187 Cleaning Alcantara.............-.00000. 258
Cleaning artificial leather............... 258
c Cleaning carbon components........ 257, 258

Cleaning controls..................005. 258
California Proposition 65 Warning........ 222
Cleaning decorative parts andtrim........ 257
Battery specific...............00-0 00 231
Cleaning exhaust tail pipes.............. 257
GALLUISE sacsse + ogsiese 0 9 axons 0 4 exexeus 4 2 anneew a 166
Cleaning plastic parts...........00
eee 257
Cameras
Coverage areaS............-.0. 000000. 118 Cleaning textiles = cass ¢ & exes ¢ cae se ees 258
LOGAUIONS a: « ¢ apes ¢ nates 3 paee 5 x PEER GE 119 Climate control system ............00000- 90
Capacities also refer to Automatic climate control sys-
Puelitankss sss so somes a sess @ o aves ¥ 0 ond 287 GNA. 2 execs © 2 ceeueve = ueueat © + steams © meme = © 90
Washer fluid reservoir................. 287 Climate control system controls in the rear
8W1012721BC
Garwashh x 5 sews « onsmeus © scagens os ayers «6 @ some 255 Child safety lock........... 0. cece eee 44
Gatalytic converter « sis 2 weve eo wee ee cree 220
289
Index
Closing Coolant temperature display.............. 14

Automatic luggage compartment lid...... 41 Cooling system
Convenience closing...........00.++00% 46 Adding coolant..............2--0000- 228
HOOP «a asaces <u anowies wn amas 6S mane & a omaKeLRE 222 Checking the coolant level............. 228
Luggage compartment lid............... 41 GOOlANE « sess oo soem oo memes © a ieenen @ DesemN 227
Luggage compartment lid with foot motion . 42 Cornering lighticcs : gees s see es Senge 2 wes 51
Panoramic glass'roOf ici «+ eaves ew wrens oo a 47 Cruise control system..............00-5 127
Sliding/tilting sunroof................-. 46
CUB ROIGETS secs 5 eas « Basen Gs Hates ee BEG 82
Sufishadé (OOF): « + eww = x sates ¢ oem ze se 47
Current consumption..............000005 16
Wind OwS:. « sess «save oo ance 2 0 weuew sw vee 45
Cockpit diMMING:: « & excuse
cers so eens ees 55
Cockpit (GVEMIEW)'s + saws 2 2 eam ae wows 2c ce 6 D
Collapsible spare tire.................0- 267 Data module
Collapsible tire Serial number (IMED) «swiss
eae as rene 170
refer to Collapsible spare tire........... 267 Data Plans = sees ss sees sine sarees bees 177
Color cOd@ <x ¢ = seem « x neem p eee oe eS ee 286 Data Privacy... .... cece cee ee eee eee 279
Compact spare tire. ...........
sce e eee 266 Date... eee eee 16
Compartments...........0.0
eee eee eee 83 SEUting:< = = seme ¢ = see Fe ewes Fe ee Ee we 212
Compass inthe mirror............-0

0-0 ee 61 Daytime running lights.................. 51
Compliance ..... 0.0... cee eee eee eee 284 Declaration of compliance............... 284
Conference call.........
eee eee eee eee 168 DEF (instrument cluster)..............005 12
Configuration wizard « « sce 26 wicca a wena o 19 Demo mode
CONNEC son 2 & ieee 2 wares o were oo sR we oe L73
refer to Presentation mode............. 191
Data plans... 0... eee eee eee ee 177 Destination onthe map...............0. 184
Data Privacy..............2..0..0200. 279 Details... 6.0... ieee
eee eee eee 184
Eme@ngericy'Calll ws a » aaa a & ons 2 9 rey 178 Determining correct load limit........... 249
Infotainment...............
2.0 e ee eee 173 Digital GOMpass)s: sevsia + 0 woicssue se anesene 6 coven ws 61
Infotainment services............00005 174 DIMENSIONS ie. © & sss 2 w mens © w seen we AMR 286
Online roadside assistance............. 179 Dimming the exterior mirrors............. 56
Vehicle control services................ 175 Dimming the rearview mirror............. 56
Connected devices DIRECtO
RY asus 5 2 wees 5s eee 5 3 ee Ey ERE 167
Device overvieW..........
00 eee eee eee 214 BUSIMESSICATG iam a wasn a 6 anesens « @ asanim www 168
Connections Settings..........
20.0.0 e eee eee eee 170
referto Media................--- 201, 203 Display
Consumer information.................- 281 Cleaning ....... 6... cece eee eee eee 258
Consumption Displaying tooltips..................00. 19
Re@dUCING secs << sees = = wows sp eee sp ee 102 Disposal. ... 2.0.0...
cee eee eee eee ee 281
Consumption (fuel) .................000. 16 DIStANGE cecriie is « coemmes ox mevece x somnwse ow omevere & 16
Contacts Distance’ Warning « sesisies + s acs w o enone & eeewens 140
IMPOFUNG ces s news 3 x woRG 5 5 aeEE Tae 170
Doors
Updating inthe MMI.................. 170
Child safety lock............. 00... eee 44
also refer to Directory...............-. 167
DOOr COMEACESWITCH): « s waas s 6 eae s jaan a 3 54
Convenience key...............00 000s eee 33 Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 36
Convenience closing...........-...+6.: 46
Driver information system................ L3
also refer to Vehicle key..............-. 37
Drives
Convenience opening and closing
Feferto Med ideas se exw ae eevee 6 owe 201, 203
Windows or panoramic glass roof........ 46
290
Drive select Emissions control system..............- 220
refer to Audi drive select.............0. 110 EnergyCOnsSUMErSi. & & sive a 2 wasn ao mare oes 16
Drive system... 1.2... cee ee eee 101 Energy management...............0005 102
AUdi drive Select sais s & news < ¢ says & 3 ve 110 Engine
Drive system (message) ........... eee eee 103 Breakingiin « sss c= cee = 2 aves ov ere a ee 101
Driving down hills............ 00.000 eee 107 Coolant..... 0.0... cece eee eee ee eee 227
DFIVIMGJPFOGFAMM:. « wnaceos % 0 spesine 6 & axonese on mune 137 EMe@ngenty StOpis « = ewes 5 2 sees ¢ 2 wees Fs me 95
Driving through water...............0.. 108 JUMp'StARtING & vesi% « 6 war % 6 senens & ewes 268
Driving CIM: « cescues & a ssanees vw ones vv orn a 8 a 16 Start/Stop system ......... 0. eee ee eee 102
Starting/Stopping:: « « seme os ews 5 wen s « 95
Driving tips
Driving through water...............-- 108 Engine compartment
Efficient driving...............-00000- 102 Opening and closing the hood.......... 222
Offroad GriWitG cows sc caws se pean es ewan 108 OVERVIEW cscssiic xo ciueins xo anette 6H atetaaie © ooetts 223
Uphill and downhill................00. 107 Safety precautions..................0. 221
Driving:up Wills: « ssc s 2 wave 6 o sree wv sew 107 Engine oil
AGQING = ex ¢ = seem « = ress « ¢ ee § pe 224
Dust filter
GhANGING sis «sess ss rena « waver 2» omen © 226
refer to Pollutant filter................. 90
Checking oil level.............00-.000- 224
DYMAMMIGIStEORIAG, cxsieos ov secre © « soneers © ¥ soaser Lill
CONSUMPtIONs « 2 was s 2 ene x eee 5 oe 224
Indicator light « sss + «owes sw ssweenn ow vase 224
E Replacement interval................. 233
EFimailss os i: cwcsan oa ncewios ow sesnin @ ononans wa wretnon 4 T/1, Temperature display............0.e00e 15
Settings.............
0.00. e eee eee ee 171 Engine sound
EDL Audi driveselect’s osx. < + sx » x come © ee 110
refer to Electronic Differential Lock...... 113 Engine Start/Stop mode
EDR refer to Start/Stop system............. 102
refer to Event Data Recorder (EDR)...... 277 Engine startsystem sce 3 5 seu o 9 was o 9 som 96
Efficiency ASSISE: s wes » x ows & a ews 8 6 ow 128 Engine stop
Predictive :comtrolin: « cxvim x 0 sensawe oo swowane 133 refer to Start/Stop system............. 102
Electrical system ........
2... cee eee eee 230 Entry/exit. IQhtingie: + scsi as essen & © wonvme a v6 53
Electromechanical parking brake......... 106 Entryiassistanee:: 2 coca 2s acim os eee 2 o were 65
Electronic Differential Lock.............. 113 also refer to Exit assistance............. 65
Electronic immobilizer................5-. 38 Environment
Electronic Stabilization Control........... 113 Unleaded gasoline.................00. 217
Embedded SIM card............--.00005 174 ESC
Emergency assistance...............00. 261 refer to Electronic Stabilization Control... 113
Emergency braking function............. 106 ESC Offroad... 2.1...

eee eee ee 114
Emergency call... «ccc.

2 mwa ve ewe 169,178 ESC Sport........... 000.000.0000 0000- 114
Emergency flashers..............--0000- 53 eSIM

refer to Embedded SIM card............ 174
Emergency modéw<s += acs 7s eevee
enue 100
Event Data Recorder (EDR).............. 277
Emergency operation
DOONS eves ov comme a a same ao omnes vv om x Exit assistance .... 0.2... 0.00...
e eee eee 65
Fuel filler door Exit warning ...... 0.66...
e ee ee eee eee 148
Luggage compartment lid............... 43 Exteriomantenna «cise oo srerw wane © aecete 165
8W1012721BC
Panoramic glass roof................005 47 Exterior Lighting’: = = sce «= seus © x cere = 4 seus 51

Sliding/tilting sunroof...............00. 46
291
Index
ExteriOmmirrorssecs os asco w 6 aeons vo ween 9 we 55 Fueling

Folding settings.............
eee eee eee 34 Fuel filler door. .......
0... cece eee eee 218
External voice operation................. 27 Fuel filler door emergency release....... 220
Functions on demand...............4.. 175
F Functions that require a license.......... 75S
also refer to Functions on demand....... 175
Factory default settings
Fuses
Multi Media Interface................. 213
ASSIQNMENKS « & senses o 8 mnmors & & mamens @ & inerer 273
Fast route............ 0.0.0.0. . cee eee 182
Replacing......... 0. cece eee eee eee 272
Favorites... 0.2.0.0... cee eee eee eee 21
BIW@tOOth): < seca ss ceca s i yews se ees 2s 215
NaViGatiOnices ss sescsus so aves + ware eo nena 183 G
Telephone ..........0 00 cece eee eee 167 Garage door opener...........0..000
eee 48
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) . 284 Garment hooks ...... 2... 0c e eee eee eee 83
File formats (media drives).............. 207 GaSOUME sscwee a 2 evarnes a a omawwes vx amos ow vase 2 217
Filling Additives... 0.0.0... eee e cece eee eee 218
Tank capacities..........
eee eee eee 287 GasOliNe MIXtURE cnn « : seam ct same & 2 Hew 217
For the sake of the environment GAWR
Disposing of engine oil................ 226 refer to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . 287
FOGUING's « « supe ¢ ¢ cause 5s same 7 2 eee a eae 218 GOSTSics + nayss = = pees = yeu se eeUR GE ROUSE 97
LOAKS ice ie x erences = 6 caenene a 6 aueuioe we axons 6 eae 222 Glossary of tire and loading terminology... 238
Forward gear Glove compartment.............--000-05 83
refer to Gears... . eee eeeeee 97 Valet parking: « < ews + ¢ sees se news oe ees 48
Free text search Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)........ 287
Media... .... eee ee eee eee 206 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)...... 287
RadiO sys = ¢ seove + © sees ¢ crews ge pew Es 195 GVWR
also refer to Intelligent search.......... 182 refer to Gross Vehicle Weight
Freeze protection Rating (GVWR) .............0000.0005 287
Coolant... ... 2... eee eee eee 227
Windshield washer system............. 233
Frequency band..........-....--.000-5 193
H
also refer to Frequency band........... 193 Handstreess «sss x i souness 6 0 annwine «a auaware x 163
Front center armrest..............02
0005 66 Hands Free: Profiles «3 inisa ao inesow a vow & 163
Front passenger’s seat adjustment Head-up display
REAR « ieiam co nasi 3 onan + wR Ts HeEEE Be RO 65 Adjusting. ........... 0c cee eee eee eee 25
Adjusting the brightness................ 55
Front wiper blades
Operatings « : vem « x ewe 5 ¢ eee g 7 eee oe 25
Changing.......... 00. c eee ee eee eee 59
Cleaning... .. cece eee 59 Headlight range control................0. §1
Fuel... 2. eee eee eee 217 H@AdLIQtS: ¢ = xcs ¢ < eees x = Resa cB eS ea 51
AGGItIVES: = ess = ven e = sees os owen ee xe 218 Gleanings « 2 svc so wes 2 wea ee res ees 256
CUFrFeENE CONSUMPTION ¢ & sesso 6 3 ese ao eee 16 Headlight range control................ 51
Fueldisplay....... 2... cece eee eee eee 12 Washer system.........--00 eee eee eee 58
GaSOliNGs « sees ss ween oe eee ce een es es 217 Washer system (filling washer fluid) ..... 233
Reducing fuel consumption............ 102 Head restraints < seus « s ems s + sates =v egops se 67
Tank capacity...........0 ee eee eee eee 287 Heated rear window...........0
eee eee 93
Heated steering wheel..............000.. 93
Heating...........0..
00.0. cee 90
292
HFP Interior lighting « . esccms ve ewe ve mes vw 54,55
refer to Hands Free Profile............. 162 Interior MONitOriNg’s + 2 wesw ce wows s ween a ae 36
High beams Intermittent mode (windshield wipers) ..... 58
High beam assistant.................4. 52 International’ travel... seessieivaseveuea Li?
Highway lights .......
0... cece eee eee ee ee 51 Internet
Hill descent assist..............02-000. 108 veferto:connects =» ssw ss wees eo wes 2 oe 173
Hill descent control............0
eee eee 107 Internet radio
Hill hold assist... 0.0.2...
ee ee eee eee 97 refer to Online radio.............. 197,198
Home iPhone
refer to Home address...........-000% 187 refer to Audi music interface........... 202
Home address ....... 0.00.0. c eee eee ee 187
HomeLink
refer to Garage door opener............. 48
J
Jump starting......................00. 268
Home screen... ... 2. eee e eee eee eee eee 18
HOM... eee eee 6
Hotspot
K
refer to Wi-Fi...........0.
2.0 e eee eee 176 ROY". ccanees i a: sonra i ot samme +o anames o 9 ames @ 33,37
Convenience opening and closing......... 46
Key replacement.........c:eecceeeeees 37
I Mechanical key...........0...000 02000 37
Idle PANIC button ....... 2.20... 00 cece eee eee 38
fefer to Gears ewes ¢ s ewes ce seen cs wees 8: 97 Replacing the battery.................. 39
Ignition Unlocking and locking.............e eee 38
Switching onvand Off". wes x y says « ¢ caver « 9 95 Vehicle code... 6.2.2... eee eee eee eee 37
Imbalance (wheels) ............0000000s 244 Key user... 2... ee eee ee eee 31
Immobilizer RICK EOWING. « ccenerts «a: eames 0 a ayngen eo acne 9 me 99
refer to Electronic immobilizer........... 37
Indicatorlights » neow ¢ a wes ¢ ewer ws wares ao ee 7
L
INSpPectionintetWals ¢ ssw < gapen g x paves se ne 233
Lane assist
INStroMment ClUStErs = wasn s x wom » x eowe sy ew 12
refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 141
Adjusting the layout................00. 13:
Lane departure warning
Cleaning........ 0... eee eee eee eee 258
refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 141
ENGin@: code: « = sas ¢ seas ¢ eee ae Heese 215
Laptimer........... 0.000000. 0.0 2000. 124
Failures: «osc 2s mene oe pews se ee ¥ ee 12
On-board computer............00200 eee 16
Evaluating s « saws « & cae & & eee so ees os 125
StANEIINGsis 6 & conse w o owen 7 cummins & 7 aE & > 124
Operating...............2.. 0.02.0 000 13
Service interval display................ 233 LATCH (securing child safety seats)......... 78
Software information................. 215 Leather care and cleaning............... 258
Switching tabs..................200005 13 Legal information
Switching the view............ 00ers 13 License subscriptions................. 215
Vehicle functions................00000- 16 Software information................. 215
Version information...............0-5 215 Software licenseSicx « s wews ss wee s genes 215
Instruments Version information...............000- 21S
Adjusting illumination.................. 55 License plate: brackets + scies 6 seen 3 6 ser 283
Lifting points (vehicle jack).............. 264
8W1012721BC
Integrated Toll Module................. 125

Intelligent search
Navigation’: « s sxe 5 ¢ caw + + seein s o tees = 182
293
Index
Light/rain sensor MAP

Automatic headlights...............00. 51 refer to Message Access Profile......... 170
Intermittent mode (windshield wipers).... 58 Map preview............0..0 0000000008 184
CIGHEING': « = sex & = eees & 3 Raw & HeieE 2 F eee 51 Map update................02..000
00 189
EXteriOr’s + cess 2 vem av cen a 2 ee a 2 es 51 myAudi app... .. eee c cece eee ee eee 189
TCORIOR ccioe + 0 soniane » : semcace wo wsesure aw ececeat as 54 ONUNG:: s sexe + 2 wees 2 Ree es Sea Gof Here 189
Listening to music USBiGONMECEION sxicase s % suncane « © sxenass « © sons 190
referto Media................-4- 201, 203 Massage function
Load... . i.e eee ee 287 Front... cece eee
eee ees 65
E@GAULUSERS ti « sietas oo exansie a « ainsi o x avesiee 8 8 30 Mechanical key........
0.0.0 e eee eee eee 37
Locking and unlocking Media « sisi s ccinene vo anvensa we ot aweseni a aie 201, 203
By remote control..............-.000-- 38 Supported formats.................-- 207
Using the lock cylinder................. 36 Media center.................00000
eee 204
With the convenience key............... 38 Memory function. .........
0.0 eee eee eee 71
Low beam headlights.................00. 51 Menu language
LTE refer to Setting the language........... 212
refer to Exterior antenna.............. 165 Menu paths......... 0.0.0... eee eee eee ee 18
Luggage compartment.................. 83 Message Access Profile................. 170
Cover (power)... ... ce eee eee eee eee 85 MesSagesins « « sows so cavewse 9 a exmnsue wv oss ¥ 6 170
Increasing the size................. 85, 86
Mitrorcompassy oe sic 3 2 miss oo mar 2 8 aw 61
Passethroughiis « essen s sons a o cos @ sens 6 86
Mirrors
Power SOUrCES .... 1 ee eee eee eee 82
Adjusting exterior mirrors............... 55
TIG-COWNS sss = ses & z gars se peen st wen ee 87
Dimming... 06... cee e eee eee eee 56
Valet parking’: « cca es weve ae seme se corre 48
Vanity mitror's « wax » ¢ anes 2 y tows © s ewe 57
also refer to Luggage compartment...... 83
MMI Navigation plus
Luggage compartment lid................ 44
refer to Multi Media Interface........... 19
Closing button... ..... 0. cee eee eee eee 4l
MMI radio
General information.................05 40
refer to Multi Media Interface........... 19
Mechanically unlocking..............45. 43
MMI Radio plus
Opening and closing................... 41
Opening and closing with foot motion..... 42 refer to Multi Media Interface........... 19
Opening from the inside in an emergency... 44 Mobile device
Power opening and closing.............. 41 refer to Telephone.............00e000 162
Luggage compartment net............... 87 Mobile device reminder signal............ 166
Lumbar support...........2.-.000
eee eee 64 Mountain passes...................00. 107
Mountain roads................0000
eee 107
Multifunction steering wheel
M Buttons... 0... 02... cee eee eee 13,29
Maintenance’. » seica i sce ov aveasc vo acanans os 281 Operating: « s ws « x eeu sy eee so ewe se 13
Maintenance intervals................-5 233: Programming buttons...............05- 29
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)........ 220 Voice recognition system.............-. 26
Manual SHIMING:: « « cows a « cows a x cow a 2 Hew 99 Multi Media Interface................... 19
Map Menus and symbols...............--04- 20
Changing the scale........... 000. seen 184 Operating’: « owes 2 wae o 6 wore oo were 17,20
Display.... 2.0... ee eee eee eee 186 Switching on or off..............02.00. 19
Operating: « asx s x news ¢ o Rew 2 b eRe Fe 185 MWC Gpceie 3 5 coveine 6 & cxemens «4 carves ww sagan © & ome 29
Setting the destination................ 184 MYAUG Es. : aseuore & csesain o cauees oe wrens woo 30,174
294
Index
myAudi navigation................. 181, 184 Luggage compartment lid with foot motion . 42
MYAUI USERS asscver s 6 ease ae enue 2 eee oY oes 30 Panoramic glass roof............00
eee ee 47
Sliding/tilting sunroof..............0005 46
Sunshade (roof) « « wcscine ow cence mv owarne wa ow 47
N Windows ...... 0... e cece eee eee eee eee 45
Natural leather care and cleaning......... 258
Opening and closing
NaVIGAEION ccs < = cece vo eres se Hees ee oe 181 refer to Unlocking and locking........ 33,38
Betterrouteiis «i ccs + 2 anzens 0 cnwisme «6 cans 190
Operating
Calling... 2... eee eee
eee eee 184 Head-tip displayins « x aims s aaes = news ex xe 25
Changing the scale............0.
ee eee 184
Tnstrumenticluster sissies i asians a o asneaine ow soi 13
alsorrefer'to. Map « sss «= ews + 2 cies owes 185 Multifunction steering wheel............ 13
Navigation database Multi Media Interface............... 17,20
Version information.............00005 215 TeXtINPUBss 2 2 cones ws wramrs x x seen oa ewe a ee 23
Navigation (instrument cluster).......... 187 Touch display..........
0... c eee eee eee 17
NHTSA es cases x x wana 4 x mmios oe wimaioe we omc 283 Voice recognition system............... 26
Notification center sci ¢ o ssesce so sae os ese 22 Optional equipment number............. 286
Options
Oo Médias: = » saes ¢ = eae 9 e ames 5 © ews 3 ee 207
RaGiOiics so awinia 6 7 seanine 6 aa 6 cimRE Yo 8 198
Octane rating (gasoline)................ 217
Overview (Cockpit). cs sina ov arenas v6 aries a 6 ose 6
QOGOMELET way « ¢ wows & 2 wes 4 bee ee ee 1S
ReSettingien & : acum sv anm © o wties & a samen a 15
P
Office address
refer to Business address.............. 187 PaintiCOdGis ¢ wees sv ween oe mews ae ees oa 286
Offroad Paint damageé:s:. = ¢ sees ss eees y = ewes se eee 257
refer to Offroad driving................ 108 PANIG BUttOMTs « » snus = 2 ame seme oY 37, 38
Offroad driving.......... 20sec eee eee 108 PANIC function ..............0
0c eee eens 37
FEC DUGEOM) wiccons = 2 exeses we stein «6 ansonoe 9 w noe 91, Panoramic glass roof................-04. 47
Oil Convenience opening and closing......... 46
refertoEngineoil.................... 224 Emergency closing: . iwc. scenes cowed ee 47
On-board computer.............00
0-0 eee 16 Quick opening...............
eee eee eee 47
On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)... 220,277 Park assist. ........
0... ccc e eee eee eee 159
Online map Parking. .... 0... cece cece eee eee 96
refer to Satellite map................. 188 Parking aideecs os csvsens vo somes ve ssecers oa mse 150
Online radio...................0.00005 197 Adjusting the volume................. 151
also refer to Online radio.......... 197,198 Automatic activation................4. 150
Online roadside assistance.............. 179 Cleaning the sensors/camera........... 256
Online services Park assist... 20... eee eee eee eee 159
fefer tO CONNEC’: « ees ¢ ¢ eyes ce ew se He 173 Parking aid plus: : sss ss sees se ewes 5 es 150
Online system update.............00005 213 Parking space search................05. 157
Peripheral cameras...........--.000-5 152
Online traffic information............... 190
REAlVIEW CAMELa eins «i oes bs aes 5 a oe 152
Opening. ....... 6. eee eee cece 33
Parking and maneuvering.............-- 150
Automatic luggage compartment lid...... 41
Convenience opening...........-...005- 46 Parking brake
Fuel filler door...........00 eee cece eee 218 refer to Electromechanical parking brake. 106
8W1012721BC
HOGG 's scvse © s mame 2 ¢ eR & 2 ERE § ee Ge 222 Parking lightSic<s « sees ¢ anaes + eres & ¥ Hees 51
Luggage compartment lid............... Al
295
Index
Parking lock
Manually releasing.............00000- 100
Q
quattro... 2... eee 112
also refer to Gears... 6... eee e eee eee 97
Selective wheel torque control.......... 113
Partition W@t sca < ssces v enees s aren ase 86, 87
Pass-through... .... cc eee cence eens 86
Pedals... 2... cece eee eee
eee 99 R
Perchlorate .......
0. eee eee ee eee 281 RSGiG}: = : suse » 5 mews ¢ 2 Swe 2 a eee x eee 193
Peripheral cameras............0.000085 152 RadiOteXtiscn casi a i ance @ a anemia oo anew 196
Phone Station list... 2.0.0... ee eee 193
Connecting a second mobile device...... 163 Radio communications equipment........ 283
Disconnecting a mobile device.......... 164 Radio‘equipment ....... eeen ee een ee eee 283
SONGS ccsain » iam © © wravens a % aosmem w v soveTs 6 169 Radio Standards Specification (RSS) ....... 284
Phonebook Rain/light sensor
refer to Directory..........
0. e ee eae 167 Automatic headlights.................. 51
PIN Intermittent mode (windshield wipers).... 58
A-digit myAudi PIN.................00. 30 Random
PROLECHON sev: « ¢ cee x o cares § e oem oe ee 31 refer to Shuffle: . s sses s+ ovens peewee: 205
Playback (media). . sss. ss sees ie cease ee 203 Range (fuel level) .................00000. 16
Podcast Reading lights..............
2.000 eee eee 54
refer to Online radio.............. 197,198 Rear cross-traffic assist.............0005 156
POLISHINGisax « ¢ eee + & eee Eee a Ree a ee 257 Rear lid
Pollen filter refer to Luggage compartment lid........ 41
refer to Pollutant filter................. 90 Rear seatS.. 1... . cee eee
eee 85, 86
Pollutant filter’: . aces ss seee s bees ween as 90 Rear shelf
POWEP SOUPCES:: « = seme: =v seme ee meee e 82, 202 refer to Storage area behind the rear head
Power WiINdOWS ......... 0 eee e eee eens 45 FEStrAINES wssve 2 o wawere oo esi ¥ 6 Rae @ 8 eens 83
Malfunction ns san 2 wean es ween a 2 wees = 45 Rearview camera... 12.1...
ee eee eee eenes 152
Power windows malfunction.............. 45 Rear window defogger...............000 93
Predictive control.............-.00e000- 133 Rear wiper blades
Predictive messages..............--005- 129 Changing sec = wee ws were ov nee oo ae 8 60
pre sense Cleaning..... 2... . 6. cece eee 60
refer to Audi presense................ 143 Recirculation mode..............--00005 92
Presentation mode..............-+-008 192 RECUPERATION cesses vu suceae « & cameson ww eames ow Re 16
Presets Refrigerant Oilivics = 5 wean eo wenn eo wwe 2 a0 287
RadiGicres s ¢ eves 5 2 neues x 5 Haus oe ROWS FB: 196 Refueling’: ss sees 2 = saws 7 5 tees Fe ewe ro: 218
Presets list Remote access authorization (key user)..... 31
Feferto Presetsicis <2 sais <a mace v were ve 196 Remote control
Pressure Garage door opener..............2+-00. 48
Tire pressure monitoring system........ 253 Remote control key.............---.e eee 37
Tif@S': + : asvox ¢ & eaime & & eG 3 5 HORS 7 ES 245 Convenience opening and closing......... 46
Profile picture... . eee eee eee ee eee 30 Key replacement...............--000-- 37
Protecting ..... 0... 0c cece cece eee 257 LED = suse 3 = wens = » owime oy ceeme se Rees ee 39
Pyrotechnic elements..............000 281 PANICTUMECIONS: « cscsses cs wrencce so ansnesa 3 8 arene 37
Replacing the battery.................. 39
Unlocking and locking...............005 38
also refer to Vehicle key..............-. 37
296
Removing the caps (wheel bolts)......... 264 Resetting the position.................. 65
ROP alts sass 2 2 mais o eaten w & wee we ONC oe 281 Storing a seat profile...............000. 71
Replacement key........
cece eee eeee eens 37 Seat ventilation....................000. 92
Replacement parts’ « exw « « ques yo eawes x oe 283 Securing the vehicle...............0.-00. 96
Replacing bulbs a. = ssws st eee ee ewes ees 276 Selecting a source (media).............. 203
Reporting Safety Defects................ 283 Selector lever. « o svvne 2 x wos 2 x ames w a anes & 97
Reverse gear Selector lever position
WEfEF LO GESTS savas sy euaw co wees co wee a 97 WEPFEPTOLGCATS « sere ao ammraye «a sma omens © 97
Reversible cargo floor..............0000e 88 Sensors
RIMS 2... eee ee 250 Coverage areaS... eee
eee eee 118
Cleaning = « sss + © seovs 3 & sees to ews ee oe 257 LOGatiOnS =< < sacs ¢ + seem & s wows ey eee 2 119
ROUING’s = wanes « ween os woe eo Ree ee BeeE Ye 96 Service interval display................. 233
Rolling ability SET REAR (button).............00000000e 92
Electromechanical parking brake........ 106 Setting measurement units.............. 212
Transmission idley. . 5 sso + saene oo siecaun oa an 98 SettingS ..... 0... eee eee eee eee eee 212
Roof Announcements and tones............. 212
refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 47 BlUGtOOthis « 2 sss + wese s + wow x 5 Hern gee 213
Roof load. ...........2..
020222 e eee eee 287 Daterand time < s ecine « 2 ovens w 5 xneee 3 3 212
ROO FAG cece sxcuens ao manor a w amante « oxewemnce «ate 88 Language
also refer to Roof rack..........-...0-4. 88 Measurement units.................-. 212
Media... .. eee eee eee eee 207
Route guidance
Navigation...........0..0..0.002 eee 191
StOPPING swe = ones ¢ ¥ Hee se carey o 2 SOS 185
RadiGiecy: x » swe sv mee 4 e cow & yee £ ee 199
also refer to Navigation............... 181
SOUMG rsx « & ssexine 6 1 aveveus wo ecicens o eneN Bo 212
Running direction (tires)..............-. 266
SysteM . 2... ee eee 212
TiMe/ZONCcas « x mewe 7 2 aoe ¢ Hom ae BERR 212
S WiItFi OtSPOt eneves oo coevene oe cress wo creer vo 176
Safety beltSies x » saws x 2 uae ¢ ¢ mew 2» REwH 6 2 68 Setting the language................... 212
Cleaning.......... 0. ec eee eee eee 258 Setting the time's « « saws ve ees ve cee vo 212
LOCKING... 6.6.6 c cece eee eee 79 Shift paddles-sies < y esas ¢ weeew y ween ss ewe 99
Securing child safety seats.............. 79 SHGprs « s seams © o EtOH 7c REGS FOE ROR EE ese = 175
Satellite Map seve ss wees 2 o ees 7 e owe es 188 Shuffle... 2... eee
eee eee 205
Saving fuel Side assist... 0.6...eee eee eee ee 147
Energy CONSUMEeMSisscs so sxe v waar a 9 were 16 Cleaning the sensors...............-.. 256
Recuperation........ 00. c eee eee eee ee 16
SIMiGard's sasan 3 4 case ¢ s BGG Te Rew FB eR 174
Screen
Sliding/tilting sunroof...............005- 46
refer to Touch display...............-.. 17 Emergency closing...........--+eeeeeee 46
Screwdriver ........
0.00. cece eee eee 261 SUMSH AGES swims wa ssanave ox somcene @ x aeauawe ww sean 46
Search function also refer to Panoramic glass roof........ 47
refer to Free text search............... 206 Smart Favorites
Seat heating.............
ee eee eee eee 92 pefer to Presets ex « « ewan se een ce eee ee 196
Seats Smartphone
ACJUStING as: « 2 ems « 2 weaw § § see FE wR Fe 64 refer to Telephone...........-seeee0e: 162
Cleaning « « cia se even eo one oo ae oo os 258 STOW CHAINS): « 2 qs a 2 ews a @ eee a x ReE x 251
8W1012721BC
Folding the rearseats............... 85, 86

Socket
Head feStraints): « sass ¢ « maven ss sane ¢ ¢ ners 67 refer to Power sourceS..........--.20-05 82
Memory function « ses + 2 vei se eens see 71
297
Index
Software information SUSPENSION « cxcisws is « somuses © v snvvaus + v soteees & oH LLL

Legalinformation................0005 215 Audi drive select..............0000008 110
Software version (MMI) Swapping calls.............-.000
22-0 168
Version information.................. 215 Swerve assist... 2.0... cece
eee eee 145
Sound Symbols
refer to Adjusting the sound............ 212 Navigation .......... 0... e cece eee eee 185
Space-saving spare tire (compact spare tire) . 266 "TRATHIC cure: « = seme x ¢ sees ¥ 2 ree ¢ Eee a 190
SPaKEUEGS s 5 mane x 5 Rates EES Gs Hate Gs HE 266 also refer to Indicator lights.............. 7
Speed limit information SYNG (BUTDON) bax ss see oo msc ow ocemue w wane 92
refer to Traffic sign recognition......... 121 SYStEM SELCINGS + zens «= geome & x seme ee eee 212
Speed limits
T
refer to Traffic sign recognition......... 121
SPeCdOMEtEl’s sess 5 & sess s ¥ ceews « ¥ eee vee 12
TaChOMi@teP eccs = s eae 2 = ween x 2 ess ae 12,14
Speed warning system..........-..0-0-5 121
Tail lights
Sport'differéntial see: < = sea ss sees se pens 112
Cleanings: « = sxe 2 & semis 2 wea <2 wre ee 256
Start/Stop system. ...........0 2-00 eee 102
Techinical'data: « s sss « = news = 2 saree 2 ¢ oe 286
Switching off ANGION « « saves 6 «ewe
oe Barer 103
Technical modifications................. 281
Starting to- drives: < s sees = « sews + ¢ ews + ¢ oes 96
Tel@phone:.« < a ccsg + hues as Seen ss HEeRs 5 162
Starting (CNGINe)'. sy ewes sc agus + ewer Fes 103
Accepting/ending acall................ 168
Steering.......... 0.0... cee eee eee eee 111 Audi phone box............00 0c eee ee 164
Audi drive select s sas < 2 cawa ys gown 3 a ae 110 Charging the battery (USB)............. 165
also refer to Steering..............-.. 111 Charging the battery (wireless) ......... 165
Steering locki.s © sss ev eee eo esses x v anevere 2 ¥ 95 Connecting a mobile phone............ 162
Steering wheel Dialing anumber................00065 168
Adjusting... . 22.00... cece e eee e eee 66 Exterior antenna s. « ¢ sss. ¢ sews tc caw 165
Adjusting manually..............-.0005 66 Mobile device reminder signal.......... 166
Shiftipaddles » sccwose eo smn ov enews oo sreaw «3 99 Options during aphonecall............ 168
Steering wheel heating................. 93 PlayitiG:(MUSie « seers + x was 4 © seme = & eerew 201
also refer to Multifunction steering wheel. . 13 Temperature display (outside temperature).. 15
Steps for determining correct load limit... 249 Temperature gauge
Stopover (navigation) .................. 185 GOOlANE « seuss ¢ 2 wenn ov mew 4 & QewE a CED 12
SEOPPING eer « 6: wsszeice « exconene w 6 eaonene « 6 ecto» & arene 96 TeXUINDUE « saws 5 = eames 5 © eae & & ewe ¥ HERE 23
Stopping the vehicle..........6c0.
ee ewes 96 TeXUHESSAGES cauve s + seme 5: SeeE xo wee 170
SCOPpING (ENGINE) ccs s 6 swe vo swe a 6 wives 103 SOCCINGS sisson 5 & somes oy moRM & + aseRHEE & ematENG 170
StOMaGelss ¢ « aay ov pawn ¢ & mews ov Hews 6 oe 83 also refer to Text messages............ 170
Storage area behind the rear head restraints. 83 TieSAOWINS: 2 2 crmscne 2 renee 2 us enews © sacs = 87
Storage areas « = sews 5 x wees 6 2 pes be eG 83 Tightening specification
Stored stations Wheel bolts.............0
0. c eee eee 266
refer'to Presetsias ss meas ss cen sv emo ve 196 Tightening specification (wheel bolts) ..... 266
Straps: « ses ¢ x neers oo eeoRS ae ee Te ee 83 THM. «scones oo aenane ao aera © amen © terete © 16
Sunshade tiptronic
Rear doorsis « 3 wien oo sue oa weswen os amen 2 0 57 refer to Manual shifting................ 99
ROOF... eeeeens 47 Tire Mobility System (tire repair set)....... 261
also refer to Sunshade................. 47 TIRCS © secason i 2 vnswene 6 = vouaens 6H cusaas © # amevaee vo 9 235
SUN VISOFS 2.6... eee eee 57 Changing.......... 0... eee eee ee eee ee 263
LOW=Profiletires:: seis ss newe « x gome ¥ x ae 251
298
Repaltiseti. «. ico + 0 mass ov caw ¥ viemees ae os 261 With the central locking switch.......... 35
Service life... . ee eee eee eee 244 With the convenience key............... 38
TIVE PreSStiriws s < sews s ¢ eege & e ees ¥ Bo 245 Update (software) ..............2--000. 213
Tire pressure monitoring system.... 252, 253 USB
Tire pressure table.................00. 247 Adapter... 0.2... ce eee eee eee eee eee 165
Tire pressure (trailer mode)............ 115 USB charging port..............00000005 82
Treadwear indicators... 0000s sonia a een 244 USB drive
Unidirectional................... 237, 266
Supported types/formats.............. 207
Uniform tire quality grading............ 251.
USB stick
Tires and wheels
refer to Audi music interface........... 202
Glossary of tire and loading terminology .. 238
Users
Tires and vehicle load limits............ 248
LOCAL USERS sisi so eaume 6 o even © & swans #8 sere 30
Toll Module
myAudi users... 2.22...
eee eee eee 30
refer to Integrated Toll Module......... 125
Using residual heat..............00.
0000 93
ToolS. 1... eee eee eee 261
Top tether anchor (securing the child safety
S@at) 6. eee eee 80 V
Touch display Waletiparking siciss < «cosas no nests x 6 oneness « a ai 48
Adjusting the brightness................ 19 Vanity Mitotic o 3 wis 6 wanen 0 + acme & 6 coven 57
Operating « « ses 2 6 mes 2 o waws s wawe we ¥ vrs 17 Vehicle
TOWING: + « sams 2 & eee 2 & emis 2 o pewE 2 & Bee 269 Care/cleaning............
cece eee eee ee 255
TOWING OOD. seavers «x omens ¢ x ees Fo ER a 2 oe 271 Dimensions .............000-.00
ee eee 286
Towing protection monitoring............. 36 Identification data...............0 000s 286
TPMS OUP ORSCNVICE coctine x 2 mses oo onesie wo aetne «6 260
Raising... 6... eee eee eee eee 264
Tire pressure monitoring system........ 253
StartiniG ce: « + aces « = wens 5 2 eee & o eee eo 95
Traffic incidents
Unlocking and locking...............05. 38
refer to Online traffic information....... 190
Vehiclescaresisns oo sca ee acer oo owen +o ons 255
Traffic information « secsia 2 2 wioww s owen ws acre 191,
Online traffic information.............. 190
Vehicle control services.............00.. 175
Tiraffic famiassist 5 novos» sorte wo exes « + swore 138 Vehicletdata labe@leys : « sw 2 «ewe 2 eames 2 2 2 286
Traffic light information................ 123 Vehicle identification number............ 286
Traffic sign recognition................. L21

Vehicle jack... 22... ee eee eee ee eee 261
LITLINIG POINES: « o cews ¢ « www oo ews eo eee 264
Traffic SIGNS ie: = ¢ sews + y saws 3 e ewes § ea 124
Vehicle keys: « « see ys sees 4s sews se ews 33; 37
Trailer towing sc < = eee ¢ » meen 2s eee 2 ees 115
Tongue weights . visws ss sensu < w came + « eesue 115 Vehicle starting system................. 103
Trailer load... 2... eee eee eee eee 115 Vehicle tool kit...............0000000-. 261
TURMHASSISE yess « os suneoe « 0 eestor 0 staneas a exo 146 Ventilation...................0.0000
08 90
TUM SIQMAlS eriiios oe evaens wo cnavene +o vara + renin 52 VIEW button... 2.6... eee eee eee eee 13
WoiGemalss x sas os snasnne ow winnsne 6 avateae ow « 168
U Voice recognition system ...........ee

External... 6.0.0... cece eee eee ee
sees 26
27
Uniform tire quality grading............. 251 Operating’: « « ase < paves & HR B= ERE a oe 26
Unlocking and locking................--. 33
BYsFEMMGTECONECOL,. cece os viaceue wo aussene © vane 38
Ww
8W1012721BC
Using the lock cylinder................. 36

With Audi connect vehicle control........ 39 Warning lights
refer to Indicator lights...............0.. 7
299
Index
Washing matte finish paint.............. 255

Wave band
refer to Frequency band............... 193
Weights ........
20.0.0 cece eee eee eee
Wheel bolts « ssscs vo sssme vo sence vo avemee 9 oe
Cleaning....
Glossary of tire and loading terminology .. 238
Replacing. ......... 0. cece eee eee eee 263
Tire pressure monitoring system........ 253
Tires and vehicle load limits............ 248
Wheel.wrenelis = sens ss zeus < + cea + x seme 261
Wi-Fi
Hotspotsetti gsi s & sce 6 o soscs oa sniwace o 176
Using ahotspot.............
00.2 eee 174
Windows
Child safety lock.........2.0.0 eee eee 44
Cleaning and removing ice............. 257
Convenience opening and closing......... 46
Defrosting............ 0. cece eee eee 93
Opening and closing.................-. 45
Power windows: « « ssc 3 cscs v 6 soevens ¥ a 45
Windshield
Cleaning.................2.20.000.00 00 58
DE@TROSEING + = same ¢ s coms 3 x eR GC BEE EF 93
also refer to Windshield................ 58
Windshield washer system........... 58, 233
Windshield wipers...............-.0000- 58
Winter operation
Gar Washes « scm « 2 sam 4 2 soon o 2 oun oo 255
Cooling systeM.......... cee cece eee 227
Defrosting the windows................ 93
Rear window defogger...........-..005 93
Removing ice from windows............ 257
Seat heating... 0... cece ee eee eee eee 92
SNOW CHAINS swe « s wep « = womys go Qe eo oe 2511,
Steering wheel heating................. 93
TiOS 0. ete 250
Vehicle battery (12 Volt).............0. 231
Windshield washer system............. 233
WINtErtIReS sriseas a 3 aeveses ao oramees 5 w mesaun oe vd 250
Wireless Apple CarPlay
refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 210
Wireless charging...............+++05- 165
300
These instructions may not be reproduced or @ Forthe sake of the environment
translated in whole or in part without written
consent of AUDI AG. All rights reserved by AUDI Printed on eco-friendly paper (bleached with-
AG. out chlorine, recyclable).
Owner's Manual
English North America 07.2020
8W1012721BC
8W1012721BC www.audi.com

2021 Audi A4 s4 78208

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 Audi A4 s4 78208

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 Audi A4 s4 78208

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner's Manual

Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us.

About this Owner's Manual...... Valetiparking = s ss-e «x cscs ov cree a ¥ os 48

Touch display..................... 17 Storage and convenience........ 82

Voice recognition system........ 26 Warm and cold................... 90

Troubleshooting............--.000005 172 Setup... 2... eee eee eee 210

Additional settings.............. 212 Customer information........... 277

Care and cleaning................ 255

Do It Yourself .................... 261

Fuses and bulbs.................. 272

This owner's manual describes the equipment

Some sections in this manual do not apply to all

The illustrations in this manual are a guide.

All directions, such as “Left”, “right”, “front” and

* — Optional equipment or vehicle-specific equip-

@ Door handle @ Lockable glove compartment with:

display on and off, adjusting the

@) Tips Drive system

blink or turn on. They indicate functions or mal-

Brake system Engine speed limitation

Electronic Stabilization Control Engine oil sensor

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Efficiency assist

Engine oil level (MAX) => page 129 >

Efficiency assist Electromechanical parking brake

Active lane assist

Instrument cluster overview

Fig. 3 Instrument cluster overview (analog)

Display If there is a severe ECD in the instru-

vehicle safely. See an authorized Audi dealer Selecting a tab

G) Tips Returning to functions at higher levels

First tab Vehicle functions > page 16

Adjusting the display

Fig. 5 Left side of multifunction steering wheel

Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit

> Press the VIEW button to switch between the

At temperatures below 41 °F (+5 °C), a snowflake

Engine oil temperature

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the engine

display Depending on vehicle equipment, the current en-

> Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument

Vehicle functions new values will be included when calculating the

Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term

—Time and date > page 212

Short-term memory and long-term memory

Applies to: touch display

The center display is a touchscreen. Operation is

Fig. 10 Touch display: pressing and pulling

Applies to: touch display Moving an item

You can position some items at any location on

Applies to: touch display

Fig. 8 Touch display: pressing

Applies to: touch display

Fig. 11 Touch display: pinching fingers together and pull-

Zooming in and out on an item

tions that are not directly visible.

‘agging away from/toward the edge of

Fig. 12 Touch display: rotating

The E=] symbol indicates that there is a hidden